(fsSV4r)
PREFACE
The rules that govern the scientific naming of algae, fungi, and plants are revised at the Nomenclature Section of an International Botanical Congress (IBC). This edition of the International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants embodies the decisions of the XX IBC, which took place in Madrid, Spain in July 2024. This Madrid Code supersedes the Shenzhen Code (Turland & al. in Regnum Veg. 159. 2018), published seven years ago after the XIX IBC in Shenzhen, China; like its six predecessors, it is written entirely in (British) English. The Shenzhen Code was translated into Chinese, French, Japanese, Portuguese, and Spanish, and it is likely that the Madrid Code, too, will become available in several languages. In questions about the meaning of provisions in translated editions of this Code, the English edition is definitive.
Amending the Code – from Shenzhen to Madrid
Altogether, 433 numbered proposals to amend the Shenzhen Code were published in Taxon, the journal of the International Association for Plant Taxonomy (IAPT), between 31 July 2020 and 27 October 2023. A “Synopsis of proposals”, with comments by the Rapporteur-général and Vice-rapporteur, was published on 21 February 2024 (Turland & Wiersema in Taxon 73: 325–404. 2024) and served as the basis for the preliminary guiding vote (“mail vote”) cast by members of the IAPT, authors of the proposals, and members of the Permanent Nomenclature Committees, as specified in Division III of the Shenzhen Code. Tabulation of the mail vote was handled at the IAPT Secretariat in Bratislava, Slovakia by Eva Kráľovičová and Matúš Kempa. The results were published on 4 July 2024 ahead of the Nomenclature Section (Turland & al. in Taxon 73: 1096–1109. 2024).
The Nomenclature Section met from Monday to Friday, 15–19 July 2024 in the conference hall of the central campus main building of the Consejo Superior de Investigaciones Científicas (CSIC) at Calle de Serrano 117, Madrid 28006, Spain (and was followed, from 21–27 July, by the main part of the IBC at the North Convention Centre of IFEMA Madrid). At the Section, 173 registered members were in physical attendance, carrying 433 institutional votes (from 192 institutions) in addition to one personal vote each, making a total of 606 possible votes. The Section was also livestreamed on the internet, permitting observation of the proceedings but not interactive commenting or voting, with a total of 219 unique users accessing the livestream at least once. The Section officers, previously appointed in conformity with Division III of the Shenzhen Code, were Sandra (Sandy) Knapp (President), Nicholas (Nick) Turland (Rapporteur-général), John Wiersema (Vice-rapporteur), and Inés Álvarez and Anna Monro (Recorders). The Vice-presidents were Werner Greuter, David Mabberley, Gideon Smith, Carmen Ulloa Ulloa, and Karen Wilson. The discussions of the Section were conducted in English.
The Nomenclature Section was entitled to define its own procedural rules within the limits set by Division III of the Shenzhen Code. These procedures are detailed in the Report of Congress action mentioned in the next paragraph. Of the 433 published proposals to amend the Shenzhen Code, 134 were accepted and 22 were referred to the Editorial Committee; an additional seven were accepted from among 14 new proposals made from the floor of the Section.
The rules of the Madrid Code became effective immediately upon acceptance of the resolution, moved on behalf of the Section at the closing plenary session of the XX IBC on 27 July 2024, that the decisions and appointments of the Nomenclature Section be approved. The “Report of Congress action on nomenclature proposals”, detailing the results of the 433 published proposals and 14 floor proposals, the membership of the Permanent Nomenclature Committees (except those for fungi, see below), the establishment of four Special-purpose Committees, and the election of the Rapporteur-général for the XXI IBC (Nicholas Turland), was published on 23 September 2024 (Turland & al. in Taxon 73: 1308–1323. 2024). The full, day-to-day proceedings of the Section will be a separate publication, planned for late 2025 or 2026, following the format of previous Nomenclature Section reports (see, for example, Lindon & al. in PhytoKeys 150: 1–276. 2020 [Shenzhen]; Flann & al. in PhytoKeys 41: 1–289. 2014 [Melbourne]; Flann & al. in PhytoKeys 45: 1–341. 2015 [Vienna]).
The Nomenclature Section also elected the Editorial Committee of the Madrid Code. In accordance with Div. III Prov. 7.4, the Nominating Committee proposed members of the Section who were physically present there (with one exception) to serve on the Editorial Committee, with the Rapporteur-général and Vice-rapporteur serving as the Chair and Secretary, respectively. The Editorial Committee was increased in size from the previous 16 to the present 18 members to ensure representation from each continent, to include expertise in the main groups of organisms covered by the Code (vascular plants, bryophytes, fungi, and algae, both extant and fossil), and to improve gender balance (there are now five women on the Committee, compared with three previously).
The Editorial Committee has a mandate (Div. III Prov. 7.12) to incorporate into the new Code the changes agreed by the Section, to clarify any ambiguous wording so long as the meaning is not changed, to ensure consistency and optimal placement of provisions while retaining the present numbering as far as possible, to add, amend, or delete Examples to best illustrate the provisions, and to revise the Glossary to explain the terms used in the Code.
A first draft of the main body of the Madrid Code, incorporating the changes decided by the Section, was prepared during September 2024 by members of the Editorial Committee, as follows: Fred Barrie (Art. 7 and 10), Julia Gravendyck (Art. 8 and 9), Patrick Herendeen (Art. 11), Ronell Klopper (Art. 13–24), Sandra Knapp (Art. 60), Wolf-Henning Kusber (Art. 30–38), Anna Monro (Art. 40–49), Jefferson Prado (Glossary), Gideon Smith (Art. 61, 62, and Chapter H), Nicholas Turland (Division III), and Juan Carlos Zamora Señoret (Preamble, Rec. 5A, Art. 6 and 51–56). Chapter F was updated by the Editorial Committee for Fungi (see below). During October 2024, in response to a request made at the Section, the Glossary was thoroughly reviewed by Jefferson Prado and Michelle Price, who added new entries and amended existing entries. During October and November 2024, the first draft was updated according to edits and comments subsequently received from the members. In addition, Kanchi Gandhi compiled numerous new Examples and amendments to existing Examples. The resulting revised draft was used at the Editorial Committee meeting as the basis for discussion.
The full Editorial Committee met from 25–29 November 2024 at the Botanischer Garten und Botanisches Museum Berlin, Germany, for five days of hard work: scrutinizing the entire Code, reviewing not only the changes made in Madrid, but also reviewing the existing wording as well as potential new Examples and Glossary items referred to the Committee or suggested by Gandhi, Prado, and Price. It was an intense but highly productive week.
On 5 December 2024, a semi-final draft of the Madrid Code was completed and distributed to all Editorial Committee members for proofreading. After making final adjustments and corrections, the finished text was sent to Franz Stadler, the Production Editor of Regnum Vegetabile, on 31 December 2024 to begin the formatting and page layout. The Index of scientific names and the Subject index, compiled by Anna Monro, followed on 31 January 2025. After formatting, page layout, and final proofreading, the Madrid Code was sent to the University of Chicago Press on 3 April 2025 for publication.
Amending Chapter F – from San Juan to Maastricht
Because both the XII International Mycological Congress (IMC12), scheduled for 2022, and the XX IBC, scheduled for 2023, were delayed until 2024, the Maastricht Chapter F is published here in the Madrid Code instead of separately, as was the case for its immediate predecessor the San Juan Chapter F (May & al. in IMA Fungus 10(21). 2019).
Seven proposals to amend the San Juan Chapter F were published in IMA Fungus, the journal of the International Mycological Association (IMA), on 14 August 2024 (May & Hawksworth in IMA Fungus 15(25). 2024). A “Synopsis of proposals”, with comments by the Secretary and Deputy Secretary of the Fungal Nomenclature Session, was published on 16 August 2024 (May & Bensch in IMA Fungus 15(26). 2024). Drafts of the proposals and Synopsis, made available via the IMA website in July 2024, served as the basis for the mail vote and, together with a draft of the results of the mail vote, were made available at the Nomenclature Session.
The Nomenclature Session met on Wednesday, 15 August 2024 in Auditorium 1 of the MECC Maastricht conference centre, Maastricht, The Netherlands as part of IMC12, which took place on 11–15 August 2024. The maximum number of persons in attendance was 322, each registered for at least that day of the IMC and carrying one personal vote (there are no institutional votes at an IMC). The Session officers were Amy Rossman (Chair), Tom May (Secretary), Konstanze Bensch (Deputy Secretary), and Ewald Groenewald and Jos Houbraken (Recorders). The Deputy Chairs were Catherine Aime, Lei Cai, Pedro Crous, Irina Druzhinina, and David Hawksworth. Nicholas Turland, as Rapporteur-général elected for the XXI IBC, attended as a non-voting advisor to the Session. The discussions of the Session were conducted in English.
Of the seven published proposals to amend the San Juan Chapter F, three were accepted; an additional three were accepted from among eight new proposals made from the floor of the Session.
The rules of the Maastricht Chapter F became effective immediately upon acceptance of the resolution, moved on behalf of the Session at the closing plenary session of IMC12 on 15 August 2024, that the decisions and appointments of the Nomenclature Session be approved. The “Report of Congress action on nomenclature proposals relating to fungi”, detailing the results of the seven published proposals and eight floor proposals, the membership of the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi and Editorial Committee for Fungi, the establishment of a Special-purpose Committee, and the election of the Secretary for the Nomenclature Session of IMC13 (Tom May), was published on 21 November 2024 (May & al. in IMA Fungus 15(36). 2024). The full proceedings of the Session will form a separate publication.
The Editorial Committee for Fungi, created at the XX IBC in Madrid as a new Permanent Nomenclature Committee, consists of the following members elected at IMC12: Tom May (Chair), Konstanze Bensch (Secretary), David Hawksworth, Juan Carlos Zamora Señoret, Nicholas Turland (ex officio, Chair of Editorial Committee), and John Wiersema (ex officio, Secretary of Editorial Committee).
The Editorial Committee for Fungi prepared a first draft of the Maastricht Chapter F by incorporating the changes decided by the Session. It was sent to the Rapporteur-général, who added it to the first draft of the Madrid Code in preparation for the Editorial Committee meeting (see above). The Editorial Committee for Fungi continued to work with the Editorial Committee of the Madrid Code (the two Committees have five members in common) for the remainder of 2024.
Amendments to the Code resulting from proposals accepted in Madrid and Maastricht
Major changes
Several changes have been made to the definitions of “specimen” and “gathering” with respect to fossil-taxa. A new Art. 8.6 rules that for fossils a specimen is an individual of a fossil-species or infraspecific fossil-taxon selected from a sample of sediment or rock, which may contain multiple individuals (i.e. specimens) of the same and other fossil-taxa. Each individual (specimen) is treated as a separate gathering. Accordingly, Art. 8.2 footnote adds to the definition of “gathering” that, for most fossils, a sample is not presumed to be of a single fossil-taxon but is a set of gatherings, and Art. 8.3 footnote adds to the definition of “duplicate” that, for most fossils, there are no duplicates. A new Art. 8 Note 2 clarifies that, for the purpose of typification, both the “part” and “counterpart”, where a rock is split to reveal a fossil organ on both parts, comprise the same specimen, not separate specimens.
Finding type specimens again can be a problem with fossil-taxa, and this is addressed by the new Art. 40.8, which requires the protologue to clearly indicate the position of the holotype specimen within the rock, sediment, or preparation (for names published on or after 1 January 2026).
New Rec. 8A.5 recommends that, if a type specimen is prepared on a microscope slide, the position of that specimen on the slide should be indicated by an England Finder reference (or an equivalent) to facilitate finding it again. Rec. 8A.6 recommends that, for palaeopalynological samples, a part of the sample from which the type was selected be deposited along with the type.
Art. 9.4 on original material has been rewritten, and one important change is that illustrations are no longer original material for names of fossil-taxa. Hence if the nomenclatural type is lost or destroyed, and if there are no specimens among the remaining original material, then there is no original material and a neotype may be designated. Under the Shenzhen Code, an illustration that was original material could not be designated as a lectotype because it would be contrary to Art. 8.5, and the existence of original material precluded designation of a neotype.
Concerning priority of names of fossil-taxa (diatoms excepted) in relation to names of non-fossil taxa, two provisions in Art. 11 have been rewritten. The previous Art. 11.8 has become Art. 11.7 ruling that when the names of a non-fossil taxon and a fossil-taxon are treated as synonyms, the correct name of the non-fossil taxon must be accepted, even if it is later. The previous Art. 11.7 has been reformulated as Art. 11.8 concerning “dual nomenclature”, which accommodates “taxonomic equivalence” between a fossil-taxon and a non-fossil taxon when the names of the two taxa are not considered to be synonyms. The previous Art. 11 Note 5 on later homonyms being illegitimate whether the type is fossil or non-fossil has been moved to Art. 53 Note 3.
Art. 20.2 has been amended to end the problem of identifying generic names that coincide with Latin technical terms in use in morphology at the time of publication. Previous cases where this provision was applied are to be resolved through binding decisions, as the new Art. 20 Note 1 explains; the related Art. 20.4(b) and Rec. 20A.1(j) are also new.
Art. 40 has been thoroughly restructured, Art. 40.4 now explicitly permits the incorrect use of the term “lectotypus” or “neotypus” (or equivalents) in the protologue of the name of a new taxon to be corrected under Art. 9.10 to “holotype” to resolve the uncertain status of some names that had been treated as not validly published because the correct term “typus” or “holotypus” (or equivalents) had not been used. Art. 9 Note 9 has also been amended to accord with the new Art. 40.4. Art. 40.8 is also new and is discussed above, under names of fossil-taxa.
Art. 42 has been augmented with several new provisions (Art. 42.3, 42.5, 42.6, 42.7, Notes 1, 3, and 4, Rec. 42A.1 and 42A.2) to establish a mechanism to enable the future voluntary registration of nomenclatural novelties and type designations for algae and plants.
New Art. 51.2, together with an amendment to Art. 56.1, permits a legitimate name of a new taxon or a replacement name published on or after 1 January 2026 to be rejected if it, or its epithet, is derogatory to a group of people. In addition, the new Rec. 51A.1 advises authors to avoid publishing names of new taxa or replacement names that could be viewed as inappropriate, disagreeable, offensive, or unacceptable.
New Art. 61.6 rules that epithets with the root caf[f][e]r-, considered as highly offensive especially in Africa, are not permitted under this Code and are to be treated as orthographical variants to be replaced by epithets with the root af[e]r-. For example, the epithet ‘caffra’ is replaced by afra.
Div. III Prov. 3, concerning the allocation of institutional votes for a Nomenclature Section, has been amended so that each listed institution now has one vote, instead of one to seven votes as previously, in an effort to reduce geographical imbalance in the exercising of institutional votes. An institution applying for a vote for the first time (i.e. not on the list of institutions entitled to vote) should show that it is registered in an online, open-access international or regional index of herbaria, collections, or institutions.
Div. III Prov. 5.1 and 5.2 have been amended to put an end to almost 20 years of confusion at the Nomenclature Section when the recommendations of the General Committee are subject to a decision. A simple majority (more than 50%) of votes cast is now required to accept these recommendations. Previously, a qualified majority (at least 60%) of votes cast was required to reject them.
Div. III Prov. 7.1(c), 7.5, and 7.13 add a new Permanent Nomenclature Committee, the Editorial Committee for Fungi, responsible for preparing Chapter F of the Code, which contains the provisions solely related to names of organisms treated as fungi.
Div. III Prov. 7.10(g)(2) and 8.13(e)(2) permit Special-purpose Committees, with a specific mandate, to be appointed by the General Committee between IBCs or by the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi between IMCs for reporting back to the next IBC or IMC.
Other changes
Numerous other, smaller changes to the Code were made in Madrid. The following list is not intended to cover every change, but it discusses the more important items.
Art. 6.1 footnote, in defining “illustration”, establishes that photographs of habitat are not illustrations for the purpose of typification. Art. 9 Note 3 explains that, because such photographs are not illustrations, they cannot be original material or types.
New Art. 7 Note 4 clarifies that the effective typification of a name automatically establishes the same typification for all names sharing the same basionym or replaced synonym and for that basionym or replaced synonym. The same holds for the typification of an autonym and the name from which it is derived.
Rec. 7A.2 is new and recommends that duplicates of type material be conserved in different herbaria, collections, or institutions, preferably in different areas of the world. New Rec. 7A.3 encourages deposition of type material in herbaria, collections, or institutions in the country or countries of origin of the newly described taxon.
Art. 8.1 has been amended to clarify that the nomenclatural type of a name of a species or infraspecific taxon, which determines the application of the name (Art. 7.1 and 7.2), is a holotype, lectotype, neotype, or conserved type.
Art. 9.1 has been amended and Art. 9.2 and Note 1 are new. They provide a more precise definition of “holotype” and explain the circumstances under which a holotype can exist.
Art. 9.4 on original material now reflects a more hierarchical arrangement of elements in parallel with the order in Art. 9.1–9.7 and Art. 9.12. Clause (e) of Art. 9.4 establishes that specimens and published or unpublished illustrations (excluding illustrations of fossil-taxa, as discussed above) are original material when they were associated with the taxon by, and were available to, either the publishing author(s) or the author(s) of the validating descriptive matter.
Art. 9.24 (previously Art. 9.2) has been expanded to now allow corrections of errors made in the designation of a lectotype, neotype, or epitype. It was moved to Art. 9.24 so as to avoid renumbering the whole of Art. 9 pending a thorough review by the Special-purpose Committee on Types and Typification established in Madrid.
New Art. 10.9 provides for the automatic typification of a generic name published without species names by the type of the first name of a species assigned to that genus and validly published solely by reference to its description or diagnosis. Other cases of automatic typification are newly noted in Art. 7.3, 7.4, 7 Note 4, and 10.10.
Art. 14.14 no longer permits the proposing of changes to the places of publication of family names in App. IIB, thereby eliminating potential disruption to nomenclature and pointless editorial and committee work.
A new added clause (3) to Art. 14 Note 4(c) establishes the date of conservation of some names of fossil-taxa.
Previous guidance on the formation of generic names to avoid names not readily adaptable to the Latin language and that are difficult to pronounce in Latin has been deleted from Rec. 20A.1. A similar clause concerning specific epithets has also been deleted from Rec. 23A.3. These amendments were made with the aim of expanding the diversity of new generic names and epithets.
Art. 23.2 now limits, for names published on or after 1 January 2026, the number of characters allowed in a specific epithet, from at least two to not more than 30.
Art. 23.5 now accounts for the independent relationship between the gender of the generic name and two groups of epithets: adverbs, and nouns and their accompanying adjectives in the genitive case.
Art. 23.6 introduces a new nomenclatural act (requiring effective publication) that provides for a choice between two different grammatical categories that would be possible for certain epithets.
Art. 23.7(a) now prohibits as species names designations consisting of a generic name and an epithet in the form of a phrase in the ablative case (e.g. Solanum “fructu-tecto”).
Art. 30.4 clarifies that electronic material that has been effectively published remains as it was when effectively published even if later altered or retracted.
Adjustments to Art. 33.1 and Art. 38.14 eliminate a conflict between these two Articles for names published between 1953 and 1972, inclusive, where the requirement for a description or diagnosis had been previously fulfilled.
Art. 34 Note 1 defines works considered for suppression as being separately published books or numbered parts or supplements of a journal while Rec. 34A.2 cautions against proposing individual journal papers or series of papers for suppression, thereby discouraging proposals seeking to suppress minor works.
Art. 36.3 has been amended and redundant wording deleted so that alternative names are now defined as “two or more different names based on the same type accepted simultaneously for the same taxon by at least one author in common in the same publication”. This rule does not apply to the same combination simultaneously used at different ranks (either for infraspecific taxa or for subdivisions of a genus), and this exclusion has been extended to suprageneric names formed from the same generic name that are simultaneously used at different ranks.
New Art. 37.5 rules that statements on ranks associated with individual infraspecific names can be used to assign rank throughout a whole publication provided that they do not result in misplaced terms contrary to Art. 5 and when no general statement on the different infraspecific ranks used in that publication is made.
New Art. 38.4 provides the definition of “description” that the Code previously lacked. Because it also rules that a description need not be diagnostic, Art. 38 Note 2 in the Shenzhen Code became redundant and has been deleted.
Art. 41 Note 2 provides guidance on how to cite page numbers from publications that lack them. This new Note suggests four options while pointing out that a DOI or URL is not by itself sufficient to indicate a page. Rec. 41A.2 has been amended to recommend enclosing page numbers (or an indication of their absence, e.g. “without page number”) in square brackets when they are cited according to Art. 41 Note 2.
A new opening sentence in Art. 48.1 contrasts a misapplication of an existing name, when the type has not been excluded, with creation of a later homonym, when the type has been excluded. Further clarification on what constitutes exclusion or inclusion of the type of a name appears in Art. 48.2, with exclusion of the name itself now also to be considered. New Art. 48 Note 3 indicates that inclusion of an apparent basionym with an expression of doubt, or only in part, does not by itself constitute exclusion of its type.
Two new Notes address the implications of nothogeneric names not having types (see Art. H.9 Note 1). Art. 52 Note 5 explains that nothogeneric names, because they have no types, do not cause nomenclatural superfluity and Art. 53 Note 2 points out that nothogeneric names, even though they have no types, can be homonyms (of each other or of non-hybrid generic names).
Art. 38.5 and Art. 53.4 now rule that binding decisions on valid publication and homonymy, respectively, take retroactive effect upon publication of the General Committee’s report containing the decisions, but this is subject to ratification by a later IBC. This now permits binding decisions to be added to App. VI and VII between IBCs, thereby streamlining the decision-making process.
An addition to the final clause of Art. 60.8 precludes changes to terminations that conform to classical Latin adjectival usage other than that dealt with by Rec. 60C.1, e.g. Cephalotaxus harringtonia (Knight ex J. Forbes) K. Koch is not to be changed to C. ‘harringtonii’.
New Art. 60 Note 3 clarifies that epithets derived from personal names with a well-established latinized form may be formed according to either Rec 60C.1 or Art. 60.8, hence martini and martinii both commemorating Martin, which has the well-established latinized form Martinus, are both correct and are not to be changed.
New Art. 60.9 rules that an epithet (or final portion thereof) formed from abbreviation of one or more personal names is considered to have been composed arbitrarily (which is permitted by Art. 23.2) and is not to be changed, e.g. under Art. 60.8.
Art. 60.12 has been amended to hopefully provide more clarity on the use or non-use of hyphens in epithets, i.e. when must a hyphen (present at valid publication) be deleted and when may a hyphen be added after valid publication. A set of four conditions, (a) (1 and 2) and (b) (1 and 2), is provided, and a hyphen is permitted only when at least one condition of (a) and at least one condition of (b) are met. However, this still does not result in a single outcome in every case. When, for example, a name is published with an epithet consisting of two words separated by a space, Art. 60.12 permits a hyphen to be inserted (replacing the space), while Art. 23.1 requires either uniting the two words (by deleting the space) or inserting a hyphen (replacing the space). On the other hand, when a name is published with an epithet containing neither a hyphen nor a space, a hyphen may not be inserted.
Art. F.2.1 and F.7.1 have been revised to more clearly set out the steps involved in the procedures for lists of protected and/or rejected names of organisms treated as fungi. Art. F.2 Note 1 makes it clear that, when preparing lists of names for protection, included names may be proposed with or without the listing of synonyms, because Art. F.2.1 rules that protected names are treated as conserved against any competing synonyms.
New Art. F.3.5 rules that an earlier homonym of a sanctioned name remains unavailable if the sanctioned name is rejected under Art. 56 or F.7.
An addition was made to Art. F.5 Note 3 to clarify that an identifier is not required when proposing a conserved type of a name of an organism treated as a fungus.
Two new Recommendations concerning types that are living cultures of organisms treated as fungi were added at the end of Chapter F. Rec. F.11A.1 augments Rec. 8B.1 by recommending that when ex-type cultures are deposited in institutional culture or genetic resource collections, those collections should be public. Rec. F.11A.2 recommends utilizing the oldest progeny of an ex-type culture when it is permitted to designate a neotype to replace a nomenclatural type that has been lost or destroyed.
Art. H.5.2 has been amended with respect to naming a nothotaxon with parent taxa at unequal ranks (species and infraspecific taxa). The appropriate rank of the nothotaxon is the lowest of these ranks, unless the nothotaxon is the only one known for hybrids between the species to which the parental taxa of the nothotaxon belong.
A new Div. III Prov. 4 Rec. 2 recommends that individuals or groups should be able to observe the Nomenclature Section of an IBC online and that the Organizing Committee of the IBC in consultation with the Bureau of Nomenclature should be responsible for implementing this. Exactly this happened at the XX IBC in Madrid in July 2024.
Editorial amendments to the Code
Several improvements have been made to the organization and presentation of the Code’s provisions. In addition to the usual titles of Divisions, Chapters, and Sections, the Madrid Code now includes titles of individual Articles. These titles were inspired by those used in the online version of the Shenzhen Code, with adjustments to make them more self-contained, and were the joint effort of Julia Gravendyck and Werner Greuter. They are now also mirrored in an expanded Contents, allowing users to more easily find what they want.
For Articles that group multiple items together, often as conditions with any one or all required, the items have been organized into lettered and sometimes numbered clauses, as was already done for some provisions in the Shenzhen Code. This format makes the Articles more digestible and facilitates citation of individual clauses. When an Example is relevant to a particular lettered clause, the respective letter is cited in parentheses, usually at the beginning of the Example, e.g. “(c)” in Art. 9 Ex. 19. Numbered clauses are sometimes also cited, and a condensed format, e.g. “(a1, b2)”, is used to avoid repetitive parentheses in Art. 60 Ex. 48–51.
Translations of words, phrases, and quotations in languages other than English (e.g. Chinese, Dutch, French, German, Latin, Russian, or Spanish) have now been provided wherever these appear, thanks to the efforts of Tom May with Latin advice from Werner Greuter.
In Division III, the Editorial Committee noticed that Prov. 7.10, which claimed to list the functions of the General Committee, did not in fact provide a comprehensive list, omitting several functions mentioned in Art. 42 and elsewhere in Div. III. Therefore, Prov. 7.10 has been expanded to enumerate all the functions of the General Committee compiled editorially from content already in the Code. Mirroring Prov. 7.10, a new Prov. 8.13 has been added to enumerate all the functions of the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi compiled editorially from content already in Chapter F and Div. III. A small, editorial addition to Prov. 7.15 comes from Art. 42.2 specifying that the Registration Committee considers applications for recognition as nomenclatural repositories for organisms other than those treated as fungi.
The Editorial Committee of the Shenzhen Code added bibliographic references to the Examples, as explained in the Preface of the Shenzhen Code (p. xxii). Over the last seven years, a number of errors have been discovered, in particular by Paul van Rijckevorsel, and these have been corrected. Where the same reference (same author(s) and publication) appears more than once within an Example, the abbreviation “l.c.” (loco citato, in the place cited) is used to avoid undue repetition.
Throughout the Madrid Code, the abbreviation “nom. sanct.” (nomen sanctionatum) has been added wherever sanctioned names of organisms treated as fungi have been cited (replacing the previous convention of citing author : sanctioning author).
A number of linguistic improvements have been implemented as well, such as using more modern and plain English where the meaning is not changed and avoiding ambiguous words, e.g. altering: “bear” to “have”; “collection” to “specimen” or “gathering” or “material collected” (unless a herbarium, collection, or institution is meant); “common” to “frequent” (unless used in the sense of shared, e.g. “in common”); “commonly” to “often”; “despite the fact that” to “even though”; “effected” to “achieved” (where appropriate, as requested by the Section in Madrid); “failed to” to “did not”; “in order to” to “to” (where appropriate); “ineffective” to “not effective”; “irrespective” to “regardless”; “location” to “locality” (where geographical) or “position” (e.g. on a microscope slide); “male” and “female” to “staminate” and “pistillate” (where describing angiosperms, not people or hybrid parents); “name of a person” to “personal name”; “notwithstanding” to “despite”; “ought to” to “should” (where appropriate); “parent” to “parental” (where used as an adjective); “prior” to “earlier” (where used as an adjective); and “prior to” to “before” (where appropriate). The phrases “for the purpose of” and “for the purposes of” were reviewed for the appropriate usage of singular or plural. A few words or phrases have been deleted, such as “pleonasm” (Rec. 23A.3(e)) and “bona fide” (Rec. 7A.1), although “infringements” (Art. H.10.1) remain for someone to propose a change at a future IBC.
Latin terms and their abbreviations used in the Code
A number of Latin terms and/or their abbreviations appear throughout the Code that may not be readily understood, especially by first-time users, so these have been compiled, in particular by Tom May and Werner Greuter, into a separate listing as part of the front matter. Terms are listed alphabetically together with the abbreviations, if they exist, and their meaning is provided in English.
The Glossary
The Glossary has retained its basic structure but has been revised and updated, as mentioned above, by Jefferson Prado and Michelle Price. New entries in the Glossary are as follows: “adopted name”, “circumscription”, “conserved type”, “dual nomenclature”, “nomenclatural repository”, “original author(s)”, “original type”, “personal name”, “phrase name”, “registration”, “taxonomic equivalence”, “type citation”, “type indication”, and “typify”. Some existing entries have been substantially revised, e.g. “automatic typification”, “description”, “epitype”, “gathering”, “identifier”, “isosyntype”, “isotype”, and “nomenclatural type”. The entry for “binary combination” has been changed to “binomial” to accord with the preferred term in the Code. The entry for “unispecific” has been deleted because it was used only in Art. 36 Ex. 1, where “unispecific genus” was rephrased as “genus of one species”. This reflects the fundamental role of the Glossary, which is strictly to explain terms used in the Code, and where possible to do so using the precise wording associated with these terms in the Code. The Glossary does not seek to cover all terms useful in the nomenclature of algae, fungi, and plants; for that, users can refer to a work such as Hawksworth, Terms used in Bionomenclature (2010; online at https://www.gbif.org/document/80577).
The Appendices
The Appendices of the Code have been maintained over the last several years by John Wiersema as an online database currently hosted by the Department of Botany at the Smithsonian National Museum of Natural History in Washington, DC (https://naturalhistory.si.edu/research/botany/codes-proposals). The Appendices will continue to be available online in this form, while the possibility of publication as printed matter or in Portable Document Format (PDF) is not precluded. The online database not only generates any or all of the Appendices of the Code, but it also provides an accounting of all proposals to conserve, protect, and reject names, to suppress works, and all requests for binding decisions since the first proposals appeared in 1892. The database can be searched using various criteria, and the matching content is reported in two different ways. A “Code Appendices” report reproduces all entries matching any set of search criteria within Madrid Code Appendices I–VII. A “Proposals/Requests” report details the history of selected proposals or requests, providing citations of all Nomenclature Committee reports regarding their status, and indicating the final determination, the presence, if any, in earlier Code Appendices, and any resulting entries in the Madrid Code Appendices.
In support of Art. 14.15, 34.2, 38.5, 53.4, 56.3, F.2.1, and F.7.1, which rule that once proposals or requests have been approved by the General Committee their effects become authorized, any names or works involved in such proposals or requests can be promptly added to the online Appendices, eliminating unnecessary publication delays. Nearly 800 new Appendix entries have thus been generated since the 2018 Shenzhen Code, initially preceded by an asterisk (*), but with ratification by the Madrid IBC the asterisks have been deleted.
Lists of protected names of fungi (Art. F.2.1) approved for both the Shenzhen and Madrid Codes, and incorporated according to their rank in App. IIA, III, and IV, were initially protected only against listed synonyms. Because they are now protected against unlisted synonyms as well, there is no longer a need to list synonyms for protected names, so the Editorial Committee has decided to remove them. No lists of rejected names of fungi (Art. F.7.1) have yet been approved.
Formatting and standards used in the Code
Recent editions of the Code have used three different sizes of type, with the Recommendations and Notes set in smaller type than the Articles, and the Examples and footnotes in smaller type than the Recommendations and Notes. These type sizes, which have been maintained in this edition, reflect the distinctions between mandatory rules (Articles), complementary information (Notes) or non-mandatory advice (Recommendations), and explanatory material (Examples). Notes, unlike Articles, do not introduce any new provision or concept; rather they explain something that may not at first be readily apparent but is covered explicitly or implicitly elsewhere in the Code. Consequently, if an apparent conflict is perceived between a Note and an Article, the Article should be followed. Notes are appropriately identified (at least in the print edition of the Code) with an “i” for “information”, highlighted in the same way as the Article numbers. Examples are distinguished, in addition to the smaller font size, by being indented. An Example prefixed by an asterisk (*) is a voted Example, which is comparable to a rule (see Art. 7 *Ex. 17 footnote). Footnotes provide supplementary material to the Preamble, Articles and Examples in Div. II, and Provisions in Div. III.
As in all recent editions, scientific names under the jurisdiction of the Code, irrespective of rank, are consistently given in italic type. The Code sets no binding standard in this respect, because typography is a matter of editorial style and tradition, not of nomenclature. Nevertheless, in the interest of international uniformity, editors and authors could consider following the practice exemplified by the Code, which has been well received in general, is followed in a number of botanical and mycological journals, and was emphatically recommended by Thines & al. (in IMA Fungus 11(25). 2020). To set off scientific names even better, italics are not used for technical terms and other words in Latin, although they are still used for word elements that are part of a scientific name and for non-abbreviated titles of books or journals.
Double quotation marks are used to denote designations, to readily distinguish them from validly published names, e.g. “Echinocereus sanpedroensis”. Single quotation marks are used to denote incorrect spellings of validly published names, e.g. Gluta ‘benghas’ L. Double quotation marks are also used to indicate text that is quoted verbatim, with single quotation marks enclosing quotes within quotes.
The Editorial Committee has tried hard to achieve uniformity in bibliographic style and formal presentation. Author citations of scientific names appearing in the Code are standardized in conformity with Brummitt & Powell, Authors of plant names (1992), updated as necessary from the International Plant Names Index (IPNI; https://www.ipni.org/), albeit with additional spacing, as mentioned in Rec. 46A Note 1. The Code has placed a space after a full stop (period) in author citations since the 1906 Vienna Rules (Briquet, Règles Int. Nomencl. Bot. 1906), whereas Authors of plant names recommended against placing spaces after full stops and has been followed by IPNI. The use or non-use of spaces in standard author citations is a matter of editorial style, and neither method is incorrect. The titles of books in bibliographic citations are abbreviated in conformity with Taxonomic literature, ed. 2 (TL-2; Stafleu & Cowan in Regnum Veg. 94, 98, 105, 110, 112, 115, 116. 1976–1988; Supplements 1–6 by Stafleu & Mennega in Regnum Veg. 125, 130, 132, 134, 135, 137. 1992–2000; Supplements 7 and 8 by Dorr & Nicolson in Regnum Veg. 149, 150. 2008, 2009; online at https://www.sil.si.edu/DigitalCollections/tl-2/index.cfm) or, when not in TL-2, by analogy, but always with capital initial letters. For journal titles, the abbreviations follow BPH Online (Botanico-Periodicum-Huntianum; https://huntbot.org/bph/) or, when not in BPH Online, by analogy. Standard herbarium codes follow Thiers, Index Herbariorum (continuously updated; online at https://sweetgum.nybg.org/science/ih/).
1.
 
(0EKjwL)
Biology requires a precise and simple system of nomenclature that is used in all countries, dealing on the one hand with the terms that denote the ranks of taxonomic groups or units, and on the other hand with the scientific names that are applied to the individual taxonomic groups. The purpose of giving a name to a taxonomic group is not to indicate its characters or history, but to supply a means of referring to it and to indicate its taxonomic rank. This
Code aims at the provision of a stable method of naming taxonomic groups, avoiding and rejecting the use of names that may cause error or ambiguity or throw science into confusion. Next in importance is the avoidance of the useless creation of names. Other considerations, such as absolute grammatical correctness, regularity or euphony of names, more or less prevailing custom, regard for persons, etc., despite their undeniable importance, are relatively accessory.
2.
 
(5AEPyt)
Algae, fungi, and plants are the organisms
1 covered by this
Code.
3.
 
(PPqXpv)
The Principles form the basis of the system of nomenclature governed by this
Code.
4.
 
(rcjj8a)
The detailed provisions are divided into rules, which are set out in the Articles (Art.) (sometimes with clarification in Notes), and Recommendations (Rec.). Examples (Ex.)
1 are added to the rules and recommendations to illustrate them. A Glossary defining terms used in this
Code is included.
5.
 
(s0aoho)
The object of the rules is to put the nomenclature of the past into order and to provide for that of the future; names contrary to a rule cannot be maintained.
6.
 
(7Q2wLX)
The Recommendations deal with subsidiary points; their object is to achieve greater uniformity and clarity, especially in future nomenclature; names contrary to a Recommendation cannot, on that account, be rejected, but they are not examples to be followed.
7.
 
(DzK5NB)
The Provisions regulating the governance of this
Code form its last Division (Div. III). These Provisions are not retroactive.
8.
 
(wxwszq)
The provisions of this
Code apply to all organisms traditionally treated as algae, fungi, or plants, whether fossil or non-fossil, including blue-green algae
(Cyanobacteria)1, chytrids, oomycetes, slime moulds, and photosynthetic protists with their taxonomically related non-photosynthetic groups (but excluding
Microsporidia). Provisions for the names of hybrids appear in Chapter H.
9.
 
(3ZXOxu)
Names that have been conserved, protected, or rejected, suppressed works, and binding decisions are given in Appendices I–VII.
10.
 
(anm0ox)
The Appendices form an integral part of this
Code, whether published together with, or separately from, the main text.
11.
 
(eLXQ8U)
The
International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants is prepared under the authority of the International Commission for the Nomenclature of Cultivated Plants and deals with the use and formation of names applied to special categories of organisms in agriculture, forestry, and horticulture.
12.
 
(I9pjwn)
The only proper reasons for changing a name are either a more profound knowledge of the facts resulting from adequate taxonomic study or the necessity of giving up a nomenclature that is contrary to the rules.
13.
 
(lfA68j)
In the absence of a relevant rule or where the consequences of rules are doubtful, established custom is followed.
14.
 
(aC7KLH)
This edition of the
Code supersedes all previous editions.
(A5dQRe)
The nomenclature of algae, fungi, and plants is independent of zoological and prokaryotic nomenclature. This Code applies equally to names of taxonomic groups treated as algae, fungi, or plants, whether or not these groups were originally treated as such (see Pre. 8).
(i5zynE)
The application of names of taxonomic groups is determined by means of nomenclatural types.
(xEvdjB)
The nomenclature of a taxonomic group is based upon priority of publication.
(Iisvom)
Single correct name
(FjAZSA)
Each taxonomic group with a particular circumscription, position, and rank can have only one correct name, the earliest that is in accordance with the rules, except in specified cases.
(DdkQRe)
Scientific names of taxonomic groups are treated as Latin regardless of their derivation.
(RdJm7F)
The rules of nomenclature are retroactive unless expressly limited.
(LLqXJM)
Rules and Recommendations
(DrBmwz)
Taxa and their ranks
1.1.
(gMcmCW)
Taxonomic groups at any rank will, in this Code, be referred to as taxa (singular: taxon).
1.2.
(vyJWQr)
A taxon (diatom taxa excepted) the name of which is based on a fossil type is a fossil-taxon. A fossil-taxon comprises the remains of one or more parts of the parent organism, or one or more of their life-history stages, in one or more preservational states, as indicated in the original or any subsequent description or diagnosis of the taxon (see also Art. 11.1 and 13.3).
Ex. 1.
(DZL4Ri)
Alcicornopteris hallei J. Walton (in Ann. Bot. (Oxford), ser. 2, 13: 450. 1949) is a fossil-species for which the original description included rachides, sporangia, and spores of a pteridosperm, preserved in part as compressions and in part as petrifactions.
Ex. 2.
(1USuVa)
Protofagacea allonensis Herend. & al. (in Int. J. Pl. Sci. 156: 94. 1995) is a fossil-species for which the original description included dichasia of staminate flowers (with anthers containing pollen grains), fruits, and cupules. The fossil-species therefore comprises more than one part and more than one life-history stage.
Ex. 3.
(iLsqiy)
Stamnostoma A. G. Long (in Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh 64: 212. 1960) is a fossil-genus that was originally described with a single species, S. huttonense A. G. Long, comprising anatomically preserved ovules with completely fused integuments forming an open collar around the lagenostome. Rothwell & Scott (in Rev. Palaeobot. Palynol. 72: 281. 1992) subsequently modified the description of the fossil-genus, expanding its circumscription to include also the cupules in which the ovules were borne. The name Stamnostoma may be applied to a fossil-genus with either circumscription or to any other fossil-genus that involves other parts, life-history stages, or preservational states, as long as it includes S. huttonense but not the type of any earlier legitimate generic name.
2.1.
(nC2Jkp)
Every individual organism is treated as belonging to an indefinite number of taxa at consecutively subordinate ranks, among which the rank of species is basic.
3.1.
(llUIDX)
The principal ranks of taxa in descending sequence are: kingdom (regnum), division or phylum (divisio or phylum), class (classis), order (ordo), family (familia), genus (genus), and species (species). Thus, each species is assignable to a genus, each genus to a family, etc.
i
Note 1.
(qmLMzG)
Species and subdivisions of genera must be assigned to genera, and infraspecific taxa must be assigned to species, because their names are combinations (Art. 21.1, 23.1, and 24.1), but this provision does not preclude the placement of taxa as incertae sedis with regard to ranks higher than genus.
Ex. 1.
(sEd5M3)
The genus Haptanthus Goldberg & C. Nelson (in Syst. Bot. 14: 16. 1989) was originally described without being assigned to a family.
Ex. 2.
(WkuxZh)
The fossil-genus Paradinandra Schönenberger & E. M. Friis (in Amer. J. Bot. 88: 478. 2001) was assigned to “Ericales s.l.” but its family placement was given as “incertae sedis”.
3.2.
(ZVJA2r)
The principal ranks of hybrid taxa (nothotaxa) are nothogenus and nothospecies. These ranks are the same as genus and species. The prefix “notho-” indicates the hybrid character (see Art. H.1.1).
(MbPAVN)
Secondary and further ranks
4.1.
(MPoVle)
The secondary ranks of taxa in descending sequence are tribe (tribus) between family and genus, section (sectio) and series (series) between genus and species, and variety (varietas) and form (forma) below species.
4.2.
(3jFXu7)
If a greater number of ranks of taxa is desired, the terms for these are made by adding the prefix “sub-” to the terms denoting the principal or secondary ranks. An organism may thus be assigned to taxa at the following ranks (in descending sequence): kingdom (regnum), subkingdom (subregnum), division or phylum (divisio or phylum), subdivision or subphylum (subdivisio or subphylum), class (classis), subclass (subclassis), order (ordo), suborder (subordo), family (familia), subfamily (subfamilia), tribe (tribus), subtribe (subtribus), genus (genus), subgenus (subgenus), section (sectio), subsection (subsectio), series (series), subseries (subseries), species (species), subspecies (subspecies), variety (varietas), subvariety (subvarietas), form (forma), and subform (subforma).
i
Note 1.
(zQ4AO4)
Ranks formed by adding “sub-” to the principal ranks (Art. 3.1) may be formed and used whether or not any secondary ranks (Art. 4.1) are adopted.
4.3.
(8nXcko)
Further ranks may also be intercalated or added, provided that confusion or error is not thereby introduced.
4.4.
(WOW44t)
The subordinate ranks of nothotaxa are the same as the subordinate ranks of non-hybrid taxa, except that nothogenus is the highest rank permitted (see Chapter H).
i
Note 2.
(zXL5HE)
Throughout this Code the phrase “subdivision of a family” refers only to taxa at a rank between and not including family and genus, and “subdivision of a genus” refers only to taxa at a rank between and not including genus and species.
i
Note 3.
(WqSzzF)
For the designation of special categories of organisms used in agriculture, forestry, and horticulture, see Pre. 11 and Art. 28 Notes 2, 4, and 5.
i
Note 4.
(h9upbn)
In classifying parasites, especially fungi, authors who do not give specific, subspecific, or varietal value to taxa characterized from a physiological standpoint but scarcely or not at all from a morphological standpoint may distinguish within the species special forms (formae speciales) characterized by their adaptation to different hosts, but the nomenclature of special forms is not governed by the provisions of this Code.
5.1.
(egSJwE)
The relative order of the ranks specified in Art. 3 and 4 must not be altered (see Art. 37.7 and F.4.1).
(FiBHzq)
Recommendation 5A
5A.1.
(PyXn1t)
For purposes of standardization, the following abbreviations are recommended: cl. (class), ord. (order), fam. (family), tr. (tribe), gen. (genus), sect. (section), ser. (series), sp. (species), var. (variety), f. (form). The abbreviations for additional ranks created by the addition of the prefix sub-, or for nothotaxa with the prefix notho-, should be formed by adding the prefixes, e.g. subsp. (subspecies), nothosp. (nothospecies), but subg. (subgenus) not “subgen.”
(TrTr9k)
Status, typification, and priority of names
(eCO8qp)
Status definitions
6.1.
(GYEl0b)
Effective publication is publication in accordance with Art. 29–31. Except in specified cases (Art. 8.1, 9.4(e), 9.22, Rec. 9A.3, and Art. 40.5), text and illustrations
1 must be effectively published to be taken into account for the purposes of this
Code.
Ex. 1.
(WHrhYJ)
The name
Kalanchoe arborescens Humbert (in Bull. Mus. Natl. Hist. Nat., ser. 2, 5: 163. 1933) was published with two gatherings cited in the protologue: “Delta de la Linta (côte Sud-Ouest), sables (H. Humbert et C. F. Swingle, 5.415, 23 août 1928); Kotoala au S.-W. d’Ambovombe, anciennes dunes (Decary, 9092, 5 août 1931; hauteur 1
m,50).” Two syntype specimens with “H. Humbert et C. F. Swingle, 5.415” and two with “Decary, 9092” exist at P. The handwritten annotation “HOLOTYPE” on one of the syntypes (barcode P00438070) cannot be accepted as a holotype designation because it was not effectively published (Art. 29–31).
6.2.
(kPNYS9)
Valid publication of names is publication in accordance with the relevant provisions of Art. 32–45, F.4, F.5.2, F.5.3, and H.9 (see also Art. 61).
i
Note 1.
(PVm3xB)
For nomenclatural purposes, valid publication creates a name, and sometimes also an autonym (Art. 22.1 and 26.1), but does not itself imply any taxonomic circumscription beyond inclusion of the type of the name (Art. 7.1).
6.3.
(1ixAJK)
In this Code, unless otherwise indicated, the word “name” means a name that has been validly published, whether it is legitimate or illegitimate (see Art. 12; but see Art. 14.9 and 14.14).
i
Note 2.
(MTaKSW)
When the same name, based on the same type, has been published independently at different times, by the same or different authors, then only the earliest of these “isonyms” has nomenclatural status. The name is always to be cited from its original place of valid publication (but see Art. 14.14).
Ex. 2.
(q7yUzT)
Baker (Summary New Ferns: 9. 1892) and Christensen (Index Filic.: 44. 1905) independently published the name Alsophila kalbreyeri as a replacement for A. podophylla Baker (in J. Bot. 19: 202. 1881) non Hook. (in Hooker’s J. Bot. Kew Gard. Misc. 9: 334. 1857). As published by Christensen, A. kalbreyeri is a later isonym of A. kalbreyeri Baker without nomenclatural status (see also Art. 41 Ex. 25).
Ex. 3.
(hYBhiu)
In publishing “Canarium pimela Leenh. nom. nov.”, Leenhouts (in Blumea 9: 406. 1959) reused the illegitimate C. pimela K. D. Koenig (in Ann. Bot. (König & Sims) 1: 361. 1805), attributing it to himself and basing it on the same type. He thereby created a later isonym without nomenclatural status.
6.4.
(Q8X7al)
An illegitimate name is one that is designated as such in Art. 18.3, 19.6, 52–54, F.3.3, or F.6.1 (see also Art. 21 Note 1 and Art. 24 Note 2). A name that according to this Code was illegitimate when published can become legitimate later only if:
(a) it is conserved (Art. 14), protected (Art. F.2), or sanctioned (Art. F.3); or
(b) the name is nomenclaturally superfluous under Art. 52 and its intended basionym is conserved or protected; or
(c) Art. 18.3 or 19.6 so provide.
Ex. 4.
(fCknzT)
The name Hydrodictyon Roth (Bemerk. Crypt. Wassergew.: 48. 1797) was nomenclaturally superfluous when published and therefore illegitimate under Art. 52 because the genus included the original type of Reticula Adans. (Fam. Pl. 2: 3, 598. 1763). The name Hydrodictyon had to be conserved to become available for use (see App. III).
6.5.
(N95iGC)
A legitimate name is one that is in accordance with the rules, i.e. one that is not illegitimate as defined in Art. 6.4.
6.6.
(k50TzV)
At the rank of family or below, the correct name of a taxon with a particular circumscription, position, and rank is the legitimate name that must be adopted for it under the rules (see Art. 11).
Ex. 5.
(WQXcmB)
The generic name Vexillifera Ducke (in Arch. Jard. Bot. Rio de Janeiro 3: 139. 1922), based on the single species V. micranthera Ducke, is legitimate. The same is true of the generic name Dussia Krug & Urb. ex Taub. (in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam. 3(3): 193. 1892), based on the single species D. martinicensis Krug & Urb. ex Taub. Both generic names are correct when the genera are thought to be separate. Harms (in Repert. Spec. Nov. Regni Veg. 19: 291. 1924), however, united Vexillifera and Dussia in a single genus; the latter is the correct name for the genus with that particular circumscription. The legitimate name Vexillifera may therefore be correct or incorrect according to different taxonomic concepts.
6.7.
(Syl8qI)
The name of a taxon below the rank of genus, consisting of the name of a genus combined with one or two epithets, is termed a combination (see Art. 21, 23, and 24).
Ex. 6.
(mx5Tb6)
The following names are combinations: Mouriri subg. Pericrene Morley (in Univ. Calif. Publ. Bot. 26: 280. 1953); Arytera sect. Mischarytera Radlk. (in Engler, Pflanzenr. IV. 165 (Heft 98f): 1271. 1933); Dendrophyllanthus S. Moore sect. Dendrophyllanthus (established by Bouman & al. in Phytotaxa 540: 53. 2022); Theobroma subsect. Subcymbicalyx (R. E. Schult.) Colli-Silva (in Brittonia 76: 59. 2024); Breynia androgyna (L.) Chakrab. & N. P. Balakr. (in Bangladesh J. Pl. Taxon. 19: 120. 2012); Gentiana lutea L. (Sp. Pl.: 227. 1753); Thysanothecium casuarinarum subsp. nipponicum (Asahina) Asahina (in J. Jap. Bot. 32: 35. 1957); Gentiana tenella var. occidentalis J. Rousseau & Raymond (in Naturaliste Canad. 79: 77. 1952); Equisetum palustre var. americanum Vict. (in Contr. Lab. Bot. Univ. Montréal 9: 51. 1927); Equisetum palustre f. fluitans Vict. (l.c.: 60. 1927); Dodonaea viscosa Jacq. subf. viscosa (established by Radlkofer in Engler, Pflanzenr. IV. 165 (Heft 98g): 1369. 1933).
6.8.
(p8nY14)
Autonyms are names that are established automatically under Art. 22.3 and 26.3, whether or not they actually appear in the publication in which they are created (see Art. 32.3, Rec. 22B.1 and 26B.1). 6.9.
(D9KXaM)
The name of a new taxon (e.g. genus novum, gen. nov., species nova, sp. nov.) is a name validly published in its own right, i.e. one not based on a previously validly published name; it is not a new combination, a name at new rank, or a replacement name.
Ex. 7.
(KjltvT)
Cannaceae Juss. (Gen. Pl.: 62. 1789); Canna L. (Sp. Pl.: 1. 1753); Canna indica L. (l.c. 1753); Heterotrichum pulchellum Fisch. (in Mém. Soc. Imp. Naturalistes Moscou 3: 71. 1812); Poa sibirica Roshev. (in Izv. Imp. S.-Peterburgsk. Bot. Sada 12: 121. 1912); Solanum umtuma Voronts. & S. Knapp (in PhytoKeys 8: 4. 2012).
6.10.
(tTVZqO)
A new combination (combinatio nova, comb. nov.) or name at new rank (status novus, stat. nov.) is a new name based on a legitimate, previously published name, which is the basionym of the new name. The basionym does not itself have a basionym; it provides the final epithet1, name, or stem of the new combination or name at new rank (see also Art. 41.2).
Ex. 8.
(znxLN2)
The basionym of Centaurea benedicta (L.) L. (Sp. Pl., ed. 2: 1296. 1763) is Cnicus benedictus L. (Sp. Pl.: 826. 1753), the name that provides the epithet.
Ex. 9.
(yL6JL9)
The basionym of Crupina (Pers.) DC. (in Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. 16: 157. 1810) is Centaurea subg. Crupina Pers. (Syn. Pl. 2: 488. 1807), the epithet of which name provides the generic name; it is not Centaurea crupina L. (Sp. Pl.: 909. 1753) (see Art. 41.2(b)).
Ex. 10.
(1GKB0U)
The basionym of Anthemis subg. Ammanthus (Boiss. & Heldr.) R. Fern. (in Bot. J. Linn. Soc. 70: 16. 1975) is Ammanthus Boiss. & Heldr. (in Boissier, Diagn. Pl. Orient., ser. 1, 11: 18. 1849), the name that provides the epithet.
Ex. 11.
(fZOGhi)
The basionym of Ricinocarpaceae Hurus. (in J. Fac. Sci. Univ. Tokyo, Sect. 3, Bot. 6: 224. 1954) is Ricinocarpeae Müll. Arg. (in Bot. Zeitung (Berlin) 22: 324. 1864), but not Ricinocarpos Desf. (in Mém. Mus. Hist. Nat. 3: 459. 1817) (see Art. 41.2(a); see also Art. 49.2), from which the names of both family and tribe are formed.
i
Note 3.
(Pov3Ez)
A descriptive name (Art. 16.1(b)) used at a rank different from that at which it was first validly published is not a name at new rank because descriptive names may be used unchanged at different ranks.
i
Note 4.
(RFm33D)
The phrase “nomenclatural novelty”, as used in this Code, refers to any or all of the following categories: name of a new taxon, new combination, name at new rank, and replacement name.
i
Note 5.
(DH1Zb9)
A new combination can at the same time be a name at new rank (comb. & stat. nov.); a nomenclatural novelty with a basionym need not be either of these.
Ex. 12.
(L3ooES)
Aloe vera (L.) Burm. f. (Fl. Indica: 83. 1768), based on A. perfoliata var. vera L. (Sp. Pl.: 320. 1753), is both a new combination and a name at new rank.
Ex. 13.
(CWMitY)
Centaurea jacea subsp. weldeniana (Rchb.) Greuter, “comb. in stat. nov.” (in Willdenowia 33: 55. 2003), based on C. weldeniana Rchb. (Fl. Germ. Excurs.: 213. 1831), was not a new combination because C. jacea var. weldeniana (Rchb.) Briq. (Monogr. Centaurées Alpes Marit.: 69. 1902) had been published previously; nor was it a name at new rank, due to the existence of C. amara subsp. weldeniana (Rchb.) Kušan (in Prir. Istraž. Kral. Jugoslavije 20: 29. 1936); it was nevertheless a nomenclatural novelty.
6.11.
(qkH92d)
A replacement name (nomen novum, nom. nov.) is a new name published as an explicit substitute (avowed substitute; but see Art. 6.12 and 6.13) for a legitimate or illegitimate, previously published name, which is the replaced synonym of the new name. The replaced synonym, when legitimate, does not provide the final epithet, name, or stem of the replacement name (see also Art. 41.2 and 58.1).
Ex. 14.
(lQ6Mqb)
Gussone (Fl. Sicul. Syn. 2: 468. 1844) described plants from the Eolie Islands near Sicily under the name Helichrysum litoreum Guss., citing in synonymy Gnaphalium angustifolium Lam. (Encycl. 2: 746. 1788), but without indication that the existing H. angustifolium (Lam.) DC. (in Candolle & Lamarck, Fl. Franç., ed. 3, 6: 467. 1815) was an illegitimate later homonym of H. angustifolium Pers. (in Syn. Pl. 2: 415. 1807) that needed replacement. At the end of the protologue, Gussone wrote: “nomen mutavi confusionis vitendi gratia [I changed the name to avoid confusion]”. This makes explicit Gussone’s intent to propose H. litoreum as a replacement name based on the type of G. angustifolium (from Posillipo near Naples), not on the material he described and cited in the protologue.
Ex. 15.
(0IqWfu)
Mycena coccineoides Grgur. (in Fungal Diversity Res. Ser. 9: 287. 2003) was published as an explicit substitute (“nom. nov.”) for Omphalina coccinea Murrill (in Britton, N. Amer. Fl. 9: 350. 1916) because M. coccinea (Murrill) Singer (in Sydowia 15: 65. 1962) is an illegitimate later homonym of M. coccinea (Sowerby) Quél. (in Bull. Soc. Amis Sci. Nat. Rouen, ser. 2, 15: 155. 1880).
Ex. 16.
(IKJzaz)
Centaurea chartolepis Greuter (in Willdenowia 33: 54. 2003) was published as an explicit substitute (“nom. nov.”) for the legitimate name Chartolepis intermedia Boiss. (Diagn. Pl. Orient., ser. 2, 3: 64. 1856) because the epithet intermedia was unavailable in Centaurea due to the previously published Centaurea intermedia Mutel (in Rev. Bot. Recueil Mens. 1: 400. 1846).
6.12.
(sug27N)
A name not explicitly proposed as a substitute for an earlier name is nevertheless a replacement name if it is either:
(a) validated solely by reference to that earlier name; or
(b) treated as a replacement name under the provisions of Art. 7.5.
6.13.
(w9AAof)
A name not explicitly proposed as a substitute for an earlier name and not covered by Art. 6.12 may be treated either as a replacement name or as the name of a new taxon if in the protologue1 both:
(a) a potential replaced synonym is cited; and
(b) all requirements for valid publication of the name of a new taxon are independently met.
Decision on the status of such a name is to be based on predominant usage and is to be achieved by means of appropriate type designation (Art. 9 and 10).
Ex. 17.
(VR7e6h)
When describing Astragalus penduliflorus Lam. (Fl. Franç. 2: 636. 1779) using material from the French Alps, Lamarck also cited in synonymy Phaca alpina L. (Sp. Pl.: 755. 1753, non Astragalus alpinus L., l.c.: 760. 1753), described from Siberia. It is questionable whether Linnaeus’s and Lamarck’s plants belong to the same species. Greuter (in Candollea 23: 265. 1969) designated different types for the two names, so that, in conformity with predominant usage, A. penduliflorus is to be treated as the name of a new, European species.
6.14.
(tiiInB)
A factually incorrect statement of a name’s status, as defined in Art. 6.9–6.11, does not preclude valid publication of that name with a different status; it is treated as a correctable error (see also Art. 41.4 and 41.8).
Ex. 18.
(75Vz6o)
Racosperma nelsonii was published by Pedley (in Bot. J. Linn. Soc. 92: 249. 1986) as a new combination (“comb. nova”) citing Acacia nelsonii Maslin (in J. Adelaide Bot. Gard. 2: 314. 1980) as “basionym”. However, A. nelsonii Maslin is illegitimate under Art. 53.1 because it is a later homonym of A. nelsonii Saff. (in J. Wash. Acad. Sci. 4: 363. 1914). Racosperma nelsonii Pedley is therefore validly published as a replacement name (Art. 6.11), with A. nelsonii Maslin its replaced synonym, and Pedley’s statement is treated as a correctable error.
(uhpWUy)
Typification in general
7.1.
(iv3swa)
The application of names of taxa at the rank of family or below is determined by means of nomenclatural types (types of names of taxa). The application of names of taxa at the higher ranks is also determined by means of types when the names are formed from a generic name (see Art. 10.11).
7.2.
(dp8kcU)
A nomenclatural type (typus) is that element to which the name of a taxon is permanently attached, whether as the correct name or as a synonym. The nomenclatural type is not necessarily the most typical or representative element of a taxon.
i
Note 1.
(huT24b)
A name of a taxon may have a type (see Art. 7.1) but has no circumscription. The taxon itself has a circumscription but no type.
7.3.
(HO3ynm)
A new combination or a name at new rank (Art. 6.10) is typified automatically by the type of the basionym even though it may have been applied erroneously to a taxon now considered not to include that type (but see Art. 48.1).
Ex. 1.
(d6m6Vx)
Pinus mertensiana Bong. (in Mém. Acad. Imp. Sci. St.-Pétersbourg, Sér. 6, Sci. Math. 2: 163. 1832) was transferred to the genus Tsuga by Carrière (Traité Gén. Conif., ed. 2: 250. 1867), who, as is evident from his description, erroneously applied the new combination T. mertensiana to another species of Tsuga, namely T. heterophylla (Raf.) Sarg. (Silva 12: 73. 1899). The combination T. mertensiana (Bong.) Carrière must not be applied to T. heterophylla but must be retained for P. mertensiana when that species is placed in Tsuga; the citation in parentheses (see Art. 49.1) of the name of the original author, Bongard, indicates the basionym, and hence the type, of the name.
Ex. 2.
(eKnX9M)
Delesseria gmelinii J. V. Lamour. (in Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. 20: 124. 1813) is a legitimate replacement name (Art. 6.11) for Fucus palmetta S. G. Gmel. (Hist. Fuc.: 183. 1768). The change of epithet was necessitated by the simultaneous publication of D. palmetta (Stackh.) J. V. Lamour. (see Art. 11 Note 2). All combinations based on D. gmelinii (and not excluding the type of F. palmetta; see Art. 48.1) have the same type as F. palmetta even though material thought to have been used by Lamouroux may be taxonomically assigned to a different species by subsequent authors.
Ex. 3.
(yuDKxr)
The new combination Cystocoleus ebeneus (Dillwyn) Thwaites (in Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 2, 3: 241. 1849) is typified by the type of its basionym Conferva ebenea Dillwyn (Brit. Conferv.: t. 101. 1809) even though the material illustrated by Thwaites was of Racodium rupestre Pers. (in Neues Mag. Bot. 1: 123. 1794).
7.4.
(yu4HmU)
A replacement name (Art. 6.11) is typified automatically by the type of the replaced synonym even though it may have been applied erroneously to a taxon now considered not to include that type (but see Art. 41 Note 4 and 48.1).
Ex. 4.
(7bbCQT)
Myrcia lucida McVaugh (in Mem. New York Bot. Gard. 18(2): 100. 1969) was published as a replacement name for M. laevis O. Berg (in Linnaea 31: 252. 1862), an illegitimate homonym of M. laevis G. Don (Gen. Hist. 2: 845. 1832). The type of M. lucida is therefore the type of M. laevis O. Berg (non G. Don).
7.5.
(si6eKC)
A name that is illegitimate under Art. 52 is a replacement name, typified automatically (Art. 7.4; but see Art. 7.6) by the type of the name (the replaced synonym) that itself or the epithet of which ought to have been adopted under Art. 11, unless a different type was designated or definitely indicated in the protologue, in which case it is either:
(a) a replacement name with a different replaced synonym; or
(b) treated as the name of a new taxon.
Automatic typification does not apply to names sanctioned under Art. F.3.
Ex. 5.
(8g6QOn)
Bauhinia semla Wunderlin (in Taxon 25: 362. 1976) is illegitimate under Art. 52 (see Art. 52 Ex. 7), but its publication as a replacement name for B. retusa Roxb. ex DC. (Prodr. 2: 515. 1825) non Poir. (in Lamarck, Encycl. Suppl. 1: 599. 1811) is definite indication of a different type (that of B. retusa Roxb. ex DC.) from that of the name (B. roxburghiana Voigt, Hort. Suburb. Calcutt.: 254. 1845) that ought to have been adopted.
Ex. 6.
(vOwc3G)
Hewittia bicolor Wight & Arn. (in Madras J. Lit. Sci. 5: 22. 1837), which provides the type of Hewittia Wight & Arn., is illegitimate under Art. 52 because, in addition to the illegitimate intended basionym Convolvulus bicolor Vahl (Symb. Bot. 3: 25. 1794) non Desr. (in Lamarck, Encycl. 3: 564. 1792), the legitimate C. bracteatus Vahl (Symb. Bot. 3: 25. 1794) was cited as a synonym and the epithet bracteatus ought to have been adopted. Wight & Arnott’s adoption of the epithet bicolor is definite indication that the type of H. bicolor, and therefore the type of Hewittia, is the type of C. bicolor and not that of C. bracteatus.
7.6.
(VFth10)
If the type of the name causing illegitimacy (Art. 52.2) is included in a subordinate taxon that does not include the intended type of the illegitimate name, then typification is not automatic (see Art. 7.5).
Ex. 7.
(GFbqlI)
Mason & Grant (in Madroño 9: 212. 1948) validly published the names Gilia splendens and G. splendens subsp. grinnellii, the former without indicating a type (because they believed the name to be already validly published) and the latter for “a long-tubed form of the species”. Under Art. 52, G. splendens was illegitimate because of the inclusion of the type of G. grinnellii Brand (in Engler, Pflanzenr. IV. 250 (Heft 27): 101. 1907), the basionym of G. splendens subsp. grinnellii. But, because G. splendens subsp. grinnellii was applied to a subordinate taxon that did not include the intended type of the illegitimate name, the type of G. splendens is not automatically that of G. grinnellii. The names G. splendens and G. grinnellii have since been conserved and rejected, respectively (see App. IV and V).
7.7.
(U9oETV)
The type of an autonym (Art. 22.1 and 26.1) is the same as that of the name from which it is derived.
Ex. 8.
(sA83KS)
The type of Caulerpa racemosa (Forssk.) J. Agardh var. racemosa is that of C. racemosa; the type of C. racemosa is that of its basionym, Fucus racemosus Forssk. (Fl. Aegypt.-Arab.: 191. 1775), i.e. Herb. Forsskål No. 845 (C).
7.8.
(lwtJ0H)
A name of a new taxon validly published solely by reference to a previously and effectively published description or diagnosis (Art. 38.1(a)) (and not by a reproduction of such a description or diagnosis) is to be typified by an element selected from the entire context of the validating description or diagnosis, unless the validating author has definitely designated a different type, but not by an element explicitly excluded by the validating author (see also Art. 7.9).
Ex. 9.
(KRQz8U)
Adenanthera bicolor Moon (Cat. Pl. Ceylon: 34. 1824) was validly published solely by reference to the description associated with an illustration devoid of analysis, “Rumph. amb. 3: t. 112”, cited by Moon. The specimen collected by Moon (in K, labelled “Adenanthera bicolor”) is not available as the type because it was not definitely designated by him as the type. In the absence of the material on which the validating description was based, the lectotype can only be the associated illustration (Rumphius, Herb. Amboin. 3: t. 112. 1743).
Ex. 10.
(KSA9NY)
Echium lycopsis L. (Fl. Angl.: 12. 1754) was published without a description or diagnosis but with reference to Ray (Syn. Meth. Stirp. Brit., ed. 3: 227. 1724), in which a “Lycopsis” species was discussed with no description or diagnosis but with citation of earlier references, including Bauhin (Pinax: 255. 1623). The accepted validating description of E. lycopsis is that of Bauhin, and the type must be chosen from the context of his work. Consequently, the Sherard specimen in the Morison herbarium (OXF), selected by Klotz (in Wiss. Z. Martin-Luther-Univ. Halle-Wittenberg, Math.-Naturwiss. Reihe 9: 375–376. 1960), although probably consulted by Ray, is not eligible as type. The first acceptable choice of lectotype is that of the illustration, cited by both Ray and Bauhin, of “Echii altera species” in Dodonaeus (Stirp. Hist. Pempt.: 620. 1583), suggested by Gibbs (in Lagascalia 1: 60–61. 1971) and formally made by Stearn (in Ray Soc. Publ. 148, Introd.: 65. 1973).
Ex. 11.
(CflOTF)
Hieracium oribates Brenner (in Meddeland. Soc. Fauna Fl. Fenn. 30: 142. 1904) was validly published without accompanying descriptive matter but with reference to the validating description of
H. saxifragum subsp.
oreinum Dahlst. ex Brenner (in Meddeland. Soc. Fauna Fl. Fenn. 18: 89. 1892). Because Brenner definitely excluded his earlier infraspecific name and part of its original material,
H. oribates is the name of a new taxon, not a replacement name, and may not be typified by an excluded element.
7.9.
(2iqtk5)
A name of a taxon assigned to a group with a nomenclatural starting-point later than 1 May 1753 (see Art. 13.1) is to be typified by an element selected from the context of its valid publication (Art. 32–45).
i
Note 2.
(3n3ZSs)
The typification of names of fossil-taxa (Art. 1.2) and of any other analogous taxa at or below the rank of genus does not differ from that indicated above.
7.10.
(011zDg)
For purposes of priority (Art. 9.19, 9.20, and 10.5), designation of a type is achieved only by effective publication (Art. 29–31).
7.11.
(Xd5y8J)
For purposes of priority (Art. 9.19, 9.20, and 10.5), designation of a type is achieved only if the type is definitely accepted as such by the typifying author, if the type element is clearly indicated by direct citation including the term “type” (typus) or an equivalent, and, on or after 1 January 2001, if the typification statement includes the phrase “designated here” (hic designatus) or a similar expression demonstrating the author’s intent to designate a type there (see also Art. 9.21–9.23 and F.5.4).
i
Note 3.
(5nF0rr)
Art. 7.10 and 7.11 apply only to the designation of lectotypes and neotypes (and their equivalents under Art. 10.2) and epitypes; for holotypes see Art. 9.1 (and for their equivalents see Art. 10.2).
Ex. 12.
(NoQiss)
The original material for the name Quercus acutifolia Née includes nine specimens in MA. In 1985, Breedlove labelled one of these (barcode MA 25953) as “Lectotype”, but, because this was not effectively published, Breedlove did not achieve a designation of type (see Art. 7.10). Valencia-A. & al. (in Phytotaxa 218: 289–294. 2015) effectively published an intended designation of the same specimen as “lectotype”, but did not include the words “designated here” or a similar expression, as required by Art. 7.11. Nixon & Barrie (in Novon 25: 449. 2017) achieved a designation of lectotype when they effectively published the statement “TYPE: Mexico. Guerrero, Née s.n. (lectotype, designated here, MA [bc] MA25953 as image!)” fulfilling all requirements of Art. 7.10 and 7.11.
Ex. 13.
(iP8WP9)
The protologue of Dryopteris hirsutosetosa Hieron. (in Hedwigia 46: 343–344, t. 6. 1907) cited only a locality (“Aequatoria: crescit in altiplanicie supra Allpayacu inter Baños et Jivaría de Píntuc [Ecuador: it grows on the high plain above Allpayacu between Baños and Jivaría de Píntuc]”) and Stübel collecting number (“n. 903”), but did not specify a herbarium, thus indicating all specimens of that gathering as syntypes (Art. 40 Note 3). In citing “Type from Ecuador: Baños-Pintuc, Stübel nr. 903 (B!)” Christensen (in Kongel. Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Skr., Naturvidensk. Math. Afd., ser. 8, 6: 112. 1920) designated the specimen in B as the lectotype of D. hirsutosetosa satisfying the requirements of Art. 7.11. A duplicate specimen in BM is an isolectotype.
Ex. 14.
(LUs1P5)
The absence of any original material (Art. 9.13) for Ocimum gratissimum L. (Sp. Pl.: 1197. 1753) means that Cramer’s (in Dassanayake & Fosberg, Revis. Handb. Fl. Ceylon 3: 112. 1981) citation of “Type: Hortu[s] Upsal[i]ensi[s], 749.2 (LINN)” is to be accepted as designation (Art. 7.11) of a neotype, antedating the superfluous neotypification by Paton (in Kew Bull. 47: 411. 1992).
Ex. 15.
(FAprjv)
Chlorosarcina Gerneck (in Beih. Bot. Centralbl., Abt. 2, 21: 224. 1907) originally comprised two species, C. minor Gerneck and C. elegans Gerneck. Vischer (in Beih. Bot. Centralbl., Abt. 1, 51: 12. 1933) transferred C. minor to Chlorosphaera G. A. Klebs and retained C. elegans in Chlorosarcina. He did not, however, use the term “type” or an equivalent, so that his action does not constitute typification of Chlorosarcina. The first to designate a type, as “LT.”, was Starr (in ING Card No. 16528, Nov 1962), who selected Chlorosarcina elegans.
Ex. 16.
(ucUGNq)
The protologue of Spermacoce tenuior L. (Sp. Pl.: 102. 1753) cites the illustration “Spermacoce verticillis tenuioribus” (Dillenius, Hort. Eltham: t. 277. 1732). Rendle (in J. Bot. 72: 333. 1934), in his attempt to typify the Linnaean name, wrote “the type of S. tenuior L. must be regarded as the figure and specimen of Dillenius…”. Rendle’s type designation is not effective because it did not clearly indicate a single element (Art. 9.17 does not apply).
*Ex. 17.
1 (cHrHos)
The phrase “standard species” as used by Hitchcock & Green (in Sprague, Nom. Prop. Brit. Bot.: 110–199. 1929) is now treated as equivalent to “type”, and hence type designations in that work are acceptable.
Ex. 18.
(qikduD)
Pfeiffer (Nomencl. Bot. 1: [Praefatio, p. 2]. 1871) explained that he cited species names only when he intended to indicate the type of names of genera and sections: “Species plantarum in libro meo omnino negliguntur, excepta indicatione illarum, quae typum generis novi aut novo modo circumscripti vel sectionis offerunt. [Species of plants are entirely disregarded in my book, except for the indication of those that are presented as the type of a new or re-circumscribed genus or of a section.]” This explanation includes the term type, and the citation of a species name has therefore been accepted as designation of a type.
i
Note 4.
(lua9a7)
Unless conservation determines otherwise, the effective typification of a name automatically establishes the same typification for all names sharing the same basionym (Art. 7.3) or replaced synonym (Art. 7.4) and for that basionym or replaced synonym. The effective typification of an autonym automatically establishes the same typification for the name from which it is derived (Art. 7.7).
Ex. 19.
(xTgelJ)
Traub & Moldenke (Amaryllid.: Tribe Amaryll.: 111. 1949) designated Amaryllis striata Lam. as the type of A. subg. Lais (Salisb.) Traub & Moldenke (in Herbertia 5: 119. 1938), thereby automatically establishing the same typification for Lais Salisb. (Gen. Pl.: 134. 1866), Hippeastrum sect. Lais (Salisb.) Baker (in J. Bot. 16: 81. 1878), and H. subg. Lais (Salisb.) Baker (Handb. Amaryll.: 41. 1888).
Ex. 20.
(yPwyuB)
Gillett (in Kew Bull. 17: 136. 1963) designated Beshir 135 as the holotype of Sesbania sudanica J. B. Gillett subsp. sudanica, thereby automatically establishing the same typification for S. sudanica J. B. Gillett. The herbarium in which the holotype was conserved was not specified but this was not required for valid publication of names of new taxa before 1 January 1990 (Art. 40.5).
(6yiUNN)
Recommendation 7A
7A.1.
(5utz9Y)
It is strongly recommended that the material on which the name of a taxon is based, especially the holotype, be deposited in a public herbarium or other public collection with a policy of giving researchers access to deposited material, and that it be scrupulously conserved.
7A.2.
(KnRh9B)
It is strongly recommended that duplicates (Art. 8.3 footnote) of the material on which the name of a taxon is based (especially of the holotype but also of a neotype or epitype) be conserved in different herbaria, collections, or institutions, preferably in different areas of the world, as far as possible.
7A.3.
(nIpyhX)
Authors publishing the name of a new species or infraspecific taxon are encouraged to deposit type material in one or more herbaria, collections, or other specialized institutions in the country or countries of origin of the newly described taxon.
(00XiUQ)
Specimens and gatherings
8.1.
(6uw5Vi)
The nomenclatural type (see Art. 7.2) of a name of a species or infraspecific taxon is a holotype (Art. 9.1), lectotype (Art. 9.3), neotype (Art. 9.8), or conserved type (Art. 14.9), any of which may be supported by an epitype (Art. 9.9). Such a type is either a single specimen conserved in one herbarium or other collection or institution, or is a published or unpublished illustration (but see Art. 8.5; see also Art. 40.6 and Art. 40 Ex. 10).
8.2.
(TZlm9F)
For the purpose of typification, a specimen is a gathering1, or part of a gathering, of a single species or infraspecific taxon, disregarding admixtures (see Art. 9.14). It may consist of a single part, multiple parts, or the whole of one or more individual organisms. A specimen is usually mounted on a single herbarium sheet or in an equivalent preparation, such as a box, packet, jar, or microscope slide (for fossil-taxa see Art. 8.6).
Ex. 1.
(oGfxi9)
The holotype of Asparagus kansuensis F. T. Wang & Tang ex S. C. Chen (in Acta Phytotax. Sin. 16(1): 94. 1978), Hao 416 (PE [barcode 00034519]) belongs to a gathering of a dioecious species made at one time at a single locality. It consists of a staminate branch and a pistillate branch, i.e. parts of two individuals, mounted on a single herbarium sheet.
Ex. 2.
(zxwkRN)
The diatom species Tursiocola denysii Frankovich & M. J. Sullivan (in Phytotaxa 234: 228. 2015) was described from material collected from neck skin of four loggerhead turtles and the type designated as “Type:—UNITED STATES. Florida: Florida Bay, samples removed from the skin in the dorsal neck area of loggerhead sea turtles Caretta caretta, 24° 55’ 01” N, 80° 48’ 28” W, B.A. Stacy, 24 June 2015 (holotype CAS! 223049, illustrated as Figs 1–4, 6, 12, 15–30, paratypes ANSP! GC59142, BM! 101 808, illustrated as Figs 7–10, 14, BRM! ZU10/31, Figs 5, 11, 13).” Because the specimens were collected at the same time, at the same place, by the same collector they comprise a single gathering, admixtures excepted, and the authors’ citation of “paratypes” is correctable to isotypes under Art. 9.10.
Ex. 3.
(FmrhrU)
“Echinocereus sanpedroensis” (Raudonat & Rischer in Echinocereenfreund 8(4): 91–92. 1995) was based on a “holotype” consisting of a complete plant with roots, a detached branch, an entire flower, a flower cut in halves, and two fruits that, according to the label, were taken from the same cultivated individual at different times and preserved, in alcohol, in a single jar. Because this material was collected at more than one time, it belongs to more than one gathering and cannot be accepted as a type. Raudonat & Rischer’s name is not validly published under Art. 40.3.
i
Note 1.
(NdkyeI)
Field numbers, collecting numbers, accession numbers, or specimen identifiers alone do not necessarily denote the same or different gatherings.
Ex. 4.
(egdtbM)
Among the specimens of Goodyera hemsleyana King & Pantl. (in J. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, Pt. 2, Nat. Hist. 64: 342. 1896) collected by Robert Pantling, the notation “No. 215” was used for more than one gathering, one made in Senchal, India in July 1892 (with specimens in BM, BR, CAL, K, L, P, and W) and another in the same place but in July 1898 (with specimens in AMES and L).
Ex. 5.
(q7HCQ8)
Solidago ×snarskisii Gudžinskas & Žalneravičius (in Phytotaxa 253: 148. 2016) was validly published (Art. 40.3) with a single gathering in BILAS indicated as type, the parts of which were numbered separately in the field, mounted on separate sheets and designated as follows: “Holotype:—LITHUANIA. Trakai district, Aukštadvaris Regional Park, environs of Zabarauskai village, in an abandoned meadow on the edge of forest (54.555191° N; 24.512987° E), 13 September 2014, Z. Gudžinskas & E. Žalneravičius 76801 (generative shoot) and 76802 (vegetative shoot) (BILAS, on two cross-referenced sheets). Isotypes:—Z. Gudžinskas & E. Žalneravičius 76803, 76804 (BILAS).”
8.3.
(Jw7lJ0)
A specimen may be mounted as more than one preparation, as long as the parts are clearly labelled as being part of that same specimen, or have a single, original label in common. Multiple preparations from a single gathering that are not clearly labelled as being part of a single specimen are duplicates1, regardless of whether the source was one individual or more than one.
Ex. 6.
(DX5pX0)
The holotype specimen of Delissea eleeleensis H. St. John, Christensen 261 (BISH), is mounted as two preparations, a herbarium sheet (BISH No. 519675 [barcode BISH1006410]) with the annotation “fl. bottled” and an inflorescence preserved in alcohol in a jar labelled “Cyanea, Christensen 261” (Cyanea eleeleensis (H. St. John) Lammers is a homotypic synonym). The annotation indicates that the inflorescence is part of the holotype specimen and not a duplicate, nor is it part of the isotype specimen (BISH No. 519676 [barcode BISH1006411]), which is not labelled as including additional material preserved in a separate preparation.
Ex. 7.
(ZBvGcv)
The holotype of Cephaelis acanthacea Standl. ex Steyerm., Cuatrecasas 16572 (F), consists of a single specimen mounted on two herbarium sheets, labelled “sheet 1” and “sheet 2”. Although the two sheets have separate herbarium accession numbers, F No. 1153741 and F No. 1153742, respectively, the cross-labelling indicates that they constitute a single specimen. A third sheet of Cuatrecasas 16572, F No. 1153740, is not cross-labelled and is therefore a duplicate. (The valid publication of this name was discussed by Taylor in Novon 25: 331–332. 2017.)
Ex. 8.
(bqdQHD)
The holotype specimen of Eugenia ceibensis Standl., Yuncker & al. 8309, is mounted on a single herbarium sheet in F. A fragment was removed from the specimen after its designation as holotype and is now conserved in LL. The fragment is mounted on a herbarium sheet along with a photograph of the holotype and is labelled “fragment of type!”. The fragment is no longer part of the holotype specimen because it is not permanently conserved in the same herbarium as the holotype. It is a duplicate, i.e. an isotype.
Ex. 9.
(HF6TEh)
In the Geneva herbaria, a single specimen is often prepared on two or more sheets, which are not therefore duplicates. Although the individual sheets are usually not labelled as being part of the same specimen, they are physically kept together in their own specimen folder and have a single, original label in common.
Ex. 10.
(oRnDWm)
Three specimens collected by Martius (Brazil, Maranhão, “in sylvis ad fl. Itapicurú [in woods near the River Itapicurú]”, May 1819, Martius s.n., M) are syntypes of Erythrina falcata Benth. (in Martius, Fl. Bras. 15(1): 172. 1859). Only one of the herbarium sheets (barcode M-0213337) has Martius’s original blue label, whereas the other two (barcodes M-0213336 and M-0213338) have been labelled with the locality to identify them as the same gathering. Because the three specimens do not have a single, original label in common, and are not cross-labelled, they are treated as duplicates.
8.4.
(gd090u)
Type specimens of names of taxa must be preserved permanently and may not be living organisms or cultures. Nevertheless, cultures of algae and fungi, if preserved in a metabolically inactive state (e.g. by lyophilization or deep-freezing to remain alive in that inactive state), are acceptable as types (see also Art. 40.7 and Rec. F.11A.2).
Ex. 11.
(ZFAvID)
“Dendrobium sibuyanense” (Naranja & al. in Philipp. Agric. Sci. 88: 484–488. 2005) was described with the statement “Type specimen is a living specimen being maintained at the Orchid Nursery, Department of Horticulture, University of the Philippines Los Baños (UPLB). Collectors: Orville C. Baldos & Ramil R. Marasigan, April 5, 2004”. Because a living plant cannot be a type, no type was indicated and the name was not validly published (Art. 40.1; see also Art. 40 Ex. 6).
Ex. 12.
(V7dUrd)
Dipodascus australiensis Arx & J. S. F. Barker (in Arx, Antonie van Leeuwenhoek 43: 335. 1977) was published with a culture cited as “Typus CBS 625.74”. This is acceptable as a holotype because, from 1958, cultures were permanently preserved at the Centraalbureau voor Schimmelcultures (CBS) in a metabolically inactive state by lyophilization (Hoog, Centraalbureau voor Schimmelcultures 75 Years Culture Collection: 20. 1979).
8.5.
(MT65cU)
The type, epitypes (Art. 9.9) excepted, of the name of a fossil-taxon at the rank of species or below is always a specimen (see Art. 9.15). One whole specimen is to be considered as the nomenclatural type (see Rec. 8A.4).
8.6.
(q36nko)
For the purpose of typification of names of fossil-taxa, a specimen is an individual of a fossil-species or infraspecific fossil-taxon selected from a sample of sediment or rock or subsample or preparation thereof. A specimen is usually contained on or in a slab of rock, box, vial, or micropalaeontology slide, or mounted on a scanning electron microscope stub or microscope slide. Each specimen is treated as a separate gathering. A sample (or subsample or preparation thereof) may contain multiple individuals (i.e. specimens) of the same fossil-taxon as well as other fossil-taxa (see also Art. 40.8).
Ex. 13.
(0OoXFG)
The specimen designated as the holotype of the fossil spore Striatella jurassica Mädler (in Fortschr. Geol. Rheinl. Westfalen 12: 192. 1964) was mounted on a microscope slide as a strew mount together with other individuals of the same and other taxa. The material on the slide represents a subsample of the residue, which in turn is a subsample of a single rock sample from the Thurau 1 core from the Lower Jurassic of Germany. The holotype is indicated by microscope co-ordinates (21:117.7) and a collection inventory number (TK 3154) on the slide as well as in the protologue. Four surrounding dots were added later to indicate the position of this specimen. This indication was translated into a more widely used England Finder reference (N19/4). Besides this holotype, the slide also contains the holotype of Ephedripites tortuosus Mädler (l.c.: 194. 1964), TK3159. Other palynomorphs on the same slide conforming to the circumscription of S. jurassica and E. tortuosus, but not explicitly cited in the protologues, comprise other parts of the original material, i.e. they are independent uncited specimens (see photograph of this example in Gravendyck & al. in Palynology 45: 727, fig. 5Ab. 2021).
i
Note 2.
(JfpBTw)
Macrofossils are often discovered by splitting rocks to reveal a fossil organ on both parts of the rock (or the entire fossil itself and a mould). These are usually referred to as “part” and “counterpart”; they are parts of the same specimen, not separate specimens, and often complementary to each other in their structural details. For the purpose of typification, both part and counterpart, where available, comprise the type specimen.
Ex. 14.
(F91mmF)
The fossil-species Diplotropis claibornensis Herend. & Dilcher (in Syst. Bot. 15: 527, fig. 1 and 2. 1990) was described based on a fossil that consists of part and counterpart. Both part and counterpart comprise the specimen that was designated as the holotype.
(VrCmtN)
Recommendation 8A
8A.1.
(otFNZo)
When a holotype, a lectotype, or a neotype is an illustration, the specimen or specimens upon which that illustration is based should be used to help determine the application of the name (see also Art. 9.15).
8A.2.
(iqSqB5)
When an illustration is the type of a name under Art. 40.6, the collection data of the illustrated material should be given (see also Rec. 38D.2).
8A.3.
(ZrGYLU)
When a single specimen designated as holotype, lectotype, neotype, or epitype is mounted as multiple preparations, this should be stated in the publication containing the type designation, and the preparations appropriately labelled.
8A.4.
(RCnCjW)
If the type specimen of a name of a fossil-taxon is cut into pieces (sections of fossil wood, pieces of coalball plants, etc.), all parts originally used in establishing the diagnosis should be clearly marked.
8A.5.
(3SSNsO)
If a type specimen is prepared on a microscope slide, it is strongly recommended that the position of the specimen be indicated by an England Finder reference (Graticules Ltd. in J. Sci. Instrum. 39: 250. 1962) or equivalent unambiguous reference (e.g. single-grain mounts or permanent ink circling; see Art. 8 Ex. 13) to facilitate finding it again.
8A.6.
(Gs8Ltz)
For palaeopalynological samples, it is recommended that at least a subsample of rock or sediment or residue from which the type was selected be deposited in the public collection along with the type, thereby permitting future preparations that could interpret or replace degraded type material.
(OwbCpK)
Recommendation 8B
8B.1.
(z37ZkO)
Whenever practicable a living culture should be prepared from the holotype material of the name of a newly described taxon of algae or fungi and deposited in at least two institutional culture or genetic resource collections. (Such action does not obviate the requirement for a holotype specimen under Art. 8.4; see also Rec. F.11A.1.)
8B.2.
(I63vkv)
In cases where the type of a name is a culture permanently preserved in a metabolically inactive state (see Art. 8.4), any living isolates obtained from it should be referred to as “ex-type” (ex typo), “ex-holotype” (ex holotypo), “ex-isotype” (ex isotypo), etc., in order to make it clear they are derived from the type but are not themselves the nomenclatural type.
(wGGSEn)
Categories and designation of types
9.1.
(BOj58t)
A holotype of a name of a species or infraspecific taxon is the one specimen or illustration (but see Art. 40.6) either:
(a) designated in the protologue as the nomenclatural type; or
(b) used by the author(s) in preparing the protologue when no type was designated; or
(c) as described in Art. 9 Note 1.
As long as the holotype exists, it fixes the application of the name concerned (but see Art. 9.15).
9.2.
(oFiofZ)
Any designation of the type made by the original author(s), if definitely expressed in the protologue, is final (but see Art. 9.11, 9.15, and 9.16). Mention of a single specimen or gathering or illustration does not by itself constitute designation of the holotype (but see Art. 9 Note 1). A cited or uncited specimen or illustration must be accepted as the holotype if there is evidence in the protologue or elsewhere to establish that the specimen or illustration was the only one used (Art. 9.1(b)) and no additional, uncited specimens or illustrations (which may have been lost or destroyed) could have been used. If a name of a new taxon is validly published solely by reference to a previously published description or diagnosis, the same considerations apply to specimens or illustrations used by the author(s) of that description or diagnosis (see Art. 7.8; but see Art. 7.9).
i
Note 1.
(D3aueP)
A single specimen or illustration (illustrations of fossil-taxa excepted: see Art. 8.5) cited in the protologue of the name of a new species or infraspecific taxon published on or after 1 January 1958 and before 1 January 1990 is the holotype (see Art. 40.3 and 40.4).
Ex. 1.
(6yKZMi)
When Tuckerman published Opegrapha oulocheila Tuck. (Lich. Calif.: 32. 1866) he referred to “the single specimen, from Schweinitz’s herbarium (Herb. Acad. Sci. Philad.) before me”. Even though the term “type” or its equivalent was not used in the protologue, Tuckerman’s statement is evidence to establish that he used only that specimen (in PH barcode 00007529), which is therefore the holotype.
Ex. 2.
(bhv1kz)
In the protologue of Coronilla argentea L. (Sp. Pl.: 743. 1753), Linnaeus cited an illustration by Alpini (Pl. Exot.: 16. 1627) and did not designate a type. Mention of the illustration does not by itself constitute designation of the holotype. Although no uncited specimens or illustrations are known to exist, making Alpini’s illustration the only known element of original material, it is not the holotype because it cannot be established that Linnaeus used only this one element when preparing the protologue. Linnaeus rarely cited specimens and could have used a specimen that was subsequently lost or destroyed (he is known to have discarded specimens). Alpini’s illustration was designated as the lectotype of C. argentea by Greuter (in Ann. Mus. Goulandris 1: 44. 1973).
Ex. 3.
(R7DBII)
In the protologue of
Calycanthus praecox L. (Sp. Pl., ed. 2: 718. 1762), Linnaeus did not designate a type and cited only one element, an illustration by Kaempfer (Amoen. Exot. Fasc.: 879. 1712); he also stated that the plant was unknown to him (“Ignota mihi”). This is evidence establishing that Linnaeus, when preparing the protologue, used only Kaempfer’s illustration, which must therefore be accepted as the holotype.
9.3.
(aiNZV8)
A lectotype is one specimen or illustration designated from the original material (Art. 9.4) as the nomenclatural type, in conformity with Art. 9.11 and 9.12:
(a) if the name was published without a holotype; or
(b) if the holotype is lost or destroyed; or
(c) if a type is found to belong to more than one taxon (see also Art. 9.14).
For sanctioned names (Art. F.3), a lectotype may be selected from among elements associated with either or both the protologue and the sanctioning treatment (Art. F.3.10).
Ex. 4.
(8OoWgD)
Adansonia grandidieri Baill. (in Grandidier, Hist. Phys. Madagascar 34: t. 79B bis, fig. 2 & t. 79E, fig. 1. 1893) was validly published when accompanied solely by two illustrations with analysis (see Art. 38.9). Baum (in Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 82: 447. 1995) designated one of the sheets of Grevé 275 (flowering specimen in P [barcode P00037169]), which he presumed to be the specimen from which most or all of the components of t. 79E, fig. 1 were drawn, as the lectotype of this name.
9.4.
(pGfFYz)
Original material of a name comprises the following elements:
(a) the holotype (Art. 9.1) and any isotypes (Art. 9.5); and
(b) any syntypes (Art. 9.6) and isosyntypes1; and
(c) any paratypes (Art. 9.7); and
(d) any illustrations published as part of the protologue (fossil-taxa excepted: see Art. 8.5); and
(e) those specimens and illustrations (both published and unpublished; illustrations of fossil-taxa excepted: see Art. 8.5) that were associated with the taxon by, and that were available to:
(1) the publishing author(s) prior to, or at the time of, publication of the protologue; or
(2) other author(s) to whom the description or diagnosis may have been ascribed (or unequivocally associated) prior to, or at the time of, preparation of the description, diagnosis, or illustration with analysis (Art. 38.8 and 38.9) validating the name (but see Art. 7.8, 7.9, and F.3.10).
i
Note 2.
(0GhhEB)
Original material under Art. 9.4(a)–(c) has not necessarily been seen by either the author of the validating description or diagnosis or the author of the name.
i
Note 3.
(QMk1Dd)
Habitat photographs cannot be original material or types because they are not illustrations as defined by this Code (Art. 6.1 footnote).
i
Note 4.
(nJ4lmJ)
For names falling under Art. 7.8, only elements from the context of the validating description are considered as original material. However, if the validating author has designated a different element as the type in the protologue (indication or usage by the validating author is insufficient to establish a type), the original material is determined in accordance with Art. 9.4 without regard to the previous sentence.
i
Note 5.
(bx0vEO)
For names falling under Art. 7.9, only elements from the context of the valid publication of those names are considered as original material.
9.5.
(S3TTdM)
An isotype is any duplicate of the holotype; it is always a specimen.
i
Note 6.
(frBKXf)
The term isotype is also used for a duplicate of the type of the conserved name of a species or infraspecific taxon because, under Art. 14.8, such a type, like a holotype, may only be changed by the procedure of conservation.
9.6.
(GWRRbT)
A syntype is any specimen cited in the protologue when there is no holotype, or any one of two or more specimens simultaneously designated in the protologue as types (see also Art. 40 Note 3). Reference to an entire gathering, or a part thereof, is considered to be citation of the included specimens (see also Art. 40 Note 2).
i
Note 7.
(k4TOnu)
Specimens not cited in the protologue that are original material according to Art. 9.4(e) are not syntypes.
Ex. 5.
(9YN4YA)
In the protologue of
Laurentia frontidentata E. Wimm. (see Art. 40 Ex. 3) a single gathering in two herbaria was designated as the type. Therefore, there must exist at least two specimens and these are syntypes.
Ex. 6.
(eRXyEu)
In the protologue of Campanula pulla L. (Sp. Pl.: 163. 1753), Linnaeus cited “Burs. IV. 21”, referring to a specimen in the Burser Herbarium (UPS), in addition to an illustration in Bauhin (Prodr.: 35. 1620). This single specimen is a syntype because it was cited in the protologue and there is no holotype. Similarly, in the protologue of Anemone alpina L. (Sp. Pl.: 539. 1753), two specimens are cited under the (unnamed) varieties β and γ, as “Burs. IX. 80” and “Burs. IX: 81”. These specimens, held in the Burser Herbarium (UPS), are syntypes of A. alpina.
Ex. 7.
(nYvZdp)
Lavalle (in Darwiniana 41: 68. 2003) cited “SINTIPOS [syntypes]” of the name Marattia cicutifolia Kaulf. (Enum. Filic.: 32. 1824). However, they cannot be syntypes because they were not cited in the protologue of that name, where Kaulfuss cited only the provenance “Habitat in Brasilia”. Instead, they are original material because they satisfy the definition of that term as given in Art. 9.4(e).
9.7.
(Vi21oC)
A paratype is any specimen cited in the protologue that is neither the holotype nor an isotype, nor one of the syntypes if in the protologue two or more specimens were simultaneously designated as types.
Ex. 8.
(2oeet5)
The holotype of the name Rheedia kappleri Eyma (in Meded. Bot. Mus. Herb. Rijks Univ. Utrecht 4: 26. 1932), which applies to a polygamous species, is a staminate specimen, Kappler 593a (U). The author designated a hermaphroditic specimen, Forestry Service of Surinam B. W. 1618 (U), as a paratype.
i
Note 8.
(dpribp)
In most cases in which no holotype was designated there are also no paratypes because all the cited specimens are syntypes. However, when an author designated two or more specimens as types (Art. 9.6), any remaining cited specimens are paratypes and not syntypes.
Ex. 9.
(7DH7cN)
In the protologue of Eurya hebeclados Y. Ling (in Acta Phytotax. Sin. 1(2): 208. 1951) the author simultaneously designated two specimens as types, Y. Ling 5014 as “typus, ♂ ” and Y. Y. Tung 315 as “typus, ♀”, which are therefore syntypes. Ling also cited the specimen Y. Ling 5366 but without designating it as a type; it is therefore a paratype.
9.8.
(7EiRkk)
A neotype is a specimen or illustration selected to serve as nomenclatural type if no original material exists, or as long as it is missing (see also Art. 9.16, 9.19(c), and Rec. F.11A.2).
9.9.
(07dOjd)
An epitype is a specimen or illustration selected to serve as an interpretative type when the holotype, lectotype, or previously designated neotype, or all original material associated with a validly published name, is demonstrably ambiguous and cannot be critically identified for the purpose of the precise application of the name to a taxon. Designation of an epitype is not achieved unless the holotype, lectotype, or neotype that the epitype supports is explicitly cited (see also Art. 9.20).
Ex. 10.
(pJ6qI4)
Podlech (in Taxon 46: 465. 1997) designated Herb. Linnaeus No. 926.43 (LINN) as the lectotype of Astragalus trimestris L. (Sp. Pl.: 761. 1753). He simultaneously designated an epitype (“Egypt, Dünen oberhalb Rosetta am linken Nilufer bei Schech Mantur [dunes above Rosetta on the left bank of the Nile at Sheikh Mandur], 9 May 1902, Anonymous (BM)”) because the lectotype lacks fruits, “which show important diagnostic features for this species”.
Ex. 11.
(zjq8cC)
The lectotype of Salicornia europaea L. (Herb. Linnaeus No. 10.1, LINN, designated by Jafri & Rateeb in Jafri & El-Gadi, Fl. Libya 58: 57. 1978) does not show the relevant characters by which it could be identified for the precise application of this name in a critical group of taxa that are best characterized molecularly. In view of this, Kadereit & al. (in Taxon 61: 1234. 2012) designated as the epitype a molecularly tested specimen from the type locality (Sweden, Gotland, W shore of Burgsviken Bay, Näsudden Cape, Piirainen & Piirainen 4222, only the plant numbered G38-1, MJG).
Ex. 12.
(8funon)
Martínez-Laborde & al. (in Phytotaxa 220: 96. 2015) designated a specimen with pistillate flowers (Balansa 2342, P barcode P00080325) as the lectotype of Hennecartia omphalandra J. Poiss. (in Bull. Soc. Bot. France 32: 41. 1885). Although fruits and staminate flowers are important diagnostic characters for this species, the vegetative organs and pistillate flowers in the lectotype are also clearly diagnostic. Therefore, according to Art. 9.9, an epitype is not necessary because the lectotype can be critically identified to precisely apply the name to the taxon.
9.10.
(zIaQwr)
The use of a term defined in the Code (Art. 9.1, 9.3, and 9.5–9.9) as denoting a type, in a sense other than that in which it is so defined, is treated as an error to be corrected (for example, the use of the term lectotype to denote what is in fact a neotype; see also Art. 40.4).
Ex. 13.
(iLyZvQ)
Borssum Waalkes (in Blumea 14: 198. 1966) cited Herb. Linnaeus No. 866.7 (LINN) as the “holotype” of Sida retusa L. (Sp. Pl., ed. 2: 961. 1763). However, illustrations in Plukenet (Phytographia: t. 9, fig. 2. 1691) and Rumphius (Herb. Amboin. 6: t. 19. 1750) were cited by Linnaeus in the protologue. Therefore, the original material of S. retusa comprises three elements (Art. 9.4(e)), and Borssum Waalkes’s use of holotype is an error to be corrected to lectotype.
i
Note 9.
(n61R38)
A misused term may be corrected to lectotype, neotype, or epitype only if the requirements of Art. 7.11 are met, in particular inclusion of the phrase “designated here” or a similar expression for typifications on or after 1 January 2001 (for names of organisms treated as fungi see also Art. F.5.4).
Ex. 14.
(yp2f7X)
Bohley & al. (in Syst. Bot. 42: 138. 2017) cited the specimen
Balansa 2263 (G) as the “type” and “holotype” of
Cypselea meziana K. Müll. (in Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 42(Beibl. 97): 72. 1908). However, this use of the term holotype cannot be corrected to lectotype because the requirement of Art. 7.11 to include, on or after 1 January 2001, the phrase “designated here” or a similar expression was not met. Consequently, designation of a lectotype was not achieved until Jocou & Minué (in Phytotaxa 461: 69. 2020) wrote “Lectotype (designated here)” selecting a specimen, in P, from the same
Balansa gathering.
9.11.
(gjK7tR)
A lectotype (Art. 9.3) or, if permissible, a neotype (Art. 9.8) may be designated (see also Art. 9.16):
(a) if the name of a species or infraspecific taxon was published without a holotype (Art. 9.1); or
(b) when the holotype or previously designated lectotype has been lost or destroyed; or
(c) when the material designated as type is found to belong to more than one taxon.
9.12.
(U2hIew)
In lectotype designation, a part of the holotype (if it is taxonomically mixed) that is not in conflict with the validating description or diagnosis must be chosen if such exists, or otherwise an isotype if such exists, or otherwise a syntype or isosyntype if such exists, or otherwise a paratype if such exists. If none of the above specimens exists, the lectotype must be chosen from among the illustrations and uncited specimens that comprise the remaining original material, if such exist.
Ex. 15.
(PnQ6Ye)
Baumann & al. (in J. Eur. Orch. 34: 176. 2002) designated an illustration cited in the protologue of Gymnadenia rubra Wettst. (in Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges. 7: 312. 1889) as “lectotype”. Because Wettstein also cited syntypes, which always have precedence over illustrations in lectotype designation, Baumann’s choice was not in conformity with Art. 9.12 and must not be followed. Later, Baumann & Lorenz (in Taxon 60: 1775. 2011) correctly designated one of the syntypes as the lectotype.
9.13.
(mQyUXo)
If no original material exists or as long as it is missing, a neotype may be selected. A lectotype always takes precedence over a neotype, except as provided by Art. 9.16 and 9.19(c).
9.14.
(FhGNMx)
When a type (herbarium sheet or equivalent preparation) contains parts belonging to more than one taxon (see Art. 9.11), the name must remain attached to the part (specimen as defined in Art. 8.2) that corresponds most nearly with the original description or diagnosis.
Ex. 16.
(hBTX4g)
The holotype of the name Tetrapterys alternifolia Cuatrec. (in Webbia 13: 435. 1958) is A. Dugand & R. Jaramillo 2850 (US); the material on this sheet, however, proved to be mixed. Anderson (in Contr. Univ. Michigan Herb. 25: 91. 2007) acted in accordance with Art. 9.14 in designating one part of the sheet (“lectotype, designated here: US!, the stem with flowers”) in US (barcode 00108506) as the lectotype.
9.15.
(IQmsxA)
The holotype (or lectotype) of a name of a fossil-species or infraspecific fossil-taxon (Art. 8.5) is the specimen (or one of the specimens) on which the validating illustrations (Art. 43.2) are based. If, before 1 January 2001 (see Art. 43.3), a type specimen is indicated (Art. 40.1) but not identified among the validating illustrations in the protologue of a name of a new fossil-taxon at the rank of species or below, a lectotype must be designated from among the specimens illustrated in the protologue. This choice is superseded if it can be demonstrated that the original type specimen corresponds to another validating illustration.
9.16.
(V7H06D)
When a holotype or a previously designated lectotype has been lost or destroyed and it can be shown that all the other original material differs taxonomically from the lost or destroyed type, a neotype may be selected to preserve the usage established by the previous typification (see also Art. 9.18).
9.17.
(OF6vLN)
A designation of a lectotype, neotype, or epitype that is later found to refer to a single gathering but to more than one specimen must nevertheless be accepted (subject to Art. 9.19 and 9.20) but may be further narrowed to a single one of these specimens by way of a subsequent lectotypification, neotypification, or epitypification (see also Art. 9.14).
Ex. 17.
(uG4IFD)
Erigeron plantagineus Greene (in Pittonia 3: 292. 1898) was described from material collected by R. M. Austin in California. Cronquist (in Brittonia 6: 173. 1947) wrote “Type: Austin s.n., Modoc County, California (ND)”, thereby designating the Austin material in ND as the lectotype (first-step). Strother & Ferlatte (in Madroño 35: 85. 1988), noting that there were two specimens of this gathering in ND, designated one of them, “ND-G, 057228 [barcode NDG57228]”, as the (second-step) lectotype. In subsequent references, both lectotypification steps may be cited in sequence.
Ex. 18.
(OIgCNT)
In the protologue of Eucalyptus oreades R. T. Baker (in Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales 24: 596. 1900) Baker cited: “Hab.—Lawson (H. G. Smith and R.T.B.); Mount Victoria and road to Jenolan Caves (R. H. Cambage).” Specimens of these gatherings are syntypes (see Art. 9.6). Brooker & al. (in Boland & al., Forest Trees Australia, ed. 4: 314. 1984) designated a (first-step) lectotype of the name, fulfilling the requirements of Art. 7.11 by citing “Type: Near Lawson, New South Wales, Apr. 1899, R. T. Baker and H. G. Smith.” No herbarium was specified, but this was not a requirement in 1984 (see Art. 9.22). Bean (in Telopea 12: 316. 2009), noting that the gathering by Baker and Smith was represented by five specimens, one in K and four in NSW, designated NSW barcode NSW325376 as the (second-step) lectotype.
9.18.
(Okxv8F)
A neotype selected under Art. 9.16 may be superseded if it can be shown to differ taxonomically from the holotype or lectotype that it replaced.
9.19.
(2kb3wa)
The author who first designates (Art. 7.10, 7.11, and F.5.4) a lectotype or a neotype in conformity with Art. 9.11–9.13 must be followed, but that choice is superseded if:
(a) the holotype or, in the case of a neotype, any of the original material is found to exist.
The choice may also be superseded if it can be shown that:
(b) it is contrary to Art. 9.14; or
(c) it is in serious conflict with the protologue, in which case an element that is not in conflict with the protologue is to be chosen.
A lectotype may only be superseded by a non-conflicting element of the original material, if such exists; if none exists it may be superseded by a neotype.
Ex. 19.
(v0bgS7)
(c) Fischer (in Feddes Repert. 108: 115. 1997) designated Herb. Linnaeus No. 26.58 (LINN) as lectotype of Veronica agrestis L. (Sp. Pl.: 13. 1753). However, Martínez-Ortega & al. (in Taxon 51: 763. 2002) established that the designated lectotype was in serious conflict with Linnaeus’s diagnosis and that three specimens of original material not conflicting with the protologue were available in the Celsius herbarium. One of them was designated as the new lectotype of V. agrestis, superseding the choice of Fischer.
i
Note 10.
(dBAOoV)
Only a choice of uncited material as lectotype may be superseded under Art. 9.19(c); cited specimens and illustrations are part of the protologue and cannot therefore be in serious conflict with it.
9.20.
(Qv2RCX)
The author who first designates (Art. 7.10, 7.11, and F.5.4) an epitype must be followed; a different epitype may be designated only if the original epitype is lost or destroyed (see also Art. 9.17). A lectotype or neotype supported by an epitype may be superseded in accordance with Art. 9.19 or, in the case of a neotype, in accordance with Art. 9.18. If it can be shown that an epitype and the type it supports differ taxonomically and that neither Art. 9.18 nor 9.19 applies, the name may be proposed for conservation with a conserved type (Art. 14.9; see also Art. 57.1).
i
Note 11.
(nJOhZa)
An epitype supports only the type to which it is linked by the typifying author. If the supported type is replaced because it was lost, destroyed, or superseded, the epitype has no standing with respect to the replacement type.
9.21.
(X1TLh8)
Designation of an epitype is not achieved unless the herbarium, collection, or institution in which the epitype is conserved is specified or, if the epitype is a published illustration, a full and direct bibliographic reference (Art. 41.5) to it is provided.
9.22.
(50nAhV)
On or after 1 January 1990, lectotypification or neotypification of a name of a species or infraspecific taxon by a specimen or unpublished illustration is not achieved unless the herbarium, collection, or institution in which the type is conserved is specified.
9.23.
(hcoV0l)
On or after 1 January 2001, lectotypification, neotypification, or epitypification of a name of a species or infraspecific taxon is not achieved unless indicated by use of the term “lectotypus”, “neotypus”, or “epitypus”, its equivalent in a modern language, or abbreviations of these (see also Art. 7.11 and 9.10).
Ex. 20.
(pArPGc)
Clavaria fumosa Pers. (in Ann. Bot. (Usteri) 15: 31. 1795) was described without mention of any specimens or a specific locality, and there is no holotype according to Art. 9.1 and 9.2. Kautmanová & al. (in Persoonia 29: 141. 2012) cited a specimen (in L [barcode L 0115746]) that lacks a collecting date and locality details as “Typus (designated here)”. This act does not constitute an effective lectotypification or neotypification because it lacks the term “lectotypus” or “neotypus” or a term correctable to one of these terms (Art. 9.10). Later, a different specimen was effectively designated as the neotype of the name C. fumosa when Franchi & Marchetti (I Funghi Clavarioidi in Italia: 196. 2022) wrote “Neotypus (hic designatus): BRA CR15656, Slovakia, Západné Tatry Mts, Zuberec village, Mačie diery Nature Reserve, alt. 800 m, in dry mowed meadow, on limestone, leg. I. Kautmanova, 16 June 2007. [typification identifier] IF 557637”.
9.24.
(7EjcXQ)
If a designation of holotype, lectotype, neotype, or epitype made in the publication containing the type designation of the name of a taxon is later found to contain errors (e.g. in locality, date, collector, collecting number, herbarium or collection or institution or its abbreviation, specimen identifier, or citation of an illustration), these errors are to be corrected provided that the intent of the original author(s) is not changed (see also Art. F.5.8). However, omissions of required information under Art. 7.11, 9.21–9.23, 40.4, 40.5, 40.7, 40.8, and F.5.4 are not correctable.
Ex. 21.
(48Vu2s)
The name Phoebe calcarea S. Lee & F. N. Wei (in Guihaia 3: 7. 1983) was validly published with the holotype designated as Du’an Expedition “4-10-004” in IBK, but no specimen with this collecting number exists in IBK. However, a specimen in IBK annotated with “Phoebe calcarea sp. nov.”, “Typus”, and matching all other details of the protologue has the collecting number Du’an Expedition 4-10-0243. Therefore, the original type citation is obviously erroneous and is to be corrected.
Ex. 22.
(PxrB6C)
The name Capparis trichocarpa B. S. Sun (in Acta Phytotax. Sin. 9: 113. 1964) was validly published with a gathering C. W. Wang 73796 in PE designated as the type, but in the herbarium PE there are two duplicates of this gathering. Li & al. (in Bull. Bot. Res., Harbin 28: 265. 2008) designated one of these specimens as the lectotype: “China. Yunnan: Fo-hai (= Menghai), alt. 1520 m, March 1936, C. W. Wang 73796 (lectotype, PE Herb. Bar Code No. 00029137, designated here, PE!; isolectotype, PE!).” However, the collecting date on the label of the lectotype specimen is May 1936. Therefore, the erroneous date in the designation of lectotype is to be corrected.
(5CSUkC)
Recommendation 9A
9A.1.
(G4S3ZV)
Typification of names published without a holotype should only be carried out with an understanding of the author’s method of working; in particular it should be realized that some of the material used by the author in describing the taxon may not be in the author’s herbarium or may not even have survived, and conversely, that not all the material surviving in the author’s herbarium was necessarily used in describing the taxon.
9A.2.
(tzISvL)
Designation of a lectotype should be undertaken only in the light of an understanding of the group concerned. In choosing a lectotype, all aspects of the protologue should be considered as a basic guide. Mechanical methods, such as the automatic selection of the first element cited or of a specimen collected by the person after whom a species is named, should be avoided as unscientific and leading to possible confusion and further change.
9A.3.
(Ipn2Hl)
In choosing a lectotype, any indication of intent by the author of a name should be given preference unless such indication is contrary to the protologue. Such indications are manuscript notes, annotations on herbarium sheets, recognizable figures, and epithets such as typicus, genuinus, etc.
9A.4.
(ZTcF7v)
When two or more heterogeneous elements were included in or cited with the original description or diagnosis, the lectotype should be selected so as to preserve current usage. If another author has already segregated one or more elements as other taxa, one of the remaining elements should be designated as the lectotype provided that this element is not in conflict with the original description or diagnosis (see Art. 9.19(c)).
(rTKNP6)
Recommendation 9B
9B.1.
(zbycZy)
In selecting a neotype, particular care and critical knowledge should be exercised because there is usually no guide except personal judgement as to what best fits the protologue; if this selection proves to be faulty it may result in further change.
9B.2.
(vdvYSg)
Authors designating an epitype should state in what way the holotype, lectotype, neotype, or all original material is ambiguous such that epitypification is necessary.
(CMgM9c)
Recommendation 9C
9C.1.
(BUJnIZ)
Specification of the herbarium, collection, or institution of deposition should be followed by any available number permanently and unambiguously identifying the lectotype, neotype, or epitype specimen (see also Rec. 40A.5).
9C.2.
(uq7q07)
Author(s) designating a type should notify the curator of the herbarium, collection, or institution to update the labelling of the specimen. This is intended to minimize the chances of superfluous nomenclatural acts.
(uNhLAB)
Typification of names above the rank of species
10.1.
(k2SeK6)
The type of a name of a genus or of any subdivision of a genus is the type of a name of a species (except as provided by Art. 10.4). For purposes of designation, indication, or citation of a type, the species name alone suffices, i.e. it is considered as the full equivalent of its type (see also Rec. 40A.2).
i
Note 1.
(WEDu7C)
Terms such as “holotype”, “syntype”, “lectotype”, and “neotype”, as defined in Art. 9, apply only to the types of names at the rank of species or below. Although not applicable to the types of names at higher ranks, such terms have sometimes been so used by analogy (e.g. by citation of a “lectotype” for a generic name).
i
Note 2.
(Uzx3kB)
Because the type of a name of a genus or subdivision of a genus is the type of a name of a species, any change in the type of that species name (e.g. by lectotypification or conservation) also affects the application of the generic or subdivisional name.
10.2.
(qAdpEk)
If in the protologue of a name of a genus or of any subdivision of a genus the type(s) of one or more previously or simultaneously published species name(s) is definitely included (see Art. 10.3), the type must be chosen from among these types, unless:
(a) the type was indicated (Art. 10.8, 40.1–40.3) or designated by the author of the name (see also Art. 10.9); or
(b) the name was sanctioned (Art. F.3), in which case the type may also be chosen from among the types of species names included in the sanctioning treatment.
If no type of a previously or simultaneously published species name was definitely included:
(c) a type must be otherwise chosen, but the choice is to be superseded if it can be demonstrated that the selected type is not conspecific with any of the material associated with either the protologue or the sanctioning treatment.
Ex. 1.
(FCh0oo)
The genus
Anacyclus, as originally circumscribed by Linnaeus (Sp. Pl.: 892. 1753), comprised three validly named species. Cassini (in Cuvier, Dict. Sci. Nat. 34: 104. 1825) designated
Anthemis valentina L. (l.c.: 895. 1753) as type of
Anacyclus, but this was not an original element of the genus. Green (in Sprague, Nom. Prop. Brit. Bot.: 182. 1929) designated
Anacyclus valentinus L. (l.c.: 892. 1753), “the only one of the three original species still retained in the genus”, as the “standard species” (see Art. 7 *Ex. 17), and her choice must be followed (Art. 10.5). Humphries (in Bull. Brit. Mus. (Nat. Hist.), Bot. 7: 109. 1979) designated a specimen in the Clifford Herbarium (BM) as lectotype of
Anacyclus valentinus, and that specimen thereby became the type of
Anacyclus.
Ex. 2.
(z3pHLL)
Warburg (in Engler, Pflanzenw. Ost-Afrikas Lief. 2/3(C): 179–180. 1895) provided separate descriptions for his new genus Brochoneura Warb. and new species B. usambarensis Warb. based on specimens from Tanzania, mentioning that three other species from Madagascar also belong to this genus. Subsequently, Warburg (in Nova Acta Acad. Caes. Leop.-Carol. German. Nat. Cur. 68: 128, 234. 1897) transferred three Malagasy species to Brochoneura (B. acuminata (Lam.) Warb., B. madagascariensis (Lam.) Warb., and B. vouri (Baill.) Warb.). Although Warburg (l.c. 1895) indicated that four species belonged to his new genus, the original type of Brochoneura is the type of B. usambarensis because this is the only validly published species name definitely included by Warburg in the protologue.
Ex. 3.
(DzYsnv)
(c) Castanella Spruce ex Benth. & Hook. f. (Gen. Pl. 1: 394. Aug 1862) was described based on a single specimen collected by Spruce and without mention of a species name. Swart (in ING Card No. 2143. 1957) was the first to designate a type (as “T.”): C. granatensis Planch. & Linden (in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 4, 18: 365. Dec 1862), based on Linden 1360. As long as the Spruce specimen is considered to be conspecific with Linden’s material, Swart’s type designation cannot be superseded, even though the Spruce specimen became the type of Paullinia paullinioides Radlk. (Monogr. Paullinia: 173. 1896), because the latter is not a “previously or simultaneously published species name”.
10.3.
(U9DPUk)
For the purpose of Art. 10.2, definite inclusion of the type of a name of a species is achieved by citation of, or reference (direct or indirect) to, a validly published species name, whether accepted or synonymized by the author, or by citation of the type of a previously or simultaneously published species name.
Ex. 4.
(CFPTM2)
The protologue of Elodes Adans. (Fam. Pl. 2: 444, 553. 1763) includes references to “Elodes” of Clusius (Alt. App. Rar. Pl. Hist., App. Alt. Auct.: [7]. 1611, i.e. “Ascyrum supinum ἑλώδης”), “Hypericum” of Tournefort (Inst. Rei Herb. 1: 255. 1700, i.e. “Hypericum palustre, supinum, tomentosum”), and Hypericum aegypticum L. (Sp. Pl.: 784. 1753). The last is the only reference to a validly published species name, and neither of the other elements is the type of a species name. The type of H. aegypticum is therefore the type of the generic name Elodes even though subsequent authors designated H. elodes L. (Amoen. Acad. 4: 105. 1759) as the type (see Robson in Bull. Brit. Mus. (Nat. Hist.), Bot. 5: 305, 337. 1977).
i
Note 3.
(0XQhAQ)
For purposes of designating or conserving a type of a name of a genus or subdivision of a genus (Art. 10.2, 10.5–10.7, and 14.9) or for purposes of inclusion or exclusion of the type of a name of a genus or subdivision of a genus (Art. 22, 48, and 52), a species name validly published without a nomenclatural type (Art. 8.1) is treated as having a type (but see Art. 40.1).
Ex. 5.
(MiSED5)
In the protologue of
Decarinium Raf. (Neogenyton: 1. 1825),
Croton glandulosus L. was designated as the type. Until a specimen was selected as the lectotype of
C. glandulosus (Fawcett & Rendle, Fl. Jamaica 4: 285. 1920), neither
Decarinium nor
C. glandulosus had a type. Klotzsch (in Arch. Naturgesch. 7: 254. 1841) included
C. glandulosus in his circumscription of
Geiseleria Klotzsch and, even though he did not mention
Decarinium, this is to be treated for the purposes of Art. 52.1 as inclusion of the type of
Decarinium. As a result,
Geiseleria is illegitimate (see Art. 58 Ex. 4).
10.4.
(tsEiMD)
By and only by conservation (Art. 14.9), the type of a name of a genus may be a specimen or illustration, preferably used by the author in the preparation of the protologue, other than the type of a name of an included species.
i
Note 4.
(CvI8ZI)
If the element designated under Art. 10.4 is the type of a species name, that name may be cited as the type of the generic name. If the element is not the type of a species name, a parenthetical reference to the correct name of the type element may be added.
Ex. 6.
(2Oh5mG)
Physconia Poelt (in Nova Hedwigia 9: 30. 1965) was conserved with the specimen “‘Lichen pulverulentus’, Germania, Lipsia in Tilia, 1767, Schreber (M)” as the conserved type. That specimen is the type of P. pulverulacea Moberg (in Mycotaxon 8: 310. 1979), the name now cited in the type entry in App. III.
Ex. 7.
(Eb9hGp)
Pseudolarix Gordon (Pinetum: 292. 1858) was conserved with a specimen from the Gordon herbarium (K No. 3455 [barcode K000287582]) as its conserved type. Because this specimen is not the type of any species name, its accepted identity “[= P. amabilis (J. Nelson) Rehder…]” has been added to the corresponding entry in App. III.
10.5.
(xcP8D4)
The author who first designates (Art. 7.10, 7.11, and F.5.4) a type of a name of a genus or subdivision of a genus must be followed, but the choice may be superseded if the author used a largely mechanical method of selection (Art. 10.6). A type chosen using a largely mechanical method of selection is superseded by any later choice of a different type not made using such a method, unless, in the interval, the supersedable choice has been affirmed by its adoption in a publication that did not use a mechanical method of selection.
i
Note 5.
(EqeGZb)
The effective date of a typification (cf. Art. 22.2, 48.2(c), and 52.2(c)) that could be superseded under Art. 10.5 remains that of the original selection, unless the type has been superseded.
10.6.
(gZS6o8)
For the purpose of Art. 10.5, “a largely mechanical method of selection” is defined as one in which the type is selected following a set of objective criteria such as those set out in “Canon 15” of the so-called “Philadelphia Code” (Arthur & al. in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 31: 255–257. 1904) or in “Canon 15” of the American Code of Botanical Nomenclature (Arthur & al. in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 34: 172–174. 1907).
Ex. 8.
(PKvbxn)
The first type designation for Delphinium L. was by Britton (in Britton & Brown, Ill. Fl. N. U.S., ed. 2, 2: 93. 1913), who followed the American Code and whose selection of D. consolida L. is therefore considered to have been largely mechanical. His choice has been superseded under Art. 10.5 by the designation of D. peregrinum L. by Green (in Sprague, Nom. Prop. Brit. Bot.: 162. 1929).
10.7.
(A0qNr9)
Unless the author(s) specifically state that they are not using a mechanical method of type selection, the following criteria determine whether a particular publication, appearing before 1 January 1935, has adopted a largely mechanical method of type selection:
(a) Any statement to that effect, including that the American Code or the “Philadelphia Code” was being followed or that types were determined in a particular mechanical way (e.g. the first species in order).
(b) Adoption of any provision of the “Philadelphia Code” or the American Code that was contrary to the provisions of the International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature in force at that time, e.g. the inclusion of one or more tautonyms as species names.
Additionally, for publications appearing before 1 January 1921:
(c) An author of the publication was a signatory of the “Philadelphia Code”1 (and was therefore also a signatory of the American Code).
(d) An author of the publication stated publicly (e.g. in another publication) that in the typification of generic names the “Philadelphia Code” or the American Code was followed.
(e) An author of the publication was an employee or a recognized associate of the New York Botanical Garden.
(f) An author of the publication was an employee of the United States government.
Ex. 9.
(aCtie4)
(a) Fink (in Contr. U. S. Natl. Herb. 14: 2. 1910) specified that he was “stating the types of the genera according to the ‘first species’ rule”. His type designations may therefore be superseded under Art. 10.5. For example, Fink had designated Biatorina griffithii (Ach.) A. Massal. as the type of Biatorina A. Massal.; but his choice was superseded when the next subsequent designation, by Santesson (in Symb. Bot. Upsal. 12: 428. 1952), stated a different type, B. atropurpurea (Schaer.) A. Massal.
Ex. 10.
(Hit59E)
(a) Underwood (in Mem. Torrey Bot. Club 6: 247–283. 1899) wrote (p. 251): “For each genus established the first named species will be regarded as the type”. Therefore, his designation (p. 276) of Caenopteris furcata Bergius as type of Caenopteris Bergius (in Acta Acad. Sci. Imp. Petrop. 1782(2): 249. 1786) is supersedable; this was done by Copeland (Gen. Filicum: 166. 1947), who designated C. rutifolia Bergius as type.
Ex. 11.
(vJmglN)
(a) Murrill (in J. Mycol. 9: 87. 1903), referring to generic types, wrote: “The principles by which I have been chiefly guided are also quite well known, having been stated and explained by Underwood” (see Art. 10 Ex. 10). Accordingly, Murrill (l.c.: 95, 98. 1903) listed the first-named species treated by Quélet (Enchir. Fung.: 175. 1886),
Coriolus lutescens (Pers.) Quél., as type of
Coriolus Quél. (l.c. 1886) and later (in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 32: 640. 1906) listed
Polyporus zonatus Nees as type because it was “the first species accompanied by a correct citation of a figure”. Both lectotypifications are considered to be mechanical and were superseded by the choice of
Polyporus versicolor (L.) Fr. by Donk (Revis. Niederl. Homobasidiomyc.: 180. 1933).
Ex. 12.
(V7ji6B)
(b) Britton & Wilson (Bot. Porto Rico 6: 262. 1925) designated Cucurbita lagenaria L. as type of Cucurbita L. (Sp. Pl.: 1010. 1753). However, because they were evidently following the American Code (they included many tautonyms in their publication, e.g. “Abrus Abrus (L.) W. Wight”, “Acisanthera Acisanthera (L.) Britton”, and “Ananas Ananas (L.) Voss”), their type selections used a largely mechanical method. Their selection of C. lagenaria (currently treated as Lagenaria siceraria (Molina) Standl.) has been superseded by the selection of C. pepo L. by Green (in Sprague, Nom. Prop. Brit. Bot.: 190. 1929).
Ex. 13.
(c9o32f)
(d) In considering the typification of Achyranthes L. in a preliminary to his account of Amaranthaceae in the North American Flora, Paul C. Standley (in J. Wash. Acad. Sci. 5: 72. 1915) selected A. repens L. as type stating that “there seems, moreover, no doubt as to the type of the genus Achyranthes under the American Code of nomenclature”, noting that, as a result, “the name Achyranthes must be used in a sense other than that in which it has generally been employed in recent years”. As a result of this published statement of acceptance of the American Code, not only is Standley’s selection of A. repens superseded by that of A. aspera L. by Hitchcock (in Sprague, Nom. Prop. Brit. Bot.: 135. 1929), but types cited in Standley’s other publications (e.g. in Britton, N. Amer. Fl. 21: 1–254. 1916–1918) are supersedable under Art. 10.5. Therefore, Standley’s statement (l.c.: 134. 1917) that A. repens was the type of Achyranthes does not constitute affirmation of his earlier selection; similarly, his publication of type designations previously made by Britton & Brown, such as Chenopodium rubrum L. (l.c.: 9. 1916) and Amaranthus caudatus L. (l.c.: 102. 1917), does not constitute affirmation of their selection; the typification of Chenopodium L. has been superseded by the selection of C. album L. by Hitchcock (in Sprague, l.c.: 137. 1929) and that of Amaranthus L. was first affirmed by Green (in Sprague, l.c.: 188. 1929).
10.8.
(F7AF1U)
When the epithet in the name of a subdivision of a genus is identical with or derived from the epithet in one of the originally included species names, the type of the higher-ranking name is the same as that of the species name, unless the original author of the higher-ranking name designated another type.
Ex. 14.
(UsLoVw)
The type of Euphorbia subg. Esula Pers. (Syn. Pl. 2: 14. 1806) is the type of E. esula L., one of the species names originally included by Persoon; the designation of E. peplus L. (also included by Persoon) as type by Croizat (in Revista Sudamer. Bot. 6: 13. 1939) has no standing.
Ex. 15.
(BtwH3Y)
The type of Cassia [unranked] Chamaecrista L. (Sp. Pl.: 379. 1753) is the type of C. chamaecrista L., nom. rej. (App. V), one of the five species names included by Linnaeus.
10.9.
(DEtfGo)
When the name of a new species is validly published solely by reference to a description or diagnosis of a genus under Art. 38.13, making that genus monotypic (see Art. 38.7), the type of the generic name is automatically the same as that of the species name.
Ex. 16.
(8Vrst0)
The generic name Antirhea Comm. ex Juss. (Gen. Pl.: 204. 1789) was published without any included species names. Because A. borbonica J. F. Gmel. (Syst. Nat. 2: 244. 1791) was validly published solely by reference to the description of Antirhea, making the genus monotypic, the type of Antirhea is automatically that of A. borbonica.
10.10.
(3SZo3m)
The type of a name of a family or of any subdivision of a family is automatically the same as that of the generic name from which it is formed (see Art. 18.1). For purposes of designation or citation of a type, the generic name alone suffices, i.e. it is considered as the full equivalent of its type. The type of a name of a family or subfamily not formed from a generic name is the same as that of the corresponding alternative name (Art. 18.5 and 19.8).
10.11.
(Swz3X8)
The principle of typification does not apply to names of taxa above the rank of family, except for names that are automatically typified by being formed from generic names (see Art. 16.1(a)), the type of which is the same as that of the generic name.
(1xQ7uK)
Recommendation 10A
10A.1.
(inQc9d)
When a combination at the rank of a subdivision of a genus has been published under a generic name that has not yet been typified, the type of the generic name should be selected from the subdivision of the genus that was designated as nomenclaturally typical, if that is apparent.
10A.2.
(IwEVLi)
In citing a type chosen using a largely mechanical method of selection that has since been affirmed by an author not using such a method, both the place of original selection and that of affirmation should be cited, e.g. “Quercus L. … Type: Q. robur L. designated by Britton & Brown (Ill. Fl. N. U.S., ed. 2, 1: 616. 1913); affirmed by Green (in Sprague, Nom. Prop. Brit. Bot.: 189. 1929)”.
(LPbfJf)
Priority and status of names
(3wGskg)
Priority of names
11.1.
(1Ret8A)
Each family or lower-ranked taxon with a particular circumscription, position, and rank can have only one correct name. Special exceptions are made for nine families and one subfamily for which alternative names are permitted (see Art. 18.5 and 19.8). The use of separate names is allowed for fossil-taxa that represent different parts, life-history stages, or preservational states of what may have been a single organismal taxon or even a single individual (Art. 1.2).
Ex. 1.
(9E5kSm)
The generic name Sigillaria Brongn. (in Bull. Sci. Soc. Philom. Paris 1822: 26. 1822) was established for fossils of “bark” fragments, but Brongniart (in Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat. 1: 405. 1839) subsequently included stems with preserved anatomy within his concept of Sigillaria. Cones with preserved anatomy that may in part represent the same biological taxon are referred to as Mazocarpon M. J. Benson (in Ann. Bot. (Oxford) 32: 569. 1918), whereas such cones preserved as adpressions are known as Sigillariostrobus Schimp. (Traité Paléont. Vég. 2: 105. 1870). All these generic names can be used concurrently even though they could, at least in part, apply to the same organism.
11.2.
(k5Xpyq)
A name has no priority outside the rank at which it is published (but see Art. 53.3).
Ex. 2.
(4U74m6)
When Campanula sect. Campanopsis R. Br. (Prodr.: 561. 1810) is treated as a genus, it is called Wahlenbergia Roth (Nov. Pl. Sp.: 399. 1821), a name conserved against the heterotypic (taxonomic) synonym Cervicina Delile (Descr. Egypte, Hist. Nat.: 150. 1813), and not Campanopsis (R. Br.) Kuntze (Revis. Gen. Pl. 2: 378. 1891).
Ex. 3.
(mx6dA1)
Solanum subg. Leptostemonum Bitter (in Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 55: 69. 1919) is the correct name of the subgenus that includes its type, S. mammosum L., because it is the earliest available name at that rank. The homotypic S. sect. Acanthophora Dunal (Hist. Nat. Solanum: 131, 218. 1813), the inclusion of which caused the illegitimacy of S. sect. Leptostemonum Dunal (in Candolle, Prodr. 13(1): 29, 183. 1852), has no priority outside its own rank.
Ex. 4.
(1xOMi5)
Helichrysum stoechas subsp. barrelieri (Ten.) Nyman (Consp. Fl. Eur.: 381. 1879) when treated at specific rank is called H. conglobatum (Viv.) Steud. (Nomencl. Bot., ed. 2, 1: 738. 1840), based on Gnaphalium conglobatum Viv. (Fl. Libyc. Spec.: 55. 1824), and not H. barrelieri (Ten.) Greuter (in Boissiera 13: 138. 1967), based on G. barrelieri Ten. (Fl. Napol. 5: 220. 1835–1838).
Ex. 5.
(0045hx)
Magnolia virginiana var. foetida L. (Sp. Pl.: 536. 1753) when treated at specific rank is called M. grandiflora L. (Syst. Nat., ed. 10: 1082. 1759), not M. foetida (L.) Sarg. (in Gard. & Forest 2: 615. 1889).
i
Note 1.
(CTm8cR)
The provisions of Art. 11 determine priority between different names applicable to the same taxon; they do not concern homonymy.
11.3.
(1blv9e)
For any taxon from family to genus, inclusive, the correct name is the earliest legitimate one with the same rank, except in cases of limitation of priority by conservation or protection (see Art. 14 and F.2) or where Art. 11.7, 11.8, 19.4, 19.5, 56, 57, F.3, or F.7 apply.
Ex. 6.
(q1AQuV)
When Aesculus L. (Sp. Pl.: 344. 1753), Pavia Mill. (Gard. Dict. Abr., ed. 4: Pavia. 1754), Macrothyrsus Spach (in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 2, 2: 61. 1834), and Calothyrsus Spach (l.c.: 62. 1834) are referred to a single genus, its correct name is Aesculus.
11.4.
(cU51wy)
For any taxon below the rank of genus, the correct name is the combination of the final epithet of the earliest legitimate name of the taxon at the same rank, with the correct name of the genus or species to which it is assigned, except:
(a) in cases of limitation of priority under Art. 14, 56, 57, F.2, F.3, or F.7; or
(b) if Art. 11.7, 11.8, 22.1, or 26.1 rules that a different combination be used; or
(c) if the resulting combination could not be validly published under Art. 32.1(c) or would be illegitimate under Art. 53.
If (c) applies, the final epithet of the next earliest legitimate name at the same rank is to be used instead or, if there is no final epithet available, a replacement name or the name of a new taxon may be published.
Ex. 7.
(4wIh2V)
When Aeginetia acaulis (Roxb.) Walp. (in Repert. Bot. Syst. 3: 481. 1844) and A. pedunculata Wall. (Pl. Asiat. Rar. 3: 13. 1831) are considered to apply to the same species, A. acaulis is the correct name because it is the combination of the final epithet of Orobanche acaulis Roxb. (Pl. Coromandel 3: 89. 1820), the earliest legitimate name of the taxon at specific rank, with Aeginetia L., the correct name of the genus to which the species is assigned.
Ex. 8.
(FNSYB3)
Primula sect. Dionysiopsis Pax (in Jahresber. Schles. Ges. Vaterl. Cult. 87(IIb): 20. 1909) when transferred to Dionysia Fenzl becomes D. sect. Dionysiopsis (Pax) Melch. (in Mitt. Thüring. Bot. Vereins 50: 164–168. 1943); the replacement name D. sect. Ariadna Wendelbo (in Bot. Not. 112: 496. 1959) is illegitimate under Art. 52.1.
Ex. 9.
(9cumC8)
Antirrhinum spurium L. (Sp. Pl.: 613. 1753) when transferred to Linaria Mill. is called L. spuria (L.) Mill. (Gard. Dict., ed. 8: Linaria No. 15. 1768).
Ex. 10.
(LgFk4F)
When transferring Serratula chamaepeuce L. (Sp. Pl.: 819. 1753) to Ptilostemon Cass., Cassini illegitimately (Art. 52.1) named the species P. muticus Cass. (in Cuvier, Dict. Sci. Nat. 44: 59. 1826). In Ptilostemon, the correct name is P. chamaepeuce (L.) Less. (Gen. Cynaroceph.: 5. 1832).
Ex. 11.
(h3pfBA)
The correct name for Rubus aculeatiflorus var. taitoensis (Hayata) T. S. Liu & T. Y. Yang (in Annual Taiwan Prov. Mus. 12: 12. 1969) is R. taitoensis Hayata var. taitoensis because R. taitoensis Hayata (in J. Coll. Sci. Imp. Univ. Tokyo 30(1): 96. 1911) has priority over R. aculeatiflorus Hayata (Icon. Pl. Formosan. 5: 39. 1915).
Ex. 12.
(JYMpFD)
When transferring Spartium biflorum Desf. (Fl. Atlant. 2: 133. 1798) to Cytisus Desf., Ball correctly proposed the replacement name C. fontanesii Spach ex Ball (in J. Linn. Soc., Bot. 16: 405. 1878) because of the previously and validly published C. biflorus L’Hér. (Stirp. Nov.: 184. 1791); the combination C. biflorus based on S. biflorum would be illegitimate under Art. 53.1.
Ex. 13.
(KbMA8M)
Spergula stricta Sw. (in Kongl. Vetensk. Acad. Nya Handl. 20: 235. 1799) when transferred to Arenaria L. is called A. uliginosa Schleich. ex Lam. & DC. (Fl. Franç., ed. 3, 4: 786. 1805) because of the existence of the name A. stricta Michx. (Fl. Bor.-Amer. 1: 274. 1803), based on a different type; but on further transfer to the genus Minuartia L. the epithet stricta is again available and the species is called M. stricta (Sw.) Hiern (in J. Bot. 37: 320. 1899).
Ex. 14.
(loih13)
Arum dracunculus L. (Sp. Pl.: 964. 1753) when transferred to Dracunculus Mill. is named D. vulgaris Schott (Melet. Bot. 1: 17. 1832). The use of the Linnaean epithet in Dracunculus would result in a tautonym (Art. 23.4), which would not be validly published (Art. 32.1(c)).
Ex. 15.
(cG0cbm)
Cucubalus behen L. (Sp. Pl.: 414. 1753) when transferred to Behen Moench was legitimately renamed B. vulgaris Moench (Methodus: 709. 1794) to avoid the tautonym “B. behen”. In Silene L., the epithet behen is unavailable because of the existence of S. behen L. (l.c.: 418. 1753). Therefore, the replacement name S. cucubalus Wibel (Prim. Fl. Werth.: 241. 1799) was proposed. This, however, is illegitimate (Art. 52.1) because the specific epithet vulgaris was available. In Silene, the correct name of the species is S. vulgaris (Moench) Garcke (Fl. N. Mitt.-Deutschland, ed. 9: 64. 1869).
Ex. 16.
(C3cfzt)
Helianthemum italicum var. micranthum Gren. & Godr. (Fl. France 1: 171. 1847) when transferred as a variety to H. penicillatum Thibaud ex Dunal retains its varietal epithet and is named H. penicillatum var. micranthum (Gren. & Godr.) Grosser (in Engler, Pflanzenr. IV. 193 (Heft 14): 115. 1903).
Ex. 17.
(7rZXCN)
The final epithet in the combination Thymus praecox subsp. arcticus (Durand) Jalas (in Veröff. Geobot. Inst. ETH Stiftung Rübel Zürich 43: 190. 1970), based on T. serpyllum var. arcticus Durand (Pl. Kaneanae Groenl.: 196. 1856), was first used at the rank of subspecies in the combination T. serpyllum subsp. arcticus (Durand) Hyl. (in Uppsala Univ. Årsskr. 1945(7): 276. 1945). But if T. britannicus Ronniger (in Repert. Spec. Nov. Regni Veg. 20: 330. 1924) is included in T. praecox, the correct name at subspecific rank is T. praecox subsp. britannicus (Ronniger) Holub (in Preslia 45: 359. 1973), for which the final epithet was first used at this rank in the combination T. serpyllum subsp. britannicus (Ronniger) Litard. (in Arch. Bot. Mém. 2: 6. 1928).
Ex. 18.
(zD8IOv)
Transfer of Polypodium tenerum Roxb. (in Calcutta J. Nat. Hist. 4: 490. 1844) to Cyclosorus Link (Hort. Berol. 2: 128. 1833) would result in a later homonym due to the existence of C. tener (Fée) Christenh. (in Bot. J. Linn. Soc. 161: 250. 2009), based on Goniopteris tenera Fée (Mém. Foug. 11: 60. 1866). The correct name is a heterotypic synonym, C. ciliatus (Wall. ex Benth.) Panigrahi (in Res. J. Pl. Environm. 9: 66. 1993), based on the next earliest legitimate name of the taxon at the same rank, Aspidium ciliatum Wall. ex Benth. (Fl. Hongkong.: 455. 1861).
i
Note 2.
(MUpisD)
The valid publication of a name at a rank lower than genus precludes any simultaneous homonymous combination (Art. 53), regardless of the priority of other names with the same final epithet that may require transfer to the same genus or species.
Ex. 19.
(eNgJi0)
Tausch included two species in his new genus Alkanna: A. tinctoria Tausch (in Flora 7: 234. 1824), a new species based on “Anchusa tinctoria” in the sense of Linnaeus (Sp. Pl., ed. 2: 192. 1762), and A. matthioli Tausch (l.c.: 235. 1824), a replacement name based on Lithospermum tinctorium L. (Sp. Pl.: 132. 1753). Both names are legitimate and take priority from 1824.
Ex. 20.
(BbTxNv)
Raymond-Hamet transferred to the genus Sedum both Cotyledon sedoides DC. (in Mém. Agric. Econ. Soc. Agric. Seine 11: 11. 1808) and Sempervivum sedoides Decne. (in Jacquemont, Voy. Inde 4(Bot.): 63. 1844). He combined the epithet of the later name, Sempervivum sedoides, under Sedum, as S. sedoides (Decne.) Raym.-Hamet (in Candollea 4: 26. 1929), and published a replacement name, S. candollei Raym.-Hamet (l.c. 1929), for the earlier name. Both of Raymond-Hamet’s names are legitimate.
11.5.
(2QeSyy)
When, for any taxon at the rank of family or below, a choice is possible between legitimate names of equal priority at the same rank, or between available final epithets of names of equal priority at the same rank, the first such choice to be effectively published (Art. 29–31) establishes the priority of the chosen name, and of any legitimate combination with the same type and final epithet at that rank, over the other competing name(s) (but see Art. 11.6; see also Rec. F.5A.2).
i
Note 3.
(ghuYCa)
A choice as provided for in Art. 11.5 is made by adopting one of the competing names, or its final epithet in the required combination, and simultaneously rejecting or relegating to synonymy the other(s) or their homotypic (nomenclatural) synonyms.
Ex. 21.
(qAavE0)
When Dentaria L. (Sp. Pl.: 653. 1753) and Cardamine L. (l.c.: 654. 1753) are united, the resulting genus is called Cardamine because that name was chosen by Crantz (Cl. Crucif. Emend.: 126. 1769), who first united them.
Ex. 22.
(jUIpYX)
When Claudopus Gillet (Hyménomycètes: 426. 1876), Eccilia (Fr.) P. Kumm. (Führer Pilzk.: 23. 1871), Entoloma (Fr. ex Rabenh.) P. Kumm. (l.c.: 23. 1871), Leptonia (Fr.) P. Kumm. (l.c.: 24. 1871), and Nolanea (Fr.) P. Kumm. (l.c.: 24. 1871) are united, one of the four generic names simultaneously published by Kummer must be used for the combined genus. Donk (in Bull. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg, ser. 3, 18(1): 157. 1949) selected Entoloma, which is therefore treated as having priority over the other names.
Ex. 23.
(LRMg6f)
Brown (in Tuckey, Narr. Exped. Zaire: 484. 1818) was the first to unite Waltheria americana L. (Sp. Pl.: 673. 1753) and W. indica L. (l.c. 1753). He adopted the name W. indica for the combined species, and this name is accordingly treated as having priority over W. americana.
Ex. 24.
(n2vkrH)
Baillon (in Adansonia 3: 162. 1863), when uniting for the first time Sclerocroton integerrimus Hochst. (in Flora 28: 85. 1845) and S. reticulatus Hochst. (l.c. 1845), adopted the name Stillingia integerrima (Hochst.) Baill. for the combined taxon. Consequently, Sclerocroton integerrimus is treated as having priority over S. reticulatus regardless of the genus (Sclerocroton, Stillingia, or any other) to which the species is assigned.
Ex. 25.
(mCORlA)
Linnaeus (Sp. Pl.: 902. 1753) simultaneously published the names Verbesina alba and V. prostrata. Later (Mant. Pl.: 286. 1771), he published Eclipta erecta, an illegitimate name because V. alba was cited in synonymy, and E. prostrata, based on V. prostrata. The first author to unite these taxa was Roxburgh (Fl. Ind., ed. 1832, 3: 438. 1832), who adopted the name E. prostrata (L.) L. Therefore, V. prostrata is treated as having priority over V. alba.
Ex. 26.
(e8BULg)
Donia speciosa and D. formosa, which were simultaneously published by Don (Gen. Hist. 2: 468. 1832), were illegitimately renamed Clianthus oxleyi and C. dampieri, respectively, by Lindley (in Trans. Hort. Soc. London, ser. 2, 1: 522. 1835). Brown (in Sturt, Narr. Exped. C. Australia 2: 71. 1849) united both in a single species, adopting the illegitimate name C. dampieri and citing D. speciosa and C. oxleyi as synonyms. His choice is not of the kind provided for by Art. 11.5. Clianthus speciosus (G. Don) Asch. & Graebn. (Syn. Mitteleur. Fl. 6(2): 725. 1909), published with D. speciosa and C. dampieri listed as synonyms, is an illegitimate later homonym of C. speciosus (Endl.) Steud. (Nomencl. Bot., ed. 2, 1: 384. 1840). Again, conditions for a choice under Art. 11.5 were not satisfied. Ford & Vickery (in Contr. New South Wales Natl. Herb. 1: 303. 1950) published the legitimate combination C. formosus (G. Don) Ford & Vickery and cited D. formosa and D. speciosa as synonyms, but because the epithet of the latter was unavailable in Clianthus Sol. ex Lindl. a choice was not possible and again Art. 11.5 does not apply. The first acceptable choice was by Thompson (in Telopea 4: 4. 1990), who published the combination Swainsona formosa (G. Don) Joy Thomps. and indicated that D. speciosa was a synonym of it.
11.6.
(zdyl8S)
An autonym is treated as having priority over the name(s) of the same date and rank that upon their valid publication established the autonym (see Art. 22.3 and 26.3).
i
Note 4.
(NqcZJo)
When the final epithet of an autonym is used in a new combination under the requirements of Art. 11.6, the basionym of that combination is the name from which the autonym is derived, or its basionym if it has one.
Ex. 27.
(b9KSD8)
The publication of Synthyris subg. Plagiocarpus Pennell (in Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 85: 86. 1933) simultaneously established the autonym Synthyris Benth. (in Candolle, Prodr. 10: 454. 1846) subg. Synthyris. If Synthyris, including S. subg. Plagiocarpus, is recognized as a subgenus of Veronica L. (Sp. Pl.: 9. 1753), the correct name is V. subg. Synthyris (Benth.) M. M. Mart. Ort. & al. (in Taxon 53: 440. 2004), which has precedence over a combination in Veronica based on S. subg. Plagiocarpus.
Ex. 28.
(xDiUFY)
Heracleum sibiricum L. (Sp. Pl.: 249. 1753) includes H. sibiricum subsp. lecokii (Godr. & Gren.) Nyman (Consp. Fl. Eur.: 290. 1879) and H. sibiricum L. subsp. sibiricum automatically established at the same time. When H. sibiricum, so circumscribed, is included in H. sphondylium L. (l.c. 1753) as a single subspecies, the correct name of that subspecies is H. sphondylium subsp. sibiricum (L.) Simonk. (Enum. Fl. Transsilv.: 266. 1887), not “H. sphondylium subsp. lecokii”.
Ex. 29.
(Z65FjJ)
The publication of Salix tristis var. microphylla Andersson (Salices Bor.-Amer.: 21. 1858) simultaneously established the autonym S. tristis Aiton (Hort. Kew. 3: 393. 1789) var. tristis. If S. tristis, including S. tristis var. microphylla, is recognized as a variety of S. humilis Marshall (Arbust. Amer.: 140. 1785), the correct name is S. humilis var. tristis (Aiton) Griggs (in Proc. Ohio Acad. Sci. 4: 301. 1905). However, if both these varieties of S. tristis are recognized as varieties of S. humilis, then the names S. humilis var. tristis and S. humilis var. microphylla (Andersson) Fernald (in Rhodora 48: 46. 1946) are used.
11.7.
(fhewyE)
When the names of a non-fossil taxon and a fossil-taxon (diatoms excepted) of the same rank are treated as synonyms, the correct name of the non-fossil taxon must be accepted, even if it is antedated by that of the fossil-taxon.
Ex. 30.
(moX29E)
If Platycarya Siebold & Zucc. (in Abh. Math.-Phys. Cl. Königl. Bayer. Akad. Wiss. 3: 741. 1843), based on a non-fossil type, and Petrophiloides Bowerb. (Hist. Fruits London Clay: 43. 1840), based on a fossil type, are treated as heterotypic synonyms for a non-fossil genus, the name Platycarya is correct even though it is antedated by Petrophiloides.
Ex. 31.
(fxf9n9)
The generic name Metasequoia Miki (in Jap. J. Bot. 11: 261. 1941) was based on the fossil type of M. disticha (Heer) Miki. After the discovery of the non-fossil species M. glyptostroboides Hu & W. C. Cheng, conservation of Metasequoia Hu & W. C. Cheng (in Bull. Fan Mem. Inst. Biol., Bot., ser. 2, 1: 154. 1948) as based on the non-fossil type was approved. Without conservation, any new generic name based on M. glyptostroboides would have been treated as having priority over Metasequoia Miki.
Ex. 32.
(JC5yQB)
Hyalodiscus Ehrenb. (in Ber. Bekanntm. Verh. Königl. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1845: 71. 1845), based on the fossil type of H. laevis Ehrenb. (l.c.: 78. 1845), is the name of a diatom genus that includes non-fossil species. If later synonymous generic names based on a non-fossil type exist, they are not treated as having priority over Hyalodiscus because Art. 11.7 excepts diatoms.
Ex. 33.
(VRHIDq)
Boalch & Guy-Ohlson (in Taxon 41: 529–531. 1992) synonymized the two non-diatom algal generic names Pachysphaera Ostenf. (in Knudsen & Ostenfeld, Iagtt. Overfladevand. Temp. Salth. Plankt. 1898: 52. 1899) and Tasmanites E. J. Newton (in Geol. Mag. 12: 341. 1875). Pachysphaera is based on a non-fossil type and Tasmanites on a fossil type. Under the Code in effect in 1992, Tasmanites had priority and was therefore adopted. Under the current Art. 11.7, which excepts only diatoms and not algae in general, Pachysphaera is the correct name for a non-fossil genus to which both of these names are applied as heterotypic synonyms.
11.8.
(XuzOjv)
Dual nomenclature in fossil-taxa (diatoms excepted) accommodates taxonomic equivalence between a fossil-taxon and a morphologically similar or identical part or life-history stage of a non-fossil taxon at the same rank, when the names of these two taxa are not considered to be synonyms.
Ex. 34.
(JYQWN9)
The name Polysphaeridium zoharyi (M. Rossignol) J. P. Bujak & al. (in Special Pap. Palaeontol. 24: 34. 1980), based on Hystrichosphaeridium zoharyi M. Rossignol (in Pollen & Spores 4: 132. 1962), may be retained under dual nomenclature for a fossil-species of dinoflagellate cyst even though apparently morphologically identical resting cysts form part of the life cycle of the non-fossil species Pyrodinium bahamense L. Plate (in Arch. Protistenk. 7: 427. 1906).
Ex. 35.
(A3DDNL)
The fossil dinoflagellate Votadinium spinosum P. C. Reid (in Nova Hedwigia 29: 445. 1977) was considered by Reid to represent the resting cyst of the non-fossil dinoflagellate Peridinium claudicans Paulsen (in Meddel. Kommiss. Havundersøgelser, Serie: Plankton 1(5): 16. 1907). Votadinium spinosum can be used as the equivalent correct name for the fossil-species given that Reid did not explicitly consider it a synonym of P. claudicans.
11.9.
(rvr3my)
For purposes of priority, names given to hybrids are subject to the same rules as are those of non-hybrid taxa at equivalent rank (but see Art. H.8).
Ex. 36.
(vF1WSg)
The name ×Solidaster H. R. Wehrh. (in Bonstedt, Pareys Blumengärtn. 2: 525. 1932) has priority over ×Asterago Everett (in Gard. Chron., ser. 3, 101: 6. 1937) for the hybrids between Aster L. and Solidago L.
Ex. 37.
(EQLCRM)
Anemone ×hybrida Paxton (in Paxton’s Mag. Bot. 15: 239. 1849) has priority over A. ×elegans Decne. (pro sp.) (in Rev. Hort. (Paris) 1852: 41. 1852). The former is correct when both are considered to apply to the same hybrid, A. hupehensis (Lemoine & É. Lemoine) Lemoine & É. Lemoine × A. vitifolia Buch.-Ham. ex DC. (Art. H.4.1).
Ex. 38.
(Ujoyw8)
Aimée Camus (in Bull. Mus. Natl. Hist. Nat. 33: 538. 1927) published the name ×Agroelymus E. G. Camus ex A. Camus without a description or diagnosis, mentioning only the names of the parental genera (Agropyron Gaertn. and Elymus L.). Because this name was not validly published under the Code then in force, Rousseau (in Mém. Jard. Bot. Montréal 29: 10–11. 1952) published a Latin diagnosis. However, under the present Code (Art. H.9), the date of valid publication of ×Agroelymus is 1927, not 1952, and therefore it has priority over the name ×Elymopyrum Cugnac (in Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Ardennes 33: 14. 1938).
11.10.
(QDYAmE)
The principle of priority does not apply above the rank of family (but see Rec. 16A.1).
12.1.
(vZiw99)
A name of a taxon has no status under this Code unless it is validly published (see Art. 6.3; but see Art. 14.9 and 14.14).
(9fy6RL)
Limitation of priority
(Ge02yc)
Nomenclatural starting-points
13.1.
(4qiFjG)
Valid publication of names for organisms of different groups is treated as beginning at the following dates (for each group a work is mentioned that is treated as having been published on the date given for that group):
Non-fossil organisms:
(a) Spermatophyta and Pteridophyta, names at ranks of genus and below, 1 May 1753 (Linnaeus, Species plantarum, ed. 1); suprageneric names, 4 August 1789 (Jussieu, Genera plantarum).
(b) Musci (except Sphagnaceae), 1 January 1801 (Hedwig, Species muscorum frondosorum).
(c) Sphagnaceae and Hepaticae (including Anthocerotae), names at ranks of genus and below, 1 May 1753 (Linnaeus, Species plantarum, ed. 1); suprageneric names, 4 August 1789 (Jussieu, Genera plantarum).
(d) Fungi (Pre. 8), see Art. F.1.1.
(e) Algae, 1 May 1753 (Linnaeus, Species plantarum, ed. 1). Exceptions:
Nostocaceae homocysteae, 1 January 1892 (Gomont, “Monographie des Oscillariées”, in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 7, 15: 263–368; 16: 91–264). The two parts of Gomont’s “Monographie”, which appeared in 1892 and 1893, respectively, are treated as having been published simultaneously on 1 January 1892.
Nostocaceae heterocysteae, 1 January 1886 (Bornet & Flahault, “Révision des Nostocacées hétérocystées”, in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 7, 3: 323–381; 4: 343–373; 5: 51–129; 7: 177–262). The four parts of the “Révision”, which appeared in 1886, 1886, 1887, and 1888, respectively, are treated as having been published simultaneously on 1 January 1886.
Desmidiaceae (s. l.), 1 January 1848 (Ralfs, British Desmidieae).
Oedogoniaceae, 1 January 1900 (Hirn, “Monographie und Iconographie der Oedogoniaceen”, in Acta Soc. Sci. Fenn. 27(1)).
Fossil organisms (diatoms excepted):
(f) All groups, 31 December 1820 (Sternberg, Flora der Vorwelt, Versuch 1: 1–24, t. 1–13).
13.2.
(Vtxg9Z)
The group to which a name is assigned for the purpose of Art. 13.1 and F.1 is determined by the accepted taxonomic position of the type of the name.
Ex. 1.
(eePwKN)
The genus Porella L. and the single species that was described under it, P. pinnata L., were placed by Linnaeus (Sp. Pl.: 1106. 1753) in the Musci. Because the type of the name P. pinnata is now accepted as belonging to the Hepaticae, the two names were validly published in 1753.
Ex. 2.
(H6TVFt)
The type of Lycopodium L. (Sp. Pl.: 1100. 1753) is L. clavatum L. (l.c.: 1101. 1753). Even though Linnaeus placed Lycopodium in the Musci, because the type of the name L. clavatum is now accepted as a pteridophyte s. l. (lycophytes), the generic name and names of the pteridophyte species treated under it were validly published in 1753.
13.3.
(eOoES4)
For nomenclatural purposes, a name is treated as pertaining to a non-fossil taxon unless its type is fossil in origin (Art. 1.2). Fossil material is distinguished from non-fossil material by stratigraphic relations at the site of original occurrence. In cases of doubtful stratigraphic relations, and for all diatoms, provisions for non-fossil taxa apply.
Ex. 3.
(ONuxv1)
The holotype of Echinidinium granulatum K. A. F. Zonn. ex M. J. Head & al. (in J. Quatern. Sci. 16: 633. 2001) does not have a stratigraphic context because it was collected from a sediment trap suspended within the water column. It is therefore treated as a non-fossil dinoflagellate. The name was not validly published when Zonneveld (in Rev. Palaeobot. Palynol. 97: 325. 1997) provided only an English diagnosis because at that date Latin was required for non-fossil algae (Art. 44.1). The Latin diagnosis provided by Head & al. (l.c. 2001) validated the name.
Ex. 4.
(dPU0Bi)
The holotype of Algidasphaeridium spongium K. A. F. Zonn. (in Rev. Palaeobot. Palynol. 97: 325. 1997) had stratigraphic context because it was collected from surface (upper centimetre) sediments of the Arabian Sea. It is therefore treated as a fossil dinoflagellate. Because an English diagnosis was provided and this is a fossil-taxon, the name was validly published (Art. 43.1).
13.4.
(TIOX8a)
Generic names that appear in Linnaeus’s Species plantarum, ed. 1 (1753) and ed. 2 (1762–1763), are associated with the first subsequent description given under those names in Linnaeus’s Genera plantarum, ed. 5 (1754) and ed. 6 (1764). The spelling of the generic names included in Species plantarum, ed. 1, is not to be altered because a different spelling has been used in Genera plantarum, ed. 5.
i
Note 1.
(kfKADv)
The two volumes of Linnaeus’s Species plantarum, ed. 1 (1753), which appeared in May and August, 1753, respectively, are treated as having been published simultaneously on 1 May 1753 (Art. 13.1).
Ex. 5.
(D8vmc3)
The generic names Thea L. (Sp. Pl.: 515. 24 May 1753; Gen. Pl., ed. 5: 232. 1754) and Camellia L. (Sp. Pl.: 698. 16 Aug 1753; Gen. Pl., ed. 5: 311. 1754) are treated as having been published simultaneously on 1 May 1753. Under Art. 11.5, the combined genus has the name Camellia because Sweet (Hort. Suburb. Lond.: 157. 1818), who was the first to unite the two genera, chose that name and cited Thea as a synonym.
Ex. 6.
(o2FUiD)
Sideroxylon L. (Sp. Pl.: 192. 1753) is not to be altered because Linnaeus spelled it ‘Sideroxylum’ in Genera plantarum, ed. 5 (p. 89. 1754); usage of Brunfelsia L. (Sp. Pl.: 191. 1753, orth. cons., ‘Brunsfelsia’), which Linnaeus adopted in 1754, has been made possible only through conservation (see App. III).
14.1.
(jAmxFy)
In order to avoid disadvantageous nomenclatural changes entailed by the strict application of the rules, and especially of the principle of priority in starting from the dates given in Art. 13 and F.1, this Code provides, in App. II–IV, lists of names of families, genera, and species that are conserved (nomina conservanda; see Rec. 50E.1). Conserved names are legitimate even though initially they may have been illegitimate. The name of a subdivision of a genus or of an infraspecific taxon may be conserved with a conserved type and listed in App. III and IV, respectively, when it is the basionym or replaced synonym of a name of a genus or species that could not continue to be used in its current sense without conservation (see also Art. 19.5 for names of subdivisions of families).
14.2.
(MBAJdm)
Conservation aims at retention of those names that best serve stability of nomenclature.
14.3.
(sj17Ps)
The application of both conserved and rejected names is determined by nomenclatural types. The type of the species name cited as the type of a conserved generic name may, if desirable, be conserved and listed in App. IV. Application of conserved and rejected names of nothogenera is determined by a statement of parentage (Art. H.9.1).
14.4.
(DqbMeh)
A conserved name of a family or genus is conserved against all other names at the same rank with the same type (homotypic, i.e. nomenclatural, synonyms, which are to be rejected) whether or not these are cited in the corresponding list as rejected names, and against those names with different types (heterotypic, i.e. taxonomic, synonyms) that are listed as rejected.1 A conserved name of a species is conserved against all names listed as rejected, and against all new combinations based on the rejected names.
i
Note 1.
(6VRMTS)
Except as by Art. 14.14 (see also Art. 14.9(b)), the Code does not provide for conservation of a name against itself, i.e. against an isonym (Art. 6 Note 2). Only the earliest known isonyms are listed in App. IIA, III, and IV.
i
Note 2.
(1mVQM9)
A species name listed as conserved or rejected in App. IV may have been published as the name of a new taxon, or as a combination based on an earlier name. Rejection of a name based on an earlier name does not by itself preclude the use of the earlier name because that name is not “a combination based on a rejected name” (Art. 14.4).
Ex. 1.
(RCNY2a)
Rejection of Lycopersicon lycopersicum (L.) H. Karst. (Deut. Fl.: 966. 1882) in favour of L. esculentum Mill. (Gard. Dict., ed. 8: Lycopersicon No. 2. 1768) does not preclude the use of the homotypic Solanum lycopersicum L. (Sp. Pl.: 185. 1753).
14.5.
(6Ghxkp)
When a conserved name competes with one or more names based on different types and against which it is not explicitly conserved, the earliest of the competing names is adopted in accordance with Art. 11, except for the conserved family names listed in App. IIB, which are conserved against unlisted names.
Ex. 2.
(4FgS3y)
If Mahonia Nutt. (Gen. N. Amer. Pl. 1: 211. 1818) is united with Berberis L. (Sp. Pl.: 330. 1753), the earlier name Berberis must be adopted for the combined genus, although Mahonia is conserved and Berberis is not.
Ex. 3.
(pKEAxc)
Nasturtium W. T. Aiton (Hort. Kew., ed. 2, 4: 109. 1812) was conserved only against the homonym Nasturtium Mill. (Gard. Dict. Abr., ed. 4: Nasturtium. 1754) and the homotypic (nomenclatural) synonym Cardaminum Moench (Methodus: 262. 1794). Consequently, if Nasturtium is reunited with Rorippa Scop. (Fl. Carniol.: 520. 1760), the name Rorippa must be adopted for the combined genus.
Ex. 4.
(ZfXAjO)
Combretaceae R. Br. (Prodr.: 351. 1810) is conserved against the unlisted earlier heterotypic name Terminaliaceae J. St.-Hil. (Expos. Fam. Nat. 1: 178. 1805).
14.6.
(rOVTEc)
When a name of a taxon has been conserved against an earlier heterotypic synonym, the latter is to be restored, subject to Art. 11, if it is considered to be the name of a taxon at the same rank distinct from that of the conserved name.
Ex. 5.
(z8GSlm)
The generic name Luzuriaga Ruiz & Pav. (Fl. Peruv. 3: 65. 1802) is conserved against the earlier names Enargea Banks ex Gaertn. (Fruct. Sem. Pl. 1: 283. 1788) and Callixene Comm. ex Juss. (Gen. Pl.: 41. 1789). If, however, Enargea is considered to be a separate genus, the name Enargea is retained for it.
Ex. 6.
(2igFPf)
To preserve the name Roystonea regia (Kunth) O. F. Cook (in Science, n.s., 12: 479. 1900), its basionym Oreodoxa regia Kunth (in Humboldt & al., Nov. Gen. Sp. 1, ed. qu.: 305; ed. fol.: 244. 1816) is conserved against Palma elata W. Bartram (Travels Carolina: iv, 115–116. 1791). However, the name R. elata (W. Bartram) F. Harper (in Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash. 59: 29. 1946) can be used for a species distinct from R. regia.
14.7.
(UiTPGp)
A rejected name, or a combination based on a rejected name, may not be restored for a taxon that includes the type of the corresponding conserved name.
Ex. 7.
(HePlmz)
Enallagma (Miers) Baill. (Hist. Pl. 10: 54. 1888) is conserved against Dendrosicus Raf. (Sylva Tellur.: 80. 1838), but not against Amphitecna Miers (in Trans. Linn. Soc. London 26: 163. 1868); if Enallagma, Dendrosicus, and Amphitecna are united, the combined genus must have the name Amphitecna, although the latter is not explicitly conserved against Dendrosicus.
14.8.
(1IVxoj)
The listed type and spelling of a conserved name (evident misspellings excepted) may only be changed by the procedure outlined in Art. 14.12.
Ex. 8.
(fPwRK2)
Bullock & Killick (in Taxon 6: 239. 1957) published a proposal that the listed type of Plectranthus L’Hér. be changed from P. punctatus (L. f.) L’Hér. to P. fruticosus L’Hér. This proposal was approved by the appropriate committees and by an International Botanical Congress (see App. III).
14.9.
(XQPKi7)
A name may be conserved with a different type from that designated by the author or determined by application of the Code (see also Art. 10.4). Such a name may be conserved either:
(a) from its place of valid publication (even though the type may not then have been included in the named taxon); or
(b) from a later publication by an author who did include the type as conserved.
In the second case (b) the name as conserved is treated as validly published in the later publication, whether or not the name as conserved was accompanied by a description or diagnosis of the taxon named; the original name and the name as conserved are treated as homonyms (see Art. 14.10).
Ex. 9.
(Eqo5As)
(a) Bromus sterilis L. (Sp. Pl.: 77. 1753) has been conserved from its place of valid publication even though its conserved type, a specimen (Hubbard 9045, E) collected in 1932, was not originally included in Linnaeus’s species.
Ex. 10.
(J5Ix96)
(b) Protea L. (Sp. Pl.: 94. 1753) did not include the conserved type of the generic name, P. cynaroides (L.) L. (Mant. Pl.: 190. 1771), which in 1753 was placed in the genus Leucadendron. Protea was therefore conserved from the 1771 publication, and Protea L. (l.c.: 187. 1771), although not intended to be a new generic name and still including the original type elements, is treated as if it were a validly published homonym of Protea L. (1753).
14.10.
(4G3LiM)
A conserved name, with any corresponding autonym, is conserved against all earlier homonyms. An earlier homonym of a conserved name is not made illegitimate by that conservation but is unavailable for use; if not otherwise illegitimate, it may serve as basionym of another name or combination based on the same type (see also Art. 55.3).
Ex. 11.
(Uzsiyu)
The generic name Smithia Aiton (Hort. Kew. 3: 496. 1789), conserved against Damapana Adans. (Fam. Pl. 2: 323, 548. 1763), is conserved automatically against the earlier, listed homonym Smithia Scop. (Intr. Hist. Nat.: 322. 1777). Blumea DC. (in Arch. Bot. (Paris) 2: 514. 1833) is conserved automatically against Blumea Rchb. (Consp. Regn. Veg.: 209. 1828–1829), although the latter name is not listed alongside the former in App. III.
14.11.
(tLtfa4)
A name may be conserved in order to preserve a particular spelling or gender. A name so conserved is to be attributed without change of date to the author who validly published it, not to an author who later introduced the conserved spelling or gender.
Ex. 12.
(kYYN6v)
The spelling Rhodymenia, used by Montagne (in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 2, 12: 44. 1839), has been conserved against the original spelling ‘Rhodomenia’, used by Greville (Alg. Brit.: xlviii, 84. 1830). The name is cited as Rhodymenia Grev. (1830).
i
Note 3.
(WpfPdJ)
The date upon which a name was conserved does not affect its priority (Art. 11), which is determined only based on the date of its valid publication (Art. 32–45; see also Art. F.4, F.5.2, F.5.3, and H.9; but see Art. 14.9 and 14.14).
14.12.
(5tNkeP)
The lists of conserved names will remain permanently open for additions and changes (but see Art. 14.14). Any proposal of an additional name must be accompanied by a detailed statement of the cases both for and against conservation. Such proposals must be submitted to the General Committee, which will refer them for examination to the specialist committees for the various taxonomic groups (see Rec. 14A.1, Div. III Prov. 2.2, 7.10(b), 7.11, and 8.13(a); see also Art. 34.1 and 56.2).
14.13.
(0dUSXC)
Entries of conserved names may not be deleted.
Ex. 13.
(8jCBNi)
In the Seattle Code of 1972 (p. 254), “Alternaria C. G. Nees ex Wallroth, Fl. Crypt. Germ. 148. 1833” was listed as conserved against “Macrosporium E. M. Fries, Syst. Mycol. 3: 373. 1832” because Macrosporium Fr. antedated Alternaria “C. G. Nees ex Wallroth” in relation to the then starting-point work for fungi (Fries, Syst. Mycol. 1. 1821). Conservation became unnecessary following the abolition of later starting-point dates for fungi at the Sydney Congress of 1981 and in the Sydney Code of 1983, which resulted in Alternaria being recognized as having been validly published by Nees (Syst. Pilze: 72. 1816). In addition, it was realized that Alternaria had been adopted by Fries in the introduction to the sanctioning work (Syst. Mycol. 1: xlvi. 1821; Art. F.3.1). Because the entry cannot be deleted, Alternaria Nees continues to be listed in App. III, but without a corresponding rejected name.
14.14.
(THYbQe)
The places of publication cited for conserved names of families in App. IIB are treated as correct in all circumstances and consequently are not to be changed, even when otherwise such a name would not be validly published or when it is a later isonym.
14.15.
(VyBYCw)
When a proposal for the conservation (Art. 14) or protection (Art. F.2) of a name has been approved by the General Committee after study by the specialist committee for the taxonomic group concerned, retention of that name as approved is authorized subject to the decision of a later International Botanical Congress (see also Art. 34.2, 38.5, 53.4, and 56.3). Before 1 January 1954, conservation takes effect on the date of decision by the relevant International Botanical Congress. On or after that date, conservation or protection takes effect on the date of effective publication (Art. 29–31) of the General Committee’s approval.
i
Note 4.
(QK4PJ1)
The effective dates for International Botanical Congress (IBC) decisions on conservation of names made before 1954 are as follows:
(a) Conservation of names in the 1906 Vienna Rules became effective on 17 June 1905 at the II IBC in Vienna (see Verh. Int. Bot. Kongr. Wien 1905: 135–137. 1906).
(b) Conservation of names in the 1912 Brussels Rules became effective on 18 May 1910 at the III IBC in Brussels (see Actes Congr. Int. Bot. Bruxelles 1910: 67–83. 1912).
(c) Conservation of names for the 1952 Stockholm Code includes:
(1) Those of the Special Committee for Phanerogamae and Pteridophyta, which became effective on 1 June 1940 under the authority of the VI IBC held in Amsterdam in 1935 (see Bull. Misc. Inform. Kew 1940: 81–134. 1940).
(2) Those of the Special Committee for Fungi, which became effective on 20 July 1950 at the VII IBC in Stockholm (see Regnum Veg. 1: 549–550. 1953).
(3) Those of the Special Committee for Palaeobotanical Nomenclature, which also became effective on 20 July 1950 at the VII IBC in Stockholm (see Regnum Veg. 1: 548. 1953), but were omitted from both the Stockholm Code and the 1961 Paris Code.
(P0BXLb)
Recommendation 14A
14A.1.
(zaZ4HW)
When a proposal for the conservation (Art. 14) or protection (Art. F.2) of a name has been referred to the appropriate specialist committee for study, authors should follow existing usage of names as far as possible pending the General Committee’s recommendation on the proposal (see also Rec. 34A.1 and 56A.1).
(vHwtuf)
Sanctioned names
See Article F.3
(Xoy2hf)
Nomenclature of taxa according to their rank
(Pvb6FW)
Names of taxa above the rank of family
(gl3hqd)
Names above the rank of family
16.1.
(IhIB0B)
The name of a taxon above the rank of family is treated as a noun in the plural and is written with an initial capital letter. Such names may be either:
(a) automatically typified names (Art. 10.11), formed from a generic name in the same way as family names (Art. 18.1; but see Art. 16.4) by adding the appropriate rank-denoting termination (Art. 16.3 and 17.1), preceded by the connecting vowel -o- if the termination begins with a consonant; or
(b) descriptive names, not so formed, which may be used unchanged at different ranks (see also Art. 6 Note 3).
Ex. 1.
(smdRZO)
Automatically typified names above the rank of family: Lycopodiophyta, formed from Lycopodium; Magnoliophyta, from Magnolia; Gnetophytina, from Gnetum; Pinopsida, from Pinus; Marattiidae, from Marattia; Caryophyllidae and Caryophyllales, from Caryophyllus; Fucales, from Fucus; Bromeliineae, from Bromelia.
Ex. 2.
(5RtJiv)
Descriptive names above the rank of family: Angiospermae, Anthophyta, Ascomycetes, Ascomycota, Ascomycotina, Centrospermae, Chlorophyta, Coniferae, Enantioblastae, Gymnospermae, Lycophyta, Parietales.
16.2.
(tDQLno)
For automatically typified names, the name of the subdivision or subphylum that includes the type of the adopted name of a division or phylum, the name of the subclass that includes the type of the adopted name of a class, and the name of the suborder that includes the type of the adopted name of an order are to be formed from the same generic name (see also Art. 16.4) as the corresponding higher-ranked name.
Ex. 3.
(CX6RYs)
Pteridophyta Schimp. (in Zittel, Handb. Palaeont., Palaeophyt.: 1. 1879) and Pteridophytina B. Boivin (in Bull. Soc. Bot. France 103: 493. 1956); Gnetopsida Prantl (Lehrb. Bot., ed. 5: 194. 1883) and Gnetidae Pax (in Prantl, Lehrb. Bot., ed. 9: 210. 1894); Liliales Perleb (Lehrb. Naturgesch. Pflanzenr.: 129. 1826) and Liliineae Rchb. (Deut. Bot. Herb.-Buch: xxxvii. 1841).
16.3.
(rzsRnR)
Automatically typified names end as follows:
(a) The name of a division or phylum ends in -phyta, unless it is referable to the fungi in which case it ends in -mycota.
(b) The name of a subdivision or subphylum ends in -phytina, unless it is referable to the fungi in which case it ends in -mycotina.
(c) The name of a class in the algae ends in -phyceae, and of a subclass in -phycidae.
(d) The name of a class in the fungi ends in -mycetes, and of a subclass in -mycetidae.
(e) The name of a class in the plants ends in -opsida, and of a subclass in -idae (but not -viridae).
Automatically typified names with a termination not in accordance with this rule or Art. 17.1 are to be corrected, without change of authorship or date of publication (see Art. 32.2). However, if such names are published with a non-Latin termination they are not validly published.
Ex. 4.
(bHpPMC)
‘Cacteae’ Juss. ex Bercht. & J. Presl (Přir. Rostlin: 238. 1820, formed from Cactus L.) and ‘Coriales’ Lindl. (Nix. Pl.: 11. 1833, formed from Coriaria L.), both published for taxa at the rank of order, are to be corrected to Cactales Juss. ex Bercht. & J. Presl (1820) and Coriariales Lindl. (1833), respectively.
Ex. 5.
(4BnOJ5)
Ptéridées (Kirschleger, Fl. Alsace 2: 379. 1853–Jul 1857), published for a taxon at the rank of order, is not to be accepted as “Pteridales Kirschl.” because it has a French rather than a Latin termination. Later, the name Pteridales Doweld (Prosyll. Tracheophyt., Tent. Syst. Pl. Vasc.: xi. 2001) was validly published.
i
Note 1.
(4CEr1C)
The terms “divisio” and “phylum”, and their equivalents in modern languages, are treated as referring to one and the same rank (Art. 3.1). When “divisio” and “phylum” are used simultaneously to denote different non-consecutive ranks, this is to be treated as informal usage of rank-denoting terms (see Art. 37.9; see also Art. 37 Note 1).
16.4.
(EyABjx)
At ranks higher than order, the word elements -clad-, -cocc-, -cyst-, -monad-, -mycet-, -nemat-, or -phyt-, all of which are genitive singular stems of the second part of a name of an included genus, may be omitted before the rank-denoting termination. Such names are automatically typified when their derivation is obvious or is indicated in the protologue.
Ex. 6.
(YoNbhG)
The name Raphidophyceae Chadef. ex P. C. Silva (in Regnum Veg. 103: 78. 1980) was indicated by its author to be formed from Raphidomonas F. Stein (Organismus Infus. 3(1): x, 69, 152, 153. 1878). The name Saccharomycetes G. Winter (Rabenh. Krypt.-Fl., ed. 2, 1(1): 32. 1880) is regarded as being formed from Saccharomyces Meyen (in Arch. Naturgesch. 4(2): 100. 1838). The name Trimerophytina H. P. Banks (in Taxon 24: 409. 1975) was indicated by its author to be formed from Trimerophyton Hopping (in Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, B, Biol. 66: 25. 1956).
i
Note 2.
(cWLD6W)
The principle of priority does not apply above the rank of family (Art. 11.10; but see Rec. 16A.1).
(UJ0uqp)
Recommendation 16A
16A.1.
(VaXGaV)
In choosing among typified names for a taxon above the rank of family, authors should generally follow the principle of priority.
(DuPQZB)
Names of orders and suborders
17.1.
(bz7gfY)
Automatically typified names of orders or suborders are to end in -ales (but not -virales) and -ineae, respectively (see Art. 16.3 and 32.2).
17.2.
(4pas0S)
Names intended as names of orders, but published with their rank denoted by a term such as “cohors”, “nixus”, “alliance”, or “Reihe” instead of “order”, are treated as having been published as names of orders.
(ChQNGL)
Recommendation 17A
17A.1.
(DF0UAN)
A new name should not be published for an order for which a name already exists that is based on the same type as the name of an included family.
(RC8uuk)
Names of families, subfamilies, tribes, and subtribes
(XwPtbV)
Names of families
18.1.
(ElFBIH)
The name of a family is a plural adjective used as a noun; it is formed from the genitive singular of a name of an included genus by replacing the genitive singular inflection (Latin -ae, -i, -us, -is; transcribed Greek -ou, -os, -es, -as, or -ous, and its equivalent -eos) with the termination -aceae (but see Art. 18.5). For generic names of non-classical origin, when analogy with classical names is insufficient to determine the genitive singular, -aceae is added to the full word. Likewise, when formation from the genitive singular of a generic name results in a homonym, -aceae may be added to the nominative singular. For generic names with alternative genitives the one implicitly used by the original author must be maintained, except that the genitive of names ending in -opsis is always -opsidis.
i
Note 1.
(QTIOYk)
The generic name from which the name of a family is formed provides the type of the family name (Art. 10.10) but is not a basionym of that name (Art. 6.10; see Art. 41.2(a)).
Ex. 1.
(evroXc)
Family names formed from a generic name of classical origin: Rosaceae (from Rosa, genitive singular: Rosae), Salicaceae (from Salix, Salicis), Plumbaginaceae (from Plumbago, Plumbaginis), Rhodophyllaceae (from Rhodophyllus, Rhodophylli), Rhodophyllidaceae (from Rhodophyllis, Rhodophyllidos), Sclerodermataceae (from Scleroderma, Sclerodermatos), Aextoxicaceae (from Aextoxicon, Aextoxicou), Potamogetonaceae (from Potamogeton, Potamogetonos).
Ex. 2.
(ku5YVc)
Family names formed from a generic name of non-classical origin: Nelumbonaceae (from Nelumbo, Nelumbonis, declined by analogy with umbo, umbonis), Ginkgoaceae (from Ginkgo, indeclinable).
Ex. 3.
(b1UF2q)
Family name formed from the nominative singular of a generic name because of an earlier potential homonym: Trigoniumaceae Glezer (in Taxon 68: 415. 2019), formed from Trigonium Cleve, non Trigoniaceae A. Juss. (in Orbigny, Dict. Univ. Hist. Nat. 12: 670. 1849) formed from Trigonia Aubl.
i
Note 2.
(xezDLZ)
The name of a family may be formed from any validly published name of an included genus, even one that is unavailable for use, although the provisions of Art. 18.3 apply if the generic name is illegitimate.
Ex. 4.
(btN4kT)
Cactaceae Juss. (Gen. Pl.: 310. 1789) formed from Cactus L. (Sp. Pl.: 466. 1753), a generic name now rejected in favour of Mammillaria Haw. (Syn. Pl. Succ.: 177. 1812).
18.2.
(eDSPWx)
Names intended as names of families, but published with their rank denoted by one of the terms “order” (ordo) or “natural order” (ordo naturalis) instead of “family”, are treated as having been published as names of families (see also Art. 19.2), unless this treatment would result in a taxonomic sequence with a misplaced rank-denoting term.
Ex. 5.
(qWw3x2)
Cyperaceae Juss. (Gen. Pl.: 26. 1789), Lobeliaceae Juss. (in Bonpland, Descr. Pl. Malmaison: [19]. 1813), and Xylomataceae Fr. (Scleromyceti Sueciae 2: [2]. 1820), nom. sanct., were published as “ordo Cyperoideae”, “ordo naturalis Lobeliaceae”, and “ordo Xylomaceae”, respectively.
i
Note 3.
(DZ9qZt)
If the term “family” is simultaneously used to denote a rank different from “order” or “natural order”, a name published for a taxon at the latter rank cannot be considered to have been published as the name of a family.
*Ex. 6.
(osLxVl)
Names published at the rank of order (“řad”) by Berchtold & Presl (
O přirozenosti rostlin … 1820) are not to be treated as having been published at the rank of family, because the term family (“čeleď ”) was sometimes used to denote a rank below order.
18.3.
(uPIsPD)
A name of a family formed from an illegitimate generic name is illegitimate unless and until it or the generic name from which it is formed is conserved or protected.
Ex. 7.
(ZoIbZz)
Caryophyllaceae Juss. (Gen. Pl.: 299. 1789), nom. cons., formed from Caryophyllus Mill. non L.; Winteraceae R. Br. ex Lindl. (Intr. Nat. Syst. Bot.: 26. 1830), nom. cons., formed from Wintera Murray, an illegitimate replacement name for Drimys J. R. Forst. & G. Forst.
Ex. 8.
(D7rxlC)
Nartheciaceae Fr. ex Bjurzon (Skand. Vaxtfam.: 64. 1846), formed from Narthecium Huds., nom. cons. (Fl. Angl.: 127. 1762), became legitimate when the generic name was conserved against its earlier homonym Narthecium Gérard (Fl. Gallo-Prov.: 142. 1761) (see App. III).
18.4.
(o1Z8Hy)
When a name of a family has been published with an improper Latin termination, the termination must be changed to conform with Art. 18.1, without change of authorship or date (see Art. 32.2). However, if such a name is published with a non-Latin termination, it is not validly published.
Ex. 9.
(oqV6Gr)
‘Coscinodisceae’ Kütz. (Kieselschal. Bacill.: 130. 1844), published to designate a family, is to be accepted as Coscinodiscaceae Kütz. (1844) and not attributed to De Toni, who first used the correct termination (in Notarisia 5: 915. 1890).
Ex. 10.
(nbvPB1)
‘Atherospermeae’ R. Br. (Gen. Rem.: 21. 1814), published to designate a family, is to be accepted as Atherospermataceae R. Br. (1814) and not attributed to Airy Shaw (in Willis, Dict. Fl. Pl., ed. 7: 104. 1966), who first used the correct spelling, nor to Lindley (Veg. Kingd.: 300. 1846), who used the spelling ‘Atherospermaceae’.
Ex. 11.
(mb2ukB)
Tricholomées (Roze in Bull. Soc. Bot. France 23: 49. 1876), published to designate a family, is not to be accepted as “Tricholomataceae Roze” because it has a French rather than a Latin termination. The name Tricholomataceae was validly published by Pouzar (in Česká Mykol. 37: 175. 1983; see App. IIA).
18.5.
(v6rqgN)
The following names, of long usage, are treated as validly published: Compositae (nom. alt.: Asteraceae; type: Aster L.); Cruciferae (nom. alt.: Brassicaceae; type: Brassica L.); Gramineae (nom. alt.: Poaceae; type: Poa L.); Guttiferae (nom. alt.: Clusiaceae; type: Clusia L.); Labiatae (nom. alt.: Lamiaceae; type: Lamium L.); Leguminosae (nom. alt.: Fabaceae; type: Faba Mill.); Palmae (nom. alt.: Arecaceae; type: Areca L.); Papilionaceae (nom. alt.: Fabaceae; type: Faba Mill.); Umbelliferae (nom. alt.: Apiaceae; type: Apium L.). When the Papilionaceae are regarded as a family distinct from the remainder of the Leguminosae, the name Papilionaceae is conserved against Leguminosae.
18.6.
(1ZtdgA)
The use, as alternatives, of the eight family names indicated as “nom. alt.” (nomen alternativum) in Art. 18.5 is authorized.
(GhFFG1)
Names of subfamilies, tribes, and subtribes
19.1.
(lQDCQH)
The name of a subfamily is a plural adjective used as a noun; it is formed in the same manner as the name of a family (Art. 18.1) but by adding the termination -oideae instead of -aceae.
19.2.
(QdDftR)
Names intended as names of subfamilies, but published with their rank denoted by the term “suborder” (subordo) instead of subfamily, are treated as having been published as names of subfamilies (see also Art. 18.2), unless this would result in a taxonomic sequence with a misplaced rank-denoting term.
Ex. 1.
(JqZOFZ)
Cyrilloideae Torr. & A. Gray (Fl. N. Amer. 1: 256. 1838) and Sphenocleoideae Lindl. (Intr. Nat. Syst. Bot., ed. 2: 238. 1836) were published as “suborder Cyrilleae” and “Sub-Order ? Sphenocleaceae”, respectively.
i
Note 1.
(QEicXI)
If the term “subfamily” is simultaneously used to denote a rank different from “suborder”, a name published for a taxon at the latter rank cannot be considered to have been published as the name of a subfamily.
19.3.
(fq1FJX)
The name of a tribe or subtribe is formed in the same manner as the name of a subfamily (Art. 19.1), except that the termination is -eae for a tribe and -inae (but not -virinae) for a subtribe.
Ex. 2.
(vrLZTS)
The generic name Mareyopsis Pax. & K. Hoffm. is the type of the subtribe Mareyopsidinae G. L. Webster (in Kubitzki, Fam. Gen. Vasc. Pl. 11: 115. 2014), spelled ‘Mareyopsinae’ in the protologue. Names of families and subfamilies are formed in the same manner as names of tribes and subtribes, and under Art. 18.1 the genitive of names ending in -opsis is always -opsidis. Because the genitive of Mareyopsis is Mareyopsidis with Mareyopsidi- as the stem, ‘Mareyopsinae’ is to be corrected to Mareyopsidinae.
19.4.
(1PGyHz)
The name of any subdivision of a family that includes the type of the adopted, legitimate name of the family to which it is assigned is to be formed from the generic name equivalent to that type (Art. 10.10; but see Art. 19.8).
Ex. 3.
(PfjlU9)
The type of the family name Rosaceae Juss. is Rosa L. and hence the subfamily and tribe assigned to Rosaceae that include Rosa are to be called Rosoideae Endl. and Roseae DC., respectively.
Ex. 4.
(SWah1h)
The type of the family name Gramineae Juss. (nom. alt.: Poaceae Barnhart, see Art. 18.5) is Poa L. and hence the subfamily, tribe, and subtribe assigned to Gramineae that include Poa are to be called Pooideae Asch., Poeae R. Br., and Poinae Dumort., respectively.
i
Note 2.
(CNgnBQ)
Art. 19.4 applies only to the names of those subordinate taxa that include the type of the adopted name of the family (but see Rec. 19A.2).
Ex. 5.
(IavLQv)
The type of the family name Ericaceae Juss. is Erica L. and hence the subfamily and tribe assigned to Ericaceae that include Erica are to be called Ericoideae Endl. and Ericeae D. Don, respectively, despite the priority of any competing names. The subfamily that includes Rhododendron L. is called Rhododendroideae Endl. However, the correct name of the tribe of Ericaceae that includes both Rhododendron and Rhodora L. is Rhodoreae D. Don (in Edinburgh New Philos. J. 17: 152. 1834).
i
Note 3.
(tgFYhq)
A name of a subdivision of a family that includes the type of the adopted, legitimate name of the family to which it is assigned, but is not formed from the generic name equivalent to that type, is incorrect but may nevertheless be validly published and may become correct in a different context.
Ex. 6.
(EmFteF)
When published, the name Lippieae Endl. (Gen. Pl.: 633. 1838) was applied to a tribe of Verbenaceae J. St.-Hil. that included Verbena L., the type of the family name, as well as Lippia L. Although originally incorrect, Lippieae may become correct if used for a tribe of Verbenaceae that includes Lippia but excludes Verbena.
19.5.
(8Ytuc2)
The name of any subdivision of a family that includes the type of a name listed in App. IIB (i.e. a name of a family conserved against all unlisted names, see Art. 14.5) is to be formed from the generic name equivalent to that type (Art. 10.10), unless this is contrary to Art. 19.4 (see also Art. 19.8). If more than one such type is included, the correct name is determined by precedence in App. IIB of the corresponding family names.
Ex. 7.
(5o5qM6)
A subfamily assigned to Rosaceae Juss. that includes Malus Mill., the type of Malaceae Small (Fl. S.E. U.S.: 495, 529. 1903) listed in App. IIB, is to be called Maloideae C. Weber (in J. Arnold Arbor. 45: 164. 1964) unless it also includes Rosa L., i.e. the type of Rosaceae, or the type of another name listed in App. IIB that takes precedence over Malaceae. This is so even if the subfamily also includes Spiraea L. and/or Pyrus L. because, although Spiraeoideae Arn. (in Hooker & Arnott, Bot. Beechey Voy.: 107. 1832) and Pyroideae Burnett (Outlines Bot.: 695, 1137. 1835) were published earlier than Maloideae, neither Spiraeaceae nor Pyraceae is listed in App. IIB. However, if Amygdalus L. is included in the same subfamily as Malus, the name Amygdaloideae Arn. (Botany: 107. 1832) takes precedence because Amygdalaceae Marquis (Esq. Règne Vég.: 49. 1820) is listed in App. IIB with priority over Malaceae.
Ex. 8.
(q0uQNB)
Monotropaceae Nutt. (Gen. N. Amer. Pl. 1: 272. 1818) and Pyrolaceae Lindl. (Syn. Brit. Fl.: 175. 1829) are both listed in App. IIB, but Pyrolaceae is conserved against Monotropaceae. Therefore, a subfamily including both Monotropa L. and Pyrola L. is called Pyroloideae Beilschm. (in Flora 16(Beibl. 1): 72, 109. 1833).
19.6.
(ee18Sb)
A name of a subdivision of a family formed from an illegitimate generic name is illegitimate unless and until that generic name or the corresponding family name is conserved or protected.
Ex. 9.
(lkn9DT)
The name Caryophylloideae Arn. (Botany: 99. 1832), formed from the illegitimate Caryophyllus Mill. non L., is legitimate because the corresponding family name, Caryophyllaceae Juss., is conserved.
Ex. 10.
(8XS9BG)
Thunbergioideae T. Anderson (in Thwaites, Enum. Pl. Zeyl.: 223. 1860), formed from Thunbergia Retz., nom. cons. (in Physiogr. Sälsk. Handl. 1(3): 163. 1780), became legitimate when the generic name was conserved against its earlier homonym Thunbergia Montin (in Kongl. Vetensk. Acad. Handl. 34: 288. 1773) (see App. III).
19.7.
(XiUdUi)
When a name of a subdivision of a family has been published with an improper Latin termination, such as -eae for a subfamily or -oideae for a tribe, the termination must be changed to accord with Art. 19.1 and 19.3, without change of authorship or date (see Art. 32.2). However, if such a name is published with a non-Latin termination, it is not validly published.
Ex. 11.
(xBbMdQ)
‘Climacieae’ Grout (Moss Fl. N. Amer. 3: 4. 1928), published to designate a subfamily, is to be accepted as Climacioideae Grout (l.c. 1928).
Ex. 12.
(ePutNS)
Melantheen (Kittel in Richard, Nouv. Elém. Bot., Germ. Transl., ed. 3: 727. 1840), published to designate a tribe, is not to be accepted as “Melanthieae Kitt.” because it has a German rather than a Latin termination. The name Melanthieae was validly published by Grisebach (Spic. Fl. Rumel. 2: 377. 1846).
19.8.
(n2O5DM)
When the Papilionaceae are included in the family Leguminosae (nom. alt.: Fabaceae; see Art. 18.5) as a subfamily, the name Papilionoideae may be used as an alternative to Faboideae.
(mQyszy)
Recommendation 19A
19A.1.
(pPZeHa)
When a family is changed to the rank of a subdivision of a family, or the inverse change occurs, and no legitimate name is available at the new rank, the name should be retained, with only the termination (-aceae, -oideae, -eae, -inae) altered.
19A.2.
(pVgQI5)
When a subdivision of a family is changed to another such rank, and no legitimate name is available at the new rank, its name, Art. 19.5 permitting, should be formed from the same generic name as the name at the former rank.
Ex. 1.
(v4xkGD)
The subtribe Drypetinae Griseb. (Fl. Brit. W. I.: 31. 1859) when raised to the rank of tribe was named Drypeteae Small (Man. S.E. Fl.: 775. 1933); the subtribe Antidesmatinae Müll. Arg. (in Linnaea 34: 64. 1865) when raised to the rank of subfamily was named Antidesmatoideae Hurus. (in J. Fac. Sci. Univ. Tokyo, Sect. 3, Bot. 6: 322, 340. 1954).
(ZpK6kV)
Names of genera and subdivisions of genera
20.1.
(wqhiCg)
The name of a genus is a noun in the nominative singular, or a word treated as such, and is written with an initial capital letter (see Art. 60.2). It may be taken from any source whatever (but see Rec. 51A) and may even be composed arbitrarily (but see Art. 60.1), but it must not end in -virus.
Ex. 1.
(fuDawb)
Bartramia, Convolvulus, Gloriosa, Hedysarum, Ifloga (an anagram of Filago), Impatiens, Liquidambar, Manihot, Rhododendron, Rosa.
20.2.
(xW3pLV)
The name of a genus published before 1 January 1912 may coincide with a Latin technical term in use in morphology at the time of publication only if it was accompanied by a species name published in accordance with the binary system of Linnaeus.
Ex. 2.
(nEKnHN)
“Radicula” (Hill, Brit. Herb.: 264. 1756) coincides with the Latin technical term “radicula” (radicle) and was not accompanied by a species name in accordance with the binary system of Linnaeus. The name Radicula is correctly attributed to Moench (Methodus: 262. 1794), who first combined it with specific epithets.
Ex. 3.
(iqCQSB)
Tuber F. H. Wigg., nom. sanct., when published in 1780, was accompanied by a binary species name (Tuber gulosorum F. H. Wigg., Prim. Fl. Holsat.: 109. 1780) and is therefore validly published even though it coincides with a Latin technical term.
i
Note 1.
(XJFY0l)
Editions of the
Code prior to the
Madrid Code of 2025 included a provision precluding the valid publication after 1911 of the name of a genus that coincided with a technical term in use in morphology at the time of publication. While publication of such names is not recommended (see Rec. 20A.1(j)), in the interest of nomenclatural stability under the current
Code, binding decisions on the valid publication of each generic “name” or any case with identical spelling where this former provision has been applied are listed in App. VI and take retroactive effect.
20.3.
(Iqq3RJ)
The name of a genus must consist of one word (which may be formed by combining two or more words into one) or of two words joined by a hyphen (but see Art. 60.13 for names of fossil-genera and Art. H.6.5 for nothogeneric names).
Ex. 4.
(YfarhX)
Names validly published that consisted of one word when originally published: Quisqualis L. (Sp. Pl., ed. 2: 556. 1762, ‘Qvisqvalis’) (formed by combining two words into one); Asplenium L. (Sp. Pl.: 1078. 1753); Leucodon Schwägr. (Sp. Musc. Frond. Suppl. 1(2): 1. 1816).
Ex. 5.
(qbVS0E)
Designation not validly published (Art. 32.1(c)) because it was composed of two separate words not joined by a hyphen: “Uva ursi” (Miller, Gard. Dict. Abr., ed. 4: Uva ursi. 1754); the corresponding name is correctly attributed to Duhamel (Traité Arbr. Arbust. 2: 371. 1755) as Uva-ursi (hyphenated when published).
Ex. 6.
(ML36uz)
Names validly published that consisted of two words joined by a hyphen when originally published:
Neves-armondia K. Schum. (in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam. Nachtr. 1: 302. 1897),
Sebastiano-schaueria Nees (in Martius, Fl. Bras. 9: 158. 1847), and
Solms-laubachia Muschl. ex Diels (in Notes Roy. Bot. Gard. Edinburgh 5: 205. 1912).
i
Note 2.
(CNoNJr)
The names of intergeneric hybrids are formed according to the provisions of Art. H.6.
20.4.
(A6kMZD)
The following are not to be regarded as generic names:
(a) Words not intended as names.
Ex. 7.
(eLVui9)
The designation “Anonymos” was applied by Walter (Fl. Carol.: 2, 4, 9, etc. 1788) to 28 different genera to indicate that they were without names (see Sprague in Bull. Misc. Inform. Kew 7: 318–319, 331–334. 1939).
Ex. 8.
(FPX0k9)
“Schænoides” and “Scirpoides”, as used by Rottbøll (Descr. Pl. Rar.: 14, 27. 1772) to indicate unnamed genera resembling Schoenus and Scirpus that, as stated on p. 7, he intended to name later, are token words and not generic names. These unnamed genera were subsequently named Kyllinga Rottb. (Descr. Icon. Rar. Pl.: 12. 1773) and Fuirena Rottb. (l.c.: 70. 1773), respectively.
(9gHTm3)
(b) Words that have been widely used in pharmacopoeia or as descriptive morphological terms: “Balsamum”, “Bulbus”, “Caulis”, “Cortex”, “Flos”, “Herba”, “Lignum”, “Oleum”, “Radix”, “Spina”.
(c) Unitary designations of species.
i
Note 3.
(8Yni0k)
Unitary designations such as “Leptostachys” and “Anthopogon”, listed in editions of the Code prior to the Tokyo Code of 1994 were from publications that are now suppressed (see App. I).
(cYFQvS)
Recommendation 20A
20A.1.
(3dLTep)
Authors forming generic names should comply with the following:
(a) Use Latin terminations insofar as possible.
(b) Not make names that are very long.
(c) Not make names by combining words from different languages.
(d) Indicate, if possible, by the formation or ending of the name the affinities or analogies of the genus.
(e) Avoid adjectives used as nouns.
(f) Not use a name similar to or derived from the epithet in the name of one of the species of the genus.
(g) Not dedicate genera to persons quite unconnected with botany, mycology, phycology, or natural science in general.
(h) Give a feminine form to all personal generic names, whether they commemorate a man or a woman (see Rec. 60B; see also Rec. 62A.1).
(i) Not form generic names by combining parts of two existing generic names, because such names are likely to be confused with nothogeneric names (see Art. H.6).
(j) Not publish names for genera that coincide with technical terms currently in use in morphology.
(vgLQXd)
Names of subdivisions of genera
21.1.
(9Xnh3n)
The name of a subdivision of a genus is a combination of a generic name and a subdivisional epithet. A connecting term (subgenus, sectio, series, etc.) is used to denote the rank.
i
Note 1.
(vSa0Wq)
Names of subdivisions of the same genus, even if they differ in rank, are homonyms if they have the same epithet but are based on different types (Art. 53.3), because the rank-denoting term is not part of the name.
21.2.
(j4epIN)
The epithet in the name of a subdivision of a genus is either of the same form as a generic name, or a noun in the genitive plural, or a plural adjective agreeing in gender with the generic name (see Art. 32.2), but not a noun in the genitive singular. It is written with an initial capital letter (see Art. 60.2).
Ex. 1.
(GXIxYQ)
Epithet of the same form as a generic name: Euphorbia sect. Tithymalus, Ricinocarpos sect. Anomodiscus; epithet a genitive plural noun: Pleione subg. Scopulorum; epithet a plural adjective: Arenaria ser. Anomalae, Euphorbia subsect. Tenellae, Sapium subsect. Patentinervia.
Ex. 2.
(EIDqE0)
“Vaccinium sect. Vitis idaea” (Koch, Syn. Fl. Germ. Helv.: 474. 1837) is not a validly published name because the intended epithet consisted of two separate words not joined by a hyphen (Art. 20.3 and 32.1(c)); “Vitis idæa” is a pre-Linnaean, binary generic name. Vaccinium sect. Vitis-idaea was validly published by Asa Gray (in Mem. Amer. Acad. Arts, n.s., 3: 53. 1846, hyphenated when published).
21.3.
(42E31f)
The epithet in the name of a subdivision of a genus is not to be formed from the name of the genus to which it belongs by adding the prefix Eu- (see also Art. 22.2).
Ex. 3.
(OiZ3m2)
Costus subg. Metacostus; Valeriana sect. Valerianopsis; but not “Carex sect. Eucarex”.
21.4.
(cBwBH2)
A name with a binary combination instead of a subdivisional epithet, but otherwise in accordance with this Code, is treated as validly published in the form determined by Art. 21.1 without change of authorship or date.
Ex. 4.
(gzu4rZ)
Sphagnum “b. Sph. rigida” (Lindberg in Öfvers. Förh. Kongl. Svenska Vetensk.-Akad. 19: 135. 1862) and S. sect. “Sphagna rigida” (Limpricht, Laubm. Deutschl. 1: 116. 1885) are to be cited as Sphagnum [unranked] Rigida Lindb. and S. sect. Rigida (Lindb.) Limpr., respectively.
i
Note 2.
(eOo2bv)
Names of hybrids at the rank of a subdivision of a genus are formed according to the provisions of Art. H.7.
(JOzn7O)
Recommendation 21A
21A.1.
(7wjH72)
When it is desired to indicate the name of a subdivision of the genus to which a particular species belongs in connection with the generic name and specific epithet, the subdivisional epithet should be placed in parentheses between the two; when desirable, the subdivisional rank may also be indicated.
Ex. 1.
(RAhvao)
Astragalus (Cycloglottis) contortuplicatus; A. (Phaca) umbellatus; Loranthus (sect. Ischnanthus) gabonensis.
(XeNnEo)
Recommendation 21B
21B.1.
(p3kBUV)
Recommendations made for forming the name of a genus (Rec. 20A) apply equally to an epithet of a subdivision of a genus, unless Rec. 21B.2–4 recommend otherwise.
21B.2.
(dsKZdF)
The epithet in the name of a subgenus or section is preferably a noun; that in the name of a subsection or lower-ranked subdivision of a genus is preferably a plural adjective.
21B.3.
(i31Q5i)
Authors, when proposing new epithets for names of subdivisions of genera, should avoid those in the form of a noun when other co-ordinate subdivisions of the same genus have them in the form of a plural adjective, and vice versa. They should also avoid, when proposing an epithet for a name of a subdivision of a genus, one already used for a subdivision of a closely related genus, or one that is identical with the name of such a genus.
21B.4.
(DWrapS)
When a section or a subgenus is raised to the rank of genus, or the inverse change occurs, the original name or epithet should be retained unless the resulting name would be contrary to the Code.
(W6XJMn)
Autonyms of subdivisions of genera
22.1.
(KhdpSX)
The name of any subdivision of a genus that includes the type of the adopted, legitimate name of the genus to which it is assigned is to repeat that generic name unaltered as its epithet, not followed by an author citation (see Art. 46). Such names are autonyms (Art. 6.8; see also Art. 7.7).
Ex. 1.
(Ydylms)
The subgenus that includes the type of the name Rhododendron L. is to be named Rhododendron L. subg. Rhododendron.
Ex. 2.
(QoLYQM)
The subgenus that includes the type of Malpighia L. (M. glabra L.) is to be called M. subg. Malpighia, not M. subg. Homoiostylis Nied.; and the section that includes the type of Malpighia is to be called M. sect. Malpighia, not M. sect. Apyrae DC.
i
Note 1.
(NTHsjy)
Art. 22.1 applies only to the names of those subordinate taxa that include the type of the adopted name of the genus (but see Rec. 22A).
Ex. 3.
(XBz5HY)
The correct name of the subgenus of the genus Solanum L. that includes S. pseudocapsicum L., the type of S. sect. Pseudocapsicum (Medik.) Roem. & Schult. (Syst. Veg. 4: 569 (‘Pseudocapsica’), 584 (‘Pseudo-Capsica’). 1819), if considered as distinct from S. subg. Solanum, is S. subg. Minon Raf. (Autikon Bot.: 108. 1840), the earliest legitimate name at that rank, and not “S. subg. Pseudocapsicum”.
22.2.
(cPN7at)
A name of a subdivision of a genus that includes the type (i.e. the original type, all elements eligible as type, or the previously designated or conserved type) of the adopted, legitimate name of the genus is not validly published unless its epithet repeats the generic name unaltered. For the purpose of this provision, explicit indication that the nomenclaturally typical element is included is considered as equivalent to inclusion of the type, whether or not it has been previously designated (see also Art. 21.3).
Ex. 4.
(syY2al)
“Dodecatheon sect. Etubulosa” (Knuth in Engler, Pflanzenr. IV. 237 (Heft 22): 234. 1905) was not validly published because it was proposed for a section that included D. meadia L., the original type of the generic name Dodecatheon L.
Ex. 5.
(PZGBXu)
Cactus [unranked] Melocactus L. (Gen. Pl., ed. 5: 210. 1754) was proposed for one of four unranked (Art. 37.3), named subdivisions of the genus Cactus, comprising C. melocactus L. (its type under Art. 10.8) and C. mammillaris L. It is validly published even though C. mammillaris was subsequently designated as the type of Cactus L. (by Coulter in Contr. U. S. Natl. Herb. 3: 95. 1894).
22.3.
(tE8nEz)
The first instance of valid publication of a name of a subdivision of a genus under a legitimate generic name automatically establishes the corresponding autonym (see also Art. 11.6 and 32.3).
Ex. 6.
(43U8eR)
Publication of Tibetoseris sect. Simulatrices Sennikov (in Komarovia 5: 91. 2008) automatically established the autonym Tibetoseris Sennikov sect. Tibetoseris. Publication of Pseudoyoungia sect. Simulatrices (Sennikov) D. Maity & Maiti (in Compositae Newslett. 48: 31. 2010) automatically established the autonym Pseudoyoungia D. Maity & Maiti sect. Pseudoyoungia.
Ex. 7.
(lyHc4T)
Umbilicaria Hoffm. (Descr. Pl. Cl. Crypt. 1: 8. 1789), a later homonym (non Umbilicaria Heist. ex Fabr., Enum.: 42. 1759), was conserved with U. hyperborea (Ach.) Hoffm. as the conserved type (Nicolson in Taxon 45: 527. 1996). Both U. sect. Gyrophora (Ach.) Endl. (Gen. Pl.: 13. 1836) and U. subg. Gyrophora (Ach.) Frey (Rabenh. Krypt.-Fl., ed. 2, 9(4, 1): 209. 1933) included U. hyperborea. Both were validly published but neither established an autonym because the name Umbilicaria Hoffm. remained illegitimate until 1996. After Umbilicaria became legitimate through conservation, the autonym U. subg. Umbilicaria was established by the valid publication of U. subg. Floccularia Davydov & al. (in Taxon 66: 1297. 2017).
22.4.
(xq348C)
The epithet in the name of a subdivision of a genus may not repeat unchanged the correct name of the genus unless the two names have the same type.
22.5.
(nyE1ib)
The epithet in the name of a subdivision of a genus may not repeat unchanged the generic name if the latter is illegitimate.
Ex. 8.
(CcD2N8)
When Kuntze (in Post & Kuntze, Lex. Gen. Phan.: 106. 1903) published
Caulinia sect.
Hardenbergia (Benth.) Kuntze under
Caulinia Moench (Suppl. Meth.: 47. 1802), a later homonym of
Caulinia Willd. (in Mém. Acad. Roy. Sci. Hist. (Berlin) 1798: 87. 1801), he did not establish the autonym
“Caulinia sect.
Caulinia”.
(TmWivj)
Recommendation 22A
22A.1.
(8QQxUW)
A section including the type of the correct name of a subgenus, but not including the type of the correct name of the genus, should, where there is no obstacle under the rules, be given a name with the same epithet and type as the subgeneric name.
22A.2.
(vYRq4k)
A subgenus not including the type of the correct name of the genus should, where there is no obstacle under the rules, be given a name with the same epithet and type as the correct name of one of its subordinate sections.
Ex. 1.
(fXpI0y)
When Brizicky raised Rhamnus sect. Pseudofrangula Grubov to the rank of subgenus, instead of using a new epithet he named the taxon R. subg. Pseudofrangula (Grubov) Brizicky so that the type of both names is the same.
(ArfGCQ)
Recommendation 22B
22B.1.
(ptSah8)
When publishing a name of a subdivision of a genus that will also establish an autonym, the author should mention that autonym in the publication.
(VC6H15)
Names of species
23.1.
(foESGi)
The name of a species is a binary combination consisting of the name of the genus followed by a single specific epithet in the form of an adjective, a noun in the genitive, an adverb, or a word in apposition (see also Art. 23.7). If an epithet consisted originally of two or more words, these are to be united or hyphenated. An epithet not so joined when originally published is not to be rejected but, when used, is to be united or hyphenated, as specified in Art. 60.12.
23.2.
(cnzEUV)
The epithet in the name of a species may be taken from any source whatever (but see Rec. 51A and Art. 61.6), and may even be composed arbitrarily (but see Art. 60.1). The epithet in the name of a species published on or after 1 January 2026 must consist of at least two but not more than 30 characters.
Ex. 1.
(h6ICsH)
Adiantum capillus-veneris, Atropa bella-donna, Cornus sanguinea, Dianthus monspessulanus, Embelia sarasiniorum, Fumaria gussonei, Geranium robertianum, Impatiens noli-tangere, Papaver rhoeas, Spondias mombin (an indeclinable epithet), Uromyces fabae.
23.3.
(KSdLEs)
Symbols forming part of specific epithets proposed by Linnaeus do not prevent valid publication of the relevant names but must be transcribed.
Ex. 2.
(dLDbjR)
Scandix ‘pecten ♀’ L. is to be transcribed as Scandix pecten-veneris; Veronica ‘anagallis s’ L. is to be transcribed as Veronica anagallis-aquatica.
23.4.
(9EGfUx)
The specific epithet, with or without the addition of a transcribed symbol, may not exactly repeat the generic name (a designation formed by such repetition is a tautonym).
Ex. 3.
(D7k4sR)
“Linaria linaria” and “Nasturtium nasturtium-aquaticum” are tautonyms and cannot be validly published.
Ex. 4.
(g8UdCe)
Linum radiola L. (Sp. Pl.: 281. 1753) when transferred to Radiola Hill may not be named “Radiola radiola”, as was done by Karsten (Deut. Fl.: 606. 1882), because that combination is a tautonym and cannot be validly published. The next earliest name, L. multiflorum Lam. (Fl. Franç. 3: 70. 1779), is an illegitimate superfluous name for L. radiola. In Radiola, the species has been given the legitimate name R. linoides Roth (Tent. Fl. Germ. 1: 71. 1788).
23.5.
(GcBs8B)
The specific epithet, when adjectival in form and not used as a noun, agrees with the gender of the generic name; when the epithet is a noun in apposition or a genitive noun or a noun and its accompanying adjective in the genitive case, it retains its own gender and termination regardless of the gender of the generic name; when the epithet is an adverb, its termination is independent of the gender of the generic name. Epithets not conforming to this rule are to be corrected (see Art. 32.2) to the proper form of the termination (Latin or transcribed Greek) of the original author(s). In particular, the usage of the word element -cola (dweller) as an adjective is a correctable error.
Ex. 5.
(h2DoJn)
Names with Latin adjectival epithets: Helleborus niger L., Brassica nigra (L.) W. D. J. Koch, Verbascum nigrum L.; Rumex cantabricus Rech. f., Daboecia cantabrica (Huds.) K. Koch (Vaccinium cantabricum Huds.); Vinca major L., Tropaeolum majus L.; Bromus mollis L., Geranium molle L.; Peridermium balsameum Peck (derived from the epithet of Abies balsamea (L.) Mill. treated as an adjective).
Ex. 6.
(0M911E)
Names with transcribed Greek adjectival epithets: Brachypodium distachyon (L.) P. Beauv. (Bromus distachyos L.), Oxycoccus macrocarpos (Aiton) Pursh (Vaccinium macrocarpon Aiton).
Ex. 7.
(c3Fml9)
Names with a noun in apposition for an epithet: Convolvulus cantabrica L., Gentiana pneumonanthe L., Liriodendron tulipifera L., Lythrum salicaria L., Schinus molle L., all with epithets featuring pre-Linnaean generic names.
Ex. 8.
(3ypt9a)
Names with a genitive noun for an epithet: Bromus tectorum L., Capsicum caatingae Barboza & Agra, Cistus clusii Dunal, Gloeosporium balsameae Davis (derived from the epithet of Abies balsamea (L.) Mill. treated as a noun).
Ex. 9.
(uVlGNr)
Names with an adverb for an epithet: Acrostichum deorsum H. Karst., Brachyotum seorsum Wurdack, Caladenia postea Hopper & A. P. Br., Phaca unde Rydb., Rubus satis L. H. Bailey.
Ex. 10.
(AKl29L)
Correctable errors in Latin adjectival epithets: Zanthoxylum trifoliatum L. (Sp. Pl.: 270. 1753) upon transfer to Acanthopanax (Decne. & Planch.) Miq. (masculine, see Art. 62.2(a)) is correctly A. trifoliatus (L.) Voss (Vilm. Blumengärtn., ed. 3: 1: 406. 1894, ‘trifoliatum’); Mimosa latisiliqua L. (Sp. Pl.: 519. 1753) upon transfer to Lysiloma Benth. (neuter) is correctly L. latisiliquum (L.) Benth. (in Trans. Linn. Soc. London 30: 534. 1875, ‘latisiliqua’); Corydalis chaerophylla DC. (Prodr. 1: 128. 1824) upon transfer to Capnoides Mill. (feminine, see Art. 62.4) is correctly Capnoides chaerophylla (DC.) Kuntze (Revis. Gen. Pl. 1: 14. 1891, ‘chaerophyllum’); Areca monostachya Mart. (Hist. Nat. Palm. 3: 178. 1838) upon transfer to Linospadix H. Wendl. (masculine) is correctly L. monostachyus (Mart.) H. Wendl. (in Linnaea 39: 199. 1875, ‘monostachyos’).
Ex. 11.
(KJd4dC)
Correctable errors in transcribed Greek adjectival epithets: Andropogon distachyos L. (Sp. Pl.: 1046. 1753, ‘distachyon’); Bromus distachyos L. (Fl. Palaest.: 13. 1756) upon transfer to Brachypodium P. Beauv. (neuter) is correctly B. distachyon (L.) P. Beauv. (Ess. Agrostogr.: 155. 1812, ‘distachyum’) or to Trachynia Link (feminine) is correctly T. distachyos (L.) Link (Hort. Berol. 1: 43. 1827, ‘distachya’); Vaccinium macrocarpon Aiton (Hort. Kew. 2: 13. 1789) upon transfer to Oxycoccus Hill (masculine) is correctly O. macrocarpos (Aiton) Pursh (Fl. Amer. Sept. 1: 263. 1813, ‘macrocarpus’) or to Schollera Roth (feminine) is correctly S. macrocarpos (Aiton) Steud. (Nomencl. Bot.: 746. 1821, ‘macrocarpa’).
Ex. 12.
(Iu42ht)
Correctable errors in epithets that are nouns: the epithet of Polygonum segetum Kunth (in Humboldt & al., Nov. Gen. Sp. 2, ed. qu.: 177; ed. fol.: 142. 1817) is a genitive plural noun (of the corn fields); when Small (Fl. S.E. U.S.: 378. 1903) proposed the new combination Persicaria ‘segeta’, it was a correctable error for Persicaria segetum (Kunth) Small. In Masdevallia echidna Rchb. f. (in Bonplandia 3: 69. 1855), the epithet corresponds to the generic name of an animal; when Garay (in Svensk Bot. Tidskr. 47: 201. 1953) proposed the new combination Porroglossum ‘echidnum’, it was a correctable error for P. echidna (Rchb. f.) Garay.
Ex. 13.
(wxYtim)
Correctable errors in Latin epithets that consist of a noun and its accompanying adjective in the genitive case: Agrostophyllum montis-jayani Ormerod (in Orchadian 17: 379. 2013, ‘montis-jayanum’); Loranthus cycnei-sinus Blakely (in Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales 47: 392. 1922, ‘Cycneus-Sinus’); Salicornia sinus-persici Akhani (in Pakistan J. Bot. 40: 1638. 2008, ‘sinus-persica’).
Ex. 14.
(9e2nby)
Correctable error in the usage of -cola as an adjective: when Blanchard (in Rhodora 8: 170. 1906) proposed Rubus ‘amnicolus’, it was a correctable error for R. amnicola Blanch.
23.6.
(aE85e8)
When the final epithet of a name can be interpreted as belonging to two different grammatical categories (e.g. an adjective and a noun), and both are correct under the rules, a subsequent author may choose (directly or indirectly) one of those categories. The first such choice to be effectively published (Art. 29–31) is to be followed.
Ex. 15.
(RGrRDp)
The final epithet in Ruellia hybrida Pursh (Fl. Amer. Sept. 2: 420. 1813) may be considered as either a noun in apposition or a feminine adjective, because neither option was indicated in the protologue. When the final epithet was combined as Dipteracanthus ciliosus var. hybridus (Pursh) Nees (in Candolle, Prodr. 11: 123. 1847), Nees chose to treat it as an adjective, and his choice is to be followed.
Ex. 16.
(Cp21Le)
When Peziza lachnoderma Berk. (in Hooker, Bot. Antarct. Voy., III, Fl. Tasman. 2: 274. 1859) was published, Berkeley did not indicate whether the final epithet was a noun in apposition or a feminine adjective, and both interpretations are possible. A combination made by Rehm (in Ber. Naturhist. Augsburg 26: 76. 1881), currently accepted in Dasyscyphus, did not constitute a choice because, at that time, Rehm combined the final epithet under a feminine orthographical variant of the generic name, “Dasyscypha”. The first choice was made by Kuntze (Revis. Gen. Pl. 3: 446. 1898), who effectively published the combination Atractobolus lachnoderma (Berk.) Kuntze under a masculine generic name, unambiguously using the final epithet as a noun in apposition; Kuntze’s choice is to be followed.
23.7.
(oRellB)
The following designations are not to be regarded as species names:
(a) Designations consisting of a generic name followed by an epithet in the form of a phrase in the ablative case (but see Art. 23.8).
Ex. 17.
(BuLsC7)
Solanum “fructu-tecto” (Cavanilles, Icon. 4: 5. 1797) is a generic name followed by an epithet in the form of a phrase in the ablative case. It is not to be regarded as a species name.(ARGH99)
(b) Designations consisting of a generic name followed by a phrase name (Linnaean “nomen specificum legitimum”) often composed of one or more nouns and associated adjectives in the ablative case, but also including any single-word phrase names in works in which phrase names of two or more words predominate.
Ex. 18.
(HpwEad)
Smilax “caule inermi” (Aublet, Hist. Pl. Guiane 2, Tabl.: 27. 1775) is an abbreviated descriptive reference to an imperfectly known species, which is not given a binomial in the text but referred to merely by a phrase name cited from Burman.
Ex. 19.
(hUFgDN)
In Miller, The gardeners dictionary … abridged, ed. 4 (1754), phrase names of two or more words largely predominate over those that consist of a single word and that are thereby similar to Linnaean nomina trivialia (specific epithets) but are not distinguished typographically or in any other way from other phrase names. Therefore, designations in that work such as “Alkekengi officinarum”, “Leucanthemum vulgare”, “Oenanthe aquatica”, and “Sanguisorba minor” are not validly published names.(WTF67y)
(c) Other designations of species consisting of a generic name followed by one or more words not intended as a specific epithet.
Ex. 20.
(eHaT8F)
Viola “qualis” (qualis, of what sort) (Krocker, Fl. Siles. 2: 512, 517. 1790). Urtica “dubia?” (dubia, doubtful) (Forsskål, Fl. Aegypt.-Arab.: cxxi. 1775); the word “dubia?” was repeatedly used in Forsskål’s work for species that could not be reliably identified.
Ex. 21.
(hR6XNz)
Atriplex “nova” (Winterl, Index Hort. Bot. Univ. Hung.: fol. A [8] recto et verso. 1788); the word “nova” (new) was here used in connection with four different species of
Atriplex. However, in
Artemisia nova A. Nelson (in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 27: 274. 1900), the species was newly distinguished from others and
nova was intended as a specific epithet.
Ex. 22.
(99fHW5)
Cornus “gharaf” (Forsskål, Fl. Aegypt.-Arab.: xci, xcvi. 1775) is a designation not intended as a species name. Such usage in Forsskål’s work is an original designation for an accepted taxon with an epithet-like vernacular name that is not used as an epithet in the “Centuriae” part of the work. Elcaja “roka” (Forsskål, l.c.: xcv. 1775) is another example of such a designation; in other parts of the work (l.c.: c, cxvi, 127) this species is not named.
Ex. 23.
(UK7KQ7)
In Agaricus “octogesimus nonus” and Boletus “vicesimus sextus” (Schaeffer, Fung. Bavar. Palat. Nasc. 1: t. 100. 1762; 2: t. 137. 1763), the generic names are followed by ordinal adjectives used for enumeration that are not intended as epithets. The corresponding species were given validly published names, A. cinereus Schaeff., nom. sanct., and B. ungulatus Schaeff., in the final volume of the same work (l.c. 4: 100, 88. 1774).
Ex. 24.
(5mxX80)
In
Agrostis, Honckeny (Verz. Gew. Teutschl. 1782; see Art. 46 Ex. 47) used species designations such as
“A. Reygeri I.”, “A. Reyg. II.”, “A. Reyg. III.” (all referring to species described but not named in Reyger, Tent. Fl. Gedan.: 36–37. 1763), and also
“A. alpina. II” for a newly described species listed after
A. alpina Scop. These enumerations were not intended as epithets; there is no provision for expansion of the binomials into, e.g.,
“Agrostis reygeri-prima”.
(HiU999)
(d) Designations of species consisting of a generic name followed by two or more adjectival words in the nominative case.
Ex. 25.
(fpumLZ)
“Salvia africana caerulea” (Linnaeus, Sp. Pl.: 26. 1753) and “Gnaphalium fruticosum flavum” (Forsskål, Fl. Aegypt.-Arab.: cxix. 1775) are generic names followed by two adjectival words in the nominative case. They are not to be regarded as species names.
Ex. 26.
(Q7zjYR)
Rhamnus ‘vitis idaea’ Burm. f. (Fl. Ind.: 61. 1768) is to be regarded as a species name because the generic name is followed by a noun and an adjective, both in the nominative case; these words are to be hyphenated (R. vitis-idaea) under the provisions of Art. 23.1 and 60.12. In Anthyllis ‘Barba jovis’ L. (Sp. Pl.: 720. 1753) the generic name is followed by a noun in the nominative case and a noun in the genitive case, and they are to be hyphenated (A. barba-jovis). Likewise, Hyacinthus ‘non scriptus’ L. (l.c.: 316. 1753), where the generic name is followed by a negative particle and a past participle used as an adjective, is corrected to H. non-scriptus, and Impatiens ‘noli tangere’ L. (l.c.: 938. 1753), where the generic name is followed by two verbs, is corrected to I. noli-tangere.
Ex. 27.
(bvn5pp)
In Narcissus ‘Pseudo Narcissus’ L. (Sp. Pl.: 289. 1753) the generic name is followed by a prefix (a word that cannot stand independently) and a noun in the nominative case, and the name is to be corrected to N. pseudonarcissus under the provisions of Art. 23.1 and 60.12.(SIGH56)
(e) Formulae designating hybrids (see Art. H.10.2).
23.8.
(wT38px)
Names in which Linnaeus used phrases in the ablative case as specific epithets (“nomina trivialia”) are to be corrected in accordance with later usage by Linnaeus himself.
Ex. 28.
(1xm8ra)
Apocynum ‘fol. [foliis] androsaemi’ L. is cited as A. androsaemifolium L. (Sp. Pl.: 213. 1753 [corr. L., Syst. Nat., ed. 10: 946. 1759]); and Mussaenda ‘fr. [fructu] frondoso’ L., as M. frondosa L. (Sp. Pl.: 177. 1753 [corr. L., Syst. Nat., ed. 10: 931. 1759]).
23.9.
(DTu9W1)
Where the status of a designation of a species is uncertain under Art. 23.7, established custom is to be followed (Pre. 13).
*Ex. 29.
(aPTWcP)
Polypodium ‘F. mas’, P. ‘F. femina’, and
P. ‘F. fragile’ (Linnaeus, Sp. Pl.: 1090–1091. 1753) are, in accordance with established custom, to be treated as
P. filix-mas L.,
P. filix-femina L., and
P. fragile L., respectively. Likewise,
Cambogia ‘G. gutta’ is to be treated as
C. gummi-gutta L. (Gen. Pl., ed. 5: [522]. 1754). The intercalations
“Trich.” [Trichomanes] and
“M.” [Melilotus] in the names of Linnaean species of
Asplenium and
Trifolium, respectively, are to be deleted, so that names in the form
Asplenium ‘Trich. dentatum’ and
Trifolium ‘M. indica’, for example, are treated as
A. dentatum L. and
T. indicum L. (Sp. Pl.: 765, 1080. 1753).
(HkrPiH)
Recommendation 23A
23A.1.
(FVZ4eG)
Names of persons and also of countries and localities used in specific epithets should take the form of nouns in the genitive (clusii, porsildiorum, saharae) or of adjectives (clusianus, dahuricus) (see also Art. 60, Rec. 60C, and 60D).
23A.2.
(7V7uax)
The use of the genitive and the adjectival form of the same word to designate two different species of the same genus should be avoided (e.g. Lysimachia hemsleyana Oliv. and L. hemsleyi Franch.).
23A.3.
(OjGmiQ)
In forming specific epithets, authors should comply also with the following:
(a) Use Latin terminations insofar as possible.
(b) Avoid epithets that are very long.
(c) Not make epithets by combining words from different languages.
(d) Avoid those formed of two or more hyphenated words.
(e) Avoid those that have the same meaning as the generic name.
(f) Avoid those that express a character common to all or nearly all the species of a genus.
(g) Avoid in the same genus those that are very much alike, especially those that differ only in their last letters or in the arrangement of two letters.
(h) Avoid those that have been used before in any closely allied genus.
(i) Not adopt epithets from unpublished names found in correspondence, travellers’ notes, herbarium labels, or similar sources, attributing them to their authors, unless these authors have approved publication (see Rec. 50G).
(j) Avoid using the names of little-known or very restricted localities unless the species is quite local.
(tP8HDB)
Names of taxa below the rank of species (infraspecific taxa)
(W55w7D)
Names of infraspecific taxa
24.1.
(9AjR9V)
The name of an infraspecific taxon is a combination of the name of a species and an infraspecific epithet. A connecting term is used to denote the rank.
Ex. 1.
(EjwsPh)
Saxifraga aizoon subf. surculosa Engl. & Irmsch. This taxon may also be referred to as Saxifraga aizoon var. aizoon subvar. brevifolia f. multicaulis subf. surculosa Engl. & Irmsch.; in this way a full classification of the subform within the species is given, not only its name.
24.2.
(9SZIHD)
Infraspecific epithets are formed like specific epithets (Art. 23) and, when adjectival in form and not used as nouns or adverbs, they agree grammatically with the generic name (see Art. 23.5 and 32.2).
Ex. 2.
(UjQW4T)
Solanum melongena var. insanum (L.) Prain (Bengal Pl.: 746. 1903, ‘insana’).
24.3.
(fWlOy7)
Infraspecific names with final epithets such as genuinus, originalis, originarius, typicus, verus, and veridicus, or with the prefix eu-, when purporting to indicate the taxon containing the type of the name of the next higher-ranked taxon, are not validly published unless they have the same final epithet as the name of the corresponding higher-ranked taxon (see Art. 26.2, Rec. 26A.1, and 26A.3).
Ex. 3.
(5i36AT)
“Hieracium piliferum var. genuinum” (Rouy, Fl. France 9: 270. 1905) was based on “H. armerioides var. genuinum” of Arvet-Touvet (Hieracium Alpes Franç.: 37. 1888), a designation not validly published under Art. 26.2. As circumscribed by Rouy, the taxon does not include the type of H. piliferum Hoppe, but it does include the type of the name of the next higher-ranked taxon, H. piliferum subsp. armerioides (Arv.-Touv.) Rouy. Therefore, “H. piliferum var. genuinum” is not a validly published name of a new variety.
Ex. 4.
(t5QsR6)
“Narcissus bulbocodium var. eu-praecox” and “N. bulbocodium var. eu-albidus” were not validly published by Emberger & Maire (in Jahandiez & Maire, Cat. Pl. Maroc: 961. 1941) because they were placed, respectively, in N. bulbocodium subsp. praecox Gattef. & Maire (in Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Afrique N. 28: 540. 1937) and N. bulbocodium subsp. albidus (Emb. & Maire) Maire (in Jahandiez & Maire, l.c.: 138. 1931) and their epithet purports inclusion of the type of the higher-ranked name in the subordinate variety.
Ex. 5.
(ixD3rM)
“Lobelia spicata var.
originalis” (McVaugh in Rhodora 38: 308. 1936) was not validly published (see Art. 26 Ex. 1), whereas the autonyms
Galium verum L. subsp.
verum and
G. verum var.
verum are validly published.
Ex. 6.
(Q1OK42)
Aloe perfoliata var. vera L. (Sp. Pl.: 320. 1753) is validly published because it does not purport to contain the type of A. perfoliata L. (l.c. 1753).
24.4.
(jDx28p)
A name with a binary combination instead of an infraspecific epithet, but otherwise in accordance with this Code, is treated as validly published in the form determined by Art. 24.1 without change of authorship or date.
Ex. 7.
(a60zmI)
Salvia grandiflora subsp. “S. willeana” (Holmboe in Bergens Mus. Skr., ser. 2, 1(2): 157. 1914) is to be altered to S. grandiflora subsp. willeana Holmboe.
Ex. 8.
(knLj3R)
Phyllerpa prolifera var. “Ph. firma” (Kützing, Sp. Alg.: 495. 1849) is to be altered to P. prolifera var. firma Kütz.
Ex. 9.
(rCKomS)
Cynoglossum cheirifolium “β. Anchusa (lanata)” (Lehmann, Pl. Asperif. Nucif.: 141. 1818), a new combination based on Anchusa lanata L. (Syst. Nat., ed. 10, 2: 914. 1759), is to be altered to C. cheirifolium var. lanatum (L.) Lehm.
i
Note 1.
(hezH2B)
Infraspecific taxa within different species may have names with the same final epithet; those within one species may have names with the same final epithet as the names of other species (but see Rec. 24B.1).
Ex. 10.
(1dcPul)
Rosa glutinosa var. leioclada H. Christ (in Boissier, Fl. Orient. Suppl.: 222. 1888) and Rosa jundzillii f. leioclada Borbás (in Math. Term. Közlem. 16: 376, 383. 1880) are both permissible, as is Viola tricolor var. hirta Ging. (in Candolle, Prodr. 1: 304. 1824), despite the previous existence of Viola hirta L. (Sp. Pl.: 934. 1753).
i
Note 2.
(qCNre0)
Names of infraspecific taxa within the same species, even if they differ in rank, are homonyms if they have the same final epithet but are based on different types (Art. 53.3), because the rank-denoting term is not part of the name.
(rAhJ1Q)
Recommendation 24A
24A.1.
(dwuPab)
Recommendations made for forming specific epithets (Rec. 23A) apply equally for infraspecific epithets.
(y8bj2V)
Recommendation 24B
24B.1.
(TQKRlU)
Authors proposing new infraspecific names should avoid final epithets previously used as specific epithets in the same genus.
24B.2.
(kpDhLl)
When an infraspecific taxon is raised to the rank of species, or the inverse change occurs, the final epithet of its name should be retained unless the resulting combination would be contrary to the Code.
(LPfoMR)
Sum of subordinate taxa
25.1.
(oVhCwa)
For nomenclatural purposes, a species or any taxon below the rank of species is regarded as the sum of its subordinate taxa, if any.
Ex. 1.
(Jgr6jj)
When Montia parvifolia (DC.) Greene is treated as comprising two subspecies, the name M. parvifolia applies to the species in its entirety, i.e. including both M. parvifolia subsp. parvifolia and M. parvifolia subsp. flagellaris (Bong.) Ferris, and its use for M. parvifolia subsp. parvifolia alone may lead to confusion.
(aU5r5u)
Autonyms of infraspecific taxa
26.1.
(uduKL6)
The name of any infraspecific taxon that includes the type of the adopted, legitimate name of the species to which it is assigned is to repeat the specific epithet unaltered as its final epithet, not followed by an author citation (see Art. 46). Such names are autonyms (Art. 6.8; see also Art. 7.7).
Ex. 1.
(y6R32j)
The variety that includes the type of the name
Lobelia spicata Lam. is to be named
Lobelia spicata Lam. var.
spicata (see also Art. 24 Ex. 5).
i
Note 1.
(NZLAK0)
Art. 26.1 applies only to the names of those subordinate taxa that include the type of the adopted name of the species (but see Rec. 26A).
26.2.
(aFoZnb)
A name of an infraspecific taxon that includes the type (i.e. the holotype or all syntypes or the previously designated or conserved type) of the adopted, legitimate name of the species to which it is assigned is not validly published unless its final epithet repeats the specific epithet unaltered. For the purpose of this provision, explicit indication that the nomenclaturally typical element of the species is included is considered as equivalent to inclusion of the type, whether or not it has been previously designated (see also Art. 24.3).
Ex. 2.
(s2xOPF)
The intended combination “Vulpia myuros subsp. pseudomyuros (Soy.-Will.) Maire & Weiller” was not validly published in Maire (Fl. Afrique N. 3: 177. 1955) because it included in synonymy “F. myuros L., Sp. 1, p. 74 (1753) sensu stricto”, i.e. Festuca myuros L., the basionym of Vulpia myuros (L.) C. C. Gmel.
Ex. 3.
(WS3Gsp)
Linnaeus (Sp. Pl.: 3. 1753) recognized two named varieties under Salicornia europaea. Because S. europaea has neither a holotype nor syntypes, both varietal names are validly published even though the lectotype of S. europaea (designated by Jafri & Rateeb in Jafri & El-Gadi, Fl. Libya 58: 57. 1979) can be attributed to S. europaea var. herbacea L. (l.c. 1753) and the varietal name was subsequently lectotypified (by Piirainen in Ann. Bot. Fenn. 28: 82. 1991) with the same specimen as the species name.
Ex. 4.
(TN7dD5)
Linnaeus (Sp. Pl.: 779–781. 1753) recognized 13 named varieties under Medicago polymorpha. Because M. polymorpha L. has neither a holotype nor syntypes, all varietal names are validly published, and the lectotype subsequently designated for the species name (by Heyn in Bull. Res. Council Israel, Sect. D, Bot., 7: 163. 1959) is not part of the original material for any of the varietal names of 1753.
26.3.
(569Njg)
The first instance of valid publication of a name of an infraspecific taxon under a legitimate species name automatically establishes the corresponding autonym (see also Art. 11.6 and 32.3).
Ex. 5.
(MnR1Ys)
The publication of the name Lycopodium inundatum var. bigelovii Tuck. (in Amer. J. Sci. Arts 45: 47. 1843) automatically established the name of another variety, L. inundatum L. var. inundatum, the autonym, the type of which is that of the name L. inundatum L. (Art. 7.7).
Ex. 6.
(qQ3fJh)
Pangalo (in Trudy Prikl. Bot. 23: 258. 1930), when describing Cucurbita mixta Pangalo, distinguished two varieties, C. mixta var. cyanoperizona Pangalo and C. mixta var. stenosperma Pangalo, together encompassing the entire circumscription of the species. Although Pangalo did not mention the autonym (see Rec. 26B.1), C. mixta var. mixta was automatically established at the same time. Because neither a holotype nor any syntypes were indicated for C. mixta, both varietal names were validly published (see Art. 26.2). Merrick & Bates (in Baileya 23: 96, 101. 1989), in the absence of known type material, neotypified C. mixta by an element that can be attributed to C. mixta var. stenosperma. As long as their choice of neotype is followed, under Art. 11.6 the correct name for that variety recognized under C. mixta is C. mixta var. mixta, dating from 1930, not C. mixta var. stenosperma.
(AZiWrM)
Recommendation 26A
26A.1.
(zf0EtE)
A variety including the type of the correct name of a subspecies, but not including the type of the correct name of the species, should, where there is no obstacle under the rules, be given a name with the same final epithet and type as the subspecific name.
Ex. 1.
(YuH3fd)
Fernald treated Stachys palustris subsp. pilosa (Nutt.) Epling (in Repert. Spec. Nov. Regni Veg. Beih. 80: 63. 1934) as composed of five varieties, for one of which (that including the type of S. palustris subsp. pilosa) he made the combination S. palustris var. pilosa (Nutt.) Fernald (in Rhodora 45: 474. 1943) because there was no legitimate varietal name available.
26A.2.
(cmI8my)
A subspecies not including the type of the correct name of the species should, where there is no obstacle under the rules, be given a name with the same final epithet and type as a name of one of its subordinate varieties.
Ex. 2.
(zkPNjg)
Because there was no legitimate name available at the rank of subspecies, Bonaparte made the combination Pteridium aquilinum subsp. caudatum (L.) Bonap. (Notes Ptérid. 1: 62. 1915), using the same final epithet that Sadebeck had used earlier in the combination P. aquilinum var. caudatum (L.) Sadeb. (in Jahrb. Hamburg. Wiss. Anst. Beih. 14(3): 5. 1897), with both combinations based on Pteris caudata L. Each name is legitimate, and both can be used, as was done by Tryon (in Rhodora 43: 52–54. 1941), who treated P. aquilinum var. caudatum as one of four varieties under subsp. caudatum (see also Art. 36.3).
26A.3.
(62zpbx)
A taxon at a rank lower than variety that includes the type of the correct name of a subspecies or variety, but not the type of the correct name of the species, should, where there is no obstacle under the rules, be given a name with the same final epithet and type as the name of the subspecies or variety. On the other hand, a subspecies or variety that does not include the type of the correct name of the species should not be given a name with the same final epithet as a name of one of its subordinate taxa below the rank of variety.
(vVUahi)
Recommendation 26B
26B.1.
(VGMCEY)
When publishing a name of an infraspecific taxon that will also establish an autonym, the author should mention that autonym in the publication.
(5MeOPt)
Final epithet in names of infraspecific taxa
27.1.
(oHshWm)
The final epithet in the name of an infraspecific taxon may not repeat unchanged the epithet of the correct name of the species to which the taxon is assigned unless the two names have the same type.
27.2.
(tvqJBq)
The final epithet in the name of an infraspecific taxon may not repeat unchanged the epithet of the species name if that species name is illegitimate.
Ex. 1.
(ATkN4T)
When Honda (in Bot. Mag. (Tokyo) 41: 385. 1927) published
Agropyron japonicum var.
hackelianum Honda under the illegitimate
A. japonicum Honda (l.c.: 384. 1927), which is a later homonym of
A. japonicum (Miq.) P. Candargy (in Arch. Biol. Vég. Pure Appl. 1: 42. 1901), he did not validly publish an autonym
“A. japonicum var.
japonicum” (see also Art. 55 Ex. 3).
(zUNcHf)
Names of organisms in cultivation
28.1.
(0OVNdB)
Organisms brought from the wild into cultivation retain the names that are applied to them when growing in nature.
i
Note 1.
(YISGpc)
Hybrids, including those arising in cultivation, may receive names as provided in Chapter H (see also Art. 11.9, 32.4, and 50.1).
i
Note 2.
(mDNJwD)
Additional, independent designations for special categories of organisms used in agriculture, forestry, and horticulture (and arising either in nature or cultivation) are dealt with in the International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants (ICNCP), which defines the cultivar as its basic category (see Pre. 11).
i
Note 3.
(3mQQRL)
Nothing precludes the use, for cultivated organisms, of names published in accordance with the requirements of this Code.
i
Note 4.
(ViPocX)
Epithets in names published in conformity with this Code are retained as cultivar epithets, included in single quotation marks, under the rules of the ICNCP when it is considered appropriate to treat the taxon concerned under that Code.
Ex. 1.
(CLN0lB)
Mahonia japonica DC. (Syst. Nat. 2: 22. 1821) may be treated as a cultivar, which is then designated as Mahonia ‘Japonica’; Taxus baccata var. variegata Weston (Bot. Univ. 1: 292, 347. 1770), when treated as a cultivar, is designated as Taxus baccata ‘Variegata’.
i
Note 5.
(t9ivsB)
The ICNCP also provides for the establishment of epithets differing markedly from epithets provided for under this Code.
Ex. 2.
(lCGk01)
×Disophyllum ‘Frühlingsreigen’; Eriobotrya japonica ‘Golden Ziad’ and E. japonica ‘Maamora Golden Yellow’; Phlox drummondii ‘Sternenzauber’; Quercus frainetto ‘Hungarian Crown’.
Ex. 3.
(wdJkeV)
Juniperus ×pfitzeriana ‘Wilhelm Pfitzer’ (P. A. Schmidt in Folia Dendrol. 10: 292. 1998) was established for a tetraploid cultivar presumed to result from the original cross between J. chinensis L. and J. sabina L.
(ock04n)
Effective publication
(hba0pt)
Definition and conditions of effective publication
29.1.
(yhYKSw)
Publication is effected, under this Code, by distribution of printed matter (through sale, exchange, or gift) to the general public or at least to scientific institutions with generally accessible libraries. Publication is also effected by distribution on or after 1 January 2012 of electronic material in Portable Document Format (PDF; see also Art. 29.3 and Rec. 29A.1) in an online publication (Art. 29.2) with an International Standard Serial Number (ISSN) or an International Standard Book Number (ISBN) (see also Art. 30).
Ex. 1.
(og2eCU)
The paper containing the new combination Anaeromyces polycephalus (Y. C. Chen & al.) Fliegerová & al. (Kirk in Index Fungorum 1: 1. 2012), based on Piromyces polycephalus Y. C. Chen & al. (in Nova Hedwigia 75: 411. 2002), was effectively published when it was issued online in Portable Document Format with an ISSN on 1 January 2012.
Ex. 2.
(R4k9MO)
Intended nomenclatural novelties by Ruck & al. (in Molec. Phylogen. Evol. 103: 155–171. 22 Jul 2016) appeared only in supplementary material published online in Microsoft Word document format and were not therefore effectively published. These novelties were effectively published when they appeared in Portable Document Format (Ruck & al. in Notul. Alg. 10: 1–4. 17 Aug 2016), meeting the requirements of Art. 29.1.
i
Note 1.
(w77si2)
The distribution before 1 January 2012 of electronic material does not constitute effective publication.
Ex. 3.
(zuoHSC)
Floristic accounts of the Asteraceae in Flora of China volume 20–21, containing numerous nomenclatural novelties, were published online in Portable Document Format on 25 October 2011. Because they were distributed before 1 January 2012 they were not effectively published. Effective publication occurred when the printed version of the same volume became available on 11 November 2011.
Ex. 4.
(8UkJVi)
The paper in which the diatom
“Tursiocola podocnemicola” was first described was distributed online on 14 December 2011 as an “iFirst” PDF document (
https://doi.org/10.1080/0269249X.2011.642498) available through the
Diatom Research website (ISSN 0269-249X, print; ISSN 2159-8347, online). Although the paper appeared online in an electronic publication with an ISSN and in Portable Document Format, it was distributed before 1 January 2012 and was not therefore effectively published. It did not become effectively published on 1 January 2012 merely by remaining available online. Effective publication occurred on 28 February 2012 upon distribution of the printed version of the journal in which the name
T. podocnemicola C. E. Wetzel (in Diatom Res. 27: 2. 2012) was validly published.
29.2.
(YFudtm)
For the purpose of Art. 29.1, “online” is defined as accessible electronically via the World Wide Web.
29.3.
(2LVS13)
Should Portable Document Format (PDF) be succeeded, a successor international standard format communicated by the General Committee (see Div. III Prov. 7.10(l)) is acceptable.
i
Note 2.
(OLNY9F)
Citation, for electronic material, of an inappropriate ISSN or ISBN (e.g. one that does not exist or that refers to a serial publication or book in which that electronic material is not included, not even as a declared supplement to an included item) does not result in effective publication under Art. 29.1.
Ex. 5.
(PuIORM)
The paper by Meyer, Baquero, and Cameron in which “Dracula trigonopetala” was described as an intended new species was placed online as a PDF/A document on 1 March 2012. There was no mention of a journal or ISSN in the document itself, but, because it was made accessible through the homepage of OrchideenJournal (ISSN 1864-9459), it could be argued that it qualified as an “online publication with an International Standard Serial Number” (Art. 29.1). However, the content of the paper was not presented in a format suited for publication in the OrchideenJournal and was evidently not intended for inclusion in that journal. A new version of the paper, translated into German, appeared in print (in OrchideenJ. 19: 107–112) on 15 August 2012. Although this was effectively published, “D. trigonopetala” was not validly published there because no Latin or English description or diagnosis was provided. (The name was later validated as D. trigonopetala Gary Mey. & Baquero ex A. Doucette in Phytotaxa 74: 59. 9 December 2012.)
(5Ad10y)
Recommendation 29A
29A.1.
(tRhMv6)
Electronic publication in Portable Document Format (PDF) should comply with the PDF/A archival standard (ISO 19005).
29A.2.
(yChETe)
Authors of electronic material should give preference to publications that are archived and curated, satisfying the following criteria as far as is practical (see also Rec. 29A.1):
(a) The material should be placed in multiple trusted online digital repositories, e.g. an ISO-certified repository.
(b) Digital repositories should be in more than one area of the world and preferably on different continents.
(IaikhA)
Further conditions of effective publication
30.1.
(3wEvW2)
Publication is not effected by communication of nomenclatural novelties at a public meeting, by the placing of names in collections or gardens open to the public, by the issue of microfilm made from manuscripts or typescripts or other unpublished material, or by distribution of electronic material other than as described in Art. 29.
Ex. 1.
(aU8Glm)
Cusson announced his establishment of the genus Physospermum in a memoir read at the Société des Sciences de Montpellier in 1770, and later in 1782 or 1783 at the Société de Médecine de Paris, but its effective publication dates from 1787 (in Hist. Soc. Roy. Méd. 5(1): 279).
30.2.
(lkAL4H)
An electronic publication is not effectively published if there is evidence within or associated with the publication that its content is merely preliminary and was, or is to be, replaced by content that the publisher considers final, in which case only the version with that final content is effectively published.
Ex. 2.
(hc1zA8)
“Rodaucea” was published in a paper first placed online on 12 January 2012 as a PDF document accessible through the website of the journal Mycologia (ISSN 0027-5514, print; ISSN 1557-2436, online). That document had a header stating “In Press”, and on the journal website it was qualified as “Preliminary version”, which is clear evidence that it was not considered by the publisher as final. Because the final version of the document appeared simultaneously online and in print, a correct citation of the name is: Rodaucea W. Rossi & Santam. in Mycologia 104 (print and online): 785. 11 Jun 2012.
Ex. 3.
(TvEdxf)
“Lycopinae” appeared in a paper first placed online on 26 April 2012 as an “Advance Access” PDF document accessible through the website of the American Journal of Botany (ISSN 0002-9122, print; ISSN 1537-2197, online). Because the journal website stated (May 2012) “AJB Advance Access articles … have not yet been printed or posted online by issue” and “minor corrections may be made before the issue is released”, this was evidently not considered as the final version by the publisher. The name Lycopinae B. T. Drew & Sytsma was validly published in Amer. J. Bot. 99: 945. 1 May 2012, when the printed volume containing it was effectively published.
Ex. 4.
(j2D2gd)
The paper (in S. African J. Bot. 80: 63–66; ISSN 0254-6299, print; ISSN 1727-9321, online) in which the name Nanobubon hypogaeum Magee appeared was effectively published online as a PDF document on 30 March 2012 in its “final and fully citable” form, before publication of the printed version (May 2012). Papers that appeared online in the same journal under the heading “In Press Corrected Proof” are not effectively published because the journal website clearly stated “Corrected proofs: articles that contain the authors’ corrections. Final citation details, e.g. volume/issue number, publication year and page numbers, still need to be added and the text might change before final publication.”
i
Note 1.
(rHaJ0w)
An electronic publication may be a final version even if details, e.g. volume, issue, article, or page numbers, are to be added or changed, provided that those details are not part of the content (see Art. 30.3).
30.3.
(oNlTr6)
Content of an electronic publication includes what is visible on the page, e.g. text, tables, illustrations, etc., but excludes volume, issue, article, and page numbers; it also excludes external sources accessed via a hyperlink or URL (Uniform Resource Locator).
Ex. 5.
(HCo2O2)
A paper describing the new genus Partitatheca and its four constituent species, accepted for the Botanical Journal of the Linnean Society (ISSN 0024-4074, print; ISSN 1095-8339, online), was placed online on 1 February 2012 as an “Early View” PDF document with preliminary pagination (1–29). This was evidently the version considered as final by the journal’s publisher because, in the document itself, it was declared the “Version of Record” (an expression defined by the standard NISO-RP-8-2008). Later, in the otherwise identical electronic version published together with the printed version on 27 February 2012, the volume pagination (229–257) was added. A correct citation of the generic name is: Partitatheca D. Edwards & al. in Bot. J. Linn. Soc. 168 (online): [2 of 29], 230. 1 Feb 2012, or just “… 168 (online): 230. 1 Feb 2012”.
Ex. 6.
(foX0PO)
The new combination
Rhododendron aureodorsale was made in a paper in
Nordic Journal of Botany (ISSN 0107-055X, print; ISSN 1756-1051, online), first effectively published online on 13 March 2012 in “Early View”, the “Online Version of Record published before inclusion in an issue”, with a permanent Digital Object Identifier (DOI) but with preliminary pagination (1-EV to 3-EV). When the printed version was published on 20 April 2012, the pagination of the electronic version was changed to 184–186 and the date of the printed version was added. The combination can be cited as
Rhododendron aureodorsale (W. P. Fang ex J. Q. Fu) Y. P. Ma & J. Nielsen in Nordic J. Bot. 30 (online): 184. 13 Mar 2012 (
https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1756-1051.2011.01438.x).
Ex. 7.
(UXlf6L)
Two new Echinops species, including E. antalyensis, were described in Annales Botanici Fennici (ISSN 0003-3847, print; ISSN 1797-2442, online) in a paper effectively published in its definitive form on 13 March 2012 as an online PDF document, still with preliminary pagination ([1]–4) and the watermark “preprint”. When the printed version was published on 26 April 2012, the online document was repaginated ([95]–98) and the watermark removed. A correct citation of the name is: E. antalyensis C. Vural in Ann. Bot. Fenn. 49 (online): 95. 13 Mar 2012.
30.4.
(gjV9xc)
The content of a particular electronic publication may not be altered after it is effectively published. Any such alterations are not themselves effectively published and have no effect on the original publication. Corrections or revisions must be issued separately to be effectively published. Electronic material that has been effectively published remains effectively published even if retracted.
Ex. 8.
(RHUZZN)
Bauhinia saksuwaniae Mattapha & al. was effectively published in a paper first placed online on 11 December 2013 as a PDF document accessible through the website of the
Nordic Journal of Botany (ISSN 1756-1051, online,
https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1756-1051.2013.00102.x). That paper was later declared as “retracted” by the publisher and has not appeared in the printed version of the journal (ISSN 0107-055X, print). Despite the retraction, the paper remains effectively published under Art. 29 and 30 and the species name remains validly published.
30.5.
(y2hzZh)
Publication by indelible autograph before 1 January 1953 is effective. Indelible autograph produced on or after that date is not effectively published.
30.6.
(rNF0l8)
For the purpose of Art. 30.5, indelible autograph is handwritten material reproduced by some mechanical or graphic process (such as lithography, offset, or metallic etching).
Ex. 9.
(uSTmKH)
Léveillé, Flore du Kouy Tchéou (1914–1915), is a work lithographed from a handwritten text.
Ex. 10.
(4tvGMZ)
Catalogus plantarum hispanicarum … ab A. Blanco lectarum (Webb & Heldreich, Paris, Jul 1850, folio) was effectively published as an indelible autograph catalogue.
Ex. 11.
(Sz4nAQ)
The Journal of the International Conifer Preservation Society, vol. 5[1]. 1997 (“1998”), consists of duplicated sheets of typewritten text with handwritten additions and corrections in several places. The handwritten portions are not effectively published because they are indelible autograph published after 1 January 1953. Intended new combinations (e.g. “Abies koreana var. yuanbaoshanensis”, p. 53) for which the basionym reference is handwritten are not validly published. The entirely handwritten account of a new taxon (p. 61: name, Latin description, statement of type) is not effectively published.
Ex. 12.
(E0uSsY)
The generic designation “Lindenia” was handwritten in ink by Bentham in the margin of copies of a published but not yet distributed fascicle of the Plantae hartwegianae (p. 84. 1841) to replace the struck-out name Siphonia Benth., which he had discovered was a later homonym of Siphonia Rich. ex Schreb. (Gen. Pl.: 656. 1791). Although the fascicle was then distributed, the handwritten portion was not itself reproduced by mechanical or graphic process and is not therefore effectively published.
30.7.
(pYqU15)
Publication on or after 1 January 1953 in trade catalogues or non-scientific newspapers, and on or after 1 January 1973 in seed-exchange lists, does not constitute effective publication.
30.8.
(LH6xQX)
The distribution on or after 1 January 1953 of printed matter accompanying specimens does not constitute effective publication.
i
Note 2.
(p0DMYX)
If the printed matter is also distributed independently of the specimens, it is effectively published.
Ex. 13.
(b8IKse)
The printed labels of Fuckel’s Fungi rhenani exsiccati (1863–1874) are effectively published even though not independently issued. The labels antedate Fuckel’s subsequent accounts (e.g. in Jahrb. Nassauischen Vereins Naturk. 23–24. 1870).
Ex. 14.
(CSBFTy)
Vězda’s Lichenes selecti exsiccati (1960–1995) were issued with printed labels that were also distributed as printed fascicles; the latter are effectively published, and nomenclatural novelties appearing in Vězda’s labels are to be cited from the fascicles.
30.9.
(DYg5Oi)
Publication on or after 1 January 1953 of an independent non-serial work stated to be a thesis submitted to a university or other institute of education for the purpose of obtaining a degree does not constitute effective publication unless the work includes an explicit statement (referring to the requirements of the Code for effective publication) or other internal evidence that it is regarded as an effective publication by its author or publisher.
i
Note 3.
(cKwncL)
The presence of an International Standard Book Number (ISBN) or a statement of the name of the printer, publisher, or distributor in the original printed version is regarded as internal evidence that the work was intended to be effectively published.
Ex. 15.
(XUtLaS)
“Meclatis in Clematis; yellow flowering Clematis species – Systematic studies in Clematis L. (Ranunculaceae), inclusive of cultonomic aspects”, a “Proefschrift ter verkrijging van de graad van doctor … van Wageningen Universiteit [Dissertation to obtain the degree of doctor … from Wageningen University]” by Brandenburg, was effectively published on 8 June 2000 because it has the ISBN 90-5808-237-7.
Ex. 16.
(QWYUgK)
The thesis “Comparative investigations on the life-histories and reproduction of some species in the siphoneous green algal genera Bryopsis and Derbesia” by Rietema, submitted to Rijksuniversiteit te Groningen in 1975, is stated to have been printed (“Druk”) by Verenigde Reproduktie Bedrijven, Groningen and was therefore effectively published.
Ex. 17.
(KREMlL)
The dissertation “Die Gattung Mycena s.l.” by Rexer, submitted to the Eberhard-Karls-Universität Tübingen, was effectively published in 1994 because it includes the statement “Druck [Printing]: Zeeb-Druck, Tübingen 7 (Hagelloch)”, referring to a commercial printer. The generic name Roridomyces Rexer and the names of new species in Mycena, such as M. taiwanensis Rexer, are therefore validly published.
Ex. 18.
(QccPpM)
The thesis by Demoulin, “Le genre Lycoperdon en Europe et en Amérique du Nord” (1971), was not effectively published because it does not contain internal evidence that it is regarded as such. Even if photocopies of it can be found in some libraries, names of new species of Lycoperdon, e.g. L. americanum Demoulin, L. cokeri Demoulin, and L. estonicum Demoulin, introduced there, were validly published in the effectively published paper “Espèces nouvelles ou méconnues du genre Lycoperdon (Gastéromycètes)” (Demoulin in Lejeunia, ser. 2, 62: 1–28. 1972).
Ex. 19.
(4YxUIJ)
The dissertation by Funk, “The Systematics of Montanoa Cerv. (Asteraceae)”, submitted to the Ohio State University in 1980, was not effectively published because it does not contain internal evidence that it is regarded as such. The same applies to facsimile copies of the dissertation printed from microfiche and distributed, on demand, from 1980 onward, by University Microfilms, Ann Arbor. The name Montanoa imbricata V. A. Funk, introduced in the dissertation, was validly published in the effectively published paper “The systematics of Montanoa (Asteraceae, Heliantheae)” (Funk in Mem. New York Bot. Gard. 36: 1–133. 1982).
Ex. 20.
(EBIrgW)
The dissertation “Revision der südafrikanischen Astereengattungen Mairia und Zyrphelis” submitted in 1990 by Ursula Zinnecker-Wiegand to the Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität München (University of Munich) is not effectively published because it does not include an ISBN, the name of any printer or publisher or distributor, or any statement that it was intended to be effectively published under the Code, even though about 50 copies were distributed to other public libraries and all the other formalities for the publication of new taxa were met. The designations in the thesis became validly published names in the effectively published paper by Ortiz & Zinnecker-Wiegand (in Taxon 60: 1194–1198. 2011).
(8iaq79)
Recommendation 30A
30A.1.
(mAbbGw)
Preliminary and final versions of the same electronic publication should be clearly indicated as such when they are first issued. The phrase “Version of Record” should only be used to indicate a final version in which the content will not change.
30A.2.
(JgkyUO)
To facilitate citation, final versions of electronic publications should contain final pagination.
30A.3.
(amEvai)
Authors and editors are strongly recommended to include page numbers on the actual pages of publications, such that if electronic publications are printed, these page numbers are visible.
30A.4.
(eChgke)
It is strongly recommended that authors avoid publishing nomenclatural novelties in ephemeral printed matter of any kind, in particular printed matter that is multiplied in restricted and uncertain numbers, in which the permanence of the text may be limited, for which effective publication in terms of number of copies is not obvious, or that is unlikely to reach the general public. Authors should also avoid publishing nomenclatural novelties in popular periodicals, in abstracting journals, or on correction slips.
Ex. 1.
(ZQiP8r)
Kartesz provided an unpaginated printed insert titled “Nomenclatural innovations” to accompany the electronic version (1.0) of the Synthesis of the North American flora produced on compact disk (CD-ROM, which is not effectively published under Art. 30.1). This insert, which is effectively published under Art. 29–31, is the place of valid publication of 41 new combinations, which also appear on the disk, in an item authored by Kartesz: “A synonymized checklist and atlas with biological attributes for the vascular flora of the United States, Canada, and Greenland” (e.g. Dichanthelium hirstii (Swallen) Kartesz, Synth. N. Amer. Fl., Nomencl. Innov.: [1]. Aug 1999). Kartesz’s procedure is not to be recommended, as the insert is unlikely to be permanently stored and catalogued in libraries and so reach the general public.
30A.5.
(OSQfJW)
To aid availability through time and place, authors publishing nomenclatural novelties should give preference to periodicals that regularly publish taxonomic work, or else they should send a copy of a publication (printed or electronic) to an indexing centre appropriate to the taxonomic group. When such publications exist only as printed matter, they should be deposited in at least ten, but preferably more, generally accessible libraries throughout the world.
30A.6.
(P81Hii)
Authors and editors are encouraged to mention nomenclatural novelties in the summary or abstract, or list them in an index in the publication.
(Cs3gyJ)
Date of effective publication
31.1.
(PD0rzq)
The date of effective publication is the date on which the printed matter or electronic material became available as defined in Art. 29 and 30. In the absence of proof establishing some other date, the one appearing in the printed matter or electronic material must be accepted as correct.
Ex. 1.
(A4tasy)
Individual parts of Willdenow’s Species plantarum were published as follows: 1(1), Jun 1797; 1(2), Jul 1798; 2(1), Mar 1799; 2(2), Dec 1799; 3(1), 1800; 3(2), Nov 1802; 3(3), Apr–Dec 1803; 4(1), 1805; 4(2), 1806; these dates are presently accepted as the dates of effective publication (see Stafleu & Cowan in Regnum Veg. 116: 303. 1988).
Ex. 2.
(yvKGsq)
Fries first published Lichenes arctoi in 1860 as an independently paginated preprint, which antedates the identical content published in a journal (Nova Acta Regiae Soc. Sci. Upsal., ser. 3, 3: 103–398. 1861).
Ex. 3.
(NtTfQg)
Diatom Research 2(2) is dated December 1987. Nevertheless, Williams & Round, the authors of a paper in that issue, stated in a subsequent paper (in Diatom Res. 3: 265. 1988) that the actual date of publication had been 18 February 1988. Under Art. 31.1, their statement is acceptable as proof establishing another date of publication for issue 2(2) of the journal.
Ex. 4.
(q7lpMh)
The paper in which Ceratocystis omanensis Al-Subhi & al. is described was available online in final form on Science Direct on 7 November 2005 but was not effectively published (Art. 29 Note 1). It was distributed in print (in Mycol. Res. 110(2): 237–245) on 7 March 2006, which is the date of effective publication.
Ex. 5.
(BHJStX)
On its last page, Index secundus seminum, quae hortus botanicus Imperialis petropolitanus pro mutua commutatione offert […], a seed list co-authored by Fischer and Meyer and issued from Saint Petersburg, is dated “25 Декабря [December] 1835”, which belongs to the Julian calendar then observed in Russia. In the Gregorian calendar, this date corresponds to 6 January 1836, which has been accepted as the date of effective publication (see Stafleu & Cowan in Regnum. Veg. 94: 836. 1976).
31.2.
(arUDgo)
When a publication is issued in parallel as electronic material and printed matter, both must be treated as effectively published on the same date unless the dates of the versions are different as determined by Art. 31.1.
Ex. 6.
(YU4dZe)
The paper in which Solanum baretiae was validly published was placed online in final form, as a PDF document, on 3 January 2012 in the journal PhytoKeys (ISSN 1314-2003). The printed version (ISSN 1314-2011) of the corresponding issue of PhytoKeys, with identical pagination and content, is undated but demonstrably later because it includes a paper dated 6 January 2012. A correct citation of the name is: S. baretiae Tepe in PhytoKeys 8 (online): 39. 3 Jan 2012.
31.3.
(ZQuwQF)
When separates from periodicals or other works placed on sale are issued in advance, the date on the separate is accepted as the date of effective publication unless there is evidence that it is erroneous.
Ex. 7.
(hVNXJY)
The names of the Selaginella species published by Hieronymus (in Hedwigia 51: 241–272. 1911) were effectively published on 15 October 1911 because the volume in which the paper appeared, though dated 1912, states (p. ii) that the separate appeared on that date.
Ex. 8.
(LMa0aY)
Plantae novae thurberianae […], a publication authored by Asa Gray and dated 1854, is a preprint from the journal Memoirs of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, new series, volume 5, dated 1855 (see Stafleu & Cowan in Regnum Veg. 94: 991. 1976). The date appearing on the preprint is accepted as the date of effective publication.
(R0Mv5T)
Recommendation 31A
31A.1.
(LRZ4bP)
The date on which the publisher or publisher’s agent delivers printed matter to one of the usual carriers for distribution to the public should be accepted as its date of effective publication.
(BMBdVS)
Recommendation 31B
31B.1.
(MLMUkz)
The date of effective publication should be clearly indicated as precisely as possible (day, month, year) within the printed matter or electronic material. In printed matter not already published as electronic material, the date should conform to Rec. 31A.1. When a publication is issued in parts, this date should be indicated in each part.
(QK5d4e)
Recommendation 31C
31C.1.
(4PA3YT)
On reprints of papers published in a periodical, the name of the periodical, volume and part number, original pagination, and date (day, month, year) of publication should be indicated.
(YAaQS5)
Valid publication
(cbmTFP)
Valid publication in general
(NMIVBr)
General requirements for valid publication
32.1.
(9u2YDk)
To be validly published, a name of a taxon (autonyms excepted) must:
(a) be effectively published (Art. 29–31) on or after the starting-point date of the respective group (Art. 13.1 and F.1.1); and
(b) be composed only of letters of the Latin alphabet, except as provided in Art. 23.3, 60.4, 60.7, and 60.12–15; and
(c) have a form that complies with the provisions of Art. 16–27 (but see Art. 21.4 and 24.4) and Art. H.6 and H.7 (see also Art. 61).
i
Note 1.
(v5K4HJ)
The use of typographical signs, numerals, or letters of a non-Latin alphabet in the arrangement of taxa (such as Greek letters α, β, γ, etc. in the arrangement of varieties under a species) does not prevent valid publication because rank-denoting terms and devices are not part of the name.
32.2.
(YAP8Oj)
Names above the rank of species are validly published even when they or their epithets were published with an improper Latin termination but otherwise in accordance with this Code; they are to be changed to accord with Art. 16–19 and 21, without change of authorship or date. Names of species or infraspecific taxa are validly published even when their epithets were published with an improper Latin or transcribed Greek termination but otherwise in accordance with this Code; they are to be changed to accord with Art. 23 and 24, without change of authorship or date (see also Art. 60.8).
Ex. 1.
(DzufAu)
The epithet in Cassia “*” ‘Chamaecristae’ L. (Sp. Pl.: 379. 1753), the name of a subdivision of a genus, is a noun in the nominative plural, derived from “Chamaecrista”, a pre-Linnaean generic designation. Under Art. 21.2, however, this epithet must have the same form as a generic name, i.e. a noun in the nominative singular (Art. 20.1). The name is to be changed accordingly and is cited as Cassia [unranked] Chamaecrista L.
i
Note 2.
(hRF89y)
Improper terminations of otherwise correctly formed names or epithets may result from the use of an inflectional form other than that required by Art. 32.2.
Ex. 2.
(EzaAm1)
Senecio sect. Synotii Benth. (in Bentham & Hooker, Gen. Pl. 2: 448. 1873) was validly published with reference to certain species that constituted a section (“speciebus tamen nonnullis Asiaticis sectionem subdistinctam (Synotios) constituentibus [in some Asian species, however, constituting a subdistinct section (Synotios)]”). Although the sectional epithet was written as an adjective in the accusative plural (because it was a direct object), it is to be cited in the nominative plural, S. sect. Synotii, as required by Art. 21.2.
32.3.
(qbfkdy)
Autonyms (Art. 6.8) are accepted as validly published names, dating from the publication in which they were established (see Art. 22.3 and 26.3), whether or not they actually appear in that publication.
32.4.
(hdZMn4)
To be validly published, names of hybrids at specific or lower rank with Latin epithets must comply with the same rules as names of non-hybrid taxa at the same rank.
Ex. 3.
(c6e9np)
“Nepeta ×faassenii” (Bergmans, Vaste Pl. Rotsheesters, ed. 2: 544. 1939, with a description in Dutch; Lawrence in Gentes Herb. 8: 64. 1949, with a diagnosis in English) is not validly published because it is not accompanied by or associated with a Latin description or diagnosis (Art. 39.1). The name Nepeta ×faassenii Bergmans ex Stearn (in J. Roy. Hort. Soc. 75: 405. 1950) is validly published because it is accompanied by a Latin description.
Ex. 4.
(2Prtyq)
“Rheum ×cultorum” (Thorsrud & Reisaeter, Norske Plantenavn: 95. 1948) is a nomen nudum and is not therefore validly published (Art. 38.1(a)).
Ex. 5.
(K8rEOn)
“Fumaria ×salmonii” (Druce, List Brit. Pl.: 4. 1908) is not validly published (Art. 38.1(a)) because only the presumed parentage (F. densiflora × F. officinalis) was stated.
i
Note 3.
(EbUOxy)
For names of hybrids at the rank of genus or of a subdivision of a genus, see Art. H.9.
i
Note 4.
(5jIDqM)
For valid publication of names of organisms originally assigned to a group not covered by this Code, see Art. 45.
(bQ9uLE)
Recommendation 32A
32A.1.
(vMw1TB)
When publishing nomenclatural novelties, authors should indicate this by a phrase including the word “novus” or its abbreviation, e.g. genus novum (gen. nov., new genus), species nova (sp. nov., new species), combinatio nova (comb. nov., new combination), nomen novum (nom. nov., replacement name), or status novus (stat. nov., name at new rank).
(GjYI0X)
Date of valid publication
33.1.
(btpBhY)
The date of a name is that of its valid publication. When the various conditions for valid publication are not simultaneously fulfilled, the date is that on which the last is fulfilled. However, the name must always be explicitly accepted in the place of its valid publication. When the various conditions for valid publication are not simultaneously fulfilled, a name is not validly published unless reference is given to the place(s) where these requirements were previously fulfilled. On or after 1 January 1973, this reference must be full and direct (Art. 41.5; see also Art. 41.7).
Ex. 1.
(fCgUCn)
“Clypeola minor” first appeared in the Linnaean thesis Flora monspeliensis (p. 21, 1756), in a list of names preceded by numerals but without an explanation of the meaning of these numerals and without any other descriptive matter; when the thesis was reprinted in vol. 4 of the Amoenitates academicae (1759), a statement was added (p. 475) explaining that the numbers referred to earlier descriptions published in Magnol’s Botanicum monspeliense (1676). However, “Clypeola minor” was absent from the reprint and was not therefore validly published.
Ex. 2.
(sfA6if)
When proposing “Graphis meridionalis” as a new species, Nakanishi (in J. Sci. Hiroshima Univ., Ser. B(2), 11: 75. 1966) provided a Latin description but did not designate a type. Graphis meridionalis M. Nakan. was validly published only when Nakanishi (l.c.: 265. 1967) designated the holotype of the name and provided a reference to his previous publication.
Ex. 3.
(sRD5Eu)
“Hypericum taygeteum” (Quézel & Contandriopoulos in Naturalia Monspel., Sér. Bot. 16: 121. 1965) was not a validly published name because, although a Latin diagnosis was provided, no type was indicated. Hypericum taygeteum Quézel & Contandr. was validly published when the same authors (in Taxon 16: 240. 1967) indicated the type and referred to three of their previous publications but without specifying in which publication and on which page the description of H. taygeteum appears. Although this reference was not full and direct, before 1973 it was sufficient to validate the name under Art. 33.1.
Ex. 4.
(L7rw8c)
“Passiflora salpoense” (Leiva & Tantalean in Arnaldoa 22: 39. 2015) was not validly published because, although a single gathering, S. Leiva & M. Leiva 5806, was designated as “tipo”, it was specified as being conserved in five herbaria, contrary to Art. 40.5. The name P. salpoensis S. Leiva & Tantalean (again as ‘salpoense’, but correctable to salpoensis under Art. 23.5 and 32.2) was validly published only when the same authors (in Arnaldoa 23: 628. 2016) designated the same gathering as “lectotipo” in a single herbarium, HAO, with “isolectotipos” in CORD, F, MO, and HUT (correctable, respectively, to holotype and isotypes under Art. 9.10), while providing a full and direct reference to their previously published (l.c. 2015) validating English diagnosis of the species.
33.2.
(yJrS5K)
A correction of the original spelling of a name (see Art. 32.2 and 60) does not affect its date.
Ex. 5.
(bxeSaX)
The correction of the erroneous spelling of Gluta ‘benghas’ L. (Mant. Pl.: 293. 1771) to G. renghas L. does not affect the date of the name even though the correction dates from 1883 (Engler in Candolle & Candolle, Monogr. Phan. 4: 225).
(W5hqa2)
Suppressed works
34.1.
(Y7qruf)
New names at specified ranks included in publications or parts thereof listed as suppressed works (opera utique oppressa; App. I) are not validly published and no nomenclatural act1 within the work associated with any name at the specified ranks is effective. Proposals for the addition of publications or parts thereof to App. I must be submitted to the General Committee, which will refer them for examination to the specialist committees for the various taxonomic groups (see Rec. 34A.1, Div. III Prov. 2.2, 7.10(b), 7.11, and 8.13(a); see also Art. 14.12 and 56.2).
i
Note 1.
(5QSed9)
For the purpose of Art. 34.1, a “work” is normally a separately published book or a numbered part or supplement of a journal.
Ex. 1.
(TIadcb)
In the suppressed work (see App. I) of Motyka, Porosty, Lecanoraceae (3: 97. 1996), one of three specimens of Lecanora dissipata Nyl. (in Bull. Soc. Bot. France 13: 368. 1866) in Nylander’s herbarium in H was designated as the lectotype for that name. This type designation is not effective and therefore has no nomenclatural status.
34.2.
(W5mSAv)
When a proposal for the suppression of a publication or part thereof has been approved by the General Committee after study by the specialist committees for the taxonomic groups concerned, suppression of that publication or part is authorized subject to the decision of a later International Botanical Congress (see also Art. 14.15, 38.5, 53.4, and 56.3) and takes retroactive effect.
(qrwBFY)
Recommendation 34A
34A.1.
(QT5KRN)
When a proposal for the suppression of a publication or part thereof under Art. 34.1 has been referred to the appropriate specialist committees for study, authors should follow existing usage of names as far as possible pending the General Committee’s recommendation on the proposal (see also Rec. 14A.1 and 56A.1).
34A.2.
(7Xs916)
Individual papers or series of papers in regular issues of journals should not normally be considered as candidates for suppression.
(6yLArs)
Further requirements for valid publication
35.1.
(iia2s0)
A name of a taxon below the rank of genus is not validly published unless the name of the genus or species to which it is assigned is validly published at the same time or was validly published previously (but see Art. 13.4).
Ex. 1.
(TBuKo0)
Binary designations for six species of “Suaeda”, including “S. baccata” and “S. vera”, were published with descriptions and diagnoses by Forsskål (Fl. Aegypt.-Arab.: 69–71. 1775), but he provided no description or diagnosis for the genus; these were not therefore validly published names.
Ex. 2.
(G8vpn8)
Müller (in Flora 63: 286. 1880) published the new genus “Phlyctidia” with the species “P. hampeana n. sp.”, “P. boliviensis” (Phlyctis boliviensis Nyl.), “P. sorediiformis” (Phlyctis sorediiformis Kremp.), “P. brasiliensis” (Phlyctis brasiliensis Nyl.), and “P. andensis” (Phlyctis andensis Nyl.). However, the intended new binomials were not validly published in this place because the intended generic name “Phlyctidia” was not validly published; Müller gave no generic description or diagnosis but only a description and a diagnosis for one additional species, “P. hampeana”, and so did not validly publish “Phlyctidia” under Art. 38.6(b) because the genus was not monotypic (see Art. 38.7). Valid publication of the name Phlyctidia was by Müller (in Hedwigia 34: 141. 1895), who provided a short generic diagnosis and explicitly included only two species, the names of which, P. ludoviciensis Müll. Arg. and P. boliviensis (Nyl.) Müll. Arg., were also validly published in 1895.
i
Note 1.
(9J8QVJ)
Art. 35.1 applies also when specific and other epithets are published under words not to be regarded as names of genera or species (see Art. 20.4 and 23.7).
Ex. 3.
(i6WWQH)
The binary designation
“Anonymos aquatica” (Walter, Fl. Carol.: 230. 1788) is not a validly published name (see Art. 20 Ex. 7). The first validly published name for the species concerned is
Planera aquatica J. F. Gmel. (Syst. Nat. 2: 150. 1791). This name is not to be cited as
P. aquatica “(Walter) J. F. Gmel.”
Ex. 4.
(MKDVJG)
Despite the existence of the generic name
Scirpoides Ség. (Pl. Veron. 3: 73. 1754), the binary designation
“S. paradoxus” (Rottbøll, Descr. Pl. Rar.: 27. 1772) is not validly published because “Scirpoides”
in Rottbøll’s context was a word not intended as a generic name (see Art. 20 Ex. 8). The first validly published name for this species is
Fuirena umbellata Rottb. (Descr. Icon. Rar. Pl.: 70. 1773).
35.2.
(PaqxWo)
A combination (autonyms excepted) is not validly published unless the author definitely associates the final epithet with the name of the genus or species, or with its abbreviation (see Art. 60.15).
i
Note 2.
(TnIjlc)
This association can be achieved typographically by the position of the final epithet in the text, or by use of a symbol.
i
Note 3.
(VphKK0)
When an adjectival epithet is definitely associated with an abbreviation that can stand for two or more generic names differing in gender, the intended association can be ascertained through the gender of the epithet and result in a validly published new combination.
Ex. 5.
(VvFYka)
Combinations validly published. In Linnaeus’s Species plantarum, the placing of the epithet in the margin opposite the name of the genus clearly associates the epithet with the name of the genus. The same result is attained in Miller’s The gardeners dictionary, ed. 8, by the inclusion of the epithet in parentheses immediately after the name of the genus, in Steudel’s Nomenclator botanicus by the arrangement of the epithets in a list headed by the name of the genus, and in general by any typographical device that associates an epithet with a particular name of a genus or species.
Ex. 6.
(7JNhdK)
Combinations not validly published. Rafinesque’s statement under Blephilia that “Le type de ce genre est la Monarda ciliata Linn. [The type of this genus is Monarda ciliata Linn.]” (in J. Phys. Chim. Hist. Nat. Arts 89: 98. 1819) does not constitute valid publication of the combination B. ciliata because Rafinesque did not definitely associate the epithet ciliata with the generic name Blephilia. Similarly, the combination Eulophus peucedanoides is not to be attributed to Bentham & Hooker (Gen. Pl. 1: 885. 1867) based on their listing of “Cnidium peucedanoides, H. B. et K.” under Eulophus.
Ex. 7.
(Sboi3K)
Erioderma polycarpum subsp. verruculosum Vain. (in Acta Soc. Fauna Fl. Fenn. 7(1): 202. 1890) is validly published because Vainio clearly linked the subspecific epithet to the specific epithet by an asterisk.
Ex. 8.
(mFffxG)
When Tuckerman (in Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts 12: 168. 1877) described “Erioderma velligerum, sub-sp. nov.”, he stated that his new subspecies was very near to E. chilense, from which he provided distinguishing features. However, because he did not definitely associate the subspecific epithet with that species name, he did not validly publish “E. chilense subsp. velligerum”.
Ex. 9.
(pTaTtK)
Andropogon brevifolius Sw. was assigned to Schizachyrium Nees (in Martius, Fl. Bras. Enum. Pl. 2(1): 332. 1829) when Nees described that genus as new: “Hujusce generis species, praeter enumeratas, sunt et Andropogon brevifolius, Sw. (Pollinia Spr.) … [Species of this genus, besides those enumerated, are also Andropogon brevifolius, Sw. (Pollinia Spr.) …]”. However, Nees did not associate the final epithet of the species name with Schizachyrium and did not therefore validly publish a new combination. Schizachyrium brevifolium (Sw.) Nees ex Buse (in Miquel, Pl. Jungh.: 359. 1854) was validly published when Buse wrote “… a Schiz. brevifolio Nees (i.e. Andr. brevifolio Sw.) …”, thereby referring to the basionym and definitely associating the final epithet with Schizachyrium.
Ex. 10.
(T8xjOA)
In “Chloris Novae Hollandiae”, a catalogue of “hitherto published” names for Australian plants (in Ann. Bot. (König & Sims) 2: 504–532. 1806), species names are listed with their place of publication, preceded in several cases by the name of another genus in parentheses. For example, the listing includes “(Myoporum) Pogonia debilis. Andrews’s reposit. 212” and a further statement “These plants belong to the genus Myoporum …” (p. 525). Nevertheless, none of the potential new combinations indicated in this way is validly published due to the lack of definite association of the parenthetical generic name with the specific epithet.
(gS7QdM)
Names not accepted by their authors, alternative names
36.1.
(e315py)
A name is not validly published when it is not accepted by its author(s) in the original publication, for example:
(a) when it is merely proposed in anticipation of the future acceptance of the taxon concerned, or of a particular circumscription, position, or rank of the taxon (so-called provisional name); or
(b) when it is merely cited as a synonym.
These provisions do not apply to names published with a question mark or other indication of taxonomic doubt, but accepted by their author(s).
Ex. 1.
(P7YRzP)
“Sebertia”, proposed by Pierre (ms.) for a genus of one species, was not validly published by Baillon (in Bull. Mens. Soc. Linn. Paris 2: 945. 1891) because he did not accept the generic name. He gave a description of the species “Sebertia acuminata Pierre” but referred it to the genus Sersalisia R. Br., as “Sersalisia ? acuminata”, which he thereby validly published as Sersalisia acuminata Baill., despite his use of a question mark. The name Sebertia was validly published by Engler (in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam., Nachtr. 1: 280. 1897).
Ex. 2.
(0Hd3h9)
The designations listed in the left-hand column of the Linnaean thesis Herbarium amboinense defended by Stickman (1754) were not names accepted by Linnaeus upon publication and are not validly published.
Ex. 3.
(JHptTC)
The name Coralloides gorgonina Bory was validly published in a paper by Flörke (in Mag. Neuesten Entdeck. Gesammten Naturk. Ges. Naturf. Freunde Berlin 3: 125. 1809) even though Flörke did not accept the taxon as a new species. At Bory’s request, Flörke included Bory’s diagnosis (and species name) making Bory the publishing author as defined in Art. 46.6. The acceptance or otherwise of the name by Flörke is not therefore relevant for valid publication.
Ex. 4.
(5JXRwS)
Carrière (in Fl. Serres Jard. Eur. 8: 292. 1853) stated “On cultive encore dans les jardins, depuis plusieurs années, sous le nom de Weigela splendens, une autre espèce de Diervilla, voisine par le port du D. canadensis, Willd. [For several years now, another species of Diervilla has been cultivated in the gardens under the name of Weigela splendens, similar in appearance to D. canadensis, Willd.]” Because Carrière did not accept “Weigela splendens” and did not associate the specific epithet splendens with the generic name Diervilla (see Art. 35.2), neither “Diervilla splendens” nor “Weigela splendens” was validly published. Subsequently, D. ×splendens G. Kirchn. (in Petzold & Kirchner, Arbor. Muscav.: 442. 1864) was validly published.
Ex. 5.
(uyJulH)
(a) The designation “Conophyton”, suggested by Haworth (Revis. Pl. Succ.: 82. 1821) for Mesembryanthemum sect. Minima Haw. (l.c.: 81. 1821) in the words “If this section proves to be a genus, the name of Conophyton would be apt”, was not a validly published generic name because Haworth did not accept it but merely proposed “Conophyton” in anticipation of its future acceptance. The name was validly published as Conophytum N. E. Br. (in Gard. Chron., ser. 3, 71: 198. 1922).
Ex. 6.
(EkiepO)
(a) “Pteridospermaexylon” and “P. theresiae” were published by Greguss (in Földt. Közl. 82: 171. 1952) for a genus and species of fossil wood. Because Greguss explicitly stated “Vorläufig benenne ich es mit dem Namen … [provisionally I designate it by the name …]”, these are provisional names and as such are not validly published.
Ex. 7.
(5fj6NP)
(a) The designation “Stereocaulon subdenudatum” proposed by Havaas (in Univ. Bergen Årbok, Naturvidensk. Rekke. 1954(12): 13, 20. 1954) is not validly published, even though it was presented as a new species with a Latin diagnosis, because on both pages it was indicated to be “ad int. [ad interim, for the time being]”.
Ex. 8.
(hF9FDK)
(b) “Ornithogalum undulatum Hort. Bouch.” was not validly published by Kunth (Enum. Pl. 4: 348. 1843) when he cited it as a synonym under Myogalum boucheanum Kunth; the correct combination under Ornithogalum L. was validly published later: O. boucheanum (Kunth) Asch. (in Verh. Bot. Vereins Prov. Brandenburg 8: 165. 1866).
Ex. 9.
(msJgm1)
(b) The intended new combination “Henckelia membranacea (Bedd.) Janeesha & Nampy comb. nov.” was included by Janeesha & Nampy (in Rheedea 30: 77. 2020) in the synonymy of H. missionis (Wall. ex R. Br.) A. Weber & B. L. Burtt (in Beitr. Biol. Pflanzen 70: 350. 1998). “Henckelia membranacea” was not therefore validly published.
Ex. 10.
(hUmkzO)
Besenna A. Rich. and B. anthelmintica A. Rich. (Tent. Fl. Abyss. 1: 253. 1847) were simultaneously published by Richard, both with a question mark (“Besenna ?” and “Besenna anthelmintica ? Nob.”). Richard’s uncertainty was due to the absence of flowers or fruits for examination, but the names were nonetheless accepted by him, with Besenna listed as such (i.e. not italicized) in the index (p. [469]).
36.2.
(04u624)
A name is not validly published by the mere mention of the subordinate taxa included in the taxon concerned.
Ex. 11.
(BXDBpO)
The family designation “Rhaptopetalaceae” was not validly published by Pierre (in Bull. Mens. Soc. Linn. Paris 2: 1296. May 1897), who merely mentioned the constituent genera, Brazzeia Baill., Rhaptopetalum Oliv., and “Scytopetalum”, but gave no description or diagnosis; a description of the family was published under the name Scytopetalaceae Engl. (in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam., Nachtr. 1: 242. Oct 1897).
Ex. 12.
(3PRoWk)
The generic designation “Ganymedes” was not validly published by Salisbury (in Trans. Hort. Soc. London 1: 353–355. 1812), who merely mentioned three included species but supplied no generic description or diagnosis.
36.3.
(YEwbTH)
When, on or after 1 January 1953, two or more different names based on the same type are accepted simultaneously for the same taxon by at least one author in common in the same publication (so-called alternative names), none of them, if new, is validly published. This rule does not apply in those cases where the same combination is simultaneously used at different ranks, either for infraspecific taxa or for subdivisions of a genus (see Rec. 22A.1, 22A.2, and 26A.1–3), nor where suprageneric names formed from the same generic name are simultaneously used at different ranks (see Rec. 19A.1 and 19A.2), nor to names provided for in Art. F.8.1.
Ex. 13.
(S7QiNo)
The species of Brosimum Sw. described by Ducke (in Arch. Jard. Bot. Rio de Janeiro 3: 23–29. 1922) were published with alternative names under Piratinera Aubl. added in a footnote (pp. 23–24), in which Ducke indicated acceptability of these names under the competing (alternative) American Code. The publication of both sets of names is valid because it occurred before 1 January 1953.
Ex. 14.
(biMKyv)
“Euphorbia jaroslavii” (Poljakov in Bot. Mater. Gerb. Bot. Inst. Komarova Akad. Nauk SSSR 15: 155. 1953) was published with an alternative designation, “Tithymalus jaroslavii”. Neither was validly published. However, one name, Euphorbia yaroslavii (with a differently transcribed initial letter), was validly published by Poljakov (in Bot. Mater. Gerb. Bot. Inst. Komarova Akad. Nauk SSSR 21: 484. 1961), who provided a full and direct reference to the earlier publication and rejected the assignment to Tithymalus.
Ex. 15.
(d8ys0f)
Hitchcock (in Univ. Wash. Publ. Biol. 17(1): 507–508. 1969) used the name Bromus inermis subsp. pumpellianus (Scribn.) Wagnon and provided a full and direct reference to its basionym, B. pumpellianus Scribn. (in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 15: 9. 1888). Within that subspecies, he recognized varieties, one of which he named B. inermis var. pumpellianus (without an author citation but clearly based on the same basionym and type). In so doing, he met the requirements for valid publication of B. inermis var. pumpellianus (Scribn.) C. L. Hitchc.
(ENGwHc)
Requirement of indication of rank
37.1.
(Tn5Vsy)
A name published on or after 1 January 1953 without a clear indication of the rank of the taxon concerned is not validly published.
37.2.
(0fMIyQ)
For suprageneric names published on or after 1 January 1887, the use of one of the terminations1 specified in Art. 16.3, 17.1, 18.1, 19.1, and 19.3 is accepted as an indication of the corresponding rank, unless this:
(a) would conflict with the explicitly designated rank of the taxon (which takes precedence); or
(b) would result in a rank sequence contrary to Art. 5 (in which case Art. 37.7 applies); or
(c) would result in a rank sequence in which the same rank-denoting term occurs at more than one hierarchical position.
Ex. 1.
(7mEtMG)
Jussieu (in Mém. Mus. Hist. Nat. 12: 497. 1827) proposed Zanthoxyleae without specifying the rank. Although he used the present termination for tribe (-eae), that name is unranked because it was published before 1887. Zanthoxyleae Dumort. (Anal. Fam. Pl.: 45. 1829), however, is the name of a tribe because Dumortier specified its rank.
Ex. 2.
(yUorIy)
Nakai (Chosakuronbun Mokuroku [Ord. Fam. Trib. Nov.]. 1943) validly published the names Parnassiales, Lophiolaceae, Ranzanioideae, and Urospatheae. He indicated the respective ranks of order, family, subfamily, and tribe, by use of their terminations even though he did not mention these ranks explicitly.
37.3.
(5y8rCL)
A name published before 1 January 1953 without a clear indication of its rank is validly published provided that all other requirements for valid publication are fulfilled; it is, however, inoperative in questions of priority except for homonymy (see Art. 53.3). If it is the name of a new taxon, it may serve as a basionym or replaced synonym for subsequent new combinations, names at new rank, or replacement names at definite ranks.
Ex. 3.
(5WxtNC)
The unranked groups “Soldanellae”, “Sepincoli”, “Occidentales”, etc., were published under Convolvulus L. by House (in Muhlenbergia 4: 50. 1908). The names C. [unranked] Soldanellae House, etc., are validly published but have no status in questions of priority except for purposes of homonymy under Art. 53.3.
Ex. 4.
(fyjdkd)
In Carex L., the epithet Scirpinae was used in the name of an unranked subdivision of a genus by Tuckerman (Enum. Meth. Caric.: 8. 1843); this taxon was assigned sectional rank by Kükenthal (in Engler, Pflanzenr. IV. 20 (Heft 38): 81. 1909) and its name is then cited as Carex sect. Scirpinae (Tuck.) Kük. (C. [unranked] Scirpinae Tuck.).
Ex. 5.
(1IcYm6)
Loesener published Geranium andicola “Var. vel forma α. longipedicellata” (in Bull. Herb. Boissier, ser. 2, 3: 93. 1903) with an ambiguous indication of infraspecific rank. The name is correctly cited as G. andicola [unranked] longipedicellatum Loes. The epithet was used in a subsequent combination, G. longipedicellatum (Loes.) R. Knuth (in Engler, Pflanzenr. IV. 129 (Heft 53): 171. 1912).
37.4.
(0jmjbO)
If in one whole publication (Art. 37.6), before 1 January 1890, only one infraspecific rank is admitted, it is considered to be that of variety unless this would be contrary to the author’s statements in the same publication.
37.5.
(ptSzuI)
If in one whole publication (Art. 37.6) no general statement is made by the author(s) on the different infraspecific ranks used in that publication, statements on ranks associated with individual infraspecific names can be used instead to assign rank throughout the publication as long as they do not result in misplaced terms contrary to Art. 5 (see Art. 37.7).
37.6.
(cgnoXh)
In questions of indication of rank, all publications appearing under the same title and by the same author, such as different parts of a flora issued at different times (but not different editions of the same work), must be considered as a whole, and any statement made therein designating the rank of taxa included in the work must be considered as if it had been published together with the first instalment.
Ex. 6.
(oHdxqe)
In Link’s Handbuch (1829–1833) the rank-denoting term “O.” (ordo) was used in all three volumes. These names of orders cannot be considered as having been published as names of families (Art. 18.2) because the term family was used for Agaricaceae and Tremellaceae under the order Fungi in vol. 3 (pp. 272, 337; see Art. 18 Note 3). This applies to all three volumes of the Handbuch even though vol. 3 was published later (Jul–29 Sep 1833) than vol. 1 and 2 (4–11 Jul 1829).
37.7.
(tG6aHq)
A name is not validly published if it is given to a taxon of which the rank is at the same time denoted by a misplaced term, contrary to Art. 5. Such misplacements include, e.g., forms divided into varieties, species containing genera, and genera containing families or tribes (but see Art. F.4.1).
37.8.
(Ca4tKF)
Only those names published with rank-denoting terms that must be removed to achieve a proper sequence are to be regarded as not validly published. In cases where terms are switched, e.g. family-order, and a proper sequence can be achieved by removing either or both of the rank-denoting terms, names at neither rank are validly published unless one is a secondary rank (Art. 4.1) and one is a principal rank (Art. 3.1), e.g. family-genus-tribe, in which case only names published at the secondary rank are not validly published.
Ex. 7.
(MSo6Kl)
“Sectio Orontiaceae” (Brown, Prodr.: 337. 1810) is not a validly published name because Brown misapplied the term “sectio” to a rank higher than genus.
Ex. 8.
(uw1qpj)
“Tribus Involuta” and “tribus Brevipedunculata” (Huth in Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 20: 365, 368. 1895) are not validly published names because Huth misapplied the term “tribus” to a rank lower than section within the genus Delphinium.
Ex. 9.
(rZevhP)
Centaurea “Ser. I. Aplolepideae” and C. “Sect. I. Hyalaea” (Candolle, Prodr. 6: 565. 1838) are not validly published names because Candolle misapplied the term series to a rank higher than section within the genus Centaurea. Consequently, Hyalea Jaub. & Spach (Ill. Pl. Orient. 3: 19. 1847), based on “Centaureae Sectio I” in Candolle (l.c. 1838), was published as the name of a new genus.
i
Note 1.
(SpulV7)
Consecutive use of the same rank-denoting term in a taxonomic sequence does not represent misplaced rank-denoting terms.
37.9.
(IqdxXB)
Situations where the same or equivalent rank-denoting term is used at more than one non-consecutive position in the taxonomic sequence represent informal usage of rank-denoting terms. Names published with such rank-denoting terms are treated as unranked (see Art. 37.1 and 37.3; see also Art. 16 Note 1).
Ex. 10.
(fbLhr1)
Names published with the term “series” by Bentham & Hooker (Gen. Pl. 1862–1883) are treated as unranked because this term was used at seven different hierarchical positions in the taxonomic sequence. Therefore, the sequence in Rhynchospora (l.c. 3: 1058–1060. 1883) of genus-“series”-section does not contain a misplaced rank-denoting term.
(eglNEC)
Valid publication of names of new taxa
(H7VAM2)
Requirement of description, diagnosis, or illustration with analysis
38.1.
(fx3KUo)
To be validly published, a name of a new taxon (see Art. 6.9) must:
(a) be accompanied by a description or diagnosis of the taxon (see also Art. 38.8 and 38.9) or, if none is provided in the protologue, by a reference (see Art. 38.14) to a previously and effectively published description or diagnosis (except as provided in Art. 13.4 and H.9; see also Art. 14.9 and 14.14); and
(b) comply with the relevant provisions of Art. 32–45 and F.4–F.5.
i
Note 1.
(IYD7Uh)
An exception to Art. 38.1 is made for the generic names first published by Linnaeus in Species plantarum, ed. 1 (1753) and ed. 2 (1762–1763), which are treated as having been validly published in those works even though the validating descriptions were published later in Genera plantarum, ed. 5 (1754) and ed. 6 (1764), respectively (see Art. 13.4).
38.2.
(DRvc9e)
A diagnosis of a taxon is a statement of that which in the opinion of its author distinguishes the taxon from other taxa.
Ex. 1.
(LZ9deF)
“Egeria” (Néraud in Gaudichaud, Voy. Uranie, Bot.: 25, 28. 1826) was published without a description or a diagnosis or a reference to a former one (and is therefore a nomen nudum); it was not validly published.
Ex. 2.
(Gvkjqt)
“Loranthus macrosolen” originally appeared without a description or diagnosis on the printed labels issued about the year 1843 with Sect. II, No. 529, 1288, of the herbarium specimens from Schimper’s “Abyssinische Reise”. The name L. macrosolen Steud. ex A. Rich. (Tent. Fl. Abyss. 1: 340. 1848) was validly published when Richard supplied a description.
*Ex. 3.
(xi5kfn)
In Don,
Sweet’s Hortus britannicus, ed. 3 (1839), for each listed species the flower colour, the duration of the plant, and a translation into English of the specific epithet are given in tabular form. In many genera the flower colour and duration may be identical for all species and clearly their mention is not intended as a validating description or diagnosis. Names of new taxa appearing in that work are not therefore validly published, except in some cases where reference is made to earlier descriptions or diagnoses.
Ex. 4.
(Qv6bmr)
“Crepis praemorsa subsp. tatrensis” (Dvořák & Dadáková in Biológia (Bratislava) 32: 755. 1977) appeared with “a subsp. praemorsa karyotypo achaeniorumque longitudine praecipue differt [it differs from subsp. praemorsa principally by the karyotype and the length of the achenes]”. This statement specifies the features in which the two taxa differ but not how these features differ and so it does not satisfy the requirement of Art. 38.1(a) for a “description or diagnosis”.
Ex. 5.
(u7RaeM)
The generic name Epilichen Clem. (Gen. Fungi: 69, 174. 1909) is validly published by means of the key character “parasitic on lichens” (contrasting with “saprophytic” for Karschia) and the Latin diagnosis “Karschia lichenicola”, referring to the ability of the included species formerly included in Karschia to grow on lichens. These statements, in the opinion of Clements, distinguished the genus from others, although provision of such a meagre diagnosis is not good practice.
Ex. 6.
(xebW2b)
The protologue of Iresine borschii Zumaya & Flores Olv. (in Willdenowia 46: 166. 2016) includes both a morphological and a molecular diagnosis. Both are diagnoses because they indicate how the features of the new species, in the opinion of the authors, differ from those of other taxa.
38.3.
(MxBkkS)
The requirements of Art. 38.1(a) are not met by statements describing properties such as purely aesthetic features, economic, medicinal or culinary use, cultural significance, cultivation techniques, geographical origin, or geological age.
Ex. 7.
(PrVe2Y)
“Musa basjoo” (Siebold in Verh. Bat. Genootsch. Kunsten 12: 18. 1830) appeared with “Ex insulis Luikiu introducta, vix asperitati hiemis resistens. Ex foliis linteum, praesertim in insulis Luikiu ac quibusdam insulis provinciae Satzuma conficitur. Est haud dubie linteum, quod Philippinis incolis audit Nippis. [Introduced from the Ryukyu Islands, hardly withstands winter hardships. Linen is made from the leaves, principally in the Ryukyu Islands and in some islands of the Satsuma Province. This is doubtless the cloth called Nippis by the Philippine people.]” This statement gives information about the economic use (linen is made from the leaves), hardiness in cultivation (scarcely survives the winter), and geographical origin (introduced from the Ryukyu Islands). Because there is no explicit descriptive information (e.g. shape or texture) on the leaves, the only character mentioned, it does not satisfy the requirement of Art. 38.1(a) for a “description or diagnosis”. Musa basjoo Siebold ex Miq. was later validly published by Miquel (in Ann. Mus. Bot. Lugduno-Batavi 3: 203. 1867) with a diagnosis in Latin.
38.4.
(LDkT9P)
A description is a statement explicitly describing one or more features of an individual taxon. A description need not be diagnostic (but see Rec. 38B.2).
38.5.
(ZSxBSZ)
When it is doubtful whether a descriptive statement satisfies the requirement of Art. 38.1(a) for a “description or diagnosis”, a request for a binding decision may be submitted to the General Committee, which will refer it for examination to the specialist committee for the appropriate taxonomic group (see Div. III Prov. 2.2, 7.10(b), 7.11, and 8.13(a)). A General Committee recommendation as to whether or not the name concerned is validly published is to be treated as a binding decision subject to ratification by a later International Botanical Congress (see also Art. 14.15, 34.2, 53.4, and 56.3) and takes retroactive effect. These binding decisions are listed in App. VI.
Ex. 8.
(HNGztT)
Ascomycota Caval.-Sm. (in Biol. Rev. (Cambridge) 73: 247. 1998, as “Ascomycota Berkeley 1857 stat. nov.”) was published as the name of a phylum with the diagnosis “sporae intracellulares [spores intracellular]”. Because Cavalier-Smith (l.c. 1998) did not provide a full and direct reference to Berkeley’s publication (Intr. Crypt. Bot.: 270. 1857) of the name Ascomycetes (not Ascomycota), valid publication of Ascomycota is dependent on its meeting the requirements of Art. 38.1(a), and a request was made for a binding decision under Art. 38.5. The Nomenclature Committee for Fungi concluded that the requirements of Art. 38.1(a) were minimally fulfilled and recommended (in Taxon 59: 292. 2010) a binding decision that Ascomycota is validly published. This was approved by the General Committee (in Taxon 60: 1212. 2011) and ratified by the XVIII International Botanical Congress in Melbourne in 2011 (see App. VI).
Ex. 9.
(Bex1Wl)
Brugmansia aurea Harrison (Floric. Cab. & Florist’s Mag. 5: 144. 1837) was described in an account of a garden visit as comprising “plants about two feet high” with flowers “about the size of the B. sanguinea, but of fine rich golden yellow colour”, and was compared with “an inferior kind … the flowers of which are of a dull buff colour”. A binding decision has been made that the name is validly published (see App. VI).
38.6.
(Ru9uTZ)
The names of a genus and a species may be validly published simultaneously by provision of a single description (descriptio generico-specifica) or diagnosis, even though this may have been intended as either generic or specific, only if all of the following conditions are satisfied:
(a) the descriptio generico-specifica accompanies the names of the taxa described (reference instead to an earlier description or diagnosis is not acceptable); and
(b) the genus is at that time monotypic (see Art. 38.7); and
(c) no other names (at any rank) have previously been validly published based on the same type; and
(d) the names of the genus and species otherwise fulfil the requirements for valid publication.
Ex. 10.
(bNZ5tR)
(a) For “Merremia convolvulacea”, Dennstedt (Schlüssel Hortus Malab.: 12, 23, 34. 1818) did not provide a description or diagnosis but referred to an earlier Latin description and an illustration with analysis in Rheede (Hort. Malab. 8: 52 [“51”], t. 27. 1692). Therefore, under Art. 38.6(a), “Merremia” and “Merremia convolvulacea” were not validly published. The generic and species names were subsequently validated by Endlicher (Gen. Pl.: 1403. 1841) and Hallier (in Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 16: 552. 1893), respectively.
38.7.
(LjbBzs)
For the purpose of Art. 38.6, a monotypic genus is one for which a single binomial is validly published even though the author may indicate that other species are attributable to the genus.
Ex. 11.
(pzY3iD)
Nylander (in Flora 62: 353. 1879) described the new species “Anema nummulariellum” in a new genus “Anema” without providing a generic description or diagnosis. Because in the same publication (l.c.: 354. 1879) he wrote “Affine Anemati nummulario (DR.) Nyl., … [related to Anema nummularium (DR.) Nyl., …]”, which was an attempted new combination in “Anema” based on Collema nummularium Dufour ex Durieu & Mont. (in Bory & Durieu, Expl. Sci. Algérie 1: 200. 1846), none of his designations was validly published. The names were later validly published by Forssell (Beitr. Gloeolich.: 40, 91, 93. 1885).
Ex. 12.
(N3d7qU)
The names Kedarnatha P. K. Mukh. & Constance (in Brittonia 38: 147. 1986) and K. sanctuarii P. K. Mukh. & Constance, the latter designating the single, new species of the new genus, are both validly published although a Latin description was provided only under the generic name.
Ex. 13.
(zL6HLS)
Piptolepis phillyreoides Benth. (Pl. Hartw.: 29. 1840) was a new species assigned to the monotypic new genus Piptolepis. Both names were validly published with a combined generic and specific description.
Ex. 14.
(soa58b)
In publishing “Phaelypea” without a generic description or diagnosis, Browne (Civ. Nat. Hist. Jamaica: 269. 1756) included and described a single species, but he gave the species a phrase name, not a validly published binomial. Art. 38.6 does not therefore apply and “Phaelypea” is not a validly published name.
38.8.
(6COuMW)
For the purpose of Art. 38.6, before 1 January 1908, an illustration with analysis (see Art. 38.10 and 38.11) is acceptable in place of a written description or diagnosis.
Ex. 15.
(TapjOL)
The generic name Philgamia Baill. (in Grandidier, Hist. Phys. Madagascar 35: t. 265. 1894) was validly published because it appeared on a plate with analysis of the only included species, P. hibbertioides Baill.
Ex. 16.
(gtv3nV)
The generic name Torrentia Vell. (Fl. Flumin. Icon. 8: t. 149. 1831) and that of its only included species, T. quinquenervis Vell., were validly published without a description or diagnosis but with an illustration with analysis showing details of the bracts, ray floret pappus, and stigma.
38.9.
(BDj6F5)
The name of a new species or infraspecific taxon published before 1 January 1908 may be validly published even if only accompanied by an illustration with analysis (see Art. 38.10 and 38.11).
Ex. 17.
(KKbuhO)
When “Polypodium subulatum” (Vellozo, Fl. Flumin. Icon. 11: ad t. 67. 1831) was published, only an illustration of part of a frond was presented, without analysis, hence this drawing does not fulfil the provisions of Art. 38.9 and the designation was not validly published there. The name P. subulatum Vell. was validly published when Vellozo’s fern species descriptions appeared (in Arch. Mus. Nac. Rio de Janeiro 5: 447. 1881).
38.10.
(QQwQ1M)
For the purposes of this Code, an analysis is a figure or group of figures, often presented separately from the main illustration of the organism (though usually on the same page or plate), showing details aiding identification, with or without a separate caption (see also Art. 38.11).
Ex. 18.
(l9KpXK)
Panax nossibiensis Drake (in Grandidier, Hist. Phys. Madagascar 35: t. 406. 1897) was validly published on a plate with analysis that includes details of flower structure.
38.11.
(W7hoL2)
For organisms other than vascular plants, single figures showing details aiding identification are considered as illustrations with analysis (see also Art. 38.10).
Ex. 19.
(3yQd58)
Eunotia gibbosa Grunow (in Van Heurck, Syn. Diatom. Belgique: t. 35, fig. 13. 1881), a name of a diatom, was validly published by provision of a figure of a single valve.
38.12.
(Fhj75t)
For the purpose of valid publication of a name of a new taxon, reference to a previously and effectively published description or diagnosis is restricted as follows:
(a) For a name of a family or subdivision of a family, the earlier description or diagnosis must be that of a family or subdivision of a family.
(b) For a name of a genus or subdivision of a genus, the earlier description or diagnosis must be that of a genus or subdivision of a genus.
(c) For a name of a species or infraspecific taxon, the earlier description or diagnosis must be that of a species or infraspecific taxon (but see Art. 38.13).
Ex. 20.
(DaPH7Y)
(a) “Pseudoditrichaceae fam. nov.” (Steere & Iwatsuki in Canad. J. Bot. 52: 701. 1974) was not a validly published name of a family because there was no Latin description or diagnosis of the family, nor reference to either, but only mention of the single included genus and species (see Art. 36.2), as “Pseudoditrichum mirabile Steere et Iwatsuki, gen. et sp. nov.”, the names of which were both validly published under Art. 38.6 by provision of a single Latin diagnosis.
Ex. 21.
(JR6r91)
(b) Scirpoides Ség. (Pl. Veron. 3: 73. 1754) was published without a generic description or diagnosis. It was validly published by indirect reference (through the title of the book and a general statement in the preface) to the generic diagnosis and further direct references in Séguier (Pl. Veron. 1: 117. 1745).
Ex. 22.
(DREC98)
Because Art. 38.12 places no restriction on names at ranks higher than family, Eucommiales Němejc ex Cronquist (Integr. Syst. Class. Fl. Pl.: 182. 1981) was validly published by Cronquist, who provided a full and direct reference to the Latin description associated with the genus Eucommia Oliv. (in Hooker’s Icon. Pl. 20: ad t. 1950. 1890).
38.13.
(LezXSb)
A name of a new species may be validly published by reference (direct or indirect; see Art. 38.14 and 38.15) to a description or diagnosis of a genus, if the following conditions are satisfied:
(a) the name of the genus was previously and validly published simultaneously with its description or diagnosis; and
(b) neither the author of the name of the genus nor the author of the name of the species indicates that more than one species belongs to the genus in question.
Ex. 23.
(lQ0HCb)
Trilepisium Thouars (Gen. Nov. Madagasc.: 22. 1806) was validated by a generic description but without mention of a name of a species. Trilepisium madagascariense DC. (Prodr. 2: 639. 1825) was subsequently proposed without a description or diagnosis of the species and with the generic name followed by a reference to Thouars. Neither author gave any indication that there was more than one species in the genus. Candolle’s species name is therefore validly published. The type of T. madagascariense DC. is automatically the type of Trilepisium Thouars (see Art. 10.9).
38.14.
(KqcC3M)
For the purpose of valid publication of a name of a new taxon, reference to a previously and effectively published description or diagnosis may be direct or indirect (Art. 38.15). For names published on or after 1 January 1953, for which the requirement for a description or diagnosis was not previously fulfilled (see Art. 33.1), this reference must, however, be full and direct as specified in Art. 41.5.
38.15.
(gx6qex)
An indirect reference is a clear (if cryptic) indication, by an author citation or in some other way, that a previously and effectively published description or diagnosis applies.
Ex. 24.
(VPzR35)
“Kratzmannia” (Opiz in Berchtold & Opiz, Oekon.-Techn. Fl. Böhm. 1: 398. 1836) was published with a diagnosis but was not definitely accepted by the author and was not therefore validly published under Art. 36.1. Kratzmannia Opiz (Seznam: 56. 1852), lacking description or diagnosis, is however definitely accepted, and its citation as “Kratzmannia O.” constitutes an indirect reference to Opiz’s diagnosis published in 1836.
Ex. 25.
(5kj581)
The name Statice tenoreana was published by Gussone (Enum. Pl. Inarim.: 268. 1855) without any description or diagnosis but citing “S. minuta. Ten. Syll. p. 593 (non Lin.)”. However, Tenore (Syll. Pl. Fl. Neapol.: 593. 1833) did not include any description of S. minuta, which was provided only later (Tenore, Fl. Napol. 5: 338. 1835–1838), along with a reference to page 593 of the Sylloge (Tenore, l.c. 1833). Statice tenoreana Guss., although lacking a description or diagnosis both in the protologue and in the directly cited Sylloge of Tenore, is validly published by the indirect reference to the description in Tenore’s Flora napolitana (1835–1838).
(l8088H)
Recommendation 38A
38A.1.
(LZu9ui)
A name of a new taxon should not be validated solely by a reference to a description or diagnosis published before 1753.
(HMyH8n)
Recommendation 38B
38B.1.
(SOlVlr)
When a description is provided for valid publication of the name of a new taxon, a separate diagnosis should also be presented.
38B.2.
(rDsgHO)
Where no separate diagnosis is provided, the description of any new taxon should mention the points that distinguish the taxon from others.
(oPXQTc)
Recommendation 38C
38C.1.
(XRqNrU)
When naming a new taxon, authors should not adopt a name that has been previously but not validly published for a different taxon.
(2TZyZz)
Recommendation 38D
38D.1.
(hBf807)
In describing or diagnosing new taxa, authors should, when possible, supply figures with details of structure as an aid to identification.
38D.2.
(msdxkm)
In the explanation of figures, authors should indicate the specimen(s) on which they are based (see also Rec. 8A.2).
38D.3.
(rrTw98)
Authors should indicate clearly and precisely the scale of the figures that they publish.
(Nl6dcJ)
Recommendation 38E
38E.1.
(OjyYSy)
Descriptions or diagnoses of new taxa of parasitic organisms, especially fungi, should always be followed by indication of the hosts. The hosts should be designated by their scientific names and not solely by names in modern languages, the application of which is often doubtful.
(XlB8jh)
Language of validating description or diagnosis
39.1.
(CcIPtC)
To be validly published, a name of a new taxon (algae and fossils excepted) published between 1 January 1935 and 31 December 2011, inclusive, must be accompanied by a Latin description or diagnosis or by a reference (see Art. 38.14) to a previously and effectively published Latin description or diagnosis (but see Art. H.9; for fossils see Art. 43.1; for algae see Art. 44.1).
Ex. 1.
(dGTo4T)
Arabis “Sekt. Brassicoturritis O. E. Schulz” and A. “Sekt. Brassicarabis O. E. Schulz” (in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam., ed. 2, 17b: 543–544. 1936), published with German but no Latin descriptions or diagnoses, are not validly published names.
Ex. 2.
(vvXKxU)
“Schiedea gregoriana” (Degener, Fl. Hawaiiensis, fam. 119. 9 Apr 1936) was accompanied by an English but no Latin description and is not therefore a validly published name. Schiedea kealiae Caum & Hosaka (in Occas. Pap. Bernice Pauahi Bishop Mus. 11(23): 3. 10 Apr 1936), the type of which is part of the material used by Degener, is provided with a Latin description and is validly published.
Ex. 3.
(vfT6xw)
Alyssum flahaultianum Emb., first published without a Latin description or diagnosis (in Bull. Soc. Sci. Nat. Maroc 15: 199. 1935), was validly published posthumously when a Latin translation of Emberger’s original French description was provided (in Willdenowia 15: 62–63. 1985).
39.2.
(hFiaeD)
To be validly published, a name of a new taxon published on or after 1 January 2012 must be accompanied by a Latin or English description or diagnosis or by a reference (see Art. 38.14) to a previously and effectively published Latin or English description or diagnosis (for fossils see also Art. 43.1).
(GKcqBs)
Recommendation 39A
39A.1.
(kaia8V)
Authors publishing names of new taxa should give or cite a full description in Latin or English in addition to the diagnosis.
(Jp04ZD)
Requirement of indication of type
40.1.
(BpBwSC)
Publication on or after 1 January 1958 of the name of a new taxon at the rank of genus or below is valid only when the type of the name is indicated (see Art. 7–10; but see Art. H.9 Note 1 for the names of certain hybrids).
i
Note 1.
(7sl5nE)
When elements that cannot on their own serve as types as defined under Art. 8 and 40 are cited as part of the type indication (e.g. living organisms cited contrary to Art. 8.4 or illustrations cited contrary to Art. 8.5 and 40.6), they do not affect valid publication of the name and are not relevant for the purpose of Art. 40.1.
40.2.
(sENjQL)
For the name of a new genus or subdivision of a genus, reference (direct or indirect) to a single species name, or citation of a single element that is the type of a previously or simultaneously published species name, even if that element is not explicitly designated as type, is acceptable as indication of the type (see also Art. 10.8; but see Art. 40.4).
40.3.
(Bf5N3W)
For the name of a new species or infraspecific taxon published on or after 1 January 1958, mention of a single specimen, a single gathering or a part thereof, or an illustration is acceptable as indication of the type, even if that element is not explicitly designated as type (but see Art. 40.4) or if it consists of two or more specimens as defined in Art. 8 (but see Art. 40.5).
Ex. 1.
(G0ZQwJ)
When Cheng described “Gnetum cleistostachyum” (in Acta Phytotax. Sin. 13(4): 89. 1975) the name was not validly published because two gatherings were designated as types: K. H. Tsai 142 (as “♀ Typus”) and X. Jiang 127 (as “♂ Typus”).
Ex. 2.
(zCfP0q)
“Baloghia pininsularis” was published by Guillaumin (in Mém. Mus. Natl. Hist. Nat., B, Bot. 8: 260. 1962) with two cited gatherings:
Baumann 13813 and
Baumann 13823. Because the author did not designate one of them as the type, the designation was not validly published. Valid publication of the name
B. pininsularis Guillaumin was achieved when McPherson & Tirel (Fl. Nouv.-Calédonie & Dépend. 14: 58. 1987) wrote “Lectotype (désigné ici):
Baumann-Bodenheim 13823 (P!; iso-, Z)” while providing a full and direct reference to Guillaumin’s Latin description (Art. 33.1; see Art. 46 Ex. 22); McPherson & Tirel’s use of “lectotype” is correctable to “holotype” under Art. 9.10.
i
Note 2.
(L3beKF)
Mere citation of a locality does not constitute mention of a single specimen or gathering. Concrete reference to some detail relating to the actual type is required, such as the collector’s name, collecting number or date, or unique specimen identifier.
i
Note 3.
(SoUvKp)
When the type is indicated by mention of an entire gathering, or a part thereof, consisting of more than one specimen, those specimens are syntypes (see Art. 9.6).
Ex. 3.
(I7f23V)
The protologue of Laurentia frontidentata E. Wimm. (in Engler, Pflanzenr. IV. 276 (Heft 108): 855. 1968) includes the type statement “E. Esterhuysen No. 17070! Typus – Pret., Bol.” The name is validly published because a single gathering is cited, despite the mention of duplicate specimens (syntypes) in two different herbaria, and Art. 40.5 does not apply.
Ex. 4.
(5r7uIP)
Radcliffe-Smith (Gen. Croton Madag. Comoro: 169. 2016) indicated the type of Croton nitidulus var. acuminatus Radcl.-Sm. as “Cours 4871 (holotypus P)”. In the herbarium P there are four duplicates of Cours 4871. The name is validly published because a single gathering in a single herbarium was indicated as type. These specimens are syntypes, and one of them was subsequently designated as the lectotype by Berry & al. (in PhytoKeys 90: 69. 2017).
i
Note 4.
(9JMPug)
Cultures of algae and fungi preserved in a metabolically inactive state are acceptable as types (Art. 8.4; see also Rec. 8B, Art. 40.7, and Rec. F.11A).
40.4.
(0Ga76N)
For the name of a new taxon at the rank of genus or below published on or after 1 January 1990, indication of the type must include one of the words “typus” or “holotypus”, its equivalent in a modern language, or abbreviations of these (see also Rec. 40A.3). This requirement is also satisfied by use of one of the words “lectotypus” or “neotypus” (or its equivalent in a modern language, or abbreviations of these), which are to be treated as errors to be corrected under Art. 9.10. In the case of the name of a monotypic (as defined in Art. 38.7) new genus or subdivision of a genus with the simultaneously published name of a new species, indication of the type of the species name is sufficient.
Ex. 5.
(bqJUZu)
“Sedum mucizonia (Ortega) Raym.-Hamet subsp. urceolatum” was described by Stephenson (in Cact. Succ. J. (Los Angeles) 64: 234. 1992) but was not validly published because an indication of “typus” or “holotypus”, its equivalent in a modern language, or an abbreviation of one of these was not provided.
Ex. 6.
(wWXhT8)
“Dendrobium sibuyanense” (see Art. 8 Ex. 11) was described with a living plant indicated as “Type specimen” and was not therefore validly published.
Dendrobium sibuyanense Lubag-Arquiza & al. (in Orchid Digest 70: 174. 2006) was validly published later, when Lubag-Arquiza & Christenson designated a published drawing as “lectotype”, which under Art. 9.10 and 40.4 is treated as an error to be corrected to “holotype”.
40.5.
(N81kXQ)
For the name of a new species or infraspecific taxon published on or after 1 January 1990 of which the type is a specimen or unpublished illustration, the single herbarium, collection, or institution in which the type is conserved must be specified (see also Rec. 40A.4 and 40A.5).
Ex. 7.
(1GCUDz)
In the protologue of Setaria excurrens var. leviflora Keng ex S. L. Chen (in Bull. Nanjing Bot. Gard. 1988–1989: 3. 1990) the gathering Guangxi Team 4088 was indicated as “模式 [type]” and the herbarium where the type is conserved was specified as “中国科学院植物研究所标本室 [Herbarium, Institute of Botany, The Chinese Academy of Sciences]”, i.e. PE.
Ex. 8.
(BF5JWB)
“Sedum eriocarpum subsp. spathulifolium” was described by ’t Hart (in Ot 2(2): 7. 1995) without specification of herbarium, collection, or institution in which the holotype specimen was conserved and therefore was not validly published. Valid publication was achieved when ’t Hart (in Strid & Tan, Fl. Hellen. 2: 325. 2002) wrote “Type … ’t Hart HRT-27104 … (U)” and provided a full and direct reference to his previously published Latin diagnosis (Art. 33.1).
Ex. 9.
(k52D86)
“Rhodotorula portillonensis” (Laich & al. in Int. J. Syst. Evol. Microbiol. 63: 3889. 2013) was introduced with the statement “Typus stirpis Pi2
T (=CBS 12733
T=CECT 13081
T)”, where Pi2
T was a strain designation. Because the type was cited as conserved in more than one culture collection (CBS and CECT), the name was not validly published. The name was validly published as
R. portillonensis Laich & al. (in Laich, Index Fungorum 361: 1. 2018) with the type designated as “Holotype CBS 12733”.
i
Note 5.
(AgoKta)
Specification of the herbarium, collection, or institution may be made in an abbreviated form, e.g. as given in Index Herbariorum or in the Culture Collections Information Worldwide database of the World Data Centre for Microorganisms.
40.6.
(4l3dZP)
For the name of a new species or infraspecific taxon published on or after 1 January 2007, the type indicated in accordance with Art. 40 may not be an illustration (for fossils see also Art. 8.5). An exception is permitted for names of non-fossil microscopic algae and non-fossil microfungi, for which the type may be an effectively published illustration if there are technical difficulties of specimen preservation or if it is impossible to preserve a specimen that would show the features attributed to the taxon by the author of the name.
Ex. 10.
(Ek7b42)
Lücking & Moncada (in Fungal Diversity 84: 119–138. 2017) introduced “Lawreymyces” and seven intended microfungal species names using representations of diagnostic sequences of bases of DNA from the Internal Transcribed Spacer (ITS) region as intended types. These representations are not illustrations under Art. 6.1 footnote because they are not depictions of features of the organisms, and consequently the intended names were not validly published.
40.7.
(r5Kc8L)
For the name of a new species or infraspecific taxon published on or after 1 January 2019 of which the type is a culture, the protologue must include a statement that the culture is preserved in a metabolically inactive state.
Ex. 11.
(NL1htj)
“Trichoderma botryosum” (Rodríguez & al. in Sci. Rep. 11(5671): 12. 11 Mar 2021) was not validly published because the holotype was cited as a culture, “H.C. Evans, K. Belachew & R.W. Barreto. Ex-type culture: COAD 2422”, without a statement that it is preserved in a metabolically inactive state. Subsequently, Rodríguez & al. (in Sci. Rep. 11(19229): 1. 22 Sep 2021) fulfilled the requirement of Art. 40.7 by citing the type as “H.C. Evans, K. Belachew & R.W. Barreto. VIC 47493 (dried metabolically inactive culture). Ex-type culture: COAD 2422” and thus validly published the name T. botryosum M. C. H. Rodr. & al. The validation cited a new identifier (MB840985) as required by Art. F.5.7.
40.8.
(6VgjY7)
For the name of a new fossil-species or infraspecific fossil-taxon published on or after 1 January 2026, the protologue must clearly indicate where the holotype specimen (see Art. 8.6) is located within the rock, sediment, or preparation.
(F8KKzZ)
Recommendation 40A
40A.1.
(b5sa4l)
Authors proposing names of new families or subdivisions of families are urged to ensure that the generic name from which the new name is formed is itself effectively typified (see Art. 7 and 10), if necessary by designating a type for that generic name under the relevant provisions of Art. 7 and 10 (see also Rec. 40A.2).
40A.2.
(oKyuOl)
For the name of a new genus or subdivision of a genus, authors should cite the type of the species name (see Art. 7–9) that provides the type (Art. 10.1) of the new name and, if necessary, designate the type for that species name under the relevant provisions of Art. 7 and 9.
40A.3.
(lRbxfc)
Details of the type specimen of the name of a new species or infraspecific taxon should be published in the Latin alphabet.
40A.4.
(9Sxkre)
Specification of the herbarium, collection, or institution of deposition should be followed by any available number permanently and unambiguously identifying the holotype specimen.
Ex. 1.
(ABmxBP)
The type of Lycianthes lucens S. Knapp (in PhytoKeys 209: 65. 2022) was designated as “O. Gideon LAE-57196 (holotype: LAE [acc. # 256314]; isotypes: K [K000922490], L [L.2882045])”, where “LAE [acc. # 256314]” is the accession number on the holotype in the herbarium of the Papua New Guinea Forest Research Institute (LAE).
40A.5.
(cq3ykC)
Citation of the herbarium, collection, or institution of deposition should use one of the standards mentioned in Art. 40 Note 5 or, when those standards give no abbreviated form, the herbarium, collection, or institution should be cited in full with its location.
(6FwJnd)
New combinations, names at new rank, and replacement names
41.1.
(fe5NKV)
To be validly published, a new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name must be accompanied by a reference to the basionym or replaced synonym (see Art. 6.10 and 6.11).
41.2.
(6QAlPC)
For the purpose of valid publication of a new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name, the following restrictions apply:
(a) For a name of a family or subdivision of a family, the basionym or replaced synonym must be a name of a family or subdivision of a family.
(b) For a name of a genus or subdivision of a genus, the basionym or replaced synonym must be a name of a genus or subdivision of a genus.
(c) For a name of a species or infraspecific taxon, the basionym or replaced synonym must be a name of a species or infraspecific taxon.
Ex. 1.
(t9q2hn)
(a) Carl Presl did not validly publish
“Cuscuteae” (in Presl & Presl, Delic. Prag.: 87. 1822) as the name of a family (see “Praemonenda”, pp. [3–4]) based on
Cuscutales Bercht. & J. Presl (Přir. Rostlin: 247. 1820,
‘Cuscuteae’) because the latter is the name of an order (see Art. 18 *Ex. 6).
Ex. 2.
(Iy7oib)
(b) Thuspeinanta T. Durand (Index Gen. Phan.: 703. 1888) is a replacement name for Tapeinanthus Boiss. ex Benth. (in Candolle, Prodr. 12: 436. 1848) non Herb. (Amaryllidaceae: 190. 1837); Aspalathoides (DC.) K. Koch (Hort. Dendrol.: 242. 1853) is based on Anthyllis sect. Aspalathoides DC. (Prodr. 2: 169. 1825).
41.3.
(iEmAMA)
An indirect reference (see Art. 38.15) to a basionym or replaced synonym is sufficient for valid publication of a new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name published before 1 January 1953. Therefore, errors in the citation of the basionym or replaced synonym, or in author citation (Art. 46), do not affect valid publication of such names.
Ex. 3.
(6ToRVd)
Gross (in Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 49: 275. 1913) ascribed the name Persicaria runcinata to “(Ham.)” without giving further information. Previously, the name Polygonum runcinatum had been validly published by Don (Prodr. Fl. Nepal.: 73. 1825) and ascribed there to “Hamilton MSS.” The mention of “Ham.” by Gross is regarded as an indirect reference to the basionym published by Don, and thus the new combination Persicaria runcinata (Buch.-Ham. ex D. Don) H. Gross was validly published.
Ex. 4.
(qZRpMV)
Opiz validly published the name at new rank Hemisphace (Benth.) Opiz (Seznam: 50. 1852) by writing “Hemisphace Benth.”, which is regarded as an indirect reference to the basionym Salvia sect. Hemisphace Benth. (Labiat. Gen. Spec.: 193, 207, 310. 1833).
Ex. 5.
(7KTGE6)
The new combination
Cymbopogon martini (Roxb.) Will. Watson (in Gaz. N.-W. Prov. India 10: 392. 1882) is validly published through the cryptic notation “309”, which, as explained at the top of the same page, is the running-number of the species (
Andropogon martini Roxb.) in Steudel (Syn. Pl. Glumac. 1: 388. 1854). Although the reference to the basionym
A. martini is indirect, it is unambiguous (but see Art. 33 Ex. 1; see also Rec. 60C.1).
Ex. 6.
(h8MtXa)
Miller (1768), in the preface to The gardeners dictionary, ed. 8, stated that he had “now applied Linnaeus’s method entirely, except in such particulars …”, of which he gave examples. In the main text, he often referred to Linnaean genera under his own generic headings, e.g. to Cactus L. (pro parte) under Opuntia Mill. Therefore, an implicit reference to a Linnaean binomial may be assumed when this is appropriate, and Miller’s binomials are accepted as new combinations (e.g. O. ficus-indica (L.) Mill., based on C. ficus-indica L.) or replacement names (e.g. O. vulgaris Mill., based on C. opuntia L.: both names have the reference to “Opuntia vulgo herbariorum” of Bauhin & Cherler in common).
Ex. 7.
(dbMZdn)
When Haines (Forest Fl. Chota Nagpur: 530. 1910) published the name Dioscorea belophylla, he attributed the name to “Voight”. Previously, Prain (Bengal Pl.: 1065, 1067. 1903) had validly published D. nummularia var. belophylla Prain, citing “Voigt (sp.)”, an apparent reference to the nomen nudum “Dioscorea belophylla” (Voigt, Hort. Suburb. Calcutt.: 653. 1845). The mention by Haines of “Voight” is regarded as an indirect reference to Prain’s varietal name, and thus D. belophylla (Prain) Voigt ex Haines was validly published as a new combination and name at new rank.
Ex. 8.
(wR7BBf)
Cortinarius collinitus var. trivialis (J. E. Lange) A. H. Sm. (in Lloydia 7: 175. 1944) was validly published as a new combination based on C. trivialis J. E. Lange (Fl. Agaric. Danic. 5(Taxon. Consp.): iii. 1940), even though Smith referred to the basionym as “C. trivialis Lange ‘Studies,’ pt. 10: 24. 1935”, where that name was not validly published because Lange did not provide a Latin description or diagnosis.
41.4.
(bmeURh)
If, for a name of a genus or lower-ranked taxon published before 1 January 1953, no reference to a basionym is given but the conditions for its valid publication as the name of a new taxon or a replacement name are fulfilled, that name is nevertheless treated as a new combination or name at new rank when this was the author’s presumed intent and a potential basionym (Art. 6.10) applying to the same taxon exists.
Ex. 9.
(u5DK6s)
In Kummer’s Der Führer in die Pilzkunde (1871) the note (p. 12) explaining that the author intended to adopt at generic rank the subdivisions of Agaricus then in use, which at the time were those of Fries, and the general arrangement of the work, which faithfully follows that of Fries, have been considered to provide indirect reference to Fries’s earlier names of “tribes” as basionyms (see Art. F.4.1). Even though this was Kummer’s presumed intent, he did not actually mention Fries. Nevertheless, even when Art. 41.3 is not considered to apply, because Kummer provided diagnoses in a key and thus fulfilled the conditions for valid publication of names of new taxa, Art. 41.4 rules that names such as Hypholoma (Fr.) P. Kumm. and H. fasciculare (Huds.) P. Kumm. are to be accepted as new combinations or names at new rank based on the corresponding Friesian names (here: A. “tribus” [unranked] Hypholoma Fr., nom. sanct. and A. fascicularis Huds., nom. sanct.).
Ex. 10.
(Db46yK)
Scaevola taccada was validly published by Roxburgh (Hort. Bengal.: 15. 1814) solely by reference to an illustration in Rheede (Hort. Malab. 4: t. 59. 1683) that is associated with a description of a species. Because the same illustration was cited in the protologue of the earlier name Lobelia taccada Gaertn. (Fruct. Sem. Pl. 1: 119. 1788) and the two names apply to the same species, S. taccada is treated as a new combination, S. taccada (Gaertn.) Roxb., not as the name of a new species, even though in Roxburgh’s protologue there is no reference, either direct or indirect, to L. taccada.
Ex. 11.
(4yUIsq)
When Moench (Methodus: 272. 1794) described
Chamaecrista, he did not refer to
Cassia [unranked]
Chamaecrista L. (Sp. Pl.: 379. 1753; see Art. 32 Ex. 1) but used its epithet as the generic name and included its type,
Cassia chamaecrista L. (cited in synonymy). Therefore, he published a name at new rank,
Chamaecrista (L.) Moench, and not a name of a new genus.
Ex. 12.
(aKXObm)
Cololejeunea was published by Stephani (in Hedwigia 30: 208. 1891) for a taxon that had previously been described as Lejeunea subg. Cololejeunea Spruce (in Trans. & Proc. Bot. Soc. Edinburgh 15: 79, 291. 1884) but without even an indirect reference to Spruce’s earlier publication. Because Stephani provided a description of C. elegans Steph. that under Art. 38.6 is acceptable as a descriptio generico-specifica, he fulfilled the requirements for valid publication of Cololejeunea as the name of a new monotypic genus. Under Art. 41.4, Cololejeunea is therefore to be treated as a name at new rank, Cololejeunea (Spruce) Steph., based on Spruce’s subgeneric name.
Ex. 13.
(uSeC3G)
When Sampaio published “Psoroma murale Samp.” (in Bol. Real Soc. Esp. Hist. Nat. 27: 142. 1927), he adopted the epithet of Lichen muralis Schreb. (Spic. Fl. Lips.: 130. 1771), a name applied to the same taxon, without referring to that name either directly or indirectly. He cited in synonymy Lecanora saxicola (Pollich) Ach. (Lichenogr. Universalis: 431. 1810), which is based on Lichen saxicola Pollich (Hist. Pl. Palat. 3: 225. 1777). Under Art. 41.4, Psoroma murale (Schreb.) Samp. is treated as a new combination based on Lichen muralis; otherwise, it would be a validly published but illegitimate replacement name for Lichen saxicola.
41.5.
(mJAKHe)
A new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name published on or after 1 January 1953 is not validly published unless its basionym or replaced synonym is clearly indicated and a full and direct reference given to its author and place of valid publication, with page or plate reference and date (but see Art. 41.6 and 41.8). In addition, a new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name published on or after 1 January 2007 is not validly published unless its basionym or replaced synonym is cited.
Ex. 14.
(Lycqt8)
In transferring Ectocarpus mucronatus D. A. Saunders to Giffordia, Kjeldsen & Phinney (in Madroño 22: 90. 27 Apr 1973) cited the basionym and its author but without reference to its place of valid publication. They later (in Madroño 22: 154. 2 Jul 1973) validly published the new combination G. mucronata (D. A. Saunders) Kjeldsen & H. K. Phinney by giving a full and direct reference to the place of valid publication of the basionym.
Ex. 15.
(9fIPu2)
The new combination Conophytum marginatum subsp. littlewoodii (L. Bolus) S. A. Hammer (Dumpling & His Wife: New Views Gen. Conophytum: 181. 2002), because it was made before 1 January 2007, was validly published even though Hammer did not cite the basionym (C. littlewoodii L. Bolus) but only indicated it by giving a full and direct reference to its place of valid publication.
i
Note 1.
(3SRmrS)
For the purpose of Art. 41.5, a page reference (for publications with a consecutive pagination) is a reference to the page or pages on which the basionym or replaced synonym was validly published or on which the protologue appears, but not to the pagination of the whole publication unless it is coextensive with that of the protologue.
Ex. 16.
(5uW6Cr)
When proposing “Cylindrocladium infestans”, Peerally (in Mycotaxon 40: 337. 1991) cited the basionym as “Cylindrocladiella infestans Boesew., Can. J. Bot. 60: 2288–2294. 1982”. Because this refers to the pagination of Boesewinkel’s entire paper, not of the protologue of the intended basionym alone, the combination was not validly published by Peerally.
i
Note 2.
(XfBKi2)
For the purpose of Art. 41.5, a virtual page reference can be achieved for publications lacking page numbers, e.g. by:
(a) citing an assumed page number when there is continuous pagination; or
(b) citing the page number automatically generated within the PDF of an electronic publication; or
(c) using the words “without page number”, “sine pagina”, “s.p.” or similar; or
(d) including any indication that refers to the exact page, for example citing the species number, or the words “addition” or “supplement” if indicated as such on the page.
The citation of a DOI or URL is not by itself sufficient for page indication (see also Rec. 41A.2).
41.6.
(hjEGhQ)
For names published on or after 1 January 1953, errors in the citation of the basionym or replaced synonym, including incorrect author citation (Art. 46), but not omissions (Art. 41.5), do not preclude valid publication of a new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name.
Ex. 17.
(koz8Qq)
Aronia arbutifolia var. nigra (Willd.) F. Seym. (Fl. New England: 308. 1969) was published as a new combination “Based on Mespilus arbutifolia L. var. nigra Willd., in Sp. Pl. 2: 1013. 1800.” Willdenow treated these plants in the genus Pyrus, not Mespilus, and publication was in 1799, not 1800; these errors of citation do not preclude valid publication of the new combination.
Ex. 18.
(RRE1i2)
The name at new rank Agropyron desertorum var. pilosiusculum (Melderis) H. L. Yang (in Kuo, Fl. Reipubl. Popularis Sin. 9(3): 113. 1987) was inadvertently but validly published by Yang, who wrote “Agropyron desertorum … var. pilosiusculum Meld. in Norlindh, Fl. Mong. Steppe. 1: 121. 1949”, which constitutes a full and direct reference to the basionym, A. desertorum f. pilosiusculum Melderis, despite the error in citing the rank-denoting term.
Ex. 19.
(vyf9VP)
Nekemias grossedentata (Hand.-Mazz.) J. Wen & Z. L. Nie (in PhytoKeys 42: 16. 2014) was published as a new combination, with the basionym cited as “Ampelopsis cantoniensis var. grossedentata Hand.-Mazz., Sitzungsber. Kaiserl. Akad. Wiss., Math.-Naturwiss. Cl., Abt. 1, 59: 105. 1877”. The actual place of publication of the cited basionym was in Anz. Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-Naturwiss. Kl. 59: 105. 1922. These errors of citation (name of the journal and date) do not prevent valid publication of the new combination.
Ex. 20.
(QnURXo)
The basionym of
Eremogone hookeri (Nutt.) W. A. Weber (in Brittonia 33: 326. 1981) was cited as “
Arenaria hookeri Nutt. ex T. & G. Fl. N. Amer. 1: 178. 1838.” The author of the basionym, however, is Nuttall alone (see Art. 46 Ex. 6). Weber’s incorrect authorship citation “Nutt. ex T. & G.” (Nuttall ex Torrey & A. Gray) does not prevent valid publication of the new combination.
41.7.
(Rcgbnm)
Mere reference to the Index kewensis, the Index of fungi, or any work other than that in which the name was validly published does not constitute a full and direct reference to the place of publication of a name (but see Art. 41.8).
Ex. 21.
(ue7kDj)
“Leptosiphon croceus (Eastw.) J. M. Porter & L. A. Johnson, comb. nov.” (in Aliso 19: 80. 2000) was published with the basionym citation “Linanthus croceus Eastw., Pl. hartw. p. 325. 1849.” Because the actual place of publication of Linanthus croceus was in Bot. Gaz. 37: 442–443. 1904, Porter & Johnson’s combination was not validly published.
Ex. 22.
(irHJOh)
Ciferri (in Mycopathol. Mycol. Appl. 7: 86–89. 1954), in proposing 142 intended new combinations in Meliola, omitted references to places of publication of basionyms, stating that they could be found in Petrak’s lists or in the Index of fungi; none of these combinations was validly published. Similarly, Grummann (Cat. Lich. Germ.: 18. 1963) introduced a new combination in the form Lecanora campestris f. “pseudistera (Nyl.) Grumm. c.n. – L. p. Nyl., Z 5: 521”, in which “Z 5” referred to Zahlbruckner (Cat. Lich. Univ. 5: 521. 1928), who gave the full citation of the basionym, Lecanora pseudistera Nyl.; Grummann’s combination was not validly published.
i
Note 3.
(dwHWVV)
For the purpose of Art. 41.7, an unpaginated or independently paginated electronic publication and a later version with definitive pagination are not considered to be different publications (see Art. 30 Note 1).
i
Note 4.
(tzNSPM)
A new name published for a taxon previously known under a misapplied name is always the name of a new taxon and must therefore meet all relevant requirements of Art. 32–45 and F.4–F.5 for valid publication of such a name. This procedure is not the same as publishing a replacement name for a validly published but illegitimate name (Art. 58.1), the type of which is necessarily that of the replaced synonym (Art. 7.4).
Ex. 23.
(sC6JnP)
Sadleria hillebrandii W. J. Rob. (in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 40: 226. 1913) was introduced as a “nom. nov.” for “Sadleria pallida Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 582. 1888. Not Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. 75. 1832.” Because the requirements for valid publication were satisfied (before 1935, simple reference to a previous description or diagnosis in any language was sufficient), S. hillebrandii is the name of a new species validated by Hillebrand’s description of the taxon to which he misapplied the name S. pallida Hook. & Arn., not a replacement name as stated by Robinson (see Art. 6.14).
Ex. 24.
(XIHzGb)
“Juncus bufonius var.
occidentalis” (Hermann in Gen. Techn. Rep. R. M., U.S. Forest Serv. 18: 14. 1975) was published as a “nom. et stat. nov.” for
J. sphaerocarpus “auct. Am., non Nees”. Because there is no Latin description or diagnosis, indication of type, or reference to any previous publication providing these requirements, this is not a validly published name.
41.8.
(2TlEZh)
In any of the following cases, a full and direct reference to a work other than that in which the basionym or replaced synonym was validly published is treated as an error to be corrected, not affecting the valid publication of a new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name published on or after 1 January 1953:
(a) when the actual basionym or replaced synonym was validly published earlier than the name or later isonym cited as such, but in the cited publication, in which all conditions for valid publication of the name as cited are fulfilled, there is no reference, in association with that name, to the place of valid publication of the actual basionym or replaced synonym (but see Art. 41.5 second sentence); or
(b) when the failure to cite the place of valid publication of the basionym or replaced synonym is explained by the later nomenclatural starting-point for the group concerned (Art. 13.1), or by the backward shift of the starting date for some fungi; or
(c) when the resulting new combination or name at new rank would otherwise be validly published as a (legitimate or illegitimate) replacement name; or
(d) when the resulting new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name would otherwise be the validly published name of a new taxon.
Ex. 25.
(MebdsT)
(a) The new combination
Trichipteris kalbreyeri was proposed by Tryon (in Contr. Gray Herb. 200: 45. 1970) with a full and direct reference to “
Alsophila Kalbreyeri C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 44. 1905”. This, however, is not the place of valid publication of the intended basionym, which had previously been published, with the same type, by Baker (1892; see Art. 6 Ex. 2). Because Christensen provided no reference to Baker’s earlier publication, Tryon’s error of citation does not affect the valid publication of his new combination, which is cited as
T. kalbreyeri (Baker) R. M. Tryon.
Ex. 26.
(SSYHFw)
(a) The intended new combination “Machaerina iridifolia” was proposed by Koyama (in Bot. Mag. (Tokyo) 69: 64. 1956) with a full and direct reference to “Cladium iridifolium Baker, Flor. Maurit. 424 (1877)”. However, C. iridifolium had been proposed by Baker as a new combination based on Scirpus iridifolius Bory (Voy. Îles Afrique 2: 94. 1804). Because Baker provided an explicit reference to Bory, Art. 41.8(a) does not apply and the combination under Machaerina was not validly published by Koyama.
Ex. 27.
(9pMTYR)
(b) The combination Lasiobelonium corticale was proposed by Raitviir (in Scripta Mycol. 9: 106. 1980) with a full and direct reference to Peziza corticalis in Fries (Syst. Mycol. 2: 96. 1822). This, however, is not the place of valid publication of the basionym, which, under the Code operating in 1980, was in Mérat (Nouv. Fl. Env. Paris, ed. 2, 1: 22. 1821), and under the current Code is in Persoon (Observ. Mycol. 1: 28. 1796). Raitviir’s error of citation is partly explained by the backward shift of the starting date for some fungi and partly by the absence of a reference to Mérat in Fries’s work and does not therefore prevent valid publication of the new combination, which is cited as L. corticale (Pers.) Raitv.
Ex. 28.
(G2e300)
(b) Malvidae C. Y. Wu (in Acta Phytotax. Sin. 40: 306. 2002) was validly published as a name at new rank based on Malvaceae Juss. (Gen. Pl.: 271. 1789), even though Wu cited as the basionym “Malvaceae” (Adanson, Fam. Pl. 2: 390. 1763). Wu’s error of citation, explained by the later nomenclatural starting-point for suprageneric names of Spermatophyta and Pteridophyta (Art. 13.1(a)), does not prevent valid publication of the name at new rank.
Ex. 29.
(d3ZVRZ)
(c) The new combination Mirabilis laevis subsp. glutinosa was proposed by Murray (in Kalmia 13: 32. 1983) with a full and direct reference to “Mirabilis glutinosa A. Nels., Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash. 17: 92 (1904)” as the intended basionym. This, however, cannot be a basionym because it is an illegitimate later homonym of M. glutinosa Kuntze (Revis. Gen. Pl. 3: 265. 1898); it is also the replaced synonym of Hesperonia glutinosa Standl. (in Contr. U. S. Natl. Herb. 12: 365. 1909). Under Art. 41.8(c), Murray validly published a new combination based on H. glutinosa, because otherwise he would have published a replacement name for M. glutinosa A. Nelson. The name is therefore to be cited as M. laevis subsp. glutinosa (Standl.) A. E. Murray.
Ex. 30.
(oZXFfO)
(c) The new combination Tillandsia barclayana var. minor was proposed by Butcher (in Bromeliaceae 43(6): 5. 2009) with a reference, but not a full and direct one, to Vriesea barclayana var. minor Gilmartin (in Phytologia 16: 164. 1968). Butcher also provided a full and direct reference to T. lateritia André (“BASIONYM: Tillandsia lateritia Andre, Enum. Bromel. 6. 13 Dec 1888; Revue Hort. 60: 566. 16 Dec 1888”), which is the replaced synonym of V. barclayana var. minor. Under Art. 41.8(c), T. barclayana var. minor (Gilmartin) Butcher was validly published as a new combination based on V. barclayana var. minor because it would otherwise have been published as a replacement name for T. lateritia.
Ex. 31.
(7K6sff)
(d) When Koyama published the new combination Carex henryi (C. B. Clarke) T. Koyama (in Jap. J. Bot. 15: 175. 1956), he cited the basionym, C. longicruris var. henryi C. B. Clarke (in J. Linn. Soc., Bot. 36: 295. 1903), with a full and direct reference not to the work in which that name was validly published, but to a later work (Kükenthal in Engler, Pflanzenr. IV. 20 (Heft 38): 603. 1909), in which the name was accompanied by a Latin diagnosis. Koyama’s reference to Kükenthal is treated as an error to be corrected, not affecting the valid publication of the new combination C. henryi, because otherwise that name would be validly published as the name of a new species by direct reference to Kükenthal’s Latin diagnosis (Art. 38.1(a)).
(dkoGuh)
Recommendation 41A
41A.1.
(0sYT46)
The full and direct reference to the place of publication of the basionym or replaced synonym should immediately follow a proposed new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name. It should not be provided by mere cross-reference to a bibliography at the end of the publication or to other parts of the same publication, e.g. by use of the abbreviations “loc. cit.” or “op. cit.”
41A.2.
(Asaf75)
In the absence of established tradition, if publications are not paginated, page numbers indicated according to Art. 41 Note 2(a), (b), or (c) should be enclosed in square brackets.
Ex. 1.
(Suygk2)
The name Crocus antalyensioides Rukšāns was published electronically in International Rock Gardener (ISSN 2053-7557), Volume 64, April 2015, in Portable Document Format (PDF), without page numbers included on the actual pages of the publication. The reference should be cited as Int. Rock Gard. 64: [6]. 2015.
(YyIp9c)
Registration of names and nomenclatural acts
42.1.
(Pz9r8u)
Interested institutions, in particular those with expertise in nomenclatural indexing, may apply for recognition as nomenclatural repositories under this Code. A nomenclatural repository takes charge, for specified categories of organisms, of registering nomenclatural novelties (Art. 6 Note 4) and/or any nomenclatural act (Art. 34.1 footnote).
42.2.
(i3x8t2)
Applications for recognition as nomenclatural repositories for organisms other than those treated as fungi are to be addressed to the General Committee, which will refer the applications to the Registration Committee (see Div. III Prov. 7.15) and act upon its recommendation (for organisms treated as fungi see Art. F.5.1). Prior to such a recommendation, mechanisms and modalities of registration, and definition of coverage, will be developed in consultations among the applicant(s), the Registration Committee, and the Permanent Nomenclature Committee(s) for the group(s) concerned, and be widely publicized in the taxonomic community; a public trial run of at least one year must have shown that the procedure works efficiently and sustainably. The General Committee has the power to suspend or revoke a granted recognition.
42.3.
(Wx3NVE)
The General Committee has the power to:
(a) Appoint one or more localized or decentralized, open and accessible, electronic repositories (recognized repositories) to accession the information required by Art. 42.5 and 42.6 and issue identifiers.
(b) Cancel such appointment at its discretion.
(c) Set aside the requirements of Art. 42.5 and 42.6, if the repository mechanism, or essential parts of it, cease to function.
Decisions made by this Committee under these powers are subject to ratification by a later International Botanical Congress.
42.4.
(0rjbS8)
Registration may be proactive and/or synchronous and/or retrospective; that is, it may occur before and/or simultaneously with and/or after the valid publication of a nomenclatural novelty (Art. 6 Note 4) or the effective publication of any nomenclatural act (Art. 34.1 footnote).i
Note 1.
(EWJczC)
In contrast to mandatory registration of fungal names, registration of algal and plant names is voluntary.
i
Note 2.
(xfJl4w)
For ways in which proactive registration of nomenclatural novelties functions, see Art. F.5.2 and F.5.3, relevant for names of organisms treated as fungi, including fossil fungi and lichen-forming fungi.
42.5.
(z1Nu1k)
For an identifier to be issued by a recognized repository for a nomenclatural novelty (Art. 6 Note 4) applied to an organism treated as an alga or plant under this Code, the minimum elements of information that must be provided to the repository by either the author(s) or other user(s) of these scientific names are proof of effective publication (Art. 29–31) of the name itself along with those elements required for valid publication under Art. 38.1(a) and 39.2 (validating description or diagnosis) and Art. 40.1 and 40.5 (type) or Art. 41.5 (reference to the basionym or replaced synonym) and for algae Art. 44.2 (illustration or figure).
42.6.
(TB4aIR)
For an identifier to be issued by a recognized repository for the purpose of specifying the designation of a type of the name of an organism treated as an alga or plant under this Code, the minimum elements of information that must be provided to the repository by either the author(s) or other user(s) of these type designations are proof of effective publication (Art. 29–31) of the name being typified, along with the author(s) designating the type and those elements required by Art. 9.21, 9.22, and 9.23.
i
Note 3.
(Hg1lPG)
Proof of effective and/or valid publication for the purpose of issuing an identifier may be provided to the repository in a variety of forms including (but not limited to) PDFs, scanned page images, and/or URLs/DOIs that lead to free and publicly accessible websites where these may be obtained.
i
Note 4.
(wmkgFA)
For organisms treated as algae or plants under this Code, issuance of an identifier by a recognized repository has no effect on valid publication of a name (Art. 32–45) or effective type designation (Art. 7.8–7.11). Instead, these simply serve as stable digital references to the information present in the actual place of publication.
42.7.
(Oo0RHx)
In the interests of fully exploring best practices for the registration of nomenclatural novelties, the General Committee has the power to appoint one or more repositories (as specified under Art. 42.3) to register nomenclatural novelties in a manner other than the protocol described in Art. 42.5, for example, those that follow the well-established practices for fungal names (Art. F.5.3). Regardless of the protocol employed, registration for algae and plants will remain voluntary. Such appointments made by this Committee under these powers are subject to the decision of a later International Botanical Congress.
(vmJCNH)
Recommendation 42A
42A.1.
(MOersO)
Following the effective and valid publication of new names and nomenclatural acts, authors should report them to a recognized nomenclatural repository (Art. 42.1) for indexing and assignment of a unique identifier (Art. 42.5 and 42.6). While it is in the interest of the authors to do this promptly, any other party may present proof of effective and valid publication to these repositories for the purposes of both indexing and identifier assignment. In groups where proactive registration is mandatory (see Art. F.5), additional publication details (e.g. final pagination, precise date of publication, etc.) should be provided to the repository at this time.
42A.2.
(FpFYOa)
Specification of names and nomenclatural acts for the purpose of exchange of digital information should include the unique identifier for those entities as established by a recognized nomenclatural repository (Art. 42.1).
(QZHhxB)
Names in particular groups
(ikE5ql)
Names of fossil-taxa
43.1.
(i0rpre)
To be validly published, a name of a new fossil-taxon published on or after 1 January 1996 must be accompanied by a Latin or English description or diagnosis or by a reference (see Art. 38.14) to a previously and effectively published Latin or English description or diagnosis.
i
Note 1.
(zQdkD6)
Because Art. 39.1 does not apply to names of fossil-taxa, a validating description or diagnosis (see Art. 38) in any language is acceptable for them before 1996.
43.2.
(0FQuWO)
A name of a new fossil-genus or lower-ranked fossil-taxon published on or after 1 January 1912 is not validly published unless it is accompanied by an illustration or figure showing the essential characters or by a reference to a previously and effectively published such illustration or figure. For this purpose, in the case of a name of a fossil-genus or subdivision of a fossil-genus, citation of, or reference (direct or indirect) to, a name of a fossil-species validly published on or after 1 January 1912 will suffice.
Ex. 1.
(FiTXv1)
“Laconiella” when published by Krasser (in Sitzungsber. Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-Naturwiss. Kl. Abt. 1, 129: 16. 1920) included only one species, the intended name of which, “Laconiella sardinica”, was not validly published as no illustration or figure or reference to a previously and effectively published illustration or figure was provided. “Laconiella” is not therefore a validly published generic name.
Ex. 2.
(mBdoxL)
Batodendron Chachlov (in Izv. Sibirsk. Otd. Geol. Komiteta 2(5): 9, fig. 23–25. 1921) was published with a description and illustrations. Even though the new fossil-genus did not include any named species, its name is validly published (albeit as an illegitimate later homonym of the non-fossil generic name Batodendron Nutt. in Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc., ser. 2, 8: 261. 1842).
43.3.
(VrEKkF)
A name of a new fossil-species or infraspecific fossil-taxon published on or after 1 January 2001 is not validly published unless at least one of the validating illustrations is identified as representing the type specimen (see also Art. 9.15).
Ex. 3.
(UIp7z9)
In the protologue of Eophysaloides inflata Cam. Martínez & Deanna (in New Phytol. 238: 2688. 2023), the authors designated the holotype as “STRI-SGC 36163. (Fig. 2a–c)” and wrote in the caption of figure 2 “(a–c) Holotype of E. inflata, STRI-SGC 36163” thus clearly identifying the validating illustrations as representing the holotype specimen.
i
Note 2.
(NySuRA)
To be validly published, a nomenclatural novelty applied to a fungal fossil-taxon and published on or after 1 January 2013 must comply with Art. F.5.2 and F.5.3.
44.1.
(5zhH2k)
To be validly published, a name of a new taxon of non-fossil algae published between 1 January 1958 and 31 December 2011, inclusive, must be accompanied by a Latin description or diagnosis or by a reference (see Art. 38.14) to a previously and effectively published Latin description or diagnosis.
i
Note 1.
(t6Dl5h)
Because Art. 39.1 does not apply to names of algal taxa, a validating description or diagnosis (see Art. 38) in any language is acceptable for them before 1958.
Ex. 1.
(pQ0zDd)
Although Neoptilota Kylin (Gatt. Rhodophyc.: 392. 1956) was accompanied only by a description in German, it is a validly published name because it applies to an alga and was published before 1958.
Ex. 2.
(GlrMRk)
“Skeletonemopsis” (Sims in Diatom Res. 9: 408. 1995) was not validly published because it was not accompanied by a Latin description or diagnosis. The designation was applied to a genus of fossil diatoms, which are nevertheless treated as non-fossil algae (see Art. 1.1 and 13.3), to which Art. 44.1 applies. Skeletonemopsis P. A. Sims was validly published in App. III of the Melbourne Code (in Regnum Veg. 157: 50. 2015) by a full and direct reference to Sims’s previously published English description of “Skeletonemopsis” (see Art. 39.2) and by indicating the type as Skeletonema barbadense Grev.
44.2.
(IF9Cnb)
A name of a new species or infraspecific taxon of non-fossil algae published on or after 1 January 1958 is not validly published unless it is accompanied by an illustration or figure showing the distinctive morphological features, or by a reference to a previously and effectively published such illustration or figure.
(kXWAvN)
Recommendation 44A
44A.1.
(T494sC)
The illustration or figure required by Art. 44.2 should be prepared from actual specimens, preferably including the holotype.
(YszMtO)
Names in groups covered by other
Codes45.1.
(P0LAlt)
If a taxon originally assigned to a group not covered by this Code is treated as belonging to the algae or fungi, any of its names need satisfy only the requirements of the relevant other Code that the author was using for status equivalent to valid publication under this Code (but see Art. 54 and F.6.1, regarding homonymy). The Code used by the author is determined through internal evidence, regardless of any claim by the author as to the group of organisms to which the taxon is assigned. However, a name generated in zoological nomenclature in accordance with the Principle of Coordination (ICZN Article 46) is not validly published under this Code unless and until it actually appears in a publication as the accepted name of a taxon.
Ex. 1.
(GsyE0i)
Amphiprora Ehrenb. (in Abh. Königl. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1841: 401, t. II(VI), fig. 28. 1843), available1 under the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature as the name of a genus of animals, was first treated as belonging to the algae by Kützing (Kieselschal. Bacill.: 107. 1844). Under the International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants, Amphiprora is validly published and dates from 1843, not 1844.
Ex. 2.
(yvonx9)
Petalodinium Cachon & Cachon-Enj. (in Protistologica 5: 16. 1969) is available under the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature as the name of a genus of dinoflagellates. When the taxon is treated as belonging to the algae, its name is validly published and retains its original authorship and date even though the original publication lacked a Latin description or diagnosis (Art. 44.1).
Ex. 3.
(XYF0mZ)
Prochlorothrix hollandica Burger-Wiersma & al. (in Int. J. Syst. Bacteriol. 39: 256. 1989) was published according to the International Code of Nomenclature of Prokaryotes. When the taxon is treated as an alga, its name is validly published and retains its original authorship and date even though it was based on a living culture (Art. 8.4) and the original publication lacked a Latin description or diagnosis (Art. 44.1).
Ex. 4.
(yqsyM4)
Labyrinthodictyon Valkanov (in Progr. Protozool. 3: 373. 1969, ‘Labyrinthodyction’) is available under the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature as the name of a genus of rhizopods. When the taxon is treated as belonging to the fungi, its name is validly published and retains its original authorship and date even though the original publication lacked a Latin description or diagnosis (Art. 39.1).
Ex. 5.
(3DtyGH)
Protodiniferaceae Kof. & Swezy (in Mem. Univ. Calif. 5: 111. 1921, ‘Protodiniferidae’), available under the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature, is validly published as a name of a family of algae and retains its original authorship and date but with the original termination changed in accordance with Art. 18.4 and 32.2.
Ex. 6.
(MJVO6l)
Pneumocystis P. Delanoë & Delanoë (in Compt. Rend. Hebd. Séances Acad. Sci. 155: 660. 1912) was published for a “protozoan” genus with a description expressing doubt as to its generic status, “Si celui-ci doit constituer un genre nouveau, nous proposons de lui donner le nom de Pneumocystis Carinii. [If this is to constitute a new genus, we propose to give it the name Pneumocystis carinii.]” Under Art. 36.1(a) Pneumocystis would not be validly published, but Article 11.5.1 of the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature allows for such qualified publication before 1961. Therefore, Pneumocystis, because it is an available name under the ICZN, is validly published under Art. 45.1.
Ex. 7.
(rMcMIg)
Pneumocystis jirovecii Frenkel (in Natl. Cancer Inst. Monogr. 43: 16. 1976, ‘jiroveci’), treated as a protozoan, was published with only an English description and without designation of a type, but the former condition is no obstacle to availability under the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature (see ICZN Recommendation 13B) and the latter condition was no obstacle under that Code until after 1999 (ICZN Article 72.3). Therefore, when considered to be the name of a fungus, P. jirovecii, with corrected termination (Art. 60.8), is validly published under Art. 45.1. Subsequent publication of a Latin diagnosis and indication of type by Frenkel (in J. Eukaryot. Microbiol. 46: 91S. 1999), who treated the species as a fungus, was necessary for valid publication under the edition of the International Code of Botanical Nomenclature in operation at that time but is no longer so; P. jirovecii dates from 1976, not 1999.
i
Note 1.
(HLvREu)
Names of Microsporidia are not covered by this Code (see Pre. 8 and Art. F.1.1) even when Microsporidia are considered as fungi.
i
Note 2.
(MTmGy7)
If a taxon originally assigned to a group not covered by this Code is treated as belonging to the plants (i.e. not the algae or fungi), the authorship and date of any of its names are determined by the first publication that satisfies the relevant requirements of Art. 32–45 for valid publication.
(zev9aD)
Citation of names
(C2ZzHQ)
Author citations
46.1.
(LijeAK)
In publications, particularly those dealing with taxonomy and nomenclature, it may be desirable, even when no bibliographic reference to the protologue is made, to cite the author(s) of the name concerned (see also Art. 22.1 and 26.1). In so doing, the following rules of Art. 46 apply.
Ex. 1.
(l3OUa1)
Rosaceae Juss. (Gen. Pl.: 334. 1789), Rosa L. (Sp. Pl.: 491. 1753), Rosa gallica L. (l.c.: 492. 1753), Rosa gallica var. versicolor L. (Sp. Pl., ed. 2: 704. 1762), Rosa gallica L. var. gallica.
i
Note 1.
(YfpXNi)
A name of a taxon is attributed to the author(s) of the publication in which it appears (see Art. 46.5) unless one or more of the provisions of Art. 46 rule otherwise.
Ex. 2.
(oRJVdZ)
Wallich (Pl. Asiat. Rar. 3: 66. 15 Aug 1832) ascribed the name Aikinia brunonis to himself (“Wall.”) and, although he ascribed both the diagnosis and description to “Brown”, the correct attribution is A. brunonis Wall. because Wallich is the author of the publication and the name is not ascribed to anyone else.
46.2.
(zVXLF3)
A name of a new taxon is attributed to the author(s) to whom the name was ascribed when the validating description or diagnosis was simultaneously ascribed to or unequivocally associated with the same author(s), even when authorship of the publication is different. A new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name is attributed to the author(s) to whom it was ascribed when, in the publication in which it appears, it is explicitly stated that the same author(s) contributed in some way to that publication. Despite Art. 46.5, authorship of a nomenclatural novelty is always accepted as ascribed, even when it differs from authorship of the publication, when at least one author is common to both.
Ex. 3.
(ATtTas)
The name Pinus longaeva was published in a paper by Bailey (in Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 57: 243. 1971) and was ascribed to “D. K. Bailey”. The validating description is unequivocally associated with Bailey because he is the author of the publication (see Art. 46 Note 5). The name is therefore cited as P. longaeva D. K. Bailey (see also Art. 46 Note 1).
Ex. 4.
(nkSZsI)
The name Viburnum ternatum was published in Sargent (Trees & Shrubs 2: 37. 1907). It was ascribed to “Rehd.”, and the account of the species has “Alfred Rehder” at the end. The name is therefore cited as V. ternatum Rehder.
Ex. 5.
(tgqpex)
In a paper by Hilliard & Burtt (in Notes Roy. Bot. Gard. Edinburgh 43: 365. 1986) names of new species of Schoenoxiphium, including S. altum, were ascribed to Kukkonen, preceded by a statement “The following diagnostic descriptions of new species have been supplied by Dr. I. Kukkonen in order to make the names available for use.” The name is therefore cited as S. altum Kukkonen.
Ex. 6.
(Qu92fW)
In Torrey & Gray (Fl. N. Amer. 1: 198. 1838) the names Calyptridium and C. monandrum were ascribed to “Nutt. mss.”, and the descriptions were enclosed in double quotes indicating that Nuttall wrote them, as acknowledged in the preface. The names are therefore cited as Calyptridium Nutt. and C. monandrum Nutt.
Ex. 7.
(qoz11p)
When publishing Eucryphiaceae (in Bot. Zeitung (Berlin) 6: 130. 1848) the otherwise unnamed author “W.”, in a review of Gay’s Flora chilena (1845–1854), wrote “wird die Gattung Eucryphia als Typus einer neuen Familie, der Eucryphiaceae, angesehen [the genus Eucryphia is considered as type of a new family, the Eucryphiaceae]”, thus ascribing both the name and its validating description to Gay (Fl. Chil. 1: 348. 1846), who had used the designation “Eucrifiáceas” (see Art. 18.4). The name is therefore cited as Eucryphiaceae Gay.
Ex. 8.
(RxMiTA)
When Candolle (Essai Propr. Méd. Pl., ed. 2: 87. 1816) wrote “Elaeocarpeae. Juss., Ann. Mus. 11, p. 233” he ascribed the name to Jussieu and, to validate it, used Jussieu’s diagnosis of an unnamed family (in Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. 11: 233. 1808). The name is therefore cited as Elaeocarpaceae Juss., nom. cons. (see App. IIB), not Elaeocarpaceae “Juss. ex DC.”
Ex. 9.
(hcOFGF)
Green (Census Vasc. Pl. W. Australia, ed. 2: 6. 1985) ascribed the new combination Neotysonia phyllostegia to Wilson and elsewhere in the same publication acknowledged his assistance. The name is therefore cited as N. phyllostegia (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson.
Ex. 10.
(yHo9ni)
The authorship of Sophora tomentosa subsp. occidentalis (L.) Brummitt (in Kirkia 5: 265. 1966) is accepted as originally ascribed, although the new combination was published in a paper authored jointly by Brummitt & Gillett.
i
Note 2.
(mFPRrM)
When authorship of a name differs from authorship of the publication in which it was validly published, both are sometimes cited, connected by the word “in”. In such a case, “in” and what follows are part of a bibliographic citation and are better omitted unless the place of publication is being cited.
Ex. 11.
(1yzT5S)
The name and original description of Verrucaria aethiobola Wahlenb. (in Acharius, Methodus, Suppl.: 17. 1803) were published in a single paragraph followed by an ascription to “Wahlenb. Msc.” The name is therefore cited as V. aethiobola Wahlenb., not “Wahlenb. ex Ach.” nor “Wahlenb. in Ach.” (unless a full bibliographic citation is given), regardless of the accompanying description provided by Acharius.
Ex. 12.
(AAtEZW)
The new combination Crepis lyrata was published in Candolle’s Prodromus systematis naturalis regni vegetabilis (7: 170. 1838), as “C. lyrata (Froel. in litt. 1837)”, and in a footnote on p. 160 Candolle acknowledged Froelich as having authored the account of the relevant section of Crepis: “Sectiones generis iv, v et vi, à cl. Froelich elaboratae sunt [Sections iv, v and vi of the genus are provided by the famous Froelich]”. The name is therefore cited as C. lyrata (L.) Froel. or C. lyrata (L.) Froel. in Candolle (followed by a bibliographic citation of the place of publication), but not C. lyrata “(L.) Froel. ex DC.”
Ex. 13.
(u54sBN)
The name Physma arnoldianum was published in a paper authored by Arnold (in Flora 41: 94. 1858). Arnold introduced the name as “Ph. Arnoldianum Hepp. lit. 12. Decbr. 1857”, and the description is immediately followed by the phrase “Hepp. in lit.” The name is therefore cited as P. arnoldianum Hepp, not P. arnoldianum “Hepp ex Arnold”. Because Arnold is the author of the paper, not of the whole work (the journal Flora), his name is not required even in a full bibliographic citation.
i
Note 3.
(U7UHfk)
The authorship of a descriptive name (Art. 16.1(b)) is not changed if the name is used at a rank different from that at which it was first validly published because it is not a name at new rank (see Art. 6 Note 3; see also Art. 49.2).
Ex. 14.
(5PosSC)
Streptophyta Caval.-Sm. (in Lewin, Origins of Plastids: 340. 1993) was originally published as a name at the rank of infrakingdom (used as a rank between subkingdom and phylum). When the name is used at the rank of phylum, it is still cited as Streptophyta Caval.-Sm. (1993).
46.3.
(3uyHsX)
For the purposes of Art. 46, ascription is the direct association of the name of a person or persons with a new name or description or diagnosis of a taxon. An author citation associated with a synonym does not constitute ascription of the accepted name, nor does reference to a basionym or a replaced synonym (regardless of bibliographic accuracy) or reference to a homonym.
Ex. 15.
(dO1nJA)
The name Atropa sideroxyloides was published in Roemer & Schultes (Syst. Veg. 4: 686. 1819), with the name and diagnosis in a single paragraph followed by an ascription to “Reliq. Willd. MS.” As this represents direct association of Willdenow with both the name and the diagnosis, the name is cited as A. sideroxyloides Willd., not A. sideroxyloides “Roem. & Schult.” nor A. sideroxyloides “Willd. ex Roem. & Schult.”
Ex. 16.
(JiOQ2r)
Sicyos triqueter Moc. & Sessé ex Ser. (in Candolle, Prodr. 3: 309. 1830) was ascribed to Mociño and Sessé by Seringe’s writing “
S. triqueter (Moc. & Sessé, fl. mex. mss.)”. However,
Malpighia emarginata DC. (Prodr. 1: 578. 1824) was not ascribed to these authors by Candolle’s writing “
M. emarginata (fl. mex. ic. ined.)”.
Ex. 17.
(DWT0R4)
Lichen debilis Sm. (in Smith & Sowerby, Engl. Bot. 35: t. 2462. 1812) was not ascribed to Turner and Borrer by Smith’s citing “Calicium debile. Turn. and Borr. Mss.” as a synonym.
Ex. 18.
(vWJvGX)
When Opiz (1852) wrote “
Hemisphace Benth.” he did not ascribe the generic name to Bentham but provided an indirect reference to the basionym,
Salvia sect.
Hemisphace Benth. (see Art. 41 Ex. 4).
Ex. 19.
(vUeX8H)
When Brotherus (in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam. 1(3): 875. 1907) published “Dichelodontium nitidum Hook. fil. et Wils.” he provided an indirect reference to the basionym, Leucodon nitidus Hook. f. & Wilson, and did not ascribe the new combination to Hooker and Wilson. He did, however, ascribe to them the simultaneously published name of his new genus, Dichelodontium Hook. f. & Wilson ex Broth.
Ex. 20.
(cw4U3T)
When Sheh & Watson (in Wu & al., Fl. China 14: 72. 2005) wrote “Bupleurum hamiltonii var. paucefulcrans C. Y. Wu ex R. H. Shan & Yin Li, Acta Phytotax. Sin. 12: 291. 1974” they did not ascribe the new combination to any of those authors but provided a full and direct reference to the basionym, B. tenue var. paucefulcrans C. Y. Wu ex R. H. Shan & Yin Li.
Ex. 21.
(wjYKDe)
When Sirodot (1872) wrote “
Lemanea Bory” he published a later homonym because he excluded the nomenclatural type of
Lemanea Bory (see Art. 48 Ex. 1). His reference to Bory’s earlier homonym is not therefore ascription of the later homonym,
Lemanea Sirodot, to Bory.
i
Note 4.
(SWyHs7)
When the name of a new taxon is validly published by reference to a previously and effectively published description or diagnosis (Art. 38.1(a)), the name of the author of that description or diagnosis, even if not explicitly mentioned, is unequivocally associated with that description or diagnosis.
Ex. 22.
(Dn7t4b)
The appropriate author citation for
Baloghia pininsularis (see Art. 40 Ex. 2) is Guillaumin, and not McPherson & Tirel, because in the protologue the name was ascribed to Guillaumin and a full and direct reference was given to Guillaumin’s earlier Latin description. Even though McPherson & Tirel did not explicitly ascribe the validating description to its author, Guillaumin, he is “unequivocally associated” with it.
Ex. 23.
(FGCYZ4)
“Pancheria humboldtiana” was published by Guillaumin (in Mém. Mus. Natl. Hist. Nat., B, Bot. 15: 47. 1964), but not validly so because no type was indicated. Valid publication was achieved by Hopkins & Bradford (in Adansonia 31: 119. 2009), who designated “Baumann-Bodenheim 15515 (P! P00143076)” as the holotype, ascribed the name to Guillaumin, and by citing “Pancheria humboldtiana Guillaumin, Mémoires du Muséum national d’Histoire naturelle, sér. B, botanique 15: 47 (1964), nom. inval.”, provided a full and direct reference to a validating description that is unequivocally associated with Guillaumin. Despite Art. 46.10, the name is therefore attributed to Guillaumin, not “Guillaumin ex H. C. Hopkins & J. Bradford” as given by Hopkins & Bradford.
i
Note 5.
(6snIis)
A name or its validating description or diagnosis is treated as though ascribed to the author(s) of the publication (as defined in Art. 46.6) when there is no ascription to or unequivocal association with a different author or different authors.
Ex. 24.
(DGNMJT)
The name Asperococcus pusillus was published in Hooker (Brit. Fl., ed. 4, 2(1): 277. 1833), with the name and diagnosis ascribed simultaneously, at the end of the paragraph, to “Carm. MSS.” followed by a description ascribed similarly to Carmichael. Direct association of Carmichael with both the name and the diagnosis is evident, and the name must be cited as A. pusillus Carmich. However, the paragraph containing the name and the diagnosis of A. castaneus, published by Hooker on the same page of the same work, ends with “Scytosiphon castaneus, Carm. MSS.” Because Carmichael is directly associated with “S. castaneus” and not A. castaneus, the latter name is correctly cited as A. castaneus Hook., the author of the publication, even though the description is ascribed to Carmichael.
Ex. 25.
(W52qjv)
Brown is accepted as the author of the treatments of genera and species appearing under his name in Aiton’s Hortus kewensis, ed. 2 (1810–1813), even when names of new taxa or the descriptions validating them are not explicitly ascribed to him. In a postscript to that work (5: 532. 1813), Aiton wrote: “Much new matter has been added by this gentleman, and some without reference to his name [Robert Brown]; but the greater part of his able improvements are distinguished by the signature of Brown mss.” The latter phrase is therefore a statement of authorship not merely an ascription. For example, the new combination Oncidium triquetrum, based by indirect reference on Epidendrum triquetrum Sw. (Prodr.: 122. 1788), is cited as O. triquetrum (Sw.) R. Br. (in Aiton, Hort. Kew., ed. 2, 5: 216. 1813) and is not attributed to “R. Br. ex W. T. Aiton”, nor to Aiton alone, because in the generic heading Brown is credited with authorship of the treatment of Oncidium.
46.4.
(dEolye)
When a validly published name or its final epithet is taken up from and attributed to the author of a different “name” that has not been validly published, or one at a different rank likewise not validly published, only the author of the validly published name is cited (except as provided in Art. 46.7).
Ex. 26.
(27H5oa)
When publishing the new generic name Anoplon, Reichenbach (Consp. Regn. Veg.: 212b. 1828–1829) attributed the name to Wallroth and referred to the designation published by Wallroth (Orobanches Gen. Diask.: 25, 66. 1825) as Orobanche “Tribus III. Anoplon”, which was not validly published under Art. 37.7 because its rank was denoted by a misplaced term (tribe between genus and species). The generic name is cited as Anoplon Rchb., not Anoplon “Wallr. ex Rchb.”
Ex. 27.
(XkpEnm)
When publishing Andropogon drummondii, Steudel (Syn. Pl. Glumac. 1: 393. 1854) attributed the name to “Nees. (mpt. sub: Sorghum.)”. This reference to the unpublished binary designation “Sorghum drummondii Nees” is not ascription of A. drummondii to Nees, and the name is cited as A. drummondii Steud., not A. drummondii “Nees ex Steud.”
Ex. 28.
(CMGFYx)
“Porphyra yezoensis f. narawaensis” was published by Miura (in J. Tokyo Univ. Fish. 71: 6. 1984), but two gatherings (from the same place but on different dates) were cited as “holotype” and the designation was not therefore validly published. Kikuchi & al. (in J. Jap. Bot. 90: 381. 2015), using Miura’s description and designating a single specimen as the holotype, validly published the name Pyropia yezoensis f. narawaensis N. Kikuchi & al., which is not to be cited as P. yezoensis f. narawaensis “A. Miura ex N. Kikuchi & al.”
46.5.
(5t00k7)
A name of a new taxon is attributed to the author(s) of the publication in which it appears when the name was ascribed to a different author or different authors but the validating description or diagnosis was neither ascribed to nor unequivocally associated with that author or those authors. A new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name is attributed to the author(s) of the publication in which it appears, although it was ascribed to a different author or different authors, when no separate statement was made that one or more of those authors contributed in some way to that publication. However, in both cases, authorship as ascribed, followed by “ex”, may be inserted before the name(s) of the publishing author(s).
Ex. 29.
(ZHGIJR)
Henry (in Bull. Trimestriel Soc. Mycol. France 74: 303. 1958) published the designation “Cortinarius balteatotomentosus” with a Latin description and a locality citation but without indicating a type (Art. 40 Note 2). He later (in Bull. Trimestriel Soc. Mycol. France 101: 4. 1985) validated the name by designating a holotype and providing a full and direct reference to his earlier description (see Art. 33.1). The description is therefore unequivocally associated with Henry (Art. 46 Note 4) and the name, although not explicitly ascribed, is treated as ascribed to Henry because he was the author of the publication (Art. 46 Note 5). Liimatainen & al. (in Persoonia 33: 118. 2014) cited the authorship as C. balteatotomentosus “Rob. Henry ex Rob. Henry”, but Art. 46.5 does not apply because Henry did not ascribe the name to a different author. Under Art. 46.2, the name is correctly cited as C. balteatotomentosus Rob. Henry.
Ex. 30.
(QW1Vre)
Lilium tianschanicum was described by Grubov (in Grubov & Egorova, Rast. Tsent. Azii, Mater. Bot. Inst. Komarova 7: 70. 1977) as a new species, with its name ascribed to Ivanova; because there is no indication that Ivanova provided the validating description, the name is cited as either L. tianschanicum N. A. Ivanova ex Grubov or L. tianschanicum Grubov.
Ex. 31.
(OoLVec)
In a paper by Boufford, Tsi & Wang (in J. Arnold Arbor. 71: 123. 1990) the name Rubus fanjingshanensis was ascribed to Lu with no indication that Lu provided the description; the name is attributed to either L. T. Lu ex Boufford & al. or Boufford & al.
Ex. 32.
(1yMOIa)
Seemann (Fl. Vit.: 22. 1865) published Gossypium tomentosum “Nutt. mss.”, followed by a validating description not ascribed to Nuttall; the name is cited as either G. tomentosum Nutt. ex Seem. or G. tomentosum Seem.
Ex. 33.
(mwEGhf)
Rudolphi published Pinaceae (Syst. Orb. Veg.: 35. 1830) as “Pineae. Spreng.”, followed by a validating diagnosis not ascribed to Sprengel; the name is cited as either Pinaceae Spreng. ex F. Rudolphi or Pinaceae F. Rudolphi.
Ex. 34.
(HwFgaD)
Green (Census Vasc. Pl. W. Australia, ed. 2: 6. 1985) ascribed the new combination Tersonia cyathiflora to “(Fenzl) A. S. George”; because Green nowhere mentioned that George had contributed in any way, the name is cited as either T. cyathiflora (Fenzl) A. S. George ex J. W. Green or T. cyathiflora (Fenzl) J. W. Green.
46.6.
(EhDGWg)
For the purposes of Art. 46, the authorship of a publication is the authorship of that part of a publication in which a name appears regardless of the authorship or editorship of the publication as a whole.
Ex. 35.
(8bs8JP)
Pittosporum buxifolium was described as a new species, with its name ascribed to Feng, in Wu & Li, Flora yunnanica, vol. 3 (1983). The account of Pittosporaceae in that flora was authored by Yin, while the whole volume was edited by Wu & Li. The author of the publication (including the validating diagnosis) was Yin. The name is therefore cited as either P. buxifolium K. M. Feng ex W. Q. Yin or P. buxifolium W. Q. Yin, but not P. buxifolium “K. M. Feng ex C. Y. Wu & H. W. Li” nor P. buxifolium “C. Y. Wu & H. W. Li”.
Ex. 36.
(DcYZje)
Vicia amurensis f. sanneensis, ascribed to Jiang & Fu, was published in Ma & al. (editors), Flora intramongolica, ed. 2, vol. 3 (1989). The author of the account of Vicia in that flora is Jiang, one of the persons to whom the name was ascribed (see Art. 46.2 last sentence). The name is therefore cited as V. amurensis f. sanneensis Y. C. Jiang & S. M. Fu, not V. amurensis f. sanneensis “Y. C. Jiang & S. M. Fu ex Ma & al.”
Ex. 37.
(AovknG)
Centaurea funkii var. xeranthemoides “Lge. ined.” was described in Prodromus florae hispanicae, which was authored as a whole by Willkomm & Lange, although the different family treatments are by individual authors, and Fam. 63 Compositae has a footnote “Auctore Willkomm”. Because the validating description was not ascribed to Lange, the name is cited as C. funkii var. xeranthemoides Lange ex Willk. Its full bibliographic citation is C. funkii var. xeranthemoides Lange ex Willk. in Willkomm & Lange, Prodr. Fl. Hispan. 2: 154. 1865.
Ex. 38.
(YMxbHt)
The name Solanum dasypus was published in a work of Candolle (Prodr. 13(1): 161. 1852), in which the account of Solanaceae was authored by Dunal. Dunal introduced the name as “S. dasypus (Drège, n. 1933, in h. DC)” thereby ascribing it to Drège. The name is therefore cited as either S. dasypus Drège ex Dunal or S. dasypus Dunal.
Ex. 39.
(XVUKsz)
Schultes & Schultes (Mant. 3: 526. 1827), in a note, published a new classification of the traditional genera
Avena and
Trisetum, which they had received from “Besser in litt.” The publishing author of that text, in which the new genera
Acrospelion Bess.,
Helictotrichon Bess., and
Heterochaeta Bess. were described, is Besser. The new names are validly published, authored by Besser alone, regardless of whether or not the volume authors, Schultes & Schultes, accepted them (see also Art. 36 Ex. 3).
46.7.
(YSncAY)
When a name has been ascribed by its author to a pre-starting-point author, the latter may be included in the author citation, followed by “ex”. For groups with a starting-point later than 1753, when a taxon of a pre-starting-point author was changed in rank or taxonomic position upon valid publication of its name, that pre-starting-point author may be cited in parentheses, followed by “ex”.
Ex. 40.
(f8uRiL)
Linnaeus (Gen. Pl., ed. 5: 322. 1754) ascribed the name Lupinus to the pre-starting-point author Tournefort; the name is cited as either Lupinus Tourn. ex L. (Sp. Pl.: 751. 1753) or Lupinus L. (see Art. 13.4).
Ex. 41.
(JhvFML)
“Lyngbya glutinosa” (Agardh, Syst. Alg.: 73. 1824) was taken up as Hydrocoleum glutinosum by Gomont in the publication that marks the starting-point of the “Nostocaceae homocysteae” (in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 7, 15: 339. 1892). The name is cited as either H. glutinosum (C. Agardh) ex Gomont or H. glutinosum Gomont.
Ex. 42.
(UhibHP)
Designations of desmids published before their starting-point (see Art. 13.1(e)) may be cited according to their validation in Ralfs (Brit. Desmid. 1848) as follows: “Closterium dianae” (Ehrenberg, Infusionsthierchen: 92. 1838), cited as C. dianae Ehrenb. ex Ralfs (l.c.: 168. 1848); “Euastrum pinnatifidum” (Kützing, Phycol. Germ.: 134. 1845), cited as Micrasterias pinnatifida (Kütz.) ex Ralfs (l.c.: 77. 1848).
46.8.
(uxaKql)
In determining the correct author citation, only internal evidence in the publication as a whole (as defined in Art. 37.6) where the name was validly published is to be accepted, including ascription of the name, statements in the introduction, title, or acknowledgements, and typographical or stylistic distinctions in the text.
Ex. 43.
(e0do7G)
Although the descriptions in Aiton’s Hortus kewensis (1789) are generally considered to have been written by Solander or Dryander, the names of new taxa published there are attributed to Aiton, the stated author of the work, except where a name and description were both ascribed in that work to someone else.
Ex. 44.
(GMcuxE)
The name Andreaea angustata was published in a work of Limpricht (Laubm. Deutschl. 1: 144. 1885) with the ascription “nov. sp. Lindb. in litt. ad Breidler 1884 [new species of Lindberg in a letter to Breidler in 1884]”, but there is no internal evidence that Lindberg had supplied the validating description. Authorship is therefore cited as either Lindb. ex Limpr. or Limpr., but not “Lindb.”
46.9.
(PLvgRF)
External evidence may be used to determine authorship of nomenclatural novelties included in a publication for which there is no internal evidence of authorship.
Ex. 45.
(mKconc)
If no internal or external evidence of authorship of effectively and validly published names can be determined, the standard form “Anon.” (for Anonymous) may be used, e.g. Ficus cooperi Anon. (in Proc. Roy. Hort. Soc. London 2: 374. 1862) or Nymphaea gigantea f. hudsonii (Anon.) K. C. Landon (in Phytologia 40: 439. 1978).
Ex. 46.
(ktWyr1)
No authorship appears anywhere in the work known as “Cat. Pl. Upper Louisiana. 1813”, a catalogue of plants available from the Fraser Brothers Nursery. Based on external evidence (cf. Stafleu & Cowan in Regnum Veg. 105: 785. 1981), authorship of the document, and of included nomenclatural novelties such as Oenothera macrocarpa, is attributed to Thomas Nuttall.
Ex. 47.
(mQzLwZ)
The book that appeared under the title
Vollständiges systematisches Verzeichniß aller Gewächse Teutschlandes … (Leipzig 1782) has no explicit authorship but is attributed “einem Mitgliede der [to a member of the] Gesellschaft Naturforschender Freunde”. External evidence may be used to determine that G. A. Honckeny is the author of the work and of the nomenclatural novelties that appear in it (e.g.
Poa vallesiana Honck.,
Phleum hirsutum Honck.; see also Art. 23 Ex. 24), as was done by Pritzel (Thes. Lit. Bot.: 123. 1847).
46.10.
(WKZiWG)
Authors publishing nomenclatural novelties and wishing other persons’ names followed by “ex” to precede theirs in author citation may adopt the “ex” citation in the protologue.
Ex. 48.
(eeGy0Y)
In validly publishing the name Nothotsuga, Page (in Notes Roy. Bot. Gard. Edinburgh 45: 390. 1989) ascribed it to “H.-H. Hu ex C. N. Page”, noting that in 1951 Hu had published it as a nomen nudum; the name is attributed to either Hu ex C. N. Page or C. N. Page.
Ex. 49.
(98lbdK)
Atwood (in Selbyana 5: 302. 1981) ascribed the name of a new species, Maxillaria mombachoensis, to “Heller ex Atwood”, with a note stating that it was originally named by Heller, then deceased; the name is attributed to either A. H. Heller ex J. T. Atwood or J. T. Atwood.
(200wRn)
Recommendation 46A
46A.1.
(ONYmeZ)
For the purpose of author citation, prefixes indicating ennoblement (see Rec. 60C.4(d) and (e)) should be suppressed unless they are an inseparable part of the name.
Ex. 1.
(1EkaoS)
Lam. for J. B. P. A. Monet Chevalier de Lamarck, but De Wild. for E. De Wildeman.
46A.2.
(ehFncl)
When a name in an author citation is abbreviated, the abbreviation should be long enough to be distinctive, and should normally end with a consonant that, in the full name, precedes a vowel. The first letters should be given without any omission, but one of the last characteristic consonants of the name may be added when this is customary.
Ex. 2.
(os3b71)
L. for Linnaeus; Fr. for Fries; Juss. for Jussieu; Rich. for Richard; Bertol. for Bertoloni, to be distinct from Bertero; Michx. for Michaux, to be distinct from Micheli.
46A.3.
(FblKv9)
Given names or accessory designations serving to distinguish two authors of the same name should be abridged in the same way.
Ex. 3.
(jO3w2c)
R. Br. for Robert Brown; A. Juss. for Adrien de Jussieu; Burm. f. for Burman filius; J. F. Gmel. for Johann Friedrich Gmelin, J. G. Gmel. for Johann Georg Gmelin, C. C. Gmel. for Carl Christian Gmelin, S. G. Gmel. for Samuel Gottlieb Gmelin; Müll. Arg. for Jean Müller argoviensis (of Aargau).
46A.4.
(7wlqAX)
When it is a well-established custom to abridge a name in another manner, it is advisable to conform to custom.
Ex. 4.
(eRsAZQ)
DC. for A.-P. de Candolle; A. St.-Hil. for A. F. C. P. de Saint-Hilaire; Rchb. for H. G. L. Reichenbach.
i
Note 1.
(xJR21p)
Brummitt & Powell’s Authors of plant names (1992) provides unambiguous standard forms for many authors of names of organisms in conformity with this Recommendation. These standard forms, updated as necessary from the International Plant Names Index and Index Fungorum, have been used for author citations throughout this Code, although with additional spacing.
(xcpdoi)
Recommendation 46B
46B.1.
(HkBFiK)
In citing the author of the scientific name of a taxon, the romanization of the author’s name given in the original publication should normally be accepted. Where an author did not give a romanization, or where an author has at different times used different romanizations, then the romanization known to be preferred by the author or that most frequently adopted by the author should be accepted. In the absence of such information, the author’s name should be romanized in accordance with an internationally available standard.
46B.2.
(hNcoSB)
Authors of scientific names whose personal names are not written in the Latin alphabet should romanize their names, preferably (but not necessarily) in accordance with an internationally recognized standard and, as a matter of typographical convenience, without diacritical signs. Once authors have selected the romanization of their personal names, they should use it consistently. Whenever possible, authors should not permit editors or publishers to change the romanization of their personal names.
(eXzWeA)
Recommendation 46C
46C.1.
(VUZSxb)
After a name published jointly by two authors, both authors should be cited, linked by an ampersand (&) or by the word “et”.
Ex. 1.
(JRQ05f)
Didymopanax gleasonii Britton & P. Wilson or D. gleasonii Britton et P. Wilson.
46C.2.
(DMMha8)
After a name published jointly by more than two authors, the citation should be restricted to the first author followed by “& al.” or “et al.”, except in the original publication.
Ex. 2.
(tcT4PI)
Lapeirousia erythrantha var. welwitschii (Baker) Geerinck, Lisowski, Malaisse & Symoens (in Bull. Soc. Roy. Bot. Belgique 105: 336. 1972) should be cited as L. erythrantha var. welwitschii (Baker) Geerinck & al. or L. erythrantha var. welwitschii (Baker) Geerinck et al.
(drKdqF)
Recommendation 46D
46D.1.
(4driOf)
Authors should cite themselves by name after each nomenclatural novelty they publish rather than refer to themselves by expressions such as “nobis” (nob.) or “mihi” (m.).
(53YNdU)
Names of altered taxa without exclusion of type
47.1.
(mcRlGJ)
An alteration of the diagnostic characters or of the circumscription of a taxon without the exclusion of the type does not warrant a change of authorship of the name of the taxon.
Ex. 1.
(kLFg8d)
When the original material of Arabis beckwithii S. Watson (in Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts 22: 467. 1887) is attributed to two different species, as by Munz (in Bull. S. Calif. Acad. Sci. 31: 62. 1932), the species not including the lectotype must have a different name (A. shockleyi Munz) but the other species is still named A. beckwithii S. Watson.
Ex. 2.
(OD1hZk)
Myosotis as revised by Brown differs from the genus as originally circumscribed by Linnaeus, but the generic name remains Myosotis L. because the type of the name is still included in Brown’s circumscription of the genus (it may be cited as Myosotis L. emend. R. Br.: see Rec. 47A).
Ex. 3.
(jrTruJ)
The variously defined species that includes the types of Centaurea jacea L. (Sp. Pl.: 914. 1753), C. amara L. (Sp. Pl., ed. 2: 1292. 1763), and a variable number of other species names is still called C. jacea L. (or, as the case may be, C. jacea L. emend. Coss. & Germ., C. jacea L. emend. Vis., or C. jacea L. emend. Godr.: see Rec. 47A).
(52KYEV)
Recommendation 47A
47A.1.
(OMpWen)
When an alteration as mentioned in Art. 47.1 has been considerable, the nature of the change may be indicated by adding such words, abbreviated where suitable, as “emendavit” (emend.) followed by the name of the author responsible for the change, “mutatis characteribus” (mut. char.), “pro parte” (p. p.), “excluso genere” or “exclusis generibus” (excl. gen.), “exclusa specie” or “exclusis speciebus” (excl. sp.), “exclusa varietate” or “exclusis varietatibus” (excl. var.), “sensu amplo” (s. ampl.), “sensu lato” (s. l.), “sensu stricto” (s. str.), etc.
Ex. 1.
(ZGYbgH)
Phyllanthus L. emend. Müll. Arg.; Globularia cordifolia L. excl. var. (emend. Lam.).
(lhzas4)
Names of altered taxa with exclusion of type
48.1.
(RVdXeV)
The application of an existing name to a different taxon without exclusion of the type is considered to be a misapplication that has no nomenclatural status (but see Art. 57.1; see also Rec. 50D). However, if an author applies an existing name but definitely excludes its type, a later homonym that must be attributed solely to that author is considered to have been published. Similarly, when an author who adopts a name refers to an apparent basionym or replaced synonym but explicitly excludes its type, the name of a new taxon is considered to have been published that must be attributed solely to that author. Exclusion can be achieved by simultaneous explicit inclusion of the type in a different taxon by the same author.
Ex. 1.
(E73fy8)
Sirodot included Lemanea corallina Bory, the type of Lemanea Bory (in Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. 12: 178, 183. 1808), in his new genus Sacheria Sirodot (in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 5, 16: 69. 1872), the name of which was therefore illegitimate (Art. 52.1). As a result, Lemanea, as treated by Sirodot (l.c. 1872), is cited as Lemanea Sirodot non Bory, and not as Lemanea “Bory emend. Sirodot”.
Ex. 2.
(H1K7ne)
In the protologue of Peltophorum brasiliense Urb. (in Symb. Antill. 2: 285. 1900), Urban cited in synonymy “Caesalpinia brasiliensis Linn. Spec. I ed. vol. I (1753) p. 380 (p. p.)”, but on p. 279 he also accepted C. brasiliensis L. (Sp. Pl.: 380. 1753) as a distinct species. He thereby definitely excluded the type of C. brasiliensis from P. brasiliense, which was therefore published not as a new combination but as the legitimate name of a new species.
Ex. 3.
(P6tGaL)
The type of Myginda sect. Gyminda Griseb. (Cat. Pl. Cub.: 55. 1866) is M. integrifolia Poir. even though Grisebach misapplied the latter name. When Sargent raised the section to the rank of genus, he named the species described by Grisebach G. grisebachii and explicitly excluded M. integrifolia from the genus. Gyminda Sarg. (in Gard. & Forest 4: 4. 1891) is therefore the name of a new genus, typified by G. grisebachii Sarg., not a name at new rank based on M. sect. Gyminda.
i
Note 1.
(CSctXm)
Misapplication of a new combination, name at new rank, or replacement name to a different taxon, but without explicit exclusion of the type of the basionym or replaced synonym, is dealt with under Art. 7.3 and 7.4.
i
Note 2.
(qAtoV4)
Retention of a name in a sense that excludes its original type, or its type designated under Art. 7–10, can be achieved only by conservation (see Art. 14.9).
48.2.
(Czouit)
For the purpose of Art. 48.1, definite exclusion or inclusion of the type of a name means exclusion or inclusion of:
(a) the holotype under Art. 9.1 or the original type under Art. 10; or
(b) all syntypes under Art. 9.6 or all elements eligible as types under Art. 10.2; or
(c) the type previously designated under Art. 9.11–9.13 or 10.2; or
(d) the type previously conserved under Art. 14.9.
Exclusion of the type is also achieved by:
(e) explicit exclusion of the name itself or any name homotypic at that time, unless the type is at the same time included either explicitly or by implication.
Ex. 4.
(ZXFnca)
The name Chusquea quila was published by Kunth (Révis. Gramin.: 138. 1829) with reference to “Arundo quila Poir., excl. Syn.” The only synonym cited by Poiret (in Lamarck & al., Encycl. 6: 274. 1804) was the phrase name for A. quila Molina (Sag. Stor. Nat. Chili: 154, 155, 349. 1782). Chusquea quila Kunth is the name of a new taxon validated by Poiret’s description because Kunth explicitly excluded its apparent basionym A. quila Molina.
i
Note 3.
(twbsD5)
For the purpose of Art. 48.1, the inclusion of an apparent basionym with an expression of doubt, or in a sense that excludes one or more but not all of its potential type elements, does not by itself constitute exclusion of its type.
Ex. 5.
(XUhJLq)
The name Meum segetum was published by Gussone (Fl. Sicul. Prodr. 1: 346. 1827) with citation of “Anethum segetum. Lin. mant. 219?” in synonymy. Because Gussone’s expression of doubt did not exclude the type of A. segetum L. (Mant. Pl.: 219. 1771), he published the new combination M. segetum (L.) Guss., not the name of a new taxon.
Ex. 6.
(pkEBwN)
The name Amorphophallus campanulatus was published by Decaisne (in Nouv. Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. 3: 366. 1834) with citation of Arum campanulatum Roxb. (Pl. Coromandel 3: 68. 1820) in synonymy, but with exclusion of certain elements included by Roxburgh (“Excl. syn. Hort. malab. nec non t. 112. Herb. Amb. V.”). Because Decaisne did not explicitly exclude the type of A. campanulatum, which in 1834 had no holotype, syntypes, previously designated lectotype, or previously conserved type, he published the new combination Amorphophallus campanulatus (Roxb.) Decne., not the name of a new taxon.
(fTOyae)
Parenthetical author citations
49.1.
(97wSf9)
Author citation for a name at the rank of genus or below that has a basionym (Art. 6.10) comprises the author(s) of the basionym cited in parentheses followed by the author(s) of the name itself (see also Art. 46.7).
Ex. 1.
(Ua1Vs9)
Medicago polymorpha var. orbicularis L. (Sp. Pl.: 779. 1753) when raised to the rank of species is cited as M. orbicularis (L.) Bartal. (Cat. Piante Siena: 60. 1776).
Ex. 2.
(eTSakL)
Anthyllis sect. Aspalathoides DC. (Prodr. 2: 169. 1825) raised to generic rank, retaining the epithet Aspalathoides as its name, is cited as Aspalathoides (DC.) K. Koch (Hort. Dendrol.: 242. 1853).
Ex. 3.
(zNI2h2)
Cineraria sect. Eriopappus Dumort. (Fl. Belg.: 65. 1827) when transferred to Tephroseris (Rchb.) Rchb. is cited as T. sect. Eriopappus (Dumort.) Holub (in Folia Geobot. Phytotax. 8: 173. 1973).
Ex. 4.
(d9w7t0)
Cistus aegyptiacus L. (Sp. Pl.: 527. 1753) when transferred to Helianthemum Mill. is cited as H. aegyptiacum (L.) Mill. (Gard. Dict., ed. 8: Helianthemum No. 23. 1768).
Ex. 5.
(SpoPqV)
Fumaria bulbosa var. solida L. (Sp. Pl.: 699. 1753) was raised to specific rank as F. solida (L.) Mill. (Gard. Dict. Abr., ed. 6: Fumaria No. 8. 1771). The name of this species when transferred to Corydalis DC. is cited as C. solida (L.) Clairv. (Man. Herbor. Suisse: 371. 1811), not C. solida “(Mill.) Clairv.”
Ex. 6.
(fqpqzw)
Pulsatilla montana var. serbica W. Zimm. (in Feddes Repert. Spec. Nov. Regni Veg. 61: 95. 1958), originally placed under P. montana subsp. australis (Heuff.) Zämelis, retains its authorship when placed under P. montana subsp. dacica Rummelsp. (see Art. 24.1) and is not to be cited as var. serbica “(W. Zimm.) Rummelsp.” (in Feddes Repert. 71: 29. 1965).
Ex. 7.
(zIqOKx)
Salix subsect. Myrtilloides C. K. Schneid. (Ill. Handb. Laubholzk. 1: 63. 1904), originally placed under S. sect. Argenteae W. D. J. Koch, retains its authorship when placed under S. sect. Glaucae Pax (see Art. 21.1) and is not to be cited as S. subsect. Myrtilloides “(C. K. Schneid.) Dorn” (in Canad. J. Bot. 54: 2777. 1976).
Ex. 8.
(qFAPXH)
The name Lithocarpus polystachyus published by Rehder (in J. Arnold Arbor. 1: 130. 1919) was based on Quercus polystachya A. DC. (Prodr. 16(2): 107. 1864), ascribed by Candolle to “Wall.! list n. 2789” (a nomen nudum); Rehder’s combination is cited as either L. polystachyus (Wall. ex A. DC.) Rehder or L. polystachyus (A. DC.) Rehder (see Art. 46.5).
i
Note 1.
(otNmDh)
Author citation for a replacement name (Art. 6.11) comprises only the author(s) of the name itself, not those of the replaced synonym.
Ex. 9.
(VjrlC8)
Mycena coccineoides, a replacement name for
Omphalina coccinea Murrill (see Art. 6 Ex. 15), is cited as
M. coccineoides Grgur., not
M. coccineoides “(Murrill) Grgur.” (see also Art. 58 Ex. 1, 3, and 4).
i
Note 2.
(97xBcd)
Art. 46.7 provides for the use of parenthetical author citations preceding the word “ex” after some names in groups with a starting-point later than 1753.
49.2.
(Sqjw6V)
Parenthetical author citations are not used for suprageneric names.
Ex. 10.
(8lTTTV)
Even though Illiciaceae A. C. Sm. (in Sargentia 7: 8. 1947) was validly published by reference to Illicieae DC. (Prodr. 1: 77. 1824) it is not to be cited as Illiciaceae “(DC.) A. C. Sm.”
(ood7m3)
Transfer between the hybrid and non-hybrid category
50.1.
(Rk8K4k)
When a taxon at the rank of species or below is transferred from the non-hybrid category to the hybrid category at the same rank (Art. H.10 Note 1), or vice versa, the authorship remains unchanged but may be followed by an indication in parentheses of the original category.
Ex. 1.
(dXG6Rp)
Stachys ambigua Sm. (in Smith & Sowerby, Engl. Bot. 30: t. 2089. 1809) was published as the name of a species. If regarded as applying to a hybrid, it may be cited as S. ×ambigua Sm. (pro sp.).
Ex. 2.
(RfEWn9)
Salix ×glaucops Andersson (in Candolle, Prodr. 16(2): 281. 1868) was published as the name of a hybrid. Later, Rydberg (in Bull. New York Bot. Gard. 1: 270. 1899) considered the taxon to be a species. If this view is accepted, the name may be cited as
S. glaucops Andersson (pro hybr.).
(j1JgFj)
General Recommendations on citation
Recommendation 50A
50A.1.
(TiiIgf)
In the citation of a designation that is not validly published because it was merely cited as a synonym (Art. 36.1(b)), the words “as synonym” or “pro syn.” should be added.
(iwXhU5)
Recommendation 50B
50B.1.
(zPE1JV)
In the citation of a nomen nudum, its status should be indicated by adding the words “nomen nudum” or “nom. nud.”
Ex. 1.
(a4vFau)
“Carex bebbii” (Olney, Carices Bor.-Amer. 2: 12. 1871), published without a description or diagnosis, should be cited as Carex bebbii Olney, nomen nudum (or nom. nud.).
(Z7tldV)
Recommendation 50C
50C.1.
(THKoTR)
The citation of a later homonym should be followed by the name of the author of the earlier homonym preceded by the word “non”, preferably with the date of publication added. In some instances, it is advisable to also cite any other homonyms, preceded by the word “nec”.
Ex. 1.
(1xdQzP)
Ulmus racemosa Thomas in Amer. J. Sci. Arts 19: 170. 1831, non Borkh. 1800.
Ex. 2.
(0KGGx5)
Lindera Thunb., Nov. Gen. Pl.: 64. 1783, nom. cons., non Adans. 1763.
Ex. 3.
(Gcm6aK)
Bartlingia Brongn. in Ann. Sci. Nat. (Paris) 10: 373. 1827, non Rchb. 1824 nec F. Muell. 1882.
(eh7gSs)
Recommendation 50D
50D.1.
(BMQhOh)
Misidentifications should not be included in synonymies but added after them. A misapplied name should be indicated by the words “auct. non” followed by the name(s) of the original author(s) and the bibliographic reference of the misidentification.
Ex. 1.
(tGhtFN)
Ficus stortophylla Warb. in Ann. Mus. Congo Belge, Bot., ser. 4, 1: 32. 1904. F. irumuensis De Wild., Pl. Bequaert. 1: 341. 1922. F. exasperata auct. non Vahl: De Wildeman & Durand in Ann. Mus. Congo Belge, Bot., ser. 2, 1: 54. 1899; De Wildeman, Miss. Ém. Laurent: 26. 1905; Durand & Durand, Syll. Fl. Congol.: 505. 1909.
(ELJCI2)
Recommendation 50E
50E.1.
(1pi4Nx)
After a conserved name (nomen conservandum; see Art. 14 and App. II–IV) the abbreviation “nom. cons.” or, in the case of a conserved spelling, “orth. cons.” (orthographia conservanda) should be added in a formal citation.
Ex. 1.
(g5NazX)
Protea L., Mant. Pl.: 187. 1771, nom. cons., non L. 1753.
Ex. 2.
(NsA804)
Combretum Loefl. 1758, nom. cons.
Ex. 3.
(Cwnw2f)
Glechoma L. 1753, orth. cons., ‘Glecoma’.
50E.2.
(nC6HFN)
After a name rejected under Art. 56 (nomen utique rejiciendum, suppressed name; see App. V) the abbreviation “nom. rej.” should be added in a formal citation.
Ex. 4.
(jpszlW)
Betula alba L. 1753, nom. rej.
i
Note 1.
(UAInaV)
Rec. 50E.2 also applies to any combination based on a nomen utique rejiciendum (suppressed name; see Art. 56.1).
Ex. 5.
(7GVmYr)
Dryobalanops sumatrensis (J. F. Gmel.) Kosterm. in Blumea 33: 346. 1988, nom. rej.
(TyeqWH)
Recommendation 50F
50F.1.
(5kLJoP)
If a name is cited with alterations from the form as originally published, it is desirable that in full citations the exact original form should be added, preferably between single or double quotation marks.
Ex. 1.
(kJNEw8)
Pyrus calleryana Decne. (P. mairei H. Lév. in Repert. Spec. Nov. Regni Veg. 12: 189. 1913, ‘Pirus’).
Ex. 2.
(GJX65v)
Zanthoxylum cribrosum Spreng., Syst. Veg. 1: 946. 1824, ‘Xanthoxylon’ (Z. caribaeum var. floridanum (Nutt.) A. Gray in Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts 23: 225. 1888, ‘Xanthoxylum’).
Ex. 3.
(dJasf5)
Spathiphyllum solomonense Nicolson in Amer. J. Bot. 54: 496. 1967, ‘solomonensis’.
(sLZX9F)
Recommendation 50G
50G.1.
(uFtn6a)
Authors should avoid mentioning in their publications previously unpublished names that they do not accept, especially if the persons responsible for these unpublished names have not formally authorized their publication (see Rec. 23A.3(i)).
(WQwxrO)
Rejection of names
(RMieHY)
Limitation of rejection
51.1.
(g69DGM)
A legitimate name must not be rejected merely because it, or its epithet, is inappropriate or disagreeable, or because another is preferable or better known (but see Art. 14, 56.1, and F.7.1), or because it has lost its original meaning.
Ex. 1.
(I8Y5Ko)
Changes such as the following are contrary to Art. 51.1: Mentha to Minthe, Staphylea to Staphylis, Tamus to Tamnus, Thamnos, or Thamnus, Tillaea to Tillia, Vincetoxicum to Alexitoxicon; and Orobanche artemisiae to O. artemisiepiphyta, O. columbariae to O. columbarihaerens, O. rapum-genistae to O. rapum or O. sarothamnophyta.
Ex. 2.
(zAuhTL)
Ardisia quinquegona Blume (Bijdr. Fl. Ned. Ind. 13: 689. 1825) is not to be rejected in favour of A. pentagona A. DC. (in Trans. Linn. Soc. London 17: 124. 1834) merely because the specific epithet quinquegona is a hybrid word (Latin and Greek) (contrary to Rec. 23A.3(c)).
Ex. 3.
(aN14i3)
The name Scilla peruviana L. (Sp. Pl.: 309. 1753) is not to be rejected merely because the species does not grow in Peru.
Ex. 4.
(CKERXP)
The name Petrosimonia oppositifolia (Pall.) Litv. (Sched. Herb. Fl. Ross. 7: 13. 1911), based on Polycnemum oppositifolium Pall. (Reise Russ. Reich. 1: 484. 1771), is not to be rejected merely because the species has leaves only partly opposite, and partly alternate, although there is another closely related species, Petrosimonia brachiata (Pall.) Bunge, that has all its leaves opposite.
Ex. 5.
(USe450)
Richardia L. (Sp. Pl.: 330. 1753) is not to be rejected in favour of Richardsonia, as was done by Kunth (in Mém. Mus. Hist. Nat. 4: 430. 1818), merely because the name was originally dedicated to Richardson.
51.2.
(151NCC)
Despite Art. 51.1, a legitimate name of a new taxon or a replacement name published on or after 1 January 2026 may be rejected (under Art. 56.1) because it, or its epithet, is derogatory to a group of people.
(WsDB3G)
Recommendation 51A
51A.1.
(oXkBZI)
Authors are strongly advised to avoid publishing names of new taxa or replacement names that could be viewed as inappropriate, disagreeable, offensive, or unacceptable by any national, ethnic, cultural, or other groups.
(ZHr04a)
Nomenclaturally superfluous names
52.1.
(8B5Ir6)
A name, unless conserved (Art. 14), protected (Art. F.2), or sanctioned (Art. F.3), is illegitimate and is to be rejected if it was nomenclaturally superfluous when published, i.e. if the taxon to which it was applied, as circumscribed by its author, definitely included the type (as qualified in Art. 52.2) of a name that ought to have been adopted, or of which the epithet ought to have been adopted, under Art. 11 (but see Art. 52.4 and F.8.1).
52.2.
(40jzoe)
For the purpose of Art. 52.1, definite inclusion of the type of a name is achieved by citation of:
(a) the holotype under Art. 9.1 or the original type under Art. 10; or
(b) all syntypes under Art. 9.6 or all elements eligible as types under Art. 10.2; or
(c) the type previously designated under Art. 9.11–9.13 or 10.2; or
(d) the type previously conserved under Art. 14.9; or
(e) the name itself or any name homotypic at that time, unless the type is at the same time excluded either explicitly or by implication.
For this purpose, citation of an illustration of a specimen is treated as citation of the specimen.
Ex. 1.
(QWk54k)
The generic name Cainito Adans. (Fam. Pl. 2: 166. 1763) is illegitimate because it was a superfluous name for Chrysophyllum L. (Sp. Pl.: 192. 1753), which Adanson cited as a synonym.
Ex. 2.
(1OCUlI)
Picea excelsa Link (in Linnaea 15: 517. 1841) is illegitimate because it is based on Pinus excelsa Lam. (Fl. Franç. 2: 202. 1779), a superfluous name for Pinus abies L. (Sp. Pl.: 1002. 1753). Under Picea the correct name is Picea abies (L.) H. Karst. (Deut. Fl.: 324. 1881).
Ex. 3.
(fuHMby)
Salix myrsinifolia Salisb. (Prodr. Stirp. Chap. Allerton: 394. 1796) is legitimate because it is explicitly based on “S. myrsinites” of Hoffmann (Hist. Salic. Ill.: 71. 1787), a misapplication of S. myrsinites L. (Sp. Pl.: 1018. 1753), a name that Salisbury excluded by implication by not citing Linnaeus as he did under each of the other 14 species of Salix.
Ex. 4.
(2hKSo6)
Cucubalus latifolius Mill. and C. angustifolius Mill. are not illegitimate names, although Miller’s species are now united with the species previously named C. behen L. (Sp. Pl.: 414. 1753): C. latifolius and C. angustifolius as circumscribed by Miller (Gard. Dict., ed. 8: Cucubalus No. 2, 3. 1768) did not include the type of C. behen L., a name that he adopted for another species.
Ex. 5.
(KPkZDb)
Explicit exclusion of type. When publishing the name Galium tricornutum, Dandy (in Watsonia 4: 47. 1957) cited G. tricorne Stokes (Bot. Arr. Brit. Pl., ed. 2, 1: 153. 1787) pro parte as a synonym while explicitly excluding its type.
Ex. 6.
(8YOqao)
Exclusion of type by implication. Tmesipteris elongata P. A. Dang. (in Botaniste 2: 213. 1891) was published as a new species but Psilotum truncatum R. Br. was cited as a synonym. However, on the following page, T. truncata (R. Br.) Desv. is recognized as a different species and two pages later both are distinguished in a key, thus showing that the meaning of the cited synonym was either “P. truncatum R. Br. pro parte” or “P. truncatum auct. non R. Br.”
Ex. 7.
(Omb3co)
Under
Bauhinia semla Wunderlin (in Taxon 25: 362. 1976), the name
B. retusa Roxb. ex DC. (Prodr. 2: 515. 1825) non Poir. (in Lamarck, Encycl. Suppl. 1: 599. 1811), was cited as the replaced synonym while
B. emarginata Roxb. ex G. Don (Gen. Hist. 2: 462. 1832) non Mill. (Gard. Dict., ed. 8:
Bauhinia No. 5. 1768), was also cited in synonymy, and hence the types of the two synonyms were definitely included. However,
B. roxburghiana Voigt (Hort. Suburb. Calcutt.: 254. 1845), which was published as a replacement name (Art. 6.12) for
B. emarginata Roxb. ex G. Don, is necessarily homotypic with it (Art. 7.4) and should have been adopted by Wunderlin. Therefore,
B. semla is an illegitimate superfluous name but is typified by the type of its replaced synonym,
B. retusa Roxb. ex DC.
(see Art. 7 Ex. 5).
Ex. 8.
(eGX1GT)
Both Apios americana Medik. (in Vorles. Churpfälz. Phys.-Ökon. Ges. 2: 355. 1787) and A. tuberosa Moench (Methodus: 165. 1794) are replacement names for the legitimate Glycine apios L. (Sp. Pl.: 753. 1753), the epithet of which in combination with Apios would form a tautonym (Art. 23.4) and would not therefore be validly published (Art. 32.1(c)). Apios tuberosa was nomenclaturally superfluous when published, and is therefore illegitimate, because Moench cited in synonymy G. apios, which was then, as now, homotypic with A. americana, the name that has priority and that Moench should have adopted.
Ex. 9.
(UhtzT6)
Welwitschia Rchb. (Handb. Nat. Pfl.-Syst.: 194. 1837) was based on Hugelia Benth. (Edwards’s Bot. Reg. 19: t. 1622. 1833), non Huegelia Rchb. (in Mitth. Geb. Fl. Pomona 1829(13): 50. 1829). Welwitschia Hook. f. (in Gard. Chron. 1862: 71. 1862) was conserved against Welwitschia Rchb., becoming effective on 18 May 1910 (see Art. 14 Note 4(b)). Eriastrum Wooton & Standl. (in Contr. U. S. Natl. Herb. 16: 160. 1913), also based on Hugelia Benth., was not therefore nomenclaturally superfluous when published because Welwitschia Rchb. was no longer available for use.
i
Note 1.
(ilUEIR)
The inclusion, with an expression of doubt, of an element in a new taxon, e.g. the citation of a name with a question mark, or in a sense that excludes one or more of its potential type elements, does not make the name of the new taxon nomenclaturally superfluous.
Ex. 10.
(CRhuKc)
The protologue of Blandfordia grandiflora R. Br. (Prodr.: 296. 1810) includes, in synonymy, “Aletris punicea. Labill. nov. holl. 1. p. 85. t. 111 ?”, indicating that the new species might be the same as A. punicea Labill. (Nov. Holl. Pl. 1: 85. 1805). Blandfordia grandiflora is nevertheless a legitimate name.
i
Note 2.
(eWFTE8)
The inclusion, in a new taxon, of an element that was subsequently designated as the type of a name that, so typified, ought to have been adopted, or of which the epithet ought to have been adopted, does not by itself make the name of the new taxon illegitimate.
Ex. 11.
(NBblpL)
Leccinum Gray (Nat. Arr. Brit. Pl. 1: 646. 1821) does not include any of the elements eligible as types of the then untypified Boletus L. (Sp. Pl.: 1176. 1753), nom. cons., and is not therefore illegitimate even though it included, as L. edule (Bull.) Gray, the subsequently conserved type of Boletus, B. edulis Bull., nom. sanct.
Ex. 12.
(lDWc4T)
The protologue of Capparis baducca L. (Sp. Pl.: 504. 1753), nom. rej., included American and Indian elements. Candolle (Prodr. 1: 246. 1824) published C. rheedei DC., for which he included only the Indian element (“Badukka” in Rheede, Hort. Malab. 6: t. 57. 1686) and excluded the American element. Jacobs (in Blumea 12: 435. 1965) lectotypified the Linnaean name on the Indian element. The name C. rheedei is legitimate even though it includes the subsequently designated lectotype of C. baducca (see App. V).
52.3.
(67pXIC)
For the purpose of Art. 52.2(e), citation of a name can be achieved by a direct and unambiguous reference to it, e.g. by citation of its original sequential number or exact diagnostic phrase name (Linnaean “nomen specificum legitimum”) rather than its epithet.
Ex. 13.
(fkF9Uj)
In publishing the name Matricaria suaveolens (Fl. Suec., ed. 2: 297. 1755), Linnaeus adopted the phrase name and included all the synonyms of M. recutita L. (Sp. Pl.: 891. 1753), but did not explicitly cite M. recutita. Because in 1755 M. recutita had no holotype, no syntypes, and no designated lectotype or conserved type, the provisions of Art. 52.2 alone do not make M. suaveolens illegitimate. However, because the exact diagnostic phrase name (nomen specificum legitimum) of M. recutita was that provided for M. suaveolens, the latter name is illegitimate under Art. 52.3.
Ex. 14.
(GGU4U9)
Cyperus involucratus Rottb. (Descr. Pl. Rar.: 22. 1772) was validly published with the species number “57” and a short description (diagnostic phrase name). Subsequently, Rottbøll (Descr. Icon. Rar. Pl.: 42. 1773) published C. flabelliformis Rottb., referred to his previous place of publication, and repeated the earlier diagnostic phrase name almost verbatim, but added as a remark “Ob formam involucri nomen triviale mutavi. [I have changed the trivial name (i.e. the epithet) because of the shape of the involucre.]” Although Rottbøll did not cite the name C. involucratus as a synonym, his direct and unambiguous reference to it and his remark about the change of the epithet make the name C. flabelliformis superfluous and illegitimate.
i
Note 3.
(vbloEe)
For the purpose of Art. 52.2(e), citation of a later isonym is equivalent to citation of the name itself if the citing author does not normally cite the primary source, or if the name is usually not cited from its primary source in contemporary literature. However, if it is possible to imply that the isonym is cited “in the sense of” the later author or “as used in” the later source, its inclusion does not by itself cause illegitimacy.
52.4.
(AyNlIO)
A name that was nomenclaturally superfluous when published is not illegitimate on account of its superfluity if it has a basionym (which is necessarily legitimate; see Art. 6.10), or if it is formed from a legitimate generic name. When published it is incorrect, but it may become correct later.
Ex. 15.
(OX6gCg)
Chloris radiata (L.) Sw. (Prodr.: 26. 1788) was nomenclaturally superfluous when published because Swartz cited the legitimate Andropogon fasciculatus L. (Sp. Pl.: 1047. 1753) as a synonym. However, it is not illegitimate because it has a basionym, Agrostis radiata L. (Syst. Nat., ed. 10: 873. 1759). Chloris radiata is the correct name in the genus Chloris for Agrostis radiata when Andropogon fasciculatus is treated as a different species, as was done by Hackel (in Candolle & Candolle, Monogr. Phan. 6: 177. 1889).
Ex. 16.
(6HhR9O)
Juglans major (Torr.) A. Heller (in Muhlenbergia 1: 50. 1904), based on J. rupestris var. major Torr. (in Sitgreaves, Rep. Exped. Zuni & Colorado Rivers: 171. 1853), was nomenclaturally superfluous when published because Heller cited the legitimate J. californica S. Watson (in Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts 10: 349. 1875) as a synonym. Nevertheless, J. major is legitimate because it has a basionym, and it may be correct when treated as taxonomically distinct from J. californica.
Ex. 17.
(79cLLQ)
The generic name Hordelymus (Jess.) Harz (Landw. Samenk.: 1147. 1885) was nomenclaturally superfluous when published because its type, Elymus europaeus L., is also the type of Cuviera Koeler (Descr. Gram.: 328. 1802). However, it is not illegitimate because it has a basionym, Hordeum [unranked] Hordelymus Jess. (Deutschl. Gräser: 202. 1863). Cuviera Koeler has since been rejected in favour of its later homonym Cuviera DC., and Hordelymus can now be used as the correct name for a segregate genus containing E. europaeus L.
Ex. 18.
(Zj4sIu)
Carpinaceae Vest (Anleit. Stud. Bot.: 265, 280. 1818) was nomenclaturally superfluous when published because of the inclusion of Salix L., the type of Salicaceae Mirb. (Elém. Physiol. Vég. Bot. 2: 905. 1815). However, it is not illegitimate because it is formed from a legitimate generic name, Carpinus L.
Ex. 19.
(GE8RoJ)
Wormia suffruticosa Griff. ex Hook. f. & Thomson (in Hooker, Fl. Brit. India 1: 35. 1872), nom. cons., was nomenclaturally superfluous when published because of the inclusion of W. subsessilis Miq. (Fl. Ned. Ind., Eerste Bijv.: 619. 1861), nom. rej. With conservation, the previously illegitimate W. suffruticosa became available to serve as basionym of Dillenia suffruticosa (Griff. ex Hook. f. & Thomson) Martelli (in Malesia 3: 163. 1886), which thereby also became legitimate (see Art. 6.4), although it too was nomenclaturally superfluous when published because of the inclusion of W. subsessilis.
i
Note 4.
(g1MY9y)
In no case does a statement of parentage accompanying the publication of a name for a hybrid make the name illegitimate (see Art. H.4 and H.5).
Ex. 20.
(o4rgLd)
The name Polypodium ×shivasiae Rothm. (in Kulturpflanze, Beih. 3: 245. 1962) was proposed for hybrids between P. australe Fée and P. vulgare subsp. prionodes (Asch.) Rothm., while in the same publication (l.c. 1962) the author accepted P. ×font-queri Rothm. (in Cadevall y Diars & Font Quer, Fl. Catalun. 6: 353. 1937) for hybrids between P. australe and P. vulgare L. subsp. vulgare. Under Art. H.4.1, P. ×shivasiae is a synonym of P. ×font-queri; nevertheless, it is not an illegitimate name.
i
Note 5.
(oqRmsY)
Nothogeneric names, because they do not have types (see Art. H.9 Note 1), do not cause superfluity.
Ex. 21.
(abYGcR)
In the protologue of Majovskya Sennikov & Kurtto (in Memoranda Soc. Fauna Fl. Fenn. 93: 63. 2017), the authors cited ×Chamaearia Mezhenskyj (in Mezhenskyj & al., Netraditsĭni Plodoy Kulʼturi: 27. 2012) as a taxonomic synonym. Because ×Chamaearia is a nothogeneric name that has no type, and Majovskya did not include the type of a name that ought to have been adopted, Majovskya was not nomenclaturally superfluous when published and is not an illegitimate name.
53.1.
(I7PN1u)
A name of a family, genus, or species, unless conserved (Art. 14), protected (Art. F.2), or sanctioned (Art. F.3), is illegitimate if it is a later homonym, that is, if it is spelled exactly like a name based on a different type that was previously and validly published for a taxon at the same rank (see also Art. 53.3 and F.3.3).
Ex. 1.
(I5nAzN)
Tapeinanthus Boiss. ex Benth. (in Candolle, Prodr. 12: 436. 1848) (Labiatae) is a later homonym of Tapeinanthus Herb. (Amaryllidaceae: 190. 1837) (Amaryllidaceae). Tapeinanthus Boiss. ex Benth. is therefore illegitimate and unavailable for use; it was replaced by Thuspeinanta T. Durand (Index Gen. Phan.: 703. 1888).
Ex. 2.
(8rlNYX)
Torreya Arn. (in Ann. Nat. Hist. 1: 130. 1838) is a conserved name and is therefore available for use despite the existence of the earlier homonym Torreya Raf. (in Amer. Monthly Mag. & Crit. Rev. 3: 356. 1818).
Ex. 3.
(29mueM)
Astragalus rhizanthus Boiss. (Diagn. Pl. Orient., ser. 1, 2: 83. 1843) is a later homonym of the validly published name A. rhizanthus Royle ex Benth. (in Royle, Ill. Bot. Himal. Mts.: 200. 1835) and is therefore illegitimate; it was replaced by A. cariensis Boiss. (Diagn. Pl. Orient., ser. 1, 9: 56. 1849).
Ex. 4.
(7W98gk)
Both Molina Ruiz & Pav. (Fl. Peruv. Prodr.: 111. 1794) and M. racemosa Ruiz & Pav. (Syst. Veg. Fl. Peruv. Chil. 1: 209. 1798) (Compositae) are illegitimate later homonyms of Molina Cav. (Diss. 9: 435. 1790) and M. racemosa Cav. (l.c. 1790) (Malpighiaceae), respectively, even though Cavanilles’s species name is itself illegitimate under Art. 52.1 (Art. 53 Note 4).
Ex. 5.
(514dL2)
Moreae Britton & Rose (in Britton, N. Amer. Fl. 23: 201, 217. 1930), formed from Mora Benth. (in Trans. Linn. Soc. London 18: 210. 1839), although a later homonym of Moreae Dumort. (Anal. Fam. Pl.: 17. 1829), formed from Morus L. (Sp. Pl.: 986. 1753), is not illegitimate because the provisions on homonymy do not apply to subdivisions of families.
i
Note 1.
(MOuSyi)
Simultaneously published homonyms are not illegitimate on account of their homonymy unless an earlier homonym exists (see also Art. 53.5).
i
Note 2.
(0ZuuBJ)
Nothogeneric names, even though they do not have types (see Art. H.9 Note 1), can be homonyms (Art. H.3.3).
i
Note 3.
(MGFAXm)
Later homonyms are illegitimate regardless of whether the type is fossil or non-fossil.
Ex. 6.
(r0PP6I)
Endolepis Torr. (in Pacif. Railr. Rep. 12(2, 2): 47. 1860–1861), based on a non-fossil type, is an illegitimate later homonym of Endolepis Schleid. (in Schmid & Schleiden, Geognos. Verhältnisse Saalthales Jena: 72. 1846), based on a fossil type.
Ex. 7.
(Fh61Zu)
Cornus paucinervis Hance (in J. Bot. 19: 216. 1881), based on a non-fossil type, is an illegitimate later homonym of C. paucinervis Heer (Fl. Tert. Helv. 3: 289. 1859), based on a fossil type.
Ex. 8.
(XNhSkd)
Ficus crassipes F. M. Bailey (Rep. Pl. Prelim. Gen. Rep. Bot. Meston’s Exped. Bellenden-Ker Range: 2. 1889), F. tiliifolia Baker (in J. Linn. Soc., Bot. 21: 443. 1885), and F. tremula Warb. (in Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 20: 171. 1894), each based on a non-fossil type, were illegitimate later homonyms of, respectively, F. crassipes (Heer) Heer (Fl. Foss. Arct. 6(2): 70. 1882), F. tiliifolia (A. Braun) Heer (Fl. Tert. Helv. 2: 68. 1856), and F. tremula Heer (in Abh. Schweiz. Paläontol. Ges. 1: 11. 1874), each based on a fossil type. The three names with non-fossil types have been conserved against their earlier homonyms in order to maintain their use (see App. IV).
i
Note 4.
(OhKKnQ)
A validly published earlier homonym, even if illegitimate, rejected under Art. 56 or F.7, or otherwise generally treated as a synonym, causes illegitimacy of any later homonym that is not conserved, protected, or sanctioned (but see Art. F.3.3).
Ex. 9.
(oqA9nb)
Zingiber truncatum S. Q. Tong (in Acta Phytotax. Sin. 25: 147. 1987) is illegitimate because it is a later homonym of the validly published Z. truncatum Stokes (Bot. Mat. Med. 1: 68. 1812), even though the latter name is itself illegitimate under Art. 52.1; Z. truncatum S. Q. Tong was replaced by Z. neotruncatum T. L. Wu & al. (in Novon 10: 91. 2000).
Ex. 10.
(GKJ10u)
Amblyanthera Müll. Arg. (in Martius, Fl. Bras. 6(1): 141. 1860) is a later homonym of the validly published Amblyanthera Blume (Mus. Bot. 1: 50. 1849) and is therefore illegitimate, even when Amblyanthera Blume is treated as a synonym of Osbeckia L. (Sp. Pl.: 345. 1753).
53.2.
(tkEpRH)
When two or more names of genera or species based on different types are so similar that they are likely to be confused (because they are applied to related taxa or for any other reason) they are to be treated as homonyms (see also Art. 61.5). If established practice has been to treat two similar names as homonyms, this practice is to be continued if it is in the interest of nomenclatural stability.
*Ex. 11.
(dBltfW)
Names treated as homonyms:
Asterostemma Decne. (in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 2, 9: 271. 1838) and
Astrostemma Benth. (in Hooker’s Icon. Pl. 14: 7. 1880);
Pleuropetalum Hook. f. (in London J. Bot. 5: 108. 1846) and
Pleuripetalum T. Durand (Index Gen. Phan.: 493. 1888);
Eschweilera DC. (Prodr. 3: 293. 1828) and
Eschweileria Boerl. (in Ann. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg 6: 106, 112. 1887);
Skytanthus Meyen (Reise 1: 376. 1834) and
Scytanthus Hook. (in Icon. Pl. 7: ad t. 605–606. 1844).
*Ex. 12.
(SF3sfO)
Bradlea Adans. (Fam. Pl. 2: 324, 527. 1763),
Bradleja Banks ex Gaertn. (Fruct. Sem. Pl. 2: 127. 1790), and
Braddleya Vell. (Fl. Flumin.: 93. 1829), all commemorating Richard Bradley, are treated as homonyms because only one can be used without serious risk of confusion.
*Ex. 13.
(ya0iWI)
Acanthoica Lohmann (in Wiss. Meeresuntersuch., Abt. Kiel 7: 68. 1902) and
Acanthoeca W. N. Ellis (in Ann. Soc. Roy. Zool. Belgique 60: 77. 1930), both applied to flagellates, are sufficiently alike to be considered as homonyms (Voss in Taxon 22: 313. 1973).
*Ex. 14.
(vUFdeo)
Epithets so similar that they are likely to be confused if combined under the same name of a genus or species:
ceylanicus and
zeylanicus; chinensis and
sinensis; heteropodus and
heteropus; macrocarpon and
macrocarpum; macrostachys and
macrostachyus; napaulensis, nepalensis, and
nipalensis; poikilantha and
poikilanthes; polyanthemos and
polyanthemus; pteroides and
pteroideus; thibetanus and
tibetanus; thibetensis and
tibetensis; thibeticus and
tibeticus; trachycaulon and
trachycaulum; trinervis and
trinervius.
*Ex. 15.
(TwHvju)
Names not likely to be confused:
Desmostachys Miers (in Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 2, 9: 399. 1852) and
Desmostachya (Stapf) Stapf (in Thiselton-Dyer, Fl. Cap. 7: 316. 1898);
Euphorbia peplis L. (Sp. Pl.: 455. 1753) and
E. peplus L. (l.c.: 456. 1753);
Gerrardina Oliv. (in Hooker’s Icon. Pl. 11: 60. 1870) and
Gerardiina Engl. (in Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 23: 507. 1897);
Iris L. (l.c.: 38. 1753) and
Iria (Pers.) R. Hedw. (Gen. Pl.: 360. 1806);
Lysimachia hemsleyana Oliv. (in Hooker’s Icon. Pl. 20: ad t. 1980. 1891) and
L. hemsleyi Franch. (in J. Bot. (Morot) 9: 461. 1895) (but see Rec. 23A.2);
Monochaetum (DC.) Naudin (in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 3, 4: 48. 1845) and
Monochaete Döll (in Martius, Fl. Bras. 2(3): 78. 1875);
Peltophorus Desv. (in Nouv. Bull. Sci. Soc. Philom. Paris 2: 188. 1810) and
Peltophorum (Vogel) Benth. (in J. Bot. (Hooker) 2: 75. 1840);
Peponia Grev. (in Trans. Microscop. Soc. London, n.s., 11: 75. 1863) and
Peponium Engl. (in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam., Nachtr. 1: 318. 1897);
Rubia L. (l.c.: 109. 1753) and
Rubus L. (l.c.: 492. 1753);
Senecio napaeifolius (DC.) Sch. Bip. (in Flora 28: 498. 1845,
‘napeaefolius’; see Art. 60 Ex. 45) and
S. napifolius MacOwan (in J. Linn. Soc., Bot. 25: 388. 1890; the epithets derived, respectively, from
Napaea L. and
Brassica napus L.);
Symphyostemon Miers (in Proc. Linn. Soc. London 1: 123. 1841) and
Symphostemon Hiern (Cat. Afr. Pl. 1: 867. 1900);
Urvillea Kunth (in Humboldt & al., Nov. Gen. Sp. 5, ed. qu.: 105; ed. fol.: 81. 1821) and
Durvillaea Bory (Dict. Class. Hist. Nat. 9: 192. 1826).
Ex. 16.
(lShLuK)
Names conserved against earlier names treated as homonyms (see App. III): Cephalotus Labill. (against Cephalotos Adans.); Columellia Ruiz & Pav. (against Columella Lour., both commemorating Columella, the Roman writer on agriculture); Lyngbya Gomont (against Lyngbyea Sommerf.); Simarouba Aubl. (against Simaruba Boehm.).
53.3.
(dXsFUt)
The names of two subdivisions of the same genus, or of two infraspecific taxa within the same species, even if they are at different ranks, are homonyms if they are not based on the same type and have the same final epithet or are treated as homonyms if they have a confusingly similar final epithet. The later name is illegitimate.
Ex. 17.
(shbcDJ)
Andropogon sorghum subsp. halepensis (L.) Hack. (in Candolle & Candolle, Monogr. Phan. 6: 501. 1889) and A. sorghum var. halepensis (L.) Hack. (l.c.: 502. 1889) are legitimate because both have the same type (see also Rec. 26A.1).
Ex. 18.
(soOwrC)
Anagallis arvensis subsp. caerulea Hartm. (Sv. Norsk Exc.-Fl.: 32. 1846), based on the later homonym A. caerulea Schreb. (Spic. Fl. Lips.: 5. 1771), is illegitimate because it is itself a later homonym of A. arvensis var. caerulea (L.) Gouan (Fl. Monsp.: 30. 1765), based on A. caerulea L. (Amoen. Acad. 4: 479. 1759).
Ex. 19.
(aKCmnO)
Scenedesmus armatus var. brevicaudatus (Hortob.) Pankow (in Arch. Protistenk. 132: 153. 1986), based on S. carinatus var. brevicaudatus Hortob. (in Acta Bot. Acad. Sci. Hung. 26: 318. 1981), is a later homonym of S. armatus f. brevicaudatus L. Ş. Péterfi (in Stud. Cercet. Biol. (Bucharest), Ser. Biol. Veg. 15: 25. 1963) even though the two names apply to taxa at different infraspecific ranks. However, S. armatus var. brevicaudatus (L. Ş. Péterfi) E. H. Hegew. (in Arch. Hydrobiol. Suppl. 60: 393. 1982) is not a later homonym because it is based on the same type as S. armatus f. brevicaudatus L. Ş. Péterfi.
i
Note 5.
(DIKq2S)
The same final epithet may be used in the names of subdivisions of different genera and in the names of infraspecific taxa within different species.
Ex. 20.
(RMDGYl)
Verbascum sect. Aulacosperma Murb. (Monogr. Verbascum: 34, 593. 1933) is permissible, although there is an earlier Celsia sect. Aulacospermae Murb. (Monogr. Celsia: 34, 56. 1926). This, however, is not an example to be followed because it is contrary to Rec. 21B.3 second sentence.
53.4.
(j6xLJa)
When it is doubtful whether names or their epithets are sufficiently alike to be confused, a request for a binding decision may be submitted to the General Committee, which will refer it for examination to the specialist committee(s) for the appropriate taxonomic group(s) (see Div. III Prov. 2.2, 7.10(b), 7.11, and 8.13(a)). A General Committee recommendation as to whether or not to treat the names concerned as homonyms is to be treated as a binding decision subject to ratification by a later International Botanical Congress (see also Art. 14.15, 34.2, 38.5, and 56.3) and takes retroactive effect. These binding decisions are listed in App. VII.
Ex. 21.
(2CoH4r)
Gilmania Coville (in J. Wash. Acad. Sci. 26: 210. 1936) was published as a replacement name for Phyllogonum Coville (in Contr. U. S. Natl. Herb. 4: 190. 1893) because the author considered the latter to be a later homonym of Phyllogonium Brid. (Bryol. Univ. 2: 671. 1827). Although treating Phyllogonum Coville and Phyllogonium Brid. as homonyms had become accepted, e.g. in Index Nominum Genericorum, a binding decision was requested under Art. 53.4. The Nomenclature Committee for Spermatophyta recommended (in Taxon 54: 536. 2005) that the two names should be treated as homonyms, and this was approved by the General Committee (later reported in Taxon 55: 799. 2006) and ratified by the XVII International Botanical Congress in Vienna in 2005 (see App. VII). The name Gilmania is therefore to be accepted as legitimate.
53.5.
(LiKln3)
When two or more legitimate homonyms have equal priority (see Art. 53 Note 1), the first of them that is adopted in an effectively published text (Art. 29–31) by an author who simultaneously rejects the other(s) is treated as having priority. Likewise, if an author in an effectively published text replaces with other names all but one of these homonyms, the homonym for the taxon that is not renamed is treated as having priority (see also Rec. F.5A.2).
Ex. 22.
(OQMqfk)
Linnaeus simultaneously published “10.” Mimosa cinerea (Sp. Pl.: 517. 1753) and “25.” M. cinerea (Sp. Pl.: 520. 1753). In 1759 (Syst. Nat., ed. 10: 1311), he renamed species 10 as M. cineraria L. and retained the name M. cinerea for species 25, so that the latter is treated as having priority over its homonym.
Ex. 23.
(Z5OM8w)
Rouy & Foucaud (Fl. France 2: 30. 1895) published the name Erysimum hieraciifolium var. longisiliquum, with two different types, for two different taxa under different subspecies. Only one of these names can be maintained.
i
Note 6.
(okbRjA)
A homonym renamed or rejected under Art. 53.5 remains legitimate and has priority over a later synonym at the same rank should it be transferred to another genus or species.
Ex. 24.
(XfbdST)
Mimosa cineraria L. (Syst. Nat., ed. 10: 1311. 1759), based on
M. cinerea L. (Sp. Pl.: 517 [non 520]. 1753; see Art. 53 Ex. 22), was transferred to
Prosopis L. by Druce (in Rep. Bot. Exch. Club Soc. Brit. Isles 3: 422. 1914) as
P. cineraria (L.) Druce. However, the correct name in
Prosopis would have been a combination based on
M. cinerea (l.c. 1753) had not that name been successfully proposed for rejection (see App. V).
(NRJbiY)
Inter-
Code homonymy
54.1.
(3BTAIH)
Consideration of homonymy does not extend to the names of taxa not treated under this Code, except as stated below (see also Art. F.6.1):
(a) Later homonyms of the names of taxa once treated as algae, fungi, or plants are illegitimate, even when the taxa have been reassigned to a different group of organisms to which this Code does not apply.
(b) A name applied to an organism covered by this Code and validly published under it (Art. 32–45) but originally published for a taxon other than an alga, fungus, or plant, i.e. under another Code, is illegitimate if it:
(1) is unavailable for use under the provisions of the other Code1, usually because of homonymy; or
(2) becomes a homonym of an algal, fungal, or plant name when the taxon to which it applies is first treated as an alga, fungus, or plant (see also Art. 45.1).
(c) A name of a genus is treated as an illegitimate later homonym if it is spelled identically with a previously published intergeneric graft hybrid “name” established2 under the provisions of the International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants.
Ex. 1.
(2AHKGx)
(b)(1) Cribrosphaerella Deflandre ex Góka (in Acta Palaeontol. Polon. 2: 239, 260, 280. 5 Sep 1957) was published under the provisions of the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature for the Cretaceous coccolith algae previously known as Cribrosphaera Arkhang. (in Mater. Geol. Rossii 25: 411. 1912), an objectively invalid (equivalent to illegitimate) name under that Code because it is a later homonym of Cribrosphaera Popofsky (in Ergebn. Plankton-Exped. 3(L.f.β): 22, 32, 63. 1906), a radiolarian genus. Although Cribrosphaera Arkhang. is not a later homonym under this Code, it is illegitimate because it is not available for use according to the provisions of the Code under which it was published; consequently, Cribrosphaerella is the correct name for the coccolith genus under both Codes.
i
Note 1.
(lh5eCr)
The International Code of Nomenclature of Prokaryotes provides that a prokaryotic name is illegitimate if it is a later homonym of a name of a taxon of prokaryotes, fungi, algae, protozoa, or viruses.
(c97o3S)
Recommendation 54A
54A.1.
(R7JXwV)
Authors naming new taxa under this Code should, as far as is practicable, avoid using such names as already exist for zoological and prokaryotic taxa (see also Art. F.6.1).
(MNWD0y)
Limitation of illegitimacy
55.1.
(10gEGF)
A name of a species or subdivision of a genus may be legitimate even if its epithet was originally placed under an illegitimate generic name (see also Art. 22.5).
Ex. 1.
(pNu2aY)
Agathophyllum neesianum Blume (Mus. Bot. 1: 339. 1851) is legitimate even though Agathophyllum Juss. (Gen. Pl.: 431. 1789) is illegitimate (it is a superfluous replacement name for Ravensara Sonn., Voy. Indes Orient. 3: 248. 1782). Because Meisner (in Candolle, Prodr. 15(1): 104. 1864) cited A. neesianum as a synonym of his new Mespilodaphne mauritiana, M. mauritiana Meisn. is illegitimate under Art. 52.
Ex. 2.
(cbKY4b)
Calycothrix sect. Brachychaetae Nied. (in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam. 3(7): 100. 1893) is legitimate even though it was published under Calycothrix Meisn. (Pl. Vasc. Gen.: 107. 1838), a superfluous replacement name for Calytrix Labill. (Nov. Holl. Pl. 2: 8. 1806).
55.2.
(cYGCuK)
An infraspecific name may be legitimate even if its final epithet was originally placed under an illegitimate species name (see also Art. 27.2).
Ex. 3.
(MOabT6)
Agropyron japonicum var.
hackelianum Honda (in Bot. Mag. (Tokyo) 41: 385. 1927) is legitimate even though it was published under the illegitimate
A. japonicum Honda (l.c.: 384. 1927), a later homonym of
A. japonicum (Miq.) P. Candargy (in Arch. Biol. Vég. Pure Appl. 1: 42. 1901) (see also Art. 27 Ex. 1).
i
Note 1.
(cbdOxl)
A name falling under the provisions of Art. 55.1 or 55.2 is unavailable for use, but may serve as a replaced synonym or, if not itself illegitimate, a basionym of another name or combination.
55.3.
(JTVlBi)
The names of species and of subdivisions of genera assigned to genera the names of which are conserved, protected, or sanctioned later homonyms, and that had earlier been assigned to the genera under the rejected homonyms, are legitimate under the conserved, protected, or sanctioned names without change of authorship or date if there is no other obstacle under the rules.
Ex. 4.
(6n2yRf)
When published, Alpinia galanga (L.) Willd. (Sp. Pl. 1: 12. 1797) was assigned to Alpinia L. (Sp. Pl.: 2. 1753). When the name Alpinia was conserved from a later publication (Art. 14.9(b)), as Alpinia Roxb. (in Asiat. Res. 11: 350. 1810), this species was included in the newly named genus and its name A. galanga is to be accepted without any change in status under this Code.
55.4.
(Aaua4u)
The epithet of the name of a species or subdivision of a genus that was originally placed under a generic name that is a later homonym, or the final epithet of the name of an infraspecific taxon that was originally placed under a species name that is a later homonym, may be placed under the respective legitimate earlier homonym without change of authorship and date.
Ex. 5.
(86l1Fl)
The epithet of Haplanthus hygrophiloides T. Anderson (in J. Linn. Soc., Bot. 9: 503. 1867) was originally placed under the illegitimate generic name Haplanthus T. Anderson (l.c. 1867), a later homonym of Haplanthus Nees (in Wallich, Pl. Asiat. Rar. 3: 77, 115. 1832). When H. hygrophiloides is considered to belong instead to Haplanthus Nees, it is so accepted without change of authorship and date.
Ex. 6.
(sGoOJL)
When the homonyms
Acidosasa B. M. Yang (in J. Hunan Teachers’ Coll. (Nat. Sci. Ed.) 1981(2): 53, 54. 1981) and
Acidosasa C. D. Chu & C. S. Chao (in J. Bamboo Res. 1: 165. 1982) are considered to apply to the same genus,
A. chinensis C. D. Chu & C. S. Chao (l.c. 1982) is so accepted even though its epithet was originally placed under the illegitimate
Acidosasa C. D. Chu & C. S. Chao.
56.1.
(fMKYxE)
Any name that would cause a disadvantageous nomenclatural change (Art. 14.1) or that is derogatory to a group of people (Art. 51.2) may be proposed for rejection. A name thus rejected, or its basionym if it has one, is placed on a list of nomina utique rejicienda (see Rec. 50E.2; suppressed names, App. V). Along with each listed name, all names for which it is the basionym are similarly rejected, and none is to be used.
i
Note 1.
(0r0Mdn)
A name rejected under Art. 56.1 does not become illegitimate on account of its rejection and can continue to provide the type of a name at higher rank. Similarly, a combination under a rejected name, although unavailable for use because of the inclusion of the rejected name, may be legitimate, and may serve as basionym for another combination.
56.2.
(sXaeIV)
The list of nomina utique rejicienda (suppressed names) will remain permanently open for additions and changes. Any proposal for rejection of a name must be accompanied by a detailed statement of the cases both for and against its rejection, including considerations of typification. Such proposals must be submitted to the General Committee, which will refer them for examination to the specialist committees for the various taxonomic groups (see Rec. 56A.1, Div. III Prov. 2.2, 7.10(b), 7.11, and 8.13(a); see also Art. 14.12 and 34.1).
56.3.
(sNsnOD)
When a proposal for the rejection of a name under Art. 56 or F.7 has been approved by the General Committee after study by the specialist committee for the taxonomic group concerned, rejection of that name is authorized subject to the decision of a later International Botanical Congress (see also Art. 14.15, 34.2, 38.5, and 53.4). Rejection takes effect on the date of effective publication (Art. 29–31) of the General Committee’s approval.
i
Note 2.
(GqS2oY)
The date of the General Committee decision on a particular rejection proposal can be determined by consulting the
International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants Appendices database (
https://naturalhistory.si.edu/research/botany/codes-proposals).
(jM2BHd)
Recommendation 56A
56A.1.
(b8siip)
When a proposal for the rejection of a name under Art. 56 or F.7 has been referred to the appropriate specialist committee for study, authors should follow existing usage of names as far as possible pending the General Committee’s recommendation on the proposal (see also Rec. 14A.1 and 34A.1).
(CQ9gQF)
Names used for taxa not including their types
57.1.
(uZOA2g)
A name that has been widely and persistently used for a taxon or taxa not including its type is not to be used in a sense that conflicts with current usage unless and until a proposal to deal with it under Art. 14.1 or 56.1 has been submitted and rejected.
Ex. 1.
(wcMEox)
The name Boletus erythropus Pers. (in Ann. Bot. (Usteri) 15: 23. 1795), or combinations based on it (e.g. Neoboletus erythropus (Pers.) Hahn in Mycol. Bavar. 16: 33. 2015), has been and still is widely and persistently used in the sense of Fries (Syst. Mycol. 1: 391. 1821). This sense, however, does not include the neotype designated by Simonini & al. (in Boll. Assoc. Micol. Ecol. Romana 23: 81. 2017), which follows the original sense of the protologue but is referable to the taxon known as B. queletii Schulzer (in Hedwigia 24: 143. 1885) or Suillellus queletii (Schulzer) Vizzini & al. (in Index Fungorum 188: 1. 2014). The name B. erythropus (N. erythropus) is not to be used in the original sense unless and until a proposal to reject it or to conserve B. queletii against it has been submitted and rejected. The option of conserving the name B. erythropus with a conserved type is also available to protect the current usage that is not compatible with the neotype.
(TmKZc5)
Reuse of illegitimate names
58.1.
(lcbixu)
If there is no obstacle under the rules, the final epithet in an illegitimate name may be reused in a different name, at either the same or a different rank; or an illegitimate generic name may be reused as the epithet in the name of a subdivision of a genus. The resulting name is then treated either as a replacement name with the same type as the illegitimate name (Art. 7.4; see also Art. 7.5 and Art. 41 Note 4) or as the name of a new taxon with a different type. Its priority does not date back to the publication of the illegitimate name (see Art. 11.3 and 11.4).
Ex. 1.
(IyDLZt)
The name Talinum polyandrum Hook. (in Bot. Mag. 81: ad t. 4833. 1855) is illegitimate under Art. 53.1 because it is a later homonym of T. polyandrum Ruiz & Pav. (Fl. Peruv. Prodr.: 65. 1794). When Bentham (Fl. Austral. 1: 172. 1863) transferred T. polyandrum Hook. to Calandrinia Kunth, he called it C. polyandra. This name has priority from 1863, and is cited as C. polyandra Benth., not C. polyandra “(Hook.) Benth.”
Ex. 2.
(r0zVKm)
Cymbella subalpina Hust. (in Int. Rev. Gesamten Hydrobiol. Hydrogr. 42: 98. 1942) is illegitimate under Art. 53.1 because it is a later homonym of C. subalpina F. Meister (Kieselalg. Schweiz: 182, 236. 1912). When Mann (in Round & al., Diatoms: 667. 1990) transferred C. subalpina Hust. to Encyonema Kütz., he called it E. subalpinum D. G. Mann. This name is a replacement name with priority from 1990 and as such is illegitimate under Art. 52.1 because C. mendosa VanLand. (Cat. Fossil Recent Gen. Sp. Diatoms Syn. 3: 1211, 1236. 1969) had already been published as a replacement name for C. subalpina Hust.
Ex. 3.
(5gEJZa)
Hibiscus ricinifolius E. Mey. ex Harv. (Fl. Cap. 1: 171. 1860) is illegitimate under Art. 52.1 because H. ricinoides Garcke (in Bot. Zeitung (Berlin) 7: 834. 1849) was cited in synonymy. When the epithet ricinifolius was combined at varietal rank under H. vitifolius by Hochreutiner (in Annuaire Conserv. Jard. Bot. Genève 4: 170. 1900) his name was legitimate and is treated as a replacement name, typified (Art. 7.4) by the type of H. ricinoides. The name is cited as H. vitifolius var. ricinifolius Hochr., not H. vitifolius var. ricinifolius “(E. Mey. ex Harv.) Hochr.”
Ex. 4.
(FLXD96)
Geiseleria Klotzsch (in Arch. Naturgesch. 7: 254. 1841) is illegitimate under Art. 52.1 because Klotzsch’s circumscription included Croton glandulosus L., the original type of Decarinium Raf. (Neogenyton: 1. 1825). Later, Asa Gray (Manual, ed. 2: 391. 1856) published Croton subg. Geiseleria, which has priority from that date and is cited as C. subg. Geiseleria A. Gray, not C. subg. Geiseleria “(Klotzsch) A. Gray”. Because the subgeneric name is a replacement name, its type is C. glandulosus, the type (Art. 7.4) of Decarinium and automatic type (Art. 7.5) of Geiseleria.
i
Note 1.
(G4dHDw)
When the epithet of a name illegitimate under Art. 52.1 is reused at the same rank, the resulting name is illegitimate unless either the type of the name causing illegitimacy is explicitly excluded or its epithet is unavailable for use.
Ex. 5.
(F6iudB)
Menispermum villosum Lam. (Encycl. 4: 97. 1797) is illegitimate under Art. 52.1 because M. hirsutum L. (Sp. Pl.: 341. 1753) was cited in synonymy. The name Cocculus villosus DC. (Syst. Nat. 1: 525. 1817), based on M. villosum, is also illegitimate because the type of M. hirsutum was not excluded and the epithet hirsutus was available for use in Cocculus.
Ex. 6.
(i8G4q9)
Cenomyce ecmocyna Ach. (Lichenogr. Universalis: 549. 1810) is an illegitimate renaming of Lichen gracilis L. (Sp. Pl.: 1152. 1753). Scyphophorus ecmocynus Gray (Nat. Arr. Brit. Pl. 1: 421. 1821), based on C. ecmocyna, is also illegitimate because the type of L. gracilis was not excluded and the epithet gracilis was available for use. When proposing the combination Cladonia ecmocyna, Leighton (in Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 3, 18: 406. 1866) explicitly excluded L. gracilis and thereby published the legitimate name of a new species, Cladonia ecmocyna Leight.
Ex. 7.
(JaRCbI)
Ferreola ellipticifolia Stokes (Bot. Mat. Med. 4: 556. 1812) is illegitimate under Art. 52.1 because Maba elliptica J. R. Forst. & G. Forst. (Char. Gen. Pl., ed. 2: 122. 1776) was cited in synonymy. Bakhuizen van den Brink published Diospyros ellipticifolia Bakh. (in Gard. Bull. Straits Settlem. 7: 162. 1933) as a replacement name for F. ellipticifolia and did not exclude the type of M. elliptica. Diospyros ellipticifolia is nevertheless a legitimate name because in 1933 the epithet elliptica was not available for use in Diospyros due to the existence of D. elliptica Knowlt. (in Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 204: 83. 1902), of which D. elliptica (J. R. Forst. & G. Forst.) P. S. Green (in Kew Bull. 23: 340. 1969) is an illegitimate later homonym (Art. 53.1).
(j2OdKt)
Names of fungi with a pleomorphic life cycle
See Article F.8
(d5EiZi)
Orthography and gender of names
(SFTp4u)
Orthography of names
60.1.
(4uElih)
The original spelling of a name or epithet is to be retained, except for the correction of typographical or orthographical errors and the standardizations imposed by Art. 60.4 (letters and ligatures foreign to classical Latin), 60.5 and 60.6 (interchange between u/v, i/j, or eu/ev), 60.7 (diacritical signs and ligatures), 60.8 (terminations; see also Art. 32.2), 60.10 (intentional latinizations), 60.11 (compounding forms), 60.12 and 60.13 (hyphens), 60.14 (apostrophes and full stops), 60.15 (abbreviations), and F.9.1 (epithets of fungal names) (see also Art. 14.8, 14.11, and F.3.2).
Ex. 1.
(cTu3n7)
Retention of original spelling: The generic names
Mesembryanthemum L. (Sp. Pl.: 480. 1753) and
Amaranthus L. (l.c.: 989. 1753) were deliberately so spelled by Linnaeus and the spelling is not to be altered to
‘Mesembrianthemum’ and
‘Amarantus’, respectively, although these latter forms are linguistically correct (see Bull. Misc. Inform. Kew 1928: 113, 287. 1928).
Phoradendron Nutt. (in J. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, ser. 2, 1: 185. 1848) is not to be altered to
‘Phoradendrum’. Triaspis mozambica A. Juss. (in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 2, 13: 268. 1840) is not to be altered to
‘T. mossambica’, as in Engler (Pflanzenw. Ost-Afrikas C: 232. 1895).
Alyxia ceylanica Wight (Icon. Pl. Ind. Orient. 4: t. 1293. 1848) is not to be altered to
‘A. zeylanica’, as in Trimen (Handb. Fl. Ceylon 3: 127. 1895).
Fagus sylvatica L. (l.c.: 998. 1753) is not to be altered to
‘F. silvatica’. Although the classical spelling is
silvatica, the mediaeval spelling
sylvatica is not an orthographical error (see also Rec. 60E).
Scirpus cespitosus L. (l.c.: 48. 1753) is not to be altered to
‘S. caespitosus’.
Ex. 2.
(AOutEB)
The published epithet ‘callunigera’ in the new combination Scleroderris callunigena (P. Karst.) Nannf. (in Nova Acta Regiae Soc. Sci. Upsal., ser. 4, 8(2): 287. 1932) is to be corrected because the basionym was spelled Peziza callunigena P. Karst. (in Not. Sällsk. Fauna Fl. Fenn. Förh. 10: 171. 1869) (see Art. 6.10).
*Ex. 3.
(AqpBRQ)
The epithet of
Agaricus rhacodes Vittad. (Descr. Fung. Mang.: 158. 1833) is to be so spelled, even though it was originally spelled
‘rachodes’ (see Wilson in Taxon 66: 189. 2017).
*Ex. 4.
(yimaGl)
Typographical errors:
Globba ‘brachycarpa’ Baker (in Hooker, Fl. Brit. India 6: 205. 1890) and
Hetaeria ‘alba’ Ridl. (in J. Linn. Soc., Bot. 32: 404. 1896) are typographical errors for
G. trachycarpa Baker and
H. alta Ridl., respectively (see Sprague in J. Bot. 59: 349. 1921).
Ex. 5.
(ESdwbf)
‘Torilis’ taihasenzanensis Masam. (in J. Soc. Trop. Agric. 6: 570. 1934) was a typographical error for Trollius taihasenzanensis, as noted on the errata slip inserted between pages 4 and 5 of the same volume.
Ex. 6.
(5p3NKk)
The misspelled Indigofera ‘longipednnculata’ Y. Y. Fang & C. Z. Zheng (in Acta Phytotax. Sin. 21: 331. 1983) is presumably a typographical error and is to be corrected to I. longipedunculata.
*Ex. 7.
(uuD2JM)
Orthographical error:
Gluta ‘benghas’ L. (Mant. Pl.: 293. 1771), which is an orthographical error for
G. renghas, is cited as
G. renghas L. (see Engler in Candolle & Candolle, Monogr. Phan. 4: 225. 1883); the vernacular name used as a specific epithet by Linnaeus is “renghas”, not “benghas”.
Ex. 8.
(2Ap3pr)
The original spelling of the generic name ‘Nilsonia’ Brongn. (in Ann. Sci. Nat. (Paris) 4: 210. 1825) is an orthographical error correctable under Art. 60.1 to Nilssonia, the conservation of which is not therefore required. Brongniart named the genus after Sven Nilsson, whose name he consistently misspelled as “Nilson” in his 1825 publication.
i
Note 1.
(9qbn0m)
Art. 14.11 provides for the conservation of a particular spelling of a name of a family, genus, or species (see Art. 14.8).
Ex. 9.
(k47kS0)
Bougainvillea Comm. ex Juss. (‘Buginvillaea’), orth. cons. (see App. III).
Ex. 10.
(LXFfiC)
Wisteria Nutt., nom. cons., is not to be altered to ‘Wistaria’, although the genus was named in honour of Caspar Wistar, because Wisteria is the spelling used in App. III (see Art. 14.8).
60.2.
(dBvouI)
The words “original spelling” mean the spelling used when a name of a new taxon or a replacement name was validly published. They do not refer to the use of an initial capital or lower-case letter, which is a matter of typography (see Art. 20.1, 21.2, and Rec. 60G.1).
60.3.
(5sL7qN)
The liberty of correcting a name is to be used with reserve, especially if the change affects the first syllable and, above all, the first letter of the name (but see Art. 60 *Ex. 7).
*Ex. 11.
(8qtA80)
The spelling of the generic name
Lespedeza Michx. (Fl. Bor.-Amer. 2: 70. 1803) is not to be altered, although it commemorates Vicente Manuel de Céspedes (see Ricker in Rhodora 36: 130–132; Hochreutiner in Rhodora 36: 390–392. 1934).
Cereus jamacaru DC. (Prodr. 3: 467. 1828) may not be altered to
C. ‘mandacaru’, even if
jamacaru is believed to be a corruption of the vernacular name “mandacaru”.
60.4.
(LPjZaW)
The letters w and y, foreign to classical Latin, and k, rare in that language, are permissible in scientific names (see Art. 32.1(b)). Other letters and ligatures foreign to classical Latin that may appear in scientific names are to be transcribed, for example the German ß is to be replaced by ss. Ligatures are to be replaced by the separate letters comprising those ligatures, e.g. æ (ae) and œ (oe).
60.5.
(oUQv5t)
When a name has been published in a work where the letters u, v or i, j are used interchangeably or in any other way incompatible with modern typographical practices (e.g. one letter of a pair not being used in capitals, or not at all), those letters are to be transcribed in conformity with modern nomenclatural usage.
Ex. 12.
(z3lW8g)
Curculigo Gaertn. (Fruct. Sem. Pl. 1: 63. 1788), not ‘Cvrcvligo’; Taraxacum Zinn (Cat. Pl. Hort. Gott.: 425. 1757), not ‘Taraxacvm’; Uffenbachia Fabr. (Enum., ed. 2: 21. 1763), not ‘Vffenbachia’.
Ex. 13.
(T7pemw)
‘Geastrvm hygrometricvm’ and ‘Vredo pvstvlata’ of Persoon (in Syn. Meth. Fung.: 135, 219. 1801) are spelled, respectively, Geastrum hygrometricum Pers., nom. sanct. and Uredo pustulata Pers., nom. sanct.
60.6.
(QIecMj)
When the original publication of a name adopted a use of the letters u, v or i, j in any way incompatible with modern nomenclatural practices, those letters are to be transcribed in conformity with modern nomenclatural usage. When names or epithets are derived from Greek words that include the diphthong ey (ευ), its transcription as ev is treated as an error correctable to eu. When names or epithets of Latin but not Greek origin include the letter i used as a semi-vowel (followed by another vowel), it is treated as an error correctable to j.
Ex. 14.
(YxL79B)
The generic name ‘Mezonevron’ Desf. is correctable to Mezoneuron Desf., and the basionym of Neuropteris (Brongn.) Sternb. (nom. & orth. cons.), Filicites sect. ‘Nevropteris’ Brongn., is correctable to Filicites sect. Neuropteris Brongn. Similarly, ‘Evonymus’ L. is correctable to Euonymus L. (nom. & orth. cons.).
Ex. 15.
(jsoLJM)
Jatropha L., Jondraba Medik., and Clypeola jonthlaspi L., because they are of Greek origin, are not to be altered to ‘Iatropha’, ‘Iondraba’, and Clypeola ‘ionthlaspi’; nor are Ionopsidium Rchb. and Ionthlaspi Adans. to be altered to ‘Jonopsidium’ and ‘Jonthlaspi’, respectively.
Ex. 16.
(NM5o6j)
Brachypodium ‘iaponicum’ Miq. is correctable to Brachypodium japonicum because the epithet is Latin and, in Latin, an initial i followed by a vowel is a semi-vowel. Meiandra ‘maior’ Markgr. is correctable to Meiandra major because the epithet is Latin and, in Latin, an i between two vowels is a semi-vowel, but the generic name is of Greek origin, and so the spelling “Meiandra” is correct.
60.7.
(xs8VHr)
Diacritical signs are not used in scientific names. When such signs appear in the spelling of a name at valid publication, the signs are to be suppressed with the necessary transcription of the letters so modified; for example ä, ö, ü become, respectively, ae, oe, ue (not æ or œ, see Art. 60.4); é, è, ê become e; ñ becomes n; ø becomes oe (not œ); å becomes ao. The diaeresis, indicating that a vowel is to be pronounced separately from the preceding vowel (as in Cephaëlis, Isoëtes), is a phonetic device that is not considered to alter the spelling; as such, its use is optional.
Ex. 17.
(Tiuo5Z)
Transcription (e.g. umlaut): ‘Lühea’, dedicated to Carl Emil von der Lühe, is spelled Luehea Willd. (in Neue Schriften Ges. Naturf. Freunde Berlin 3: 410. 1801); suppression (e.g. tilde): Vochysia ‘kosñipatae’, named after the valley of Kosñipata, is spelled V. kosnipatae Huamantupa (in Arnaldoa 12: 82. 2005).
60.8.
(Ip6aVu)
The termination of specific or infraspecific epithets derived from personal names that are not already in Greek or Latin and do not possess a well-established latinized form (see Rec. 60C.1) is as follows (but see Art. 60.9 for epithets derived from abbreviation of personal names):
(a) If the personal name ends with a vowel (including y) or -er, substantival epithets are formed by adding the genitive inflection appropriate to the gender and number of the person(s) honoured (e.g. scopoli-i for Scopoli (masculine), fedtschenko-i for Fedtschenko (m), fedtschenko-ae for Fedtschenko (feminine), glaziou-i for Glaziou (m), lace-ae for Lace (f), gray-i for Gray (m), hooker-i for Hooker (m), hooker-ae for Hooker (f), hooker-orum for the Hookers (m)), except when the name ends with -a, in which case -e (singular) or -rum (plural) is added (e.g. triana-e for Triana (m), pojarkova-e for Pojarkova (f), orlovskaja-e for Orlovskaja (f), espinosa-rum for the Espinosas (m)).
(b) If the personal name ends with a consonant (but not in -er), substantival epithets are formed by latinizing them with -ius, then removing the -us and adding the genitive inflection appropriate to the gender and number of the person(s) honoured (e.g. lecardi-i for Lecard (masculine), wilsoni-ae for Wilson (feminine), verloti-orum for the Verlot brothers, brauni-arum for the Braun sisters, masoni-orum for Mason, father and daughter).
(c) If the personal name ends with a vowel (including y), adjectival epithets are formed by adding -an- plus the nominative singular inflection appropriate to the gender of the generic name (e.g. Cyperus heyne-anus for Heyne, Vanda lindley-ana for Lindley, Aspidium bertero-anum for Bertero), except when the personal name ends with -a in which case -n- plus the appropriate inflection is added (e.g. balansa-nus (masculine), balansa-na (feminine), and balansa-num (neuter) for Balansa).
(d) If the personal name ends with a consonant, adjectival epithets are formed by latinizing the personal name with -ius, then removing the -us and adding -an- (stem of adjectival suffix) plus the nominative singular inflection appropriate to the gender of the generic name (e.g. Rosa webbi-ana for Webb, Desmodium griffithi-anum for Griffith, Verbena hassleri-ana for Hassler).
Terminations contrary to the above standards are treated as errors to be corrected to -[i]i, -[i]ae, -[i]ana, -[i]anus, -[i]anum, -[i]arum, or -[i]orum, as appropriate (see also Art. 32.2). However, epithets formed in accordance with Rec. 60C.1 are not correctable (see also Art. 60.10), nor are those with terminations conforming to other classical Latin adjectival usage, namely -[i]a, -[i]us, or -[i]um, or such epithets ending in an -ea.
Ex. 18.
(yRq6KR)
In Rhododendron ‘potanini’ Batalin (in Trudy Imp. S.-Peterburgsk. Bot. Sada 11: 489. 1892), commemorating G. N. Potanin, the epithet is to be spelled potaninii under Art. 60.8(b) because Potanin is first put in Latin form by adding -ius to create potaninius; then the genitive is formed by first removing the -us and then adding the masculine genitive singular ending -i, resulting in the epithet potaninii). However, in Phoenix theophrasti Greuter (in Bauhinia 3: 243. 1967), commemorating Theophrastus, it is not spelled ‘theophrastii’ because Rec. 60C.1 applies.
Ex. 19.
(Stndgo)
Rosa ‘pissarti’ Carrière (in Rev. Hort. (Paris) 1880: 314. 1880) is a typographical error for R. ‘pissardi’ (see Rev. Hort. (Paris) 1881: 190. 1881), which is to be spelled R. pissardii under Art. 60.8(b).
Ex. 20.
(WnOk2M)
In Caulokaempferia ‘dinabandhuensis’ Biseshwori & Bipin (in J. Jap. Bot. 92: 84. 2017), commemorating Dinabandhu Sahoo, the adjectival epithet was wrongly given the geographical termination -ensis (see Rec. 60D.1). Instead it is to be spelled C. dinabandhuana under Art. 60.8(c).
Ex. 21.
(ljldHr)
In Uladendron codesuri Marc.-Berti (in Pittieria 3: 10. 1971) the epithet derives from an acronym (CODESUR, Comisión para el Desarrollo del Sur de Venezuela), not a personal name, and is not to be changed to ‘codesurii’ (as in Brenan, Index Kew., Suppl. 16: 296. 1981).
Ex. 22.
(ECnBFR)
In Asparagus tamaboki Yatabe (in Bot. Mag. (Tokyo) 7: 61. 1893) and Agropyron kamoji Ohwi (in Acta Phytotax. Geobot. 11: 179. 1942) the epithets correspond, respectively, to a Japanese vernacular designation, “tamaboki”, or to part of such a designation, “kamojigusa”, and are not therefore spelled ‘tamabokii’ and ‘kamojii’.
Ex. 23.
(4OWzsJ)
Gladiolus watsonius Thunb. (Gladiolus: 14. 1784), Syringa josikaea J. Jacq. ex Rchb. (Iconogr. Bot. Pl. Crit. 8: 32. 1830), Taxus harringtonia Knight ex J. Forbes (Pinet. Woburn.: 217. 1839), and Cephalotaxus harringtonia (Knight ex J. Forbes) K. Koch (Dendrologie 2(2): 102. 1873) are not to be changed to G. ‘watsonianus’, S. ‘josikaeana’, T. ‘harringtonii’, and C. ‘harringtonii’, respectively.
i
Note 2.
(n43hPD)
The hyphens in Art. 60.8 are given solely for explanatory reasons. For the use of hyphens in epithets see Art. 23.1 and 60.12.
i
Note 3.
(g32qan)
Rec. 60C.1 does not preclude the formation of substantival epithets following the process outlined in Art. 60.8. Authors publishing new substantival epithets derived from personal names that have a well-established latinized form may choose whether or not to use that form.
Ex. 24.
(shih29)
Substantival epithets derived from the personal name Martin may be correctly published either as martini (from the latinized form Martinus) or martinii. Grevillea martini F. Muell. (Fragm. 4: 129. 1864), named for James Martin, is not to be changed to G. ‘martinii’. Comatricha martinii Alexop. & Beneke (in Mycologia 46: 245. 1954), named for George W. Martin, is not to be changed to C. ‘martini’. Nitella martinii Casanova & Karol (in Austral. Syst. Bot. 36: 337. 2023), named for Martin O’Brien, is not to be changed to N. ‘martini’.
i
Note 4.
(kdTU9A)
Art. 60.8 does not preclude the use, as epithets, of names of genera commemorating persons, or feminine nouns formed by analogy (see Rec. 20A.1(h)), placed in apposition (Art. 23.1).
i
Note 5.
(gkOTIg)
If the gender and/or number of a substantival epithet derived from a personal name is inappropriate for the gender and/or number of the person(s) whom the name commemorates, the termination is to be corrected in conformity with Art. 60.8.
Ex. 25.
(ZbJhiV)
Rosa בtoddii’ Wolley-Dod (in J. Bot. 69, Suppl.: 106. 1931) was named for “Miss E. S. Todd”; the epithet is to be spelled toddiae.
Ex. 26.
(cgfqYD)
Astragalus ‘matthewsii’ Podlech & Kirchhoff (in Mitt. Bot. Staatssamml. München 11: 432. 1974) commemorates Victoria A. Matthews; the epithet is to be spelled matthewsiae and the name is not to be treated as a later homonym of A. matthewsii S. Watson (in Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts 18: 192. 1883) commemorating Washington Matthews (see App. VII).
Ex. 27.
(WJenMw)
Codium ‘geppii’ (Schmidt in Biblioth. Bot. 91: 50. 1923), which commemorates Ant(h)ony Gepp and Ethel S. B. Gepp, is to be corrected to C. geppiorum O. C. Schmidt.
Ex. 28.
(2QIiet)
Acacia ‘Bancrofti’ Maiden (in Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland 30: 26. 1918) “commemorates the Bancrofts, father and son, the former the late Dr. Joseph Bancroft, and the latter Dr. Thomas Lane Bancroft”; the epithet is to be spelled bancroftiorum.
Ex. 29.
(O0nsv1)
Chamaecrista leonardiae Britton (N. Amer. Fl. 23: 281. 1930, ‘Leonardae’), Scolosanthus leonardii Alain (in Brittonia 20: 160. 1968), and Frankenia leonardiorum Alain (l.c.: 155. 1968, ‘leonardorum’) were all based on type material collected by Emery C. Leonard and Genevieve M. Leonard. Because there is no explicit contradicting statement, these names are to be accepted as dedicated to either or both, as indicated by the termination of the epithet.
60.9.
(43d6rC)
An epithet, or in the case of a compound epithet its final portion, formed from abbreviation of one or more personal names is considered to have been composed arbitrarily (Art. 23.2) and is not subject to modification, e.g. under the provisions of Art. 60.8.
i
Note 6.
(m3htUF)
If the epithet itself is indicated as being abbreviated, Art. 60.15 applies.
Ex. 30.
(uAvKjU)
Silene karekirii Bocquet (in Candollea 22: 10. 1967), published as a replacement name for Lychnis sordida Kar. & Kir. (in Bull. Soc. Imp. Naturalistes Moscou 15: 170. 1842) to avoid creating a later homonym in Silene, is an arbitrarily formed epithet (Art. 23.2) constructed by abbreviating the names of Karelin and Kirilov, authors of the replaced synonym. The epithet is not to be changed to ‘karekiriorum’ or ‘karelinkirilovii’.
Ex. 31.
(h2Z0wI)
Lepanthes carvii Archila (Lepanthes Guatemala: 99. 2001) was said to be “dedicated to the family of Carlos Villela [a two-word family name] especially LIC [Licenciado] Jorge A Carlos who directed the photography in this investigation”. As an epithet apparently formed from the abbreviations “Car” from Carlos and “V” from Villela, it is considered to have been composed arbitrarily (Art. 23.2) and is not to be changed in any way.
Ex. 32.
(80S0gv)
Telipogon ‘crisariasae’ Baquero & Iturralde (in Phytotaxa 564: 249. 2022), commemorating María Cristina Arias (female), in which the final portion of a compound epithet is not formed from an abbreviation, is correctable to Telipogon crisariasiae (see Art. 60.8(b)).
60.10.
(7nBqm3)
The original spelling (Art. 60.2) of a name or epithet is to be retained (Art. 60.1) if it resulted from the intentional latinization of a personal, geographical, or vernacular name. Excepted from this are epithets formed from personal names when the latinization involves:
(a) only a termination to which Art. 60.8 applies; or
(b) only (1) omission of the terminal vowel or terminal consonant; or (2) conversion of the terminal vowel to a different vowel, for which the omitted or converted letter is to be restored.
Ex. 33.
(IsFrA4)
Clutia L. (Sp. Pl.: 1042. 1753), Gleditsia J. Clayton (in Linnaeus, l.c.: 1056. 1753), and Valantia L. (l.c.: 1051. 1753), commemorating Cluyt, Gleditsch, and Vaillant, respectively, are not to be altered to ‘Cluytia’, ‘Gleditschia’, and ‘Vaillantia’; these personal names were deliberately latinized as Clutius, Gleditsius, and Valantius.
Ex. 34.
(VKDDy5)
Abies alcoquiana Veitch ex Lindl. (in Gard. Chron. 1861: 23. 1861), commemorating “Rutherford Alcock Esq.”, implies an intentional latinization of his family name to Alcoquius. In transferring the epithet to Picea, Carrière (Traité Gén. Conif., ed. 2: 343. 1867) deliberately changed the spelling to ‘alcockiana’. The resulting combination is nevertheless correctly cited as P. alcoquiana (Veitch ex Lindl.) Carrière (see Art. 61.4).
Ex. 35.
(oc8rmB)
Abutilon glaziovii K. Schum. (in Martius, Fl. Bras. 12(3): 408. 1891), Desmodium bigelovii A. Gray (in Smithsonian Contr. Knowl. 5(6): 47. 1853), and Rhododendron bureavii Franch. (in Bull. Soc. Bot. France 34: 281. 1887), commemorating A. F. M. Glaziou, J. Bigelow, and L. E. Bureau, respectively, are not to be changed to A. ‘glazioui’, D. ‘bigelowii’, or R. ‘bureaui’. In these three cases, the implicit latinizations Glaziovius, Bigelovius, and Bureavius result from conversion of the terminal vowel or consonant to a consonant and do not affect merely the termination of the names.
Ex. 36.
(5CPiui)
Arnica chamissonis Less. (in Linnaea 6: 238. 1831) and
Tragus berteronianus Schult. (Mant. 2: 205. 1824), commemorating L. K. A. von Chamisso and C. L. G. Bertero, are not to be changed to
A. ‘chamissoi’ or
T. ‘berteroanus’. The derivation of these epithets from the third declension genitive (Rec. 60C Ex. 1(b)), a practice normally discouraged (see Rec. 60C.1), involves the addition of letters to the personal name and does not affect merely the termination.
Ex. 37.
(cERhOV)
Asa Gray (in Boston J. Nat. Hist. 6: 209. 1850) published the name Eryngium ravenellii A. Gray to honour Henry W. Ravenel. In forming the epithet, Gray’s implicit latinization of Ravenel is Ravenellius, which is to be preserved because it does not affect merely the termination, there is no omission of the terminal consonant “l” in Ravenel, and there is no terminal vowel to omit or convert. The epithet is not to be changed to ‘ravenelii’.
Ex. 38.
(s2i4pJ)
Acacia ‘brandegeana’, Blandfordia ‘backhousii’, Cephalotaxus ‘fortuni’, Chenopodium ‘loureirei’, Convolvulus ‘loureiri’, Glochidion ‘melvilliorum’, Hypericum ‘buckleii’, Solanum ‘rantonnei’, and Zygophyllum ‘billardierii’ were published to commemorate T. S. Brandegee, J. Backhouse, R. Fortune, J. de Loureiro, R. Melville and E. F. Melville, S. B. Buckley, V. Rantonnet, and J. J. H. de Labillardière (de la Billardière). The implicit latinizations are Brandegeus, Backhousius, Fortunus, Loureireus or Loureirus, Melvillius, Buckleius, Rantonneus, and Billardierius, but these are not acceptable under Art. 60.10. The names are correctly cited as A. brandegeeana I. M. Johnst. (in Contr. Gray Herb. 75: 27. 1925), B. backhousei Gunn & Lindl. (in Edwards’s Bot. Reg. 31: t. 18. 1845), Cephalotaxus fortunei Hook. (in Bot. Mag. 76: ad t. 4499. 1850), Chenopodium loureiroi Steud. (Nomencl. Bot., ed. 2, 1: 348. 1840), Convolvulus loureiroi G. Don (Gen. Hist. 4: 290. 1837), G. melvilleorum Airy Shaw (in Kew Bull. 25: 487. 1971), H. buckleyi M. A. Curtis (in Amer. J. Sci. Arts 44: 80. 1843), S. rantonnetii Carrière (in Rev. Hort. (Paris) 1859: 135. 1859), and Z. billardierei DC. (Prodr. 1: 705. 1824).
Ex. 39.
(zdcMEs)
Mycena seynii Quél. (in Bull. Soc. Bot. France 23: 351. 1877), commemorating Jules de Seynes, is not to be altered to M. ‘seynesii’. The implicit latinization of that name to Seynius results from omission of more than the terminal letter.
i
Note 7.
(fh8aJq)
The provisions of Art. 60.8, 60.10, and Rec. 60C deal with the latinization of names through their modification. Latinization is not the same as translation of a name (e.g. Tabernaemontanus, Latin for Bergzabern; Nobilis, Latin for Noble). Epithets resulting from or derived from Latin translations are not subject to standardization under Art. 60.8, although Rec. 60C.1 and 60C.2 may apply.
Ex. 40.
(xkJDs5)
In Wollemia nobilis W. G. Jones & al. (in Telopea 6: 174. 1995), nobilis is the translation into Latin of the family name of the discoverer David Noble. Cladonia abbatiana S. Stenroos (in Ann. Bot. Fenn. 28: 107. 1991) honours the French lichenologist H. des Abbayes, where Abbayes can be translated to Abbatiae (abbeys). Neither epithet may be altered.
Ex. 41.
(guRqfE)
The epithet, in apposition, in Crataegus spes-aestatum J. B. Phipps (in Novon 16: 382. 2006) honours Bill Summers, one person, but the genitive plural spes-aestatum (hope of summers) is not to be altered to the singular; it is a translation to Latin.
60.11.
(zCeDKz)
Adjectival epithets (and substantival epithets that semantically serve as if they were adjectives) that combine elements derived from two or more Greek or Latin words are to be compounded as follows:
A noun or adjective in a non-final position appears as a compounding form generally obtained by:
(a) removing the case ending of the genitive singular (Latin -ae, -i, -us, -is; transcribed Greek -ou, -os, -es, -as, -ous and its equivalent -eos); and
(b) before a consonant, adding a connecting vowel (-i- for Latin elements, -o- for Greek elements).
Adjectival epithets not formed in accordance with this provision are to be corrected to conform with it, unless Rec. 60H.1(a) or (b) applies. In particular, the use of the genitive singular case ending of Latin first-declension nouns instead of a connecting vowel is treated as an error to be corrected unless it serves to make a semantic distinction.
Ex. 42.
(gxptex)
The epithet meaning “having leaves like those of Quercus” is quercifolia (Querc-, connecting vowel -i-, and ending -folia).
Ex. 43.
(yH14LE)
The epithet ‘aquilegifolia’, derived from the name Aquilegia must be changed to aquilegiifolia (Aquilegi-, connecting vowel -i-, and ending -folia).
Ex. 44.
(LkNxDc)
The epithet of Pereskia ‘opuntiaeflora’ DC. (in Mém. Mus. Hist. Nat. 17: 76. 1828) is to be spelled opuntiiflora, and that of Myrosma ‘cannaefolia’ L. f. (Suppl. Pl. 80. 1782), cannifolia.
Ex. 45.
(D4Ob6b)
The epithet of Cacalia ‘napeaefolia’ DC. (Prodr. 6: 328. 1838) and Senecio ‘napeaefolius’ (DC.) Sch. Bip. (in Flora 28: 498. 1845) is to be spelled napaeifolia (-us); it refers to the resemblance of the leaves to those found in Napaea L. (not ‘Napea’), and the connecting vowel -i- should have been used instead of the genitive singular inflection -ae-.
Ex. 46.
(hGpM7b)
In Andromeda polifolia L. (Sp. Pl.: 393. 1753), the epithet is taken from a pre-Linnaean generic designation (“Polifolia” of Buxbaum) and is a noun used in apposition, not an adjective; it is not to be altered to ‘poliifolia’ (Polium-leaved).
Ex. 47.
(9aSRfG)
Tetragonia tetragonoides (Pall.) Kuntze (Revis. Gen. Pl. 1: 264. 1891) was based on Demidovia tetragonoides Pall. (Enum. Hort. Demidof: 150. 1781), the specific epithet of which was derived from the generic name Tetragonia and the suffix -oides. Because this is a compound epithet derived from a noun and a suffix, not two Greek or Latin words, it is not to be altered to ‘tetragonioides’.
60.12.
(XWt70I)
The use of a hyphen in an epithet is treated as an error to be corrected by deletion of the hyphen. A hyphen is permitted only when at least one condition of (a) and at least one condition of (b) are met:
|
|
|
(a) |
(1) |
the hyphen was present at the valid publication of the name or its basionym (if the name has a basionym); or |
|
(2) |
the epithet is hyphenated according to Art. 23.1 or 23.3 (if the epithet consisted originally of two or more words, or a word and a symbol); |
|
|
|
and |
|
|
|
|
|
(b) |
(1) |
the epithet is formed of words that usually stand independently; or |
|
(2) |
the letters before and after the hyphen are the same. |
|
|
|
Ex. 48.
(zVE0bo)
Hyphen deleted: Acer pseudoplatanus L. (Sp. Pl.: 1054. 1753, ‘pseudo-platanus’) (a1); Eugenia costaricensis O. Berg (in Linnaea 27: 213. 1856, ‘costa-ricensis’) (a1); Ficus neoebudarum Summerh. (in J. Arnold Arbor. 13: 97. 1932, ‘neo-ebudarum’) (a1); Lycoperdon atropurpureum Vittad. (Monogr. Lycoperd.: 42. 1842, ‘atro-purpureum’) (a1); Mesospora vanbosseae Børgesen (in Skottsberg, Nat. Hist. Juan Fernandez 2: 258. 1924, ‘van-bosseae’) (a1); Peperomia lasierrana Trel. & Yunck. (Piperac. N. South Amer.: 530. 1950, ‘la-sierrana’) (a1, see Rec. 60C.4(c)); Scirpus sect. Pseudoeriophorum Jurtzev (in Byull. Moskovsk. Obshch. Isp. Prir., Otd. Biol. 70(1): 132. 1965, ‘Pseudo-eriophorum’) (a1).
Ex. 49.
(fRkIMg)
Hyphen maintained: Athyrium austro-occidentale Ching (in Acta Bot. Boreal.-Occid. Sin. 6: 152. 1986) (a1, b2); Piper pseudo-oblongum McKown (in Bot. Gaz. 85: 57. 1928) (a1, b2); Ribes non-scriptum (Berger) Standl. (in Publ. Field Mus. Nat. Hist., Bot. Ser. 8: 140. 1930) (a1, b1); Vitis novae-angliae Fernald (in Rhodora 19: 146. 1917) (a1, b1); Pleurothyrium roberto-andinoi C. Nelson (in Phytologia 72: 402. 1992) (a1, b1); Kalanchoe adolphi-engleri Raym.-Hamet (in Bull. Soc. Bot. France 102: 239. 1955) (a1, b1).
Ex. 50.
(mg8nsb)
Hyphen inserted: Arctostaphylos uva-ursi (L.) Spreng. (Syst. Veg. 2: 287. 1825, ‘uva ursi’) (a2, b1); Aster novae-angliae L. (Sp. Pl.: 875. 1753, ‘novae angliae’) (a2, b1); Coix lacryma-jobi L. (l.c.: 972. 1753, ‘lacryma jobi’) (a2, b1); Marattia rolandi-principis Rosenst. (in Repert. Spec. Nov. Regni Veg. 10: 162. 1911, ‘rolandi principis’) (a2, b1); Veronica anagallis-aquatica L. (l.c.: 12. 1753, ‘anagallis s’) (a2, b1); Veronica argute-serrata Regel & Schmalh. (in Trudy Imp. S.-Peterburgsk. Bot. Sada 5: 626. 1878, ‘argute serrata’) (a2, b1); Sclerospora graminicola var. andropogonis-sorghi Kulk. (in Mem. Dept. Agric. India, Bot. Ser. 5: 272. 1913, ‘andropogonis sorghi’) (a2, b1, b2).
Ex. 51.
(60vkxh)
Hyphen not inserted: Synsepalum letestui Aubrév. & Pellegr. (in Notul. Syst. (Paris) 16: 263. 1961, ‘Le Testui’) (a2, see Rec. 60C.4(c)); Allelochaeta neoorbicularis Crous (in Fungal Syst. Evol. 2: 294. 2018) (b2); Acacia circummarginata Chiov. (in Ann. Bot. (Rome) 13: 394. 1915) (b2); Sporisorium andrewmitchellii R. G. Shivas & al. (in Persoonia 28: 155. 2012) (b1).
i
Note 8.
(c8taF9)
Art. 60.12 refers only to epithets (in combinations), not to names of genera (for names of fossil-genera see Art. 60.13) or taxa at higher ranks; a non-fossil generic name published with a hyphen can be changed only by conservation (Art. 14.11; see also Art. 20.3; but see Art. H.6.5).
Ex. 52.
(RxGLkw)
Pseudo-fumaria Medik. (Philos. Bot. 1: 110. 1789) may not be changed to ‘Pseudofumaria’; whereas by conservation ‘Pseudo-elephantopus’ was changed to Pseudelephantopus Rohr (in Skr. Naturhist.-Selsk. 2: 214. 1792).
60.13.
(Rjp7ta)
The use of a hyphen in the name of a fossil-genus is in all cases treated as an error to be corrected by deletion of the hyphen.
Ex. 53.
(huxPJ4)
‘Cicatricosi-sporites’ R. Potonié & Gelletich (in Sitzungsber. Ges. Naturf. Freunde Berlin 1932: 522. 1932) and ‘Pseudo-Araucaria’ Fliche (in Bull. Soc. Sci. Nancy 14: 181. 1896) are names of fossil-genera. They are treated as errors to be corrected by deletion of the hyphen to Cicatricosisporites and Pseudoaraucaria, respectively.
60.14.
(nvaS9y)
The use of an apostrophe or quotation mark in an epithet is treated as an error to be corrected by deletion of the apostrophe or quotation mark unless it follows m to represent the patronymic prefix Mc (or Mc ), in which case it is replaced by the letter c. The use of a full stop (period) in an epithet that is derived from a personal or geographical name that contains this full stop is treated as an error to be corrected by expansion or, when nomenclatural tradition does not support expansion (Art. 60.15), deletion of the full stop.
Ex. 54.
(WM1cWc)
In Cymbidium ‘i’ansoni’ Rolfe (in Orchid Rev. 8: 191. 1900), Lycium ‘o’donellii’ F. A. Barkley (in Lilloa 26: 202. 1953), and Solanum tuberosum var. ‘muru’kewillu’ Ochoa (in Phytologia 65: 112. 1988), the final epithet is to be spelled iansonii, odonellii, and murukewillu, respectively.
Ex. 55.
(vGIh2J)
In Nesoluma ‘St.-Johnianum’ H. J. Lam & B. Meeuse (in Occas. Pap. Bernice Pauahi Bishop Mus. 14: 153. 1938), derived from St. John, the family name of one of the collectors, the epithet is to be spelled st-johnianum.
Ex. 56.
(wrgP4O)
Harvey (Fl. Cap. 3: 494. 1865) published Stobaea ‘M‘Kenii’. The name commemorates one of the collectors of the type specimen, Mark Johnston McKen (1823–1872). The spelling has been changed to S. ‘mkenii’ but must be corrected to S. mckenii.
60.15.
(q7e7AB)
Names or epithets indicated as abbreviated are to be expanded in conformity with nomenclatural tradition (see also Art. 23 *Ex. 29 and Rec. 60C.4(d)).
Ex. 57.
(MObA4b)
In Allium ‘a. bolosii’ P. Palau (in Anales Inst. Bot. Cavanilles 11: 485. 1954), dedicated to Antonio de Bolòs y Vayreda, the epithet is to be spelled antonii-bolosii.
(neai22)
Recommendation 60A
60A.1.
(JowzCC)
When a name of a new taxon or a replacement name, or its epithet, is to be derived from Greek, the transcription to Latin should conform to classical usage.
Ex. 1.
(jkartq)
The Greek spiritus asper (an inverted apostrophe) in words transcribed to Latin should be replaced by the letter h, as in Hyacinthus (from ὑάκινθος) and Rhododendron (from ῥοδόδενδρον).
(29Dykb)
Recommendation 60B
60B.1.
(t1bUJ8)
When a new generic name, or epithet in a new name of a subdivision of a genus, is taken from a personal name, it should be formed as follows (see also Rec. 20A.1(h); but see Rec. 21B.2):
(a) When the personal name ends with a vowel, the letter -a is added (e.g. Ottoa after Otto; Sloanea after Sloane), except when the name ends with -a, when -ea is added (e.g. Collaea after Colla), or with -ea, when nothing is added (e.g. Correa after Correa).
(b) When the personal name ends with a consonant, the letters -ia are added, but when the name ends with -er, either of the terminations -ia and -a is appropriate (e.g. Sesleria after Sesler and Kernera after Kerner).
(c) In latinized personal names ending with -us this termination is dropped before applying the procedure described under (a) and (b) (e.g. Dillenia after Dillenius).
i
Note 1.
(TvE8gQ)
The syllables not modified by these endings are unaffected unless they contain letters, ligatures, or diacritical signs that must be transcribed under Art. 60.4 and 60.7.
i
Note 2.
(uhnGiU)
More than one generic name, or epithet of a subdivision of a genus, may be based on the same personal name, e.g. by adding a prefix or suffix to that personal name or by using an anagram or abbreviation of it (but see Art. 53.2 and 53.3).
Ex. 1.
(H4EMjk)
Bouchea Cham. (in Linnaea 7: 252. 1832) and
Ubochea Baill. (Hist. Pl. 11: 103. 1891);
Engleria O. Hoffm. (in Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 10: 273. 1888),
Englerella Pierre (Not. Bot.: 46. 1891), and
Englerastrum Briq. (in Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 19: 178. 1894);
Gerardia L. (Sp. Pl.: 610. 1753) and
Graderia Benth. (in Candolle, Prodr. 10: 521. 1846);
Lapeirousia Pourr. (in Hist. & Mém. Acad. Roy. Sci. Toulouse 3: 79. 1788) and
Peyrousea DC. (Prodr. 6: 76. 1838);
Martia Spreng. (Anleit. Kenntn. Gew., ed. 2, 2: 788. 1818) and
Martiusia Schult. (Mant. 1: 69, 226. 1822);
Orcuttia Vasey (in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 13: 219. 1886) and
Tuctoria Reeder (in Amer. J. Bot. 69: 1090. 1982);
Urvillea Kunth (in Humboldt & al., Nov. Gen. Sp. 5, ed. qu.: 105; ed. fol.: 81. 1821) and
Durvillaea Bory (Dict. Class. Hist. Nat. 9: 192. 1826) (see Art. 53 *Ex. 15).
(lf5F6t)
Recommendation 60C
60C.1.
(IGusAQ)
When forming specific and infraspecific epithets from personal names already in Greek or Latin, or that possess a well-established latinized form, the epithets, when substantival, should (despite Art. 60.8) be given the appropriate Latin genitive form (e.g.
alexandri from Alexander or Alexandre,
alberti from Albert,
arnoldi from Arnold,
augusti from Augustus or August or Auguste,
ferdinandi from Ferdinand or Fernando or Fernand,
martini from Martinus or Martin,
linnaei from Linnaeus,
martii from Martius,
wislizeni from Wislizenus,
edithae from Editha or Edith,
elisabethae from Elisabetha or Elisabeth,
murielae from Muriela or Muriel,
conceptionis from Conceptio or Concepción,
beatricis from Beatrix or Béatrice,
hectoris from Hector; but not
‘cami’ from Edmond Gustave Camus or Aimée Camus). Treating modern family names, i.e. ones that do not have a well-established latinized form, as if they were in third declension should be avoided (e.g.
munronis from Munro,
richardsonis from Richardson).
60C.2.
(b0IyFR)
New epithets based on personal names that have a well-established latinized form should maintain the traditional use of that latinized form.
Ex. 1.
(ctdSpQ)
In addition to the epithets in Rec. 60C.1, the following epithets commemorate personal names already in Latin or possessing a well-established latinized form:
(a) second declension:
afzelii based on Afzelius;
allemanii based on Allemanius (Freire Allemão);
bauhini based on Bauhinus (Bauhin);
clusii based on Clusius;
rumphii based on Rumphius (Rumpf);
solandri based on Solandrus (Solander);
(b) third declension (otherwise discouraged, see Rec. 60C.1):
bellonis based on Bello;
brunonis based on Bruno (Robert Brown);
chamissonis based on Chamisso;
(c) adjectives (see Art. 23.5):
afzelianus, clusianus, linnaeanus, martianus, rumphianus, brunonianus, and
chamissonianus.
60C.3.
(caKwh2)
In forming new epithets based on personal names the customary spelling of the personal name should not be modified unless it contains letters, ligatures, or diacritical signs that must be transcribed under Art. 60.4 and 60.7.
60C.4.
(U9x3Nl)
In forming new epithets based on personal names prefixes and particles should be treated as follows:
(a)
The Scottish and Irish patronymic prefix Mac, Mc, M
c, or M‘, meaning “son of”, should either all be spelled as
mac or the latter three as
mc and united with the rest of the name (e.g.
macfadyenii after Macfadyen,
macgillivrayi after MacGillivray,
macnabii or
mcnabii after McNab,
macclellandii or
mcclellandii after M‘Clelland).
(b) The Irish patronymic prefix O should be united with the rest of the name (Art. 60.14) or omitted (e.g. obrienii, brienianus after O’Brien, okellyi after O’Kelly).
(c) A prefix consisting of an article (e.g. le, la, l’, les, el, il, lo), or containing an article (e.g. du, de la, des, del, della), should be united to the name (e.g. leclercii after Le Clerc, dubuyssonii after Du Buysson, lafarinae after La Farina, logatoi after Lo Gato). See Art. 23.1 and Art. 60 Ex. 51 for cases where such epithets were originally spelled in two words.
(d) A prefix to a person’s family name indicating ennoblement or canonization should be omitted (e.g. candollei after de Candolle, jussieui after de Jussieu, hilairei after Saint-Hilaire, remyi after St Rémy); in geographical epithets, however, “St” should be expanded as sanctus (masculine) or sancta (feminine) (e.g. sancti-johannis, of St John, sanctae-helenae, of St Helena).
(e) A German or Dutch prefix should be omitted (e.g. iheringii after von Ihering, martii after von Martius, steenisii after van Steenis, strassenii after zu Strassen, vechtii after van der Vecht), but when it is normally treated as part of the family name it should be included in the epithet (e.g. vonhausenii after Vonhausen, vanderhoekii after Vanderhoek, vanbruntiae after Van Brunt).
(S4lyCt)
Recommendation 60D
60D.1.
(AS5LzI)
An epithet derived from a geographical name is preferably an adjective and usually takes one of the terminations
-ensis, -(a)nus, -inus, or
-icus.
Ex. 1.
(sMyaje)
Rubus quebecensis L. H. Bailey (from Quebec), Ostrya virginiana (Mill.) K. Koch (from Virginia), Eryngium amorginum Rech. f. (from Amorgos), Fraxinus pennsylvanica Marshall (from Pennsylvania).
(oKc4WO)
Recommendation 60E
60E.1.
(T3RFwO)
The epithet in a name of a new taxon or replacement name should be written in conformity with the customary spelling of the word or words from which it is derived and in accordance with the accepted usage of Latin and latinization (see also Art. 23.5).
Ex. 1.
(Dx2YKw)
sinensis (not
chinensis).
(S7p5A0)
Recommendation 60F
60F.1.
(zpPoEm)
In forming names or epithets that are based on personal, geographical, or vernacular names or on other words, in which signs (such as diacritical signs or ligatures) or letters appear that do not belong to the twenty-six letters of the modern Latin alphabet (Art. 32.1(b)), authors should suppress or transcribe these signs or letters in conformity with modern nomenclatural usage (see also Art. 60.4 and 60.7).
(f5ceIx)
Recommendation 60G
60G.1.
(mWzuue)
All specific and infraspecific epithets should be written with an initial lower-case letter.
(JhtZMx)
Recommendation 60H
60H.1.
(WVA2Sj)
A name or epithet that combines elements derived from two or more Greek or Latin words should be formed, as far as practicable, in accordance with classical usage, subject to the provisions of Art. 60.11.
(FS1U57)
(a) Exceptions to the procedure outlined in Art. 60.11 are frequent, and one should review earlier usages of a particular compounding form. In forming apparently irregular compounds, classical usage is often followed.
Ex. 1.
(ysYdmo)
The compounding forms
hydro- and
hydr- (Hydro-phyllum) stem from water (hydor, hydatos);
calli- (Calli-stemon) derives from the adjective beautiful (kalos); and
meli- (Meli-osma, Meli-lotus) stems from honey (meli, melitos).
(ge1vlj)
(b) In pseudocompounds, a noun or adjective in a non-final position appears as a word with a case ending, not as a modified stem. Examples are: nidus-avis (nest of bird, nominative), Myos-otis (mouse ear, genitive), albo-marginatus (white-margined, ablative), etc. In epithets where tingeing is expressed, the modifying colour is often in the ablative because the preposition e or ex is implicit, e.g. atropurpureus (blackish purple) from “ex atro purpureus” (purple tinged with black). Pseudocompounds, in particular those using the genitive singular of Latin first-declension nouns, are considered as correctable errors under Art. 60.11, except when they serve to reveal semantic differences between identically spelled regular compounds formed from different elements.
Ex. 2.
(QtiSeS)
The Latin words for tube (tubus, tubi) and for trumpet (tuba, tubae) in regular compounds result in identical epithets (e.g.
tubiformis), whereas the pseudocompound
tubaeformis can only mean trumpet-formed, as in
Cantharellus tubaeformis Fr. (Syst. Mycol. 1: 319. 1821), nom. cons.
Ex. 3.
(Zs5V3z)
Regular compounds derived from papaya
(Carica, Caricae) and sedge
(Carex, Caricis) are identical, whereas the pseudocompound
caricaefolius can only mean papaya-leaved, as in
Solanum caricaefolium Rusby (in Bull. New York Bot. Gard. 8: 118. 1912).
i
Note 1.
(EO2SsM)
The hyphens in the above examples (nidus-avis excepted) are given solely for explanatory reasons. For the use of hyphens in generic names and in epithets see Art. 20.3, 23.1, 60.12, and 60.13.
(NXgUAZ)
Recommendation 60I
60I.1.
(rZj7Mk)
When naming new genera or lower-ranked taxa or providing replacement names, authors should explicitly state the etymology of the names and epithets, especially when their meaning is not obvious.
(tCZMa8)
Orthographical variants of names
61.1.
(f4eA8A)
Only one orthographical variant of any one name is treated as validly published: the form that appears in the original publication (but see Art. 6.10 and 61.6), except as provided in Art. 60 and F.9 (typographical or orthographical errors and standardizations), Art. 14.8 and 14.11 (spelling of conserved names), Art. F.3.2 (spelling of sanctioned names), and Art. 16.3, 18.4, 19.7, and 32.2 (improper Latin or transcribed Greek terminations).
61.2.
(do82pn)
For the purposes of this Code, orthographical variants are the various spelling, compounding, and inflectional forms of a name or its final epithet (including typographical errors) when only one nomenclatural type is involved.
Ex. 1.
(x1LoRf)
Nelumbo Adans. (Fam. Pl. 2: 76. 1763) and ‘Nelumbium’ (Jussieu, Gen. Pl.: 68. 1789) are spelling forms of a generic name based on Nymphaea nelumbo L., and are treated as orthographical variants. Similarly, ‘Musenium’ (Nuttall in Torrey & Gray, Fl. N. Amer. 1: 642. 1840), for which Pfeiffer (Nomencl. Bot. 2: 377. 1873) designated Seseli divaricatum Pursh as type, is an orthographical variant of Musineon Raf. (in J. Phys. Chim. Hist. Nat. Arts 91: 71. 1820), of which S. divaricatum is the original type.
Ex. 2.
(7h6Aw9)
The epithet of Selaginella apus Spring (in Martius, Fl. Bras. 1(2): 119. 1840) is a noun in apposition, so that apus cannot be treated as an orthographical variant of the adjective apodus, used in Lycopodium apodum L. (Sp. Pl.: 1105. 1753). Spring cited L. apodum as a synonym of S. apus, but instead he should have adopted the former epithet and published “S. apoda”. Consequently, S. apus was nomenclaturally superfluous when published and is illegitimate under Art. 52.1.
61.3.
(7Y0q0g)
If orthographical variants of a name of a new taxon or replacement name appear in the original publication, the one that conforms to the rules and best suits the recommendations of Art. 60 is to be retained. If the variants conform and suit equally well, the first author who, in an effectively published text (Art. 29–31), explicitly adopts one of the variants and rejects the other(s) must be followed (see also Rec. F.5A.2).
61.4.
(2mBUbJ)
The orthographical variants of a name are to be corrected to the validly published form of that name. Whenever such a variant appears in a publication, it is to be treated as if it appeared in its corrected form.
i
Note 1.
(40CqX5)
In full citations it is desirable that the original form of a corrected orthographical variant of a name be added (Rec. 50F).
61.5.
(M5xevg)
Confusingly similar names based on the same type are treated as orthographical variants. (For confusingly similar names based on different types, see Art. 53.2–53.4.)
Ex. 3.
(p3eu7G)
‘Geaster’ (Fries, Syst. Mycol. 3: 8. 1829) and Geastrum Pers. (in Neues Mag. Bot. 1: 85. 1794), nom. sanct., are similar names with the same type (see Taxon 33: 498. 1984); they are treated as orthographical variants even though they are derived from two different nouns, aster and astrum, that both mean star.
61.6.
(onheix)
Epithets with the root caf[f][e]r-, such as cafra, caffra, cafrorum, and cafrum, are not permitted in the nomenclature of organisms covered by this Code. Where these epithets were used in validly published names, they are to be treated as orthographical variants that are to be replaced by epithets with the root af[e]r-, such as afra, afrorum, and afrum, respectively. If this results in a later homonym, the correct name is determined by Art. 11.4.
Ex. 4.
(Q08B2A)
Portulaca ‘caffra’ Thunb. (Prodr. Pl. Cap.: [85]. 1800) is to be treated as having been published as P. afra (with one f) Thunb. (l.c. 1800), i.e. with retention of author attribution and date and place of publication. The new combination in Talinum Adans. is to be treated as having been published as T. afrum (with one f) (Thunb.) Eckl. & Zeyh. (Enum. Pl. Afric. Austral.: 282. 1836).
Ex. 5.
(IOlmpx)
When the epithet ‘cafra’ in Plantago ‘cafra’ Decne. (in Candolle, Prodr. 13(1): 719. 1852) is replaced by afra, P. afra Decne. (l.c. 1852), i.e. with retention of author attribution and date and place of publication, is a later homonym of P. afra L. (Sp. Pl., ed. 2: 168. 1762) and therefore illegitimate. Under Art. 11.4, the name that has to be adopted is P. capillaris E. Mey. ex Decne. (in Candolle, Prodr. 13(1): 719. 1852), which is widely treated as a heterotypic synonym of P. afra Decne.
62.1.
(L5WDBp)
A generic name retains the gender assigned by nomenclatural tradition, regardless of classical usage or the author’s original usage (but see Art. 62.2–62.4). A generic name without a nomenclatural tradition retains the gender assigned by its author (but see Art. 62.4).
i
Note 1.
(2TtbDo)
Tradition for generic names usually maintains the classical gender of the corresponding Greek or Latin word, if such exists, but may differ.
*Ex. 1.
(JSFoAh)
In accordance with tradition,
Adonis L.,
Atriplex L.,
Diospyros L.,
Eucalyptus L’Hér.,
Hemerocallis L.,
Orchis L.,
Stachys L., and
Strychnos L. must be treated as feminine while
Lotus L. and
Melilotus (L.) Mill. must be treated as masculine. Although their ending suggests masculine gender,
Cedrus Trew and
Fagus L., like most other classical tree names, were traditionally treated as feminine and therefore retain that gender; similarly,
Rhamnus L. is feminine, even though Linnaeus assigned it masculine gender.
Erigeron L. (masculine, not neuter),
Phyteuma L. (neuter, not feminine), and
Sicyos L. (masculine, not feminine) are other names for which tradition has re-established the classical gender despite another choice by Linnaeus.
Ex. 2.
(VMQXSu)
Glomus Tul. & C. Tul. (in Giorn. Bot. Ital. 1(2): 63. 1845), despite having been introduced with a masculine gender, must be treated as neuter, because it has generally been accepted as such since Trappe (in Phytopathology 72: 1102–1108. 1982) proposed to re-establish its classical gender; he was followed from then on, thus establishing a significant tradition.
62.2.
(59V9xq)
Compound generic names take the gender of the last word in the nominative case in the compound (but see Art. 14.11). If the termination is altered, however, the gender is altered accordingly. An exception is made for compounds, with endings other than those listed in clauses (a)–(c) of this Article, that were classical Latin words and in which tradition has adopted the classical Latin gender of that word even though the gender of the last word differs in the original language (usually Greek). In such cases the classical Latin gender is adopted.
Ex. 3.
(VksaDy)
Even though the name Parasitaxus de Laub. (Fl. Nouv.-Calédonie & Dépend. 4: 44. 1972) was treated as masculine when published, its gender is feminine: it is a compound of which the last part coincides with the generic name Taxus L., which is feminine by tradition (Art. 62.1).
Ex. 4.
(mjqzeP)
Compound generic names in which the termination of the last word is altered: Dipterocarpus C. F. Gaertn., Stenocarpus R. Br., and all other compounds ending in the Greek masculine -carpos (or -carpus), e.g. Hymenocarpos Savi, are masculine; those in -carpa or -carpaea, however, are feminine, e.g. Callicarpa L. and Polycarpaea Lam.; and those in -carpon, -carpum, or -carpium are neuter, e.g. Polycarpon L., Ormocarpum P. Beauv., and Pisocarpium Link.(Ih8you)
(a) Compounds ending in -botrys, -codon, -dens, -myces, -odon, -panax, -pogon, -stemon, and other masculine words, are masculine.
Ex. 5.
(rthhWj)
Even though the generic names Andropogon L. and Oplopanax (Torr. & A. Gray) Miq. were originally treated as neuter by their authors, they are masculine.
(Nogh63)
(b) Compounds ending in -achne, -anthes, -chlamys, -daphne, -glochin, -mecon, -osma (the modern transcription of the feminine Greek word οσμή, osmē), and other feminine words, are feminine. An exception is made in the case of names ending in -gaster, which strictly speaking should be feminine but are treated as masculine in accordance with tradition.
Ex. 6.
(lvscoF)
Even though Tetraglochin Poepp., Triglochin L., Dendromecon Benth., and Hesperomecon Greene were originally treated as neuter, they are feminine.(last1S)
(c) Compounds ending in -ceras, -dendron, -derma, -doma, -nema, -sperma, -stigma, -stoma, and other neuter words, are neuter. An exception is made for names ending in -anthos (or -anthus), -chilos (-chilus or -cheilos), and -phykos (-phycos or -phycus), which should be neuter, because that is the gender of the Greek words άνθος, anthos, χείλος, cheilos, and φύκος, phykos, but are treated as masculine in accordance with tradition.
Ex. 7.
(8uuygz)
Even though Aceras R. Br. and Xanthoceras Bunge were treated as feminine when first published, they are neuter.
Ex. 8.
(rKarR0)
The classical Latin feminine noun polygala, which applies to milkworts, was derived from the Greek word with the same meaning, πολύγᾰλον (polygalon), itself a compound of πολύ- (poly-), many, much, and γάλα (gala), milk, a neuter noun. Linnaeus (Sp. Pl.: 701–706. 1753) adopted the classical Latin feminine gender for Polygala, which is to be maintained.
Ex. 9.
(y6y734)
The classical gender both of the Latin onosma and the original Greek ὄνοσμα (onosma) is neuter. Linnaeus (Sp. Pl., ed. 2: 196. 1762), in taking up the name for a new genus, treated Onosma as feminine. Because the ending -osma is listed in Art. 62.2(b) as feminine, Onosma maintains its feminine gender.
i
Note 2.
(miYnxk)
Art. 14.11 provides for the conservation of a generic name in order to preserve a particular gender.
Ex. 10.
(VIcQZr)
As an exception to Art. 62.2, the generic name Bidens L., formed from the Latin masculine noun dens (tooth), has been assigned feminine gender by conservation (see App. III).
62.3.
(zHc055)
Arbitrarily formed generic names or vernacular names or adjectives used as generic names, of which the gender is not apparent, take the gender assigned to them by their authors. If the original author did not indicate the gender, a subsequent author may choose a gender, and the first such choice, if effectively published (Art. 29–31), is to be accepted (see also Rec. F.5A.2).
Ex. 11.
(FCZKc2)
Taonabo Aubl. (Hist. Pl. Guiane 1: 569. 1775) is feminine because Aublet’s two species were T. dentata and T. punctata.
Ex. 12.
(DG4yhw)
Agati Adans. (Fam. Pl. 2: 326. 1763) was published without indication of gender; feminine gender was assigned to it by Desvaux (in J. Bot. Agric. 1: 120. 1813), who was the first subsequent author to adopt the name in an effectively published text, and his choice is to be accepted.
Ex. 13.
(3dV8HU)
The original gender of Manihot Mill. (Gard. Dict. Abr., ed. 4: Manihot. 1754), as apparent from some of Miller’s phrase names (e.g. “Manihot spinossimima, folio vitigineo”), was feminine, and Manihot is therefore to be treated as feminine.
Ex. 14.
(HfCwTi)
Ailanthus Desf. (in Hist. Acad. Roy. Sci. Mém. Math. Phys. (Paris, 4to) 1786 (Mém.): 265. 1788), nom. cons., could appear to be of Greek origin because of the -anthus ending and, if so, would be treated as masculine under Art. 62.2(c). The generic name was, however, derived from a vernacular name originating in a language from the Maluku Islands of Indonesia. The gender of Ailanthus is therefore feminine as originally assigned by Desfontaines.
62.4.
(DONmZc)
Generic names ending in -oides, or -odes are treated as feminine and those ending in -ites as masculine, regardless of the gender assigned to them by the original author.
(wtS60y)
Recommendation 62A
62A.1.
(1E7I5C)
When a genus is divided into two or more genera, the gender of the new generic name or names should, if there is no obstacle under the rules, be that of the generic name that is retained (see also Rec. 20A.1(h) and 60B).
Ex. 1.
(rHsFLl)
When Boletus L., nom. cons. (masculine) was divided, the segregated new genera were usually given masculine names, e.g. Xerocomus Quél. (in Mougeot & Ferry, Fl. Vosges, Champ.: 477. 1887) and Boletellus Murrill (in Mycologia 1: 9. 1909).
(WF5WOt)
Names of organisms treated as fungi
(Maastricht version)
(r4X7BY)
This Chapter brings together the provisions of this Code that deal solely with names of organisms treated as fungi.
Content in this Chapter may be modified by action of the Fungal Nomenclature Session of an International Mycological Congress (IMC) (see Div. III Prov. 8). The current version of this Chapter, the Maastricht Chapter F, embodies the decisions accepted by the 12th IMC in Maastricht, The Netherlands, on 15 August 2024.
Always consult the online version of this Code in case of changes resulting from an IMC that takes place before the next International Botanical Congress.
The following changes are introduced in the Maastricht Chapter F:
Art. F.2.1 and F.7.1. The procedures for lists of protected and/or rejected names were revised to more clearly set out the steps involved.
Art. F.2 Note 1. When preparing lists of names for protection, included names may be proposed with or without the listing of synonyms.
Art. F.3.5. An earlier homonym of a sanctioned name remains unavailable if the sanctioned name is rejected.
Art. F.5 Note 3. An addition was made to clarify that an identifier is not required when proposing a conserved type.
Rec. F.11A. A new section within Chapter F (Section 7) was added, concerning types that are living cultures, including two Recommendations: Rec. F.11A.1 about depositing ex-type cultures in public collections and Rec. F.11A.2 about utilizing ex-type cultures when selecting neotypes.
Mycologists should note that the content of this Code outside of Chapter F pertains to all organisms covered by this Code, including fungi, unless expressly limited. This content includes rules about effective publication, valid publication, typification, legitimacy, and priority of names; citation and orthography; and names of hybrids.
Some provisions in the Preamble, Principles, Articles, and Recommendations elsewhere in this Code, such as those listed below, while not restricted to fungi, are of particular relevance to mycologists. The full wording of these and all other relevant provisions of this Code should be consulted in all cases.
Pre. 8. The provisions of this Code apply to all organisms traditionally treated as fungi, whether fossil or non-fossil, including chytrids, oomycetes, and slime moulds (but excluding Microsporidia).
Principle I. This Code applies to names of taxonomic groups treated as fungi, whether or not these groups were originally treated as such.
Art. 4 Note 4. In classifying parasites, especially fungi, authors may distinguish within the species special forms (formae speciales) characterized by their adaptation to different hosts, but the nomenclature of special forms is not governed by the provisions of this Code.
Art. 8.4 (see also Art. 8 Ex. 12, Rec. 8B, Art. 40 Note 4, and Art. 40.7). Cultures of fungi are acceptable as types if preserved in a metabolically inactive state, and on or after 1 January 2019 this must be stated in the protologue.
Art. 14.15 and Art. 14 Note 4(c)(2). Before 1 January 1954, decisions on conservation of names made by the Special Committee for Fungi, became effective on 20 July 1950 at the VII International Botanical Congress in Stockholm.
Art. 16.3. Automatically typified suprafamilial names of fungi end as follows: (a) division or phylum in -mycota; (b) subdivision or subphylum in -mycotina; (c) class in -mycetes and subclass in -mycetidae. Automatically typified names not in accordance with these terminations are to be corrected.
Rec. 38E.1. The hosts should be indicated in descriptions or diagnoses of new taxa of parasitic organisms, especially fungi.
Art. 40.6. The type of a name of a new species or infraspecific taxon of non-fossil microfungi may be an effectively published illustration if there are technical difficulties of specimen preservation or if it is impossible to preserve a specimen that would show the features attributed to the taxon by the author of the name (but see Art. 40 Ex. 10, which treats representations of DNA sequences as falling outside of the definition of illustrations in Art. 6.1 footnote).
Art. 41.8(b) (see also Art. 41 Ex. 27). Failure to cite the place of valid publication of a basionym or replaced synonym, when explained by the backward shift of the starting date for some fungi, is a correctable error.
Art. 45.1 (see also Art. 45 Ex. 6 and 7 and Note 1). If a taxon originally assigned to a group not covered by this Code is treated as belonging to the algae or fungi, any of its names need satisfy only the requirements of the relevant other Code that the author was using for status equivalent to valid publication under this Code. Note especially that names of Microsporidia are not covered by this Code even when Microsporidia are considered as fungi.
(Nil0ZV)
Limitation of priority
(asEhgh)
Nomenclatural starting-point
F.1.1.
(hyywe3)
Valid publication of names for non-fossil fungi (Pre. 8) is treated as beginning at 1 May 1753 (Linnaeus, Species plantarum, ed. 1, treated as having been published on that date; see Art. 13.1). For nomenclatural purposes, names given to lichens apply to their fungal component. Names of Microsporidia are governed by the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature (see Pre. 8).
i
Note 1.
(bHI1Dn)
For fossil fungi, see Art. 13.1(f).
F.2.1.
(IbxttK)
In the interest of nomenclatural stability, for organisms treated as fungi, subcommittees may be established by the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi (see Div. III Prov. 7.2 and 8.13(f)) in consultation with the General Committee and appropriate international bodies for the purpose of preparing lists of names proposed for protection and/or rejection (see Art. F.7.1) for submission to the General Committee (see Div. III Prov. 2.2, 7.10(j), 7.11, and 8.13(a)). Protected names on these lists, which become part of the Appendices of the Code (see App. IIA, III, and IV) once reviewed and approved by the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi and the General Committee (see Art. 14.15 and Rec. 14A.1), are to be listed with their types and are treated as conserved against any competing synonyms or homonyms (including sanctioned names), although conservation under Art. 14 overrides this protection. The lists of protected names remain open for revision through the procedures described in this Article.
i
Note 1.
(9vPhZF)
Names in lists of names proposed for protection may be proposed with or without the listing of synonyms.
(Q1eJBE)
Sanctioned names
F.3.1.
(VyrWcm)
Names in Uredinales, Ustilaginales, and Gasteromycetes (s. l.) adopted by Persoon (Synopsis methodica fungorum, 1801) and names of other fungi (excluding slime moulds) adopted by Fries (Systema mycologicum, vol. 1–3. 1821–1832, with additional Index, 1832; and Elenchus fungorum, vol. 1–2. 1828), are sanctioned.
F.3.2.
(T08O1P)
Names sanctioned are treated as if conserved against earlier homonyms and competing synonyms. Such names, once sanctioned, remain sanctioned even if elsewhere in the sanctioning works the sanctioning author does not recognize them. The spelling used when the name was sanctioned is treated as conserved, except for changes required by Art. 60 and F.9.
Ex. 1.
(AlWDL5)
The name Strigula smaragdula Fr. (in Linnaea 5: 550. 1830) was accepted by Fries (Syst. Mycol., Index: 184. 1832) and therefore sanctioned. It is treated as if conserved against the competing earlier synonym Phyllochoris elegans Fée (Essai Crypt. Écorc.: xciv. 1825), which is the basionym of Strigula elegans (Fée) Müll. Arg. (in Linnaea 43: 41. 1880).
Ex. 2.
(Ry71Cr)
Agaricus ericetorum Pers. (Observ. Mycol. 1: 50. 1796) was accepted by Fries (Syst. Mycol. 1: 165. 1821), but later (Elench. Fung. 1: 22. 1828) regarded by him as a synonym of A. umbelliferus L. (Sp. Pl.: 1175. 1753), nom. sanct., and not included in his Index (Syst. Mycol., Index: 18. 1832) as an accepted name. Nevertheless A. ericetorum Pers. is a sanctioned name.
Ex. 3.
(TldMZD)
The spelling used when the name Merulius lacrimans (Wulfen) Schumach. was sanctioned (Fries, Syst. Mycol. 1: 328. 1821) is to be maintained, even though the epithet was spelled ‘lacrymans’ by Schumacher (Enum. Pl. 2: 371. 1803) and the basionym was originally published as Boletus ‘lacrymans’ Wulfen (in Jacquin, Misc. Austriac. 2: 111. 1781).
F.3.3.
(UcdyEF)
A sanctioned name is illegitimate if it is a later homonym of another sanctioned name (see also Art. 53).
F.3.4.
(CYZnBg)
An earlier homonym of a sanctioned name is not made illegitimate by that sanctioning but is unavailable for use; if not otherwise illegitimate, it may serve as a basionym of another name or combination based on the same type (see also Art. 55.3).
Ex. 4.
(0DyBgG)
Patellaria Hoffm. (Descr. Pl. Cl. Crypt. 1: 55. 1789) is an earlier homonym of the sanctioned generic name Patellaria Fr. (Syst. Mycol. 2: 158. 1822). Hoffmann’s name is legitimate but unavailable for use. Lecanidion Endl. (Fl. Poson.: 46. 1830), based on the same type as Patellaria Fr., nom. sanct., is illegitimate under Art. 52.1.
Ex. 5.
(oVnAsV)
Antennaria Gaertn. (Fruct. Sem. Pl. 2: 410. 1791), in order to become available for use, required conservation against the later homonym Antennaria Link (in Neues J. Bot. 3(1, 2): 16. 1809), nom. sanct. (Fries, Syst. Mycol. 1: xlvii. 1821).
Ex. 6.
(6pklah)
Agaricus cervinus Schaeff. (Fung. Bavar. Palat. Nasc. 4: 6. 1774) is an earlier homonym of the sanctioned name A. cervinus Hoffm. (Nomencl. Fung. 1: t. 2, fig. 2. 1789), nom. sanct. (Fries, Syst. Mycol. 1: 82. 1821); Schaeffer’s name is unavailable for use, but it is legitimate and may serve as basionym for combinations in other genera. In Pluteus Fr. the combination is cited as P. cervinus (Schaeff.) P. Kumm. and has priority over the heterotypic (taxonomic) synonym P. atricapillus (Batsch) Fayod, based on A. atricapillus Batsch (Elench. Fung. Cont. Prima: 77. 1786).
F.3.5.
(Sio0l5)
An earlier homonym of a sanctioned name remains unavailable if the sanctioned name is rejected (under Art. 56 or F.7).
F.3.6.
(DJ1vfB)
When, for a taxon at a rank from family to genus, inclusive, two or more sanctioned names compete, Art. 11.3 governs the choice of the correct name (see also Art. F.3.8).
F.3.7.
(gJ2LcO)
When, for a taxon at a rank lower than genus, two or more sanctioned names and/or two or more names with the same final epithet and type as a sanctioned name compete, Art. 11.4 governs the choice of the correct name.
i
Note 1.
(vYIAi0)
The date of sanctioning does not affect the date of valid publication, and therefore priority (Art. 11), of a sanctioned name. In particular, when two or more homonyms are sanctioned, only the earliest of them may be used because the later one(s) are illegitimate under Art. F.3.3.
Ex. 7.
(Ty7q9C)
Fries (Syst. Mycol. 1: 41. 1821) accepted and thus sanctioned Agaricus flavovirens Pers. (in Hoffmann, Abbild. Schwämme: t. [24]. 1793) and treated A. equestris L. (Sp. Pl.: 1173. 1753) as a synonym. He later (Elench. Fung. 1: 6. 1828) accepted A. equestris, stating “Nomen prius et aptius certe restituendum [The prior and more apt name is certainly to be restored]”. Both names are sanctioned, but, when they are treated as synonyms, A. equestris L., nom. sanct., is to be used because it has priority.
F.3.8.
(67vMXO)
A name that neither is sanctioned nor has the same type and final epithet as a sanctioned name at the same rank may not be used for a taxon that includes the type of a sanctioned name at that rank unless the final epithet of the sanctioned name is not available for the required combination (see Art. 11.4(c)).
Ex. 8.
(4lAsnJ)
The name Agaricus involutus Batsch (Elench. Fung. Cont. Prima: 39. 1786) was sanctioned by Fries (Syst. Mycol. 1: 271. 1821) and therefore, when treated in Paxillus Fr. with the earlier but non-sanctioned name A. contiguus Bull. (Herb. Fr. 5: t. 240. 1785) as a synonym, the correct name is P. involutus (Batsch) Fr.
Ex. 9.
(p0wJyQ)
The name Polyporus brumalis (Pers.) Fr. (Observ. Mycol. 2: 255. 1818), nom. sanct. (Fries, Syst. Mycol. 1: 348. 1821), based on Boletus brumalis Pers. (in Neues Mag. Bot. 1: 107. 1794), was treated by Zmitrovich & Kovalenko (in Int. J. Med. Mushr. 18: 23–38, suppl. 2: [2]. 2015) as synonymous with B. hypocrateriformis Schrank (Baier. Fl. 2: 621. 1789) and placed in Lentinus Fr., nom. sanct., in which the correct name is L. brumalis (Pers.) Zmitr. (in Int. J. Med. Mushr. 12: 88. 2010).
F.3.9.
(pPp2q5)
Conservation (Art. 14), protection (Art. F.2), and explicit rejection (Art. 56 and F.7) override sanctioning.
F.3.10.
(N3aCdQ)
The type of a name of a species or infraspecific taxon adopted in one of the works specified in Art. F.3.1, and thereby sanctioned, may be selected from among the elements associated with the name in the protologue and/or the sanctioning treatment.
i
Note 2.
(yBoXqI)
For names falling under Art. F.3.10, elements from the context of the protologue are original material and those from the context of the sanctioning work are considered as equivalent to original material.
Ex. 10.
(7xkzdV)
When Stadler & al. (in IMA Fungus 5: 61. 2014) designated the lectotype of Clavaria hypoxylon L. (Sp. Pl.: 1182. 1753), sanctioned by Fries (Syst. Mycol. 2: 327. 1823) as Sphaeria hypoxylon (L.) Pers. (Observ. Mycol. 1: 20. 1796), they selected a specimen in K distributed by Fries (Scler. Suec. No. 181) and cited by him in the sanctioning treatment rather than any of the elements associated with the protologue.
Ex. 11.
(2rZYnJ)
In the absence of any specimens or illustrations from the context of the protologue that are original material, Peterson (in Amer. J. Bot. 63: 313. 1976) designated a specimen in L as the neotype of Clavaria formosa Pers. (Comm. Fung. Clav.: 41. 1797), nom. sanct. However, when sanctioning C. formosa, Fries (Syst. Mycol. 1: 466. 1821) cited several illustrations, which are therefore considered as equivalent to original material. Peterson’s neotypification was not therefore designated in conformity with Art. 9.13 and is not to be followed (Art. 9.19). Instead, Franchi & Marchetti (in Riv. Micol. 59: 323. 2017) designated as the lectotype of C. formosa one of the illustrations (Persoon, Icon. Desc. Fung. Min. Cognit. 1: t. III, fig. 6. 1798) that was cited by Fries (l.c., as “f. 5”).
F.3.11.
(CqtYy6)
When a sanctioning author accepted an earlier name but did not include, even implicitly, any element associated with its protologue, or when the protologue did not include the subsequently designated type of the sanctioned name, the sanctioning author is considered to have created a later homonym, which is treated as if conserved (see also Art. 48).
i
Note 3.
(3UoFyV)
For typification of sanctioned generic names, see Art. 10.2. Note that automatic typification under Art. 7.5 does not apply to sanctioned names. For legitimacy of sanctioned names (or names based on them), see also Art. 6.4, 52.1, 53.1, and 55.3.
(uYAxJS)
Recommendation F.3A
F.3A.1.
(0AFxoe)
When it is considered useful to indicate the nomenclatural status of a sanctioned name (Art. F.3.1), the abbreviation “nom. sanct.” (nomen sanctionatum) should be added in a formal citation; the place of sanctioning should also be added in full nomenclatural citations.
Ex. 1.
(FXe6Bo)
Boletus piperatus Bull. (Herb. France: t. 451, fig. 2. 1790) was adopted in Fries (Syst. Mycol. 1: 388. 1821) and was thereby sanctioned. Depending on the level of nomenclatural information being presented, it should be cited as B. piperatus Bull., nom. sanct.; or B. piperatus Bull. 1790, nom. sanct.; or B. piperatus Bull., Herb. France: t. 451, fig. 2. 1790, nom. sanct.; or B. piperatus Bull., Herb. France: t. 451, fig. 2. 1790, nom. sanct. (Fries, Syst. Mycol. 1: 388. 1821).
Ex. 2.
(341O1b)
Agaricus compactus [unranked] sarcocephalus (Fr.) Fr. was sanctioned when adopted by Fries (Syst. Mycol. 1: 290. 1821). That status should be indicated by citing it as A. compactus [unranked] sarcocephalus (Fr.) Fr., nom. sanct. The abbreviation “nom. sanct.” should not be added when citing its basionym A. sarcocephalus Fr. (Observ. Mycol. 1: 51. 1815) or when citing subsequent combinations such as Psathyrella sarcocephala (Fr.) Singer (in Lilloa 22: 468. 1949).
(6NSUzF)
Valid publication and typification of names
(k5vBA8)
Misplaced rank-denoting terms
F.4.1.
(lcuZWh)
A name is not validly published if it is given to a taxon of which the rank is at the same time, contrary to Art. 5, denoted by a misplaced term (Art. 37.7), but an exception is made for names of the subdivisions of genera termed tribes (tribus) in Fries’s Systema mycologicum, which are treated as validly published names of unranked subdivisions of genera.
Ex. 1.
(bYgxGr)
Agaricus “tribus” [unranked]
Pholiota Fr. (Syst. Mycol. 1: 240. 1821), sanctioned in the same work, is the validly published basionym of the generic name
Pholiota (Fr.) P. Kumm. (Führer Pilzk.: 22. 1871) (see Art. 41 Ex. 9).
(ukPFFT)
Registration of names and nomenclatural acts
F.5.1.
(FN09s8)
The Nomenclature Committee for Fungi (see Div. III Prov. 7) has the power to:
(a) Appoint one or more localized or decentralized, open and accessible, electronic repositories (recognized repositories) to accession the information required by Art. F.5.3 and F.5.5 and issue the identifiers required by Art. F.5.2 and F.5.4.
(b) Cancel such appointment at its discretion.
(c) Set aside the requirements of Art. F.5.2, F.5.3, F.5.4, and F.5.5, should the repository mechanism, or essential parts thereof, cease to function.
Decisions made by this Committee under these powers are subject to ratification by a later International Mycological Congress.
F.5.2.
(XzgeVD)
To be validly published, nomenclatural novelties (Art. 6 Note 4) applied to organisms treated as fungi under this
Code (Pre. 8; including fossil fungi and lichen-forming fungi) and published on or after 1 January 2013 must, in the protologue, include citation of the identifier issued for the name by a recognized repository (Art. F.5.1).
Ex. 1.
(e9gHRQ)
The protologue of Albugo arenosa Mirzaee & Thines (in Mycol. Prog. 12: 50. 2013) complies with Art. F.5.2 because it includes citation of “MB 564515”, an identifier issued by MycoBank, one of three recognized repositories. The decision by the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi to appoint (Art. F.5.1) Fungal Names, Index Fungorum, and MycoBank as repositories (Redhead & Norvell in Taxon 62: 173–174. 2013) was ratified (Art. F.5.1) by the 10th International Mycological Congress (May in Taxon 66: 484. 2017).
Ex. 2.
(Xw8UJ3)
The designation “Austropleospora archidendri” (Ariyawansa & al. in Fungal Diversity 75: 64. 2015) is not a validly published new combination based on Paraconiothyrium archidendri Verkley & al. (in Persoonia 32: 37. 2014) because it was published without citing an identifier issued by a recognized repository, even though the recognized repository Index Fungorum had previously issued the identifier “IF 551419” for the intended new combination.
Ex. 3.
(liUI5Q)
The designation “Priceomyces fermenticarens” (Gouliamova & al. in Persoonia 36: 429. 2016), intended as a new combination, was published with the identifier “MB 310255”, which refers to the identifier “IF 310255” that had been assigned to the intended basionym, Candida fermenticarens Van der Walt & P. B. Baker (in Bothalia 12: 561. 1978) by Index Fungorum before registration became mandatory. The recognized repository MycoBank assigned the identifier “MB 818676” for the intended new combination after its publication, but because no identifier was issued before its publication the intended combination was not validly published. Priceomyces fermenticarens (Van der Walt & P. B. Baker) Gouliam. & al. (in Persoonia 39: 289. 2017) was subsequently validly published with citation of the identifier “MB 818692”, newly issued by MycoBank.
F.5.3.
(eeL3Kd)
For an identifier to be issued by a recognized repository as required by Art. F.5.2, the minimum elements of information that must be accessioned by author(s) of scientific names are the proposed name itself and those elements required for valid publication under Art. 38.1(a) and 39.2 (validating description or diagnosis) and Art. 40.1 and 40.5 (type) or Art. 41.5 (reference to the basionym or replaced synonym). When the accessioned and subsequently published information for a name with a given identifier differ, the published information is considered as definitive.1
i
Note 1.
(7deJE6)
Issuance of an identifier by a recognized repository presumes subsequent fulfilment of the requirements for valid publication of the name (Art. 32–45, F.5.2, and F.5.3) but does not by itself constitute or guarantee valid publication.
i
Note 2.
(HjsTPI)
The words “name” and “names” are used in Art. F.5.2 and F.5.3 for names that may not yet be validly published, in which case the definition in Art. 6.3 does not apply.
F.5.4.
(fkOWSd)
For purposes of priority (Art. 9.19, 9.20, and 10.5), designation of a type, on or after 1 January 2019, of the name of an organism treated as a fungus under this Code (Pre. 8), is achieved only if an identifier issued for the type designation by a recognized repository (Art. F.5.1) is cited.
i
Note 3.
(8zEg0x)
Art. F.5.4 applies only to the designation of lectotypes and neotypes (and their equivalents under Art. 10.2) and epitypes; it does not apply to the designation of a holotype when publishing the name of a new taxon, for which see Art. F.5.3, nor does it apply to proposing a conserved type when publishing a proposal to conserve a name (Art. 14.9).
F.5.5.
(Fjq4CG)
For an identifier to be issued by a recognized repository as required by Art. F.5.4, the minimum elements of information that must be accessioned by author(s) of type designations are the name being typified, the author designating the type, and those elements required by Art. 9.21, 9.22, and 9.23.
i
Note 4.
(0QT0O2)
Issuance of an identifier by a recognized repository presumes subsequent fulfilment of the requirements for effective type designation (Art. 7.8–7.11 and F.5.4) but does not by itself constitute or guarantee a type designation.
F.5.6.
(ryU6aK)
When the identifier issued for a name by a recognized repository is cited incorrectly in the protologue, this is treated as a correctable error not preventing valid publication of the name, provided that the identifier was issued prior to the protologue.
Ex. 4.
(jqJSgc)
The identifier “MB 564220” was issued by MycoBank for
Cortinarius peristeris Soop (in Bresadoliana 1: 22. 2013) before publication of the name. Even though the identifier was incorrectly cited as “MB 564” in the protologue, the name is validly published.
Ex. 5.
(16T2zI)
The identifier “MB 805372” was issued by MycoBank on 22 August 2013 for
Leucoagaricus vindobonensis (Tratt.) L. A. Parra (Fungi Eur. 1A: 721. 30 Oct 2013) before publication of the name. Even though the identifier was incorrectly cited as “MB 807352” in the protologue, the name is validly published.
F.5.7.
(liW23Y)
An identifier remains associated with the name or designation for which it was issued. If, when published, a designation for which an identifier has been issued does not meet other requirements for valid publication, in order for that designation to become a validly published name, a new identifier must be obtained.
Ex. 6.
(Eye3BB)
The designation
“Nigelia” (Luangsa-ard & al. in Mycol. Progr. 16: 378. 2017) was published without citation of an identifier. MycoBank assigned the identifier “MB 823565” for this designation after publication. The designation was later validated as
Nigelia Luangsa-ard & al. (in Index Fungorum 345: 1. 2017) with citation of the identifier “IF 553229” newly issued by Index Fungorum.
F.5.8.
(k61XgP)
When the identifier issued for a type designation by a recognized repository is cited incorrectly in the typifying publication, this is treated as a correctable error not preventing designation of the type, provided that the identifier was issued prior to the typifying publication.
(SREEG1)
Recommendation F.5AF.5A.1.
(MV3meZ)
Authors of names of organisms treated as fungi are encouraged to:
(a) Deposit the required elements of information for any nomenclatural novelty in a recognized repository as soon as possible after a work is accepted for publication, so as to obtain identifiers for each nomenclatural novelty.
(b) Inform the recognized repository that issued the identifier of the complete bibliographic details upon publication of the name, including volume and part number, page number, date of publication, and (for books) the publisher and place of publication.
(c) Upon publication of a name, supply an electronic version of the publication to the recognized repository that issued the identifier associated with the name.
F.5A.2.
(50kPPG)
In addition to meeting the requirements for effective publication of choices of name (Art. 11.5 and 53.5), orthography (Art. 61.3), or gender (Art. 62.3), those publishing such choices for names of organisms treated as fungi are encouraged to record the choice in a recognized repository (Art. F.5.1) and cite the identifier in the place of publication.
(dEW67h)
Rejection of names
F.6.1.
(pqGRRo)
The name of a taxon treated as a fungus published on or after 1 January 2019 is illegitimate if it is a later homonym of a prokaryotic or protozoan name (see also Art. 54 and Rec. 54A).
F.7.1.
(kQOR24)
Rejected names on lists prepared by the subcommittees defined in Art. F.2.1, which become part of the Appendices of the Code (see App. V) once reviewed and approved by the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi and the General Committee (see Art. 56.3 and Rec. 56A.1), are to be treated as rejected under Art. 56.1, except that they may become eligible for use by conservation under Art. 14.
(fa0Phh)
Names of fungi with a pleomorphic life cycle
F.8.1.
(208PDV)
A name published before 1 January 2013 for a taxon of non-lichen-forming Ascomycota and Basidiomycota, with the intent or implied intent of applying to or being typified by one particular morph (e.g. anamorph or teleomorph; see Art. F.8 Note 2), may be legitimate even if it otherwise would be illegitimate under Art. 52 on account of the protologue including a type (as defined in Art. 52.2) referable to a different morph. If the name is otherwise legitimate, it competes for priority (Art. 11.3 and 11.4).
Ex. 1.
(vOg7g9)
Penicillium brefeldianum B. O. Dodge (in Mycologia 25: 92. 1933) was described and based on a type with both the anamorph and teleomorph (and therefore necessarily typified by the teleomorph element alone under editions of the Code prior to the Melbourne Code of 2012). The combination Eupenicillium brefeldianum (B. O. Dodge) Stolk & D. B. Scott (in Persoonia 4: 400. 1967) for the teleomorph is legitimate. Penicillium dodgei Pitt (Gen. Penicillium: 117. 1980), typified by the anamorph in a dried culture “derived from Dodge’s type”, did not include the teleomorphic type of P. brefeldianum and therefore it too is legitimate. However, when considered to be a species of Penicillium, the correct name for all its states is P. brefeldianum.
i
Note 1.
(u3yZfB)
Except as provided in Art. F.8.1, names of fungi with mitotic asexual morphs (anamorphs) as well as a meiotic sexual morph (teleomorph) must conform to the same provisions of this Code as all other fungi.
i
Note 2.
(yeKSam)
Editions of the Code prior to the Melbourne Code of 2012 provided for separate names for mitotic asexual morphs (anamorphs) of certain pleomorphic fungi and required that the name applicable to the whole fungus be typified by a meiotic sexual morph (teleomorph). Under the current Code, however, all legitimate fungal names are treated equally for the purpose of establishing priority, regardless of the morph of the type (see also Art. F.2.1).
Ex. 2.
(MnaUGu)
Mycosphaerella aleuritis (I. Miyake) S. H. Ou (in Sinensia 11: 183. 1940, ‘Aleuritidis’), when published as a new combination, was accompanied by a Latin diagnosis of the newly discovered teleomorph corresponding to the anamorph on which the basionym Cercospora aleuritis I. Miyake (in Bot. Mag. (Tokyo) 26: 66. 1912, ‘Aleuritidis’) was typified. Under editions of the Code before the Melbourne Code of 2012, M. aleuritis was considered to be the name of a new species with a teleomorph type, dating from 1940, with authorship attributed solely to Ou. Under the current Code, the name is cited as originally published, M. aleuritis (I. Miyake) S. H. Ou, and is typified by the type of the basionym.
Ex. 3.
(sjFGQ5)
In the protologue of the teleomorph-typified Venturia acerina Plakidas ex M. E. Barr (in Canad. J. Bot. 46: 814. 1968) the anamorph-typified Cladosporium humile Davis (in Trans. Wisconsin Acad. Sci. 19: 702. 1919) was included as a synonym. Because it was published before 1 January 2013, the name V. acerina is not illegitimate, but C. humile is the earliest legitimate name at the rank of species.
i
Note 3.
(dEToFd)
Names proposed simultaneously for separate morphs (e.g. anamorph and teleomorph) of a taxon of non-lichen-forming Ascomycota and Basidiomycota are necessarily heterotypic and are not therefore alternative names as defined by Art. 36.3.
Ex. 4.
(ippy8m)
Hypocrea dorotheae Samuels & Dodd and Trichoderma dorotheae Samuels & Dodd were simultaneously validly published (in Stud. Mycol. 56: 112. 2006) for what the authors considered to be a single species with Samuels & Dodd 8657 (PDD 83839) as the holotype. Because these names were published before 1 January 2013 (see Art. F.8.1 and Art. F.8 Note 2), and because the authors explicitly indicated that the name T. dorotheae was typified by the anamorphic element of PDD 83839, both names are validly published and legitimate. They are not alternative names as defined in Art. 36.3.
(bhy6EK)
Orthography of names
F.9.1.
(enoVGn)
Epithets of fungal names derived from the generic name of an associated organism are to be spelled in accordance with the accepted spelling of the name of that organism; other spellings are regarded as orthographical variants to be corrected (see Art. 61).
Ex. 1.
(tXIhgq)
Phyllachora ‘anonicola’ Chardón (in Mycologia 32: 190. 1940) is to be corrected to P. annonicola in accordance with the accepted spelling of Annona L.; Meliola ‘albizziae’ Hansf. & Deighton (in Mycol. Pap. 23: 26. 1948) is to be corrected to M. albiziae in accordance with the accepted spelling of Albizia Durazz.
Ex. 2.
(ugYJrZ)
Dimeromyces ‘corynitis’ Thaxter (in Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts 48: 157. 1912) was stated to occur “On the elytra of Corynites ruficollis Fabr.”, but the name of the host, a species of beetle, is correctly spelled Corynetes ruficollis. The fungal name is therefore to be spelled D. corynetis.
Ex. 3.
(lVS4sS)
Tricholomopsis ‘pteridicola’ Olariaga & al. (in Mycol. Progr. 14(4/21): 6. 2015) was stated to occur in association with Pteridium aquilinum. Therefore, the name is to be corrected to T. pteridiicola because the genitive singular of Pteridium is Pteridii (in contrast to that of Pteris, which is Pteridis; see Art. 60.11).
(YP0NY3)
Author citations
F.10.1.
(MMFU7E)
For names of organisms treated as fungi, the identifier issued for the name by a recognized repository (Art. F.5.2) may be used subsequent to the protologue in place of an author citation for the name but not to replace the name itself (see also Art. 22.1 and 26.1).
(yFmrHK)
Recommendation F.10A
F.10A.1.
(CQkqac)
An identifier used in place of an author citation as permitted by Art. F.10.1 should be presented with the symbol # preceding the numerical part of the identifier, and the resulting string should be enclosed in square brackets. In electronic publications, this string should be provided with a direct and stable link to the corresponding record in one of the recognized repositories.
Ex. 1.
(ZRHWrw)
Astrothelium meristosporoides [#816706]. The direct and stable link to a record in a recognized repository would be either
https://www.mycobank.org/MB/816706 or
https://www.indexfungorum.org/Names/NamesRecord.asp?RecordID=816706.
(p1o1iH)
Recommendations on types that are living cultures
(N8WTTw)
Recommendation F.11A
F.11A.1.
(f4iKwr)
When applying Rec. 8B.1 to the name of a fungus, the collections should be public (see also Rec. 7A.1).
F.11A.2.
(ymmbuO)
When the type of a name of a fungus has been lost or destroyed and was a living culture (preserved in a metabolically inactive state), a neotype (if permissible, see Art. 9.8) selected to replace it should be the oldest progeny (preserved in a metabolically inactive state) of an ex-type culture (Rec. 8B.2).
(E4tPmJ)
Names of hybrids
(FtRowW)
Indication of hybrids
H.1.1.
(oT63Q7)
Hybridity is indicated by use of the multiplication sign × or by addition of the prefix “notho-” 1 to the term denoting the rank of the taxon.
H.2.1.
(pepDfj)
A hybrid between named taxa may be indicated by placing the multiplication sign × between the names of the taxa; the whole expression is then called a hybrid formula.
Ex. 1.
(YjDOoH)
Agrostis L. × Polypogon Desf.; Agrostis stolonifera L. × Polypogon monspeliensis (L.) Desf.; Melampsora medusae Thüm. × M. occidentalis H. S. Jacks.; Mentha aquatica L. × M. arvensis L. × M. spicata L.; Polypodium vulgare subsp. prionodes (Asch.) Rothm. × P. vulgare L. subsp. vulgare; Salix aurita L. × S. caprea L.; Tilletia caries (DC.) Tul. & C. Tul. × T. foetida (Wallr.) Liro.
Ex. 2.
(mMfQ2q)
Kunzea linearis (Kirk) de Lange × Kunzea robusta de Lange & Toelken or Kunzea linearis (Kirk) de Lange × K. robusta de Lange & Toelken, but not “Kunzea linearis (Kirk) de Lange × robusta de Lange & Toelken”, which omits the generic name or its abbreviation from the second species name contrary to Art. 23.1.
(RWvAMM)
Recommendation H.2A
H.2A.1.
(S4ZkD0)
It is usually preferable to place the names or epithets in a formula in alphabetical order. The direction of a cross may be indicated by including the gender-denoting symbols (♀: female; ♂: male) in the formula, or by placing the female parent first. If a non-alphabetical sequence is used, its basis should be clearly indicated.
(1Tf5Nu)
Names of nothotaxa
H.3.1.
(5eXuUa)
Hybrids between representatives of two or more taxa may receive a name. For nomenclatural purposes, the hybrid nature of a taxon is indicated by placing the multiplication sign × before the name of an intergeneric hybrid or before the epithet in the name of an interspecific hybrid, or by prefixing the term “notho-” (optionally abbreviated “n-”) to the term denoting the rank of the taxon (see Art. 3.2 and 4.4). All such taxa are designated nothotaxa.
Ex. 1.
(1g1YGl)
×Agropogon P. Fourn. (Quatre Fl. France: 50. 1934);
×Agropogon littoralis (Sm.) C. E. Hubb. (in J. Ecol. 33: 333. 1946);
Melampsora ×columbiana G. Newc. (in Mycol. Res. 104: 271. 2000);
Mentha ×smithiana R. A. Graham (in Watsonia 1: 89. 1949);
Polypodium vulgare nothosubsp. (or nsubsp.)
mantoniae (Rothm.) Schidlay (in Futák, Fl. Slov. 2: 225. 1966);
Salix ×capreola Andersson (in Kongl. Svenska Vetensk. Acad. Handl., n.s., 6(1): 71. 1867). (The putative or known parentage of these nothotaxa is found in Art. H.2 Ex. 1.)
H.3.2.
(VTE1Se)
A nothotaxon cannot be designated unless at least one parental taxon is known or can be postulated.
H.3.3.
(UHTnfe)
For purposes of homonymy and synonymy the multiplication sign × and the prefix “notho-” are disregarded.
Ex. 2.
(u0fj4n)
×Hordelymus Bachteev & Darevsk. (in Bot. Zhurn. (Moscow & Leningrad) 35: 191. 1950) (Elymus L. × Hordeum L.) is a later homonym of Hordelymus (Jess.) Harz (Landw. Samenk.: 1147. 1885).
i
Note 1.
(C5IJNl)
Taxa that are believed to be of hybrid origin need not be designated as nothotaxa.
Ex. 3.
(jHqMbN)
The true-breeding tetraploid raised from the artificial cross Digitalis grandiflora L. × D. purpurea L. may, if desired, be referred to as D. mertonensis B. H. Buxton & C. D. Darl. (in Nature 77: 94. 1931); Triticum aestivum L. (Sp. Pl.: 85. 1753), which provides the type of Triticum L., is treated as a species although it is not found in nature and its genome has been shown to be composed of those of several wild species; the taxon known as Phlox divaricata subsp. laphamii (A. W. Wood) Wherry (in Morris Arbor. Monogr. 3: 41. 1955) was believed by Levin (in Evolution 21: 92–108. 1967) to be a stabilized product of hybridization between P. divaricata L. subsp. divaricata and P. pilosa subsp. ozarkana Wherry; Rosa canina L. (l.c.: 492. 1753), a polyploid believed to be of ancient hybrid origin, is treated as a species.
(bmbWaq)
Recommendation H.3A
H.3A.1.
(u9qFNh)
In named hybrids, the multiplication sign × belongs with the name or epithet but is not actually part of it, and its placement should reflect that relation. The exact amount of space, if any, between the multiplication sign and the initial letter of the name or epithet should depend on what best serves readability.
i
Note 1.
(BwEVxa)
The multiplication sign × in a hybrid formula is always placed between, and separate from, the names of the parents.
H.3A.2.
(FqBiA8)
If the multiplication sign × is not available it should be approximated by the lower-case letter “x” (not italicized).
(uI1Pwh)
Circumscription of nothotaxa
H.4.1.
(ZZQlV2)
When all the parental taxa can be postulated or are known, a nothotaxon is circumscribed to include all individuals recognizably derived from the crossing of representatives of the stated parental taxa (i.e. not only the F1 but subsequent filial generations and also back-crosses and combinations of these). There can thus be only one correct name corresponding to a particular hybrid formula; this is the earliest legitimate name (Art. 6.5) at the appropriate rank (Art. H.5), and other names corresponding to the same hybrid formula are synonyms of it (but see Art. 52 Note 4).
Ex. 1.
(vqEjOI)
The names Oenothera ×drawertii Renner ex Rostański (in Acta Bot. Acad. Sci. Hung. 12: 341. 1966) and O. ×wienii Renner ex Rostański (in Fragm. Florist. Geobot. 23: 289. 1977) are both considered to apply to the hybrid O. biennis L. × O. villosa Thunb.; the types of the two nothospecific names are known to differ by a whole gene complex; nevertheless, the earlier name is the correct name, and the later name is treated as a synonym of it.
i
Note 1.
(GDoeiH)
Variation within nothospecies and infraspecific nothotaxa may be treated according to Art. H.12 or, if appropriate, according to the International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants.
(3JA8cz)
Ranks of nothotaxa
H.5.1.
(QbOTeZ)
The appropriate rank of a nothotaxon is that of the postulated or known parental taxa.
H.5.2.
(x8js0Z)
If the postulated or known parental taxa are at unequal ranks, the appropriate rank of the nothotaxon is the lowest of these ranks, unless the nothotaxon is the only one known for hybrids between the species to which the parental taxa of the nothotaxon belong.
i
Note 1.
(8sfyjs)
When a nothotaxon is designated by a name at a rank inappropriate to its hybrid formula, the name is incorrect in relation to that hybrid formula but may nevertheless be correct or may become correct later (see also Art. 52 Note 4).
Ex. 1.
(s7eQIf)
The combination Elymus ×laxus (Fr.) Melderis & D. C. McClint. (in Watsonia 14: 394. 1983), based on Triticum laxum Fr. (Novit. Fl. Suec. Mant. 3: 13. 1842), was published for hybrids with the formula E. farctus subsp. boreoatlanticus (Simonet & Guin.) Melderis × E. repens (L.) Gould, so that the combination is at a rank inappropriate to the hybrid formula. It is, however, the correct name applicable to all hybrids between E. farctus (Viv.) Melderis and E. repens.
Ex. 2.
(vJ6sjg)
Radcliffe-Smith published the nothospecific name Euphorbia ×cornubiensis Radcl.-Sm. (in Kew Bull. 40: 445. 1985) for E. amygdaloides L. × E. characias subsp. wulfenii (W. D. J. Koch) Radcl.-Sm., but the correct nothospecific name for all hybrids between E. amygdaloides and E. characias L. is E. ×martini Rouy (Ill. Pl. Eur. Rar.: 107. 1900); later, Radcliffe-Smith published the appropriate combination E. ×martini nothosubsp. cornubiensis (Radcl.-Sm.) Radcl.-Sm. (in Taxon 35: 349. 1986). However, the name E. ×cornubiensis is potentially correct for hybrids with the formula E. amygdaloides × E. wulfenii W. D. J. Koch.
Ex. 3.
(vqAeWG)
Aloe ×engelbrechtii Gideon F. Sm. & Figueiredo (in Phytotaxa 464: 253. 2020) was published for the nothospecies with A. arborescens Mill. and A. hardyi Glen as parents. The rank of nothospecies is appropriate because both parents are species. The appropriate rank for the name of a hybrid between A. arborescens subsp. mzimnyati van Jaarsv. & A. E. van Wyk and A. hardyi would be nothosubspecies. Valid publication of the name of this nothosubspecies under A. ×engelbrechtii would establish an autonym that would apply to A. arborescens subsp. arborescens × A. hardyi.
(6C9cxg)
Recommendation H.5A
H.5A.1.
(ehjGUK)
When publishing a name of a new nothotaxon at the rank of species or below, authors should provide any available information on the taxonomic identity, at lower ranks, of the known or postulated parents of the type of the name.
(71exth)
Nothogeneric names and condensed formulae
H.6.1.
(tBV4qb)
A nothogeneric name (i.e. the name at generic rank for a hybrid between representatives of two or more genera) is a condensed formula or is equivalent to a condensed formula (but see Art. 11.9 and 54.1(c)).
i
Note 1.
(LgWdfV)
The provisions for nothogeneric names do not apply to graft hybrids, which are dealt with in the International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants (but see Art. 54.1(c)).
H.6.2.
(Pqm2WO)
The nothogeneric name of a bigeneric hybrid is a condensed formula in which the names adopted for the parental genera are combined into a single word, using the first part or the whole of one, the last part or the whole of the other (but not the whole of both) and, optionally, a connecting vowel.
Ex. 1.
(LQSnRP)
×Agropogon P. Fourn. (Quatre Fl. France: 50. 1934) (Agrostis L. × Polypogon Desf.); ×Gymnanacamptis Asch. & Graebn. (Syn. Mitteleur. Fl. 3: 854. 1907) (Anacamptis Rich. × Gymnadenia R. Br.); ×Cupressocyparis Dallim. (Hand-List Conif., Roy. Bot. Gard., Kew, ed. 4: 37. 1938) (Chamaecyparis Spach × Cupressus L.); ×Seleniphyllum G. D. Rowley (in Backeberg, Cactaceae 6: 3557. 1962) (Epiphyllum Haw. × Selenicereus (A. Berger) Britton & Rose).
Ex. 2.
(0qLT0g)
×Amarcrinum Coutts (in Gard. Chron., ser. 3, 78: 411. 1925) is correct for Amaryllis L. × Crinum L., not “×Crindonna”. The latter formula was proposed by Ragionieri (in Gard. Chron., ser. 3, 69: 32. 1921) for the same nothogenus, but was formed from the generic name adopted for one parent (Crinum) and a synonym (Belladonna Sweet) of the generic name adopted for the other (Amaryllis). Because it is contrary to Art. H.6, it is not validly published under Art. 32.1(c).
Ex. 3.
(qsAwM9)
The name ×Leucadenia Schltr. (in Repert. Spec. Nov. Regni Veg. 16: 290. 1919) is correct for Leucorchis E. Mey. × Gymnadenia R. Br., but if the generic name Pseudorchis Ség. is adopted instead of Leucorchis, ×Pseudadenia P. F. Hunt (in Orchid Rev. 79: 141. 1971) is correct.
Ex. 4.
(MFPnYC)
Boivin (in Naturaliste Canad. 94: 526. 1967) published ×Maltea for what he considered to be the intergeneric hybrid Phippsia (Trin.) R. Br. × Puccinellia Parl. Because this is not a condensed formula, the name cannot be used for that intergeneric hybrid, for which the correct name is ×Pucciphippsia Tzvelev (in Novosti Sist. Vyssh. Rast. 8: 76. 1971). Maltea B. Boivin is nevertheless a validly published generic name, because Boivin provided a Latin description and designated a type, and may be correct if its type is not treated as belonging to a nothogenus.
H.6.3.
(H3seMG)
The nothogeneric name of an intergeneric hybrid derived from four or more genera is formed from a personal name to which is added the termination -ara, except when the personal name already ends with -a in which case the termination -ra is added; no such name may exceed eight syllables. Such a name is equivalent to a condensed formula.
Ex. 5.
(Mjv48E)
×Beallara Moir (in Orchid Rev. 78(929): New Orch. Hybr. [1, 3]. 1970) commemorating J. Ferguson Beall (
Brassia R. Br. ×
Cochlioda Lindl. ×
Miltonia Lindl. ×
Odontoglossum Kunth);
×Cogniauxara Garay & H. R. Sweet (see Art. H.8 Ex. 3) commemorating Célestin A. Cogniaux (
Arachnis Blume ×
Euanthe Schltr. ×
Renanthera Lour. ×
Vanda W. Jones ex R. Br.);
×Derosara Hort. (in Orchid. Rev. 104(1209): 166. 1996,
‘Derosaara’) commemorating Victor De Rosa (
Aspasia Lindl. ×
Odontoglossum Kunth ×
Miltonia Lindl. ×
Brassia R. Br.);
×Hayatara J. M. H. Shaw (in Sander’s List Orchid Hybrids Addendum 2002–2004: xxxv. 2005,
‘Hayataara’) commemorating Bunzô Hayata (
Brassavola R. Br. ×
Cattleya Lindl. ×
Laelia Lindl. ×
Myrmecophila Rolfe ×
Pseudolaelia Porto & Brade).
H.6.4.
(DVo1Kc)
The nothogeneric name of a trigeneric hybrid is either:
(a) a condensed formula in which the three names adopted for the parental genera are combined into a single word not exceeding eight syllables, using the whole or first part of one, followed by the whole or any part of another, followed by the whole or last part of the third (but not the whole of all three) and, optionally, one or two connecting vowels; or
(b) a name formed like that of a nothogenus derived from four or more genera, i.e. from a personal name to which is added the termination -ara, except when the personal name already ends with -a in which case the termination -ra is added.
Ex. 6.
(Fb5XBk)
(a) ×Sophrolaeliocattleya Hurst (in J. Roy. Hort. Soc. 21: 468. 1898) (Cattleya Lindl. × Laelia Lindl. × Sophronitis Lindl.); ×Rodrettiopsis Moir (in Orchid Rev. 84: ix. 1976) (Comparettia Poepp. & Endl. × Ionopsis Kunth × Rodriguezia Ruiz & Pav.).
Ex. 7.
(FB0nrM)
(b)
×Holttumara Holttum (see Art. H.8 Ex. 3) commemorating Richard E. Holttum (
Arachnis Blume ×
Renanthera Lour. ×
Vanda W. Jones ex R. Br.);
×Kagawara Kagawa & Wreford (Orchid Rev. 76: New Orch. Hybr. [2, 4]. 1968) commemorating Hiroshi Kagawa (
Ascocentrum J. J. Sm. ×
Renanthera ×
Vanda).
i
Note 2.
(duTeVK)
The termination -ara does not necessarily indicate the name of a nothogenus derived from three or more genera.
Ex. 8.
(SeaJaQ)
Kumara Medik. (in Theodora 69: t. 4. 1786) is not a nothogeneric name. ×Gonimara Gideon F. Sm. & Molteno (in Bradleya 36: 54. 2018) was published for bigeneric hybrids between Gonialoe (Baker) Boatwr. & J. C. Manning and Kumara Medik.
H.6.5.
(lcCXPB)
The use of a hyphen instead of or in addition to a connecting vowel in a nothogeneric name that is a condensed formula is treated as an error to be corrected by deletion of the hyphen(s) (but see Art. 20.3 for non-hybrid generic names; see also Art. 60.13 for names of fossil-genera).
Ex. 9.
(i0kBTA)
The nothogeneric name ×Anthematricaria Asch. (in Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges. 9: (99). 1892), proposed for bigeneric hybrids with the parentage Anthemis L. × Matricaria L., was originally published as ‘Anthe-Matricaria’; ×Brassocattleya Rolfe (in Gard. Chron., ser. 3, 5: 438. 1889), proposed for bigeneric hybrids with the parentage Brassavola R. Br. × Cattleya Lindl., was originally published as ‘Brasso-Cattleya’; ×Brassolaeliacattleya J. G. Fowler (in Gard. Chron., ser. 3, 41: 290. 1907), proposed for trigeneric hybrids with the parentage Brassavola × Cattleya × Laelia Lindl., was originally published as ‘Brasso-Laelia-Cattleya’; ×Sophrolaeliocattleya Hurst (in J. Roy. Hort. Soc. 21: 468. 1898), proposed for trigeneric hybrids with the parentage Cattleya × Laelia × Sophronitis Lindl., was originally published as ‘Sophro-Laelio-Cattleya’.
(tPSNAm)
Recommendation H.6A
H.6A.1.
(q7fNDB)
When a nothogeneric name is formed from a personal name by adding the termination -ara, that person should preferably be a collector, grower, or student of the group.
(cJKunH)
Hybrids between subdivisions of genera
H.7.1.
(afODSY)
The name of a nothotaxon that is a hybrid between subdivisions of a genus is a combination of an epithet, which is a condensed formula formed in the same way as a nothogeneric name (Art. H.6.2–H.6.4), with the name of the genus.
Ex. 1.
(DlkTQs)
Ptilostemon nothosect. Platon Greuter (in Boissiera 22: 159. 1973) comprises hybrids between P. sect. Platyrhaphium Greuter and P. Cass. sect. Ptilostemon. Ptilostemon nothosect. Plinia Greuter (l.c.: 158. 1973) comprises hybrids between P. sect. Cassinia Greuter and P. sect. Platyrhaphium.
(T0jhOU)
Parentage, nothogeneric names, and condensed formulae
H.8.1.
(ifef6P)
When the name or the epithet in the name of a nothotaxon is a condensed formula (Art. H.6 and H.7), the parental names used in its formation must be those that are correct for the particular circumscription, position, and rank accepted for the parental taxa.
Ex. 1.
(UfhCM2)
If the genus Triticum L. is interpreted on taxonomic grounds as including Triticum (s. str.) and Agropyron Gaertn., and the genus Hordeum L. as including Hordeum (s. str.) and Elymus L., then hybrids between Agropyron and Elymus as well as between Triticum (s. str.) and Hordeum (s. str.) are placed in the same nothogenus, ×Tritordeum Asch. & Graebn. (Syn. Mitteleur. Fl. 2(1): 748. 1902). If, however, Agropyron is treated as a genus separate from Triticum, hybrids between Agropyron and Hordeum (s. str. or s. l.) are placed in the nothogenus ×Agrohordeum E. G. Camus ex A. Camus (in Bull. Mus. Natl. Hist. Nat. 33: 537. 1927). Similarly, if Elymus is treated as a genus separate from Hordeum, hybrids between Elymus and Triticum (s. str. or s. l.) are placed in the nothogenus ×Elymotriticum P. Fourn. (Quatre Fl. France: 88. 1935). If both Agropyron and Elymus are given generic rank, hybrids between them are placed in the nothogenus ×Agroelymus E. G. Camus ex A. Camus (l.c.: 538. 1927); ×Tritordeum is then restricted to hybrids between Hordeum (s. str.) and Triticum (s. str.), and hybrids between Elymus and Hordeum are placed in ×Elyhordeum Mansf. ex Tsitsin & Petrova (in Züchter 25: 164. 1955), replacing ×Hordelymus Bachteev & Darevsk. (in Bot. Zhurn. (Moscow & Leningrad) 35: 191. 1950) non Hordelymus (Jess.) Harz (Landw. Samenk.: 1147. 1885).
Ex. 2.
(xVge4N)
When Orchis fuchsii Druce was renamed Dactylorhiza fuchsii (Druce) Soó, the name for its hybrid with Coeloglossum viride (L.) Hartm., ×Orchicoeloglossum mixtum Asch. & Graebn. (Syn. Mitteleur. Fl. 3: 847. 1907), had to be changed to ×Dactyloglossum mixtum (Asch. & Graebn.) Rauschert (in Feddes Repert. 79: 413. 1969).
H.8.2.
(pjLIhO)
Names ending in -ara for nothogenera, which are equivalent to condensed formulae (Art. H.6.3 and H.6.4(b)), are applicable only to hybrids that are accepted taxonomically as derived from the parents named.
Ex. 3.
(12JjHm)
If Euanthe Schltr. is recognized as a distinct genus, hybrids simultaneously involving its only species, E. sanderiana (Rchb.) Schltr., and the three genera Arachnis Blume, Renanthera Lour., and Vanda W. Jones ex R. Br. must be placed in ×Cogniauxara Garay & H. R. Sweet (in Bot. Mus. Leafl. 21: 156. 1966); if, on the other hand, E. sanderiana is included in Vanda, the same hybrids are placed in ×Holttumara Holttum (in Malayan Orchid Rev. 5: 75. 1958) (Arachnis × Renanthera × Vanda).
(Lxv7T8)
Valid publication of names of nothogenera and their subdivisions
H.9.1.
(cSncu2)
To be validly published, the name of a nothogenus or a nothotaxon at the rank of a subdivision of a genus (Art. H.6 and H.7) must be effectively published (Art. 29–31) with a statement of the names of the parental genera or subdivisions of genera, but no description or diagnosis is necessary, whether in Latin, English, or any other language.
Ex. 1.
(NwK9DX)
Validly published names: ×Philageria Mast. (in Gard. Chron. 1872: 358. 1872), published with a statement of parentage, Lapageria Ruiz & Pav. × Philesia Comm. ex Juss.; Eryngium nothosect. Alpestria Burdet & Miège (pro sect.) (in Candollea 23: 116. 1968), published with a statement of parentage, E. sect. Alpina H. Wolff × E. sect. Campestria H. Wolff; ×Agrohordeum E. G. Camus ex A. Camus (in Bull. Mus. Natl. Hist. Nat. 33: 537. 1927), published with a statement of parentage, Agropyron Gaertn. × Hordeum L.; and its later synonym ×Hordeopyron Simonet (in Compt. Rend. Hebd. Séances Acad. Sci. 201: 1212. 1935, ‘Hordeopyrum’; see Art. 32.2), published with an identical statement of parentage.
i
Note 1.
(kGJggu)
Because the names of nothogenera and nothotaxa at the rank of a subdivision of a genus are condensed formulae or equivalent to such, they do not have types.
Ex. 2.
(FauyYR)
The name ×Ericalluna Krüssm. (in Deutsche Baumschule 12: 154. 1960) was published for plants that were thought to be the product of the cross Calluna vulgaris (L.) Hull × Erica cinerea L. If these plants are considered not to be hybrids but variants of E. cinerea, the name ×Ericalluna Krüssm. remains available for use should known or postulated hybrids of Calluna Salisb. × Erica L. be produced.
Ex. 3.
(AHH356)
×Arabidobrassica Gleba & Fr. Hoffm. (in Naturwissenschaften 66: 548. 1979), a nothogeneric name that was validly published with a statement of parentage for the result of somatic hybridization by protoplast fusion of Arabidopsis thaliana (L.) Heynh. with Brassica campestris L., is also available for intergeneric hybrids resulting from normal crosses between Arabidopsis Heynh. and Brassica L., should any be produced.
i
Note 2.
(EH5oho)
A statement of the names of the parental species of a nothogenus, or of the names of the parental species of any of its included taxa, is sufficient to validly publish the name of a nothogenus, if the full names of all parental genera appear among the species names, when there is no separate statement of the names of the parental genera.
Ex. 4.
(z3X5Ey)
When
Kalanchoe Adans. (Fam. Pl. 2: 248. 1763) and
Bryophyllum Salisb. (Parad. Lond.: ad t. 3. 1805) are treated as two separate genera, the nothogeneric name
×Bryokalanchoe Resende (in Bol. Soc. Portug. Ci. Nat., ser. 2, 6: 242. 1956) applies to hybrids between representatives of the two genera. Resende (l.c.: 241. 1956) provided the names of the species he used when making the intergeneric crosses.
i
Note 3.
(pLgOe1)
Names published merely in anticipation of the existence of a hybrid are not validly published under Art. 36.1(a).
(N0TmJP)
Valid publication of names of nothospecies and infraspecific nothotaxa
H.10.1.
(h2T6Ez)
Names of nothotaxa at the rank of species or below must conform with:
(a) the provisions of the Code outside of Chapter H applicable to names at the same ranks (see Art. 32.4); and
(b) the provisions in Art. H.3.
Infringements of Art. H.3.1 are treated as errors to be corrected (see also Art. 11.9).
Ex. 1.
(clul9C)
The nothospecific name Melampsora ×columbiana G. Newc. (in Mycol. Res. 104: 271. 2000) was validly published, with a Latin description and designation of a holotype, for the hybrid between M. medusae Thüm. and M. occidentalis H. S. Jacks.
i
Note 1.
(RiltBl)
Taxa previously published as species or infraspecific taxa that are later considered to be nothotaxa may be indicated as such, without change of rank, in conformity with Art. 3 and 4 and by the application of Art. 50 (which also operates in the reverse direction).
H.10.2.
(ktcVyk)
The following are considered to be formulae and not true epithets: designations consisting of the epithets of the names of the parents combined in unaltered form by a hyphen, or with only the termination of one epithet changed, or consisting of the specific epithet of the name of one parent combined with the generic name of the other (with or without change of termination).
Ex. 2.
(3aRhZw)
The designation “Potentilla atrosanguinea-pedata” published by Maund (in Bot. Gard. 5: No. 385, t. 97. 1833) is considered to be a formula meaning P. atrosanguinea Lodd. ex D. Don × P. pedata Nestl.
Ex. 3.
(IyIRXe)
“Verbascum nigro-lychnitis” (Schiede, Pl. Hybr.: 40. 1825) is considered to be a formula meaning V. lychnitis L. × V. nigrum L.; the correct binary name for this hybrid is V. ×schiedeanum W. D. J. Koch (Syn. Fl. Germ. Helv., ed. 2: 592. 1844).
Ex. 4.
(ZioUoW)
In Acaena ×anserovina Orchard (in Trans. Roy. Soc. South Australia 93: 104. 1969) (A. anserinifolia (J. R. Forst. & G. Forst.) J. Armstr. × A. ovina A. Cunn.) the epithet (contrary to Rec. H.10A) combines the first part of the first and the whole of the second epithet in the names of the parental species; because more than the termination of the first epithet is omitted, anserovina is a true epithet.
Ex. 5.
(XANjsJ)
In Micromeria ×benthamineolens Svent. (Index Seminum Hortus Acclim. Pl. Arautap.: 48. 1969) (M. benthamii Webb & Berthel. × M. pineolens Svent.) the epithet (contrary to Rec. H.10A) combines the first part of the first and the second part of the second epithet in the names of the parental species; because neither epithet is unaltered, benthamineolens is a true epithet.
i
Note 2.
(1w4kH5)
Because the name of a nothotaxon at the rank of species or below has a type, statements of parentage play a secondary part in determining the application of the name.
Ex. 6.
(NOnjOt)
Quercus ×deamii Trel. (in Mem. Natl. Acad. Sci. 20: 14. 1924) when described was considered to be the cross Q. alba L. × Q. muehlenbergii Engelm. However, progeny grown from acorns of the tree from which the type originated led Bartlett to conclude that the parents were in fact Q. macrocarpa Michx. and Q. muehlenbergii. If this conclusion is accepted, the name Q. ×deamii applies to Q. macrocarpa × Q. muehlenbergii, and not to Q. alba × Q. muehlenbergii.
(cQN512)
Recommendation H.10A
H.10A.1.
(VDEWiP)
In forming epithets for names of nothotaxa at the rank of species and below, authors should avoid combining parts of the epithets of the names of the parents.
(YwxWAK)
Recommendation H.10B
H.10B.1.
(YEmMAB)
When contemplating the publication of names for hybrids between named infraspecific taxa, authors should carefully consider whether these names are really needed, taking into account that formulae, though more cumbersome, are more informative.
(Ma2QgD)
Nothotaxa with parents belonging to different higher-ranked taxa
H.11.1.
(I0y5Tp)
The name of a nothospecies of which the postulated or known parental species belong to different genera is a combination of a nothogeneric name with a nothospecific epithet.
Ex. 1.
(lKvPNr)
×Heucherella tiarelloides (Lemoine & É. Lemoine) H. R. Wehrh. is considered to have originated from the cross between a garden hybrid of Heuchera L. and Tiarella cordifolia L. (see Stearn in Bot. Mag. 165: ad t. 31. 1948). Its basionym, Heuchera ×tiarelloides Lemoine & É. Lemoine (in Catalogue (Lemoine) 182: 3. 1912), is therefore incorrect.
H.11.2.
(mMmxUd)
The final epithet in the name of an infraspecific nothotaxon of which the postulated or known parental taxa are assigned to different species may be placed under the correct name of the corresponding nothospecies (but see Rec. H.10B).
Ex. 2.
(31D0QS)
Mentha ×piperita L. nothosubsp. piperita (M. aquatica L. × M. spicata L. subsp. spicata); M. ×piperita nothosubsp. pyramidalis (Ten.) Harley (in Kew Bull. 37: 604. 1983) (M. aquatica L. × M. spicata subsp. tomentosa (Briq.) Harley).
(KmlewO)
Subordinate taxa within nothospecies
H.12.1.
(fTeLFJ)
Subordinate taxa within nothospecies may be recognized without an obligation to specify parental taxa at the subordinate rank. In this case non-hybrid infraspecific categories at the appropriate rank are used.
Ex. 1.
(Zt8sLr)
Mentha ×piperita f. hirsuta Sole; Populus ×canadensis var. serotina (R. Hartig) Rehder and P. ×canadensis var. marilandica (Poir.) Rehder (see also Art. H.4 Note 1).
i
Note 1.
(DVnIsI)
Art. H.4 and H.5, governing the circumscription and appropriate rank of hybrid taxa, do not apply when there is no statement of parentage.
i
Note 2.
(PwGvSZ)
Art. H.11.2 and H.12.1 cannot both be applied simultaneously at the same infraspecific rank.
H.12.2.
(ldS81G)
Names published at the rank of nothomorph1 are treated as having been published as names of varieties (see Art. 50).
(quc8bm)
Provisions for governance of the
Code(5jXQaz)
General provisions for governance of the
Code1.1.
(zEQEoU)
The International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants is governed by its users, who are represented by members of a Nomenclature Section of an International Botanical Congress acting under the authority of that Congress and, between such Congresses, by the Permanent Nomenclature Committees and any Special-purpose Committees.
1.2.
(Q69e1p)
The Code may be modified only by action of a plenary session of an International Botanical Congress on a resolution moved by the Nomenclature Section of that Congress.
1.3.
(x63u8N)
In the event that there should not be another International Botanical Congress, authority for the International Code of Nomenclature for algae, fungi, and plants shall be transferred to the International Union of Biological Sciences or to an organization at that time corresponding to it. The General Committee is empowered to define the mechanism to achieve this.
1.4.
(pMuJ27)
The Code is provided with logistical and financial support by the International Association for Plant Taxonomy, which liaises with the Permanent Nomenclature Committees and the Bureau of Nomenclature. The nomenclatural publications1 required by Div. III are published as specified by the General Committee (currently in the journal Taxon, except for proposals to amend the Code relating solely to names of organisms treated as fungi and proposals to protect or reject names under Art. F.2 or F.7, submitted as lists, which are published in the journal IMA Fungus).
1.5.
(DYp2RI)
The Provisions for governance of the Code (Div. III) apply to the edition of the Code of which they form a part. These Provisions are not retroactive (see Pre. 7).
(I9264J)
Proposals to amend the
Code2.1.
(kaOS8Z)
Proposals concerning the Preamble, Divisions I–III, and the Glossary are submitted by publication (see Prov. 1.4) to the Nomenclature Section of an International Botanical Congress.
2.2.
(wq85Mm)
Proposals concerning Appendices I–VII, i.e. proposals to conserve, protect, or reject names (Art. 14.12, 56.2, F.2.1, and F.7.1), proposals to suppress works (Art. 34.1), and requests for decisions (Art. 38.5 and 53.4), are submitted by publication (see Prov. 1.4) to the General Committee.
2.3.
(aLRgNi)
At least three years before an International Botanical Congress, the Rapporteur-général publishes an announcement that proposals to amend the Code may be published between specified dates.
2.4.
(Gyhza5)
Approximately six months before an International Botanical Congress, a synopsis of proposals to amend the Code is published. It is compiled by the Rapporteur-général and Vice-rapporteur, includes their comments on the proposals, and may include opinions of the Permanent Nomenclature Committees on certain proposals.
2.5.
(mmAui4)
A guiding vote on proposals to amend the Code is organized by the Bureau of Nomenclature in conjunction with the International Association for Plant Taxonomy (IAPT) to coincide with the publication of the synopsis of proposals. No accumulation or transfer of votes is permissible in this vote. The following persons are entitled to vote:
(a) individual members of the IAPT; and
(b) authors of proposals to amend the Code; and
(c) members of the Permanent Nomenclature Committees.
2.6.
(3WDbez)
The purpose of the guiding vote is to advise the Nomenclature Section of the International Botanical Congress of the level of support for proposals to amend the Code. The results of the vote and any Permanent Nomenclature Committee opinions are provided at the Nomenclature Section (see also Prov. 5.5).
(QeqBxq)
Institutional votes
3.1.
(wIp9wl)
Before an International Botanical Congress, the Committee on Institutional Votes updates the list of institutions from the previous Congress and allocates one vote to each institution (see Prov. 5.9(b)). The list must be approved by the General Committee and published (see Prov. 1.4) before the Congress. No single institution, even in the broad sense of the term (e.g. mycological and botanical divisions together), is entitled to more than one vote.
3.2.
(lFcuFs)
Before an International Botanical Congress, any institution desiring to vote in the Nomenclature Section and not listed as having been allocated a vote in the previous Nomenclature Section should notify the Rapporteur-général of its wish to be allocated a vote and provide relevant information regarding its current level of taxonomic activity (e.g. active staff, collections, publications) and show that it is registered in an online, open-access international or regional index of herbaria, collections, or institutions.
3.3.
(Qnmu7s)
An institution wishing to exercise its vote, as allocated in the published list (Prov. 3.1), must provide its official written authorization to be presented at the Nomenclature Section by its delegate (Prov. 5.9(b)).
3.4.
(dHJaNJ)
A delegate who is a member of an institution that has not previously applied for, or been allocated, a vote may apply in person for one institutional vote at the Nomenclature Section.
(f9DFE0)
Nomenclature Section
4.1.
(rFly81)
The Nomenclature Section is part of an International Botanical Congress and meets prior to a plenary session of the Congress.
4.2.
(9QB9Cf)
Registration for the Nomenclature Section is through the International Botanical Congress. Only registered members of the Nomenclature Section are entitled to vote at the Nomenclature Section.
4.3.
(Tcwbft)
The Nomenclature Section has the following functions:
(a) Approves the previous Code as published as a basis for discussion by the Section.
(b) Decides on proposals to amend the Code.
(c) Appoints ad hoc committees to consider specific questions and report back to the Section.
(d) Authorizes Special-purpose Committees, with a specific mandate, to be appointed by the General Committee and report back to the Nomenclature Section of the next Congress.
(e) Elects the ordinary members of the Permanent Nomenclature Committees (but see Prov. 8.5(e) and (f)).
(f) Elects the Rapporteur-général for the next Congress.
(g) Receives the reports of the Permanent Nomenclature Committees and Special-purpose Committees.
(h) Decides on the recommendations of the General Committee.
4.4.
(9OPBI5)
The decisions and appointments of the Nomenclature Section become binding upon their acceptance by a subsequent plenary session of the same International Botanical Congress acting on a resolution moved by the Nomenclature Section (see Prov. 1.2).
4.5.
(jpVZ7a)
The Bureau of Nomenclature of the International Botanical Congress comprises the following officers: President of the Nomenclature Section; up to five Vice-presidents; the Rapporteur-général; the Vice-rapporteur; one or more Recorders. The Bureau of Nomenclature defines the sequence and timing of debates; appoints Tellers to collect and count voting cards in the event of a card vote (see Prov. 5.10); and advises the President on procedural matters.
4.6.
(b09AIc)
The President of the Nomenclature Section is elected by the General Committee prior to the Congress. The President chairs the debates and is responsible for their harmony and timely conclusion; recognizes and silences speakers; may end a debate; decides on procedural matters not covered in Div. III; and is authorized to move a resolution on behalf of the Nomenclature Section at a plenary session of the same International Botanical Congress that the decisions and appointments of the Nomenclature Section be approved.
4.7.
(66117f)
The Vice-presidents are appointed by the Bureau of Nomenclature, either in advance of the International Botanical Congress or from those present at the Nomenclature Section. A Vice-president serves in place of the President, if and when requested.
4.8.
(afTcOg)
The Rapporteur-général is elected by the previous International Botanical Congress. The Rapporteur-général is responsible for: presentation of nomenclature proposals to the subsequent Congress; general duties in connection with the editing of the Code resulting from that Congress; and deposition of unpublished relevant material in the nomenclature archives of the International Association for Plant Taxonomy.
4.9.
(mYek3O)
The Vice-rapporteur is appointed by the Rapporteur-général and approved by the General Committee no later than three years before the Congress. The Vice-rapporteur assists and, if necessary, serves in place of the Rapporteur-général.
4.10.
(b1kDLG)
Recorders are appointed by the Organizing Committee of the International Botanical Congress in consultation with the Rapporteur-général. Recorders are responsible for all local facilities needed by the Nomenclature Section, such as the venue and its equipment, and in particular for the detailed recording of the proceedings of the Section and for facilitating the voting.
4.11.
(amhlVW)
The Nominating Committee comprises members who should preferably be unavailable to serve on the Permanent Nomenclature Committees or as Rapporteur-général. They are proposed by the President of the Nomenclature Section in consultation with the other members of the Bureau of Nomenclature and are elected by the Nomenclature Section.
4.12.
(G6RkVO)
The Nominating Committee is charged with preparing lists of candidates to serve on the Permanent Nomenclature Committees (except the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi and the Editorial Committee for Fungi; see Prov. 4.13), in consultation with the current secretaries of those committees, and proposing the Rapporteur-général for the next International Botanical Congress. The nominations of the Nominating Committee are subject to approval by the Nomenclature Section.
4.13.
(6c0aa0)
The Nominating Committee of the Fungal Nomenclature Session (Prov. 8.1) is charged with preparing lists of candidates to serve on the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi, in consultation with the current Secretary of that Committee, and on the Editorial Committee for Fungi, and proposing the Secretary of the Fungal Nomenclature Bureau for the next International Mycological Congress. The nominations of the Nominating Committee of the Fungal Nomenclature Session are subject to approval by the Fungal Nomenclature Session.
Recommendation 1.
(hA9NJT)
The Nominating Committee of the Nomenclature Section should represent the different taxonomic groups covered by the
Code and both Nominating Committees, so far as is practicable, should be geographically balanced.
Recommendation 2.
(kJxif3)
Individuals or groups should be able to observe the Nomenclature Section of an International Botanical Congress online on the World Wide Web. The Organizing Committee of the International Botanical Congress in consultation with the Bureau of Nomenclature should be responsible for ensuring that this is implemented.
(Xb2kxh)
Procedures and voting at the Nomenclature Section
5.1.
(z7YxqP)
A qualified majority (at least 60%) of votes cast is required for the following decisions:
(a) Accepting a proposal to amend the Code.
(b) Referring items to the Editorial Committee.
(c) Accepting a motion to end discussion and proceed to a vote (to “call the question”).
(d) Accepting a motion to set a time limit for a debate.
5.2.
(Pvp5An)
A simple majority (more than 50%) of votes cast is required for all other decisions, including the following:
(a) Electing the Nominating Committee for the Nomenclature Section.
(b) Accepting the Code that arose from the previous International Botanical Congress as the basis for discussion at the Nomenclature Section.
(c) Choosing between two alternative proposals.
(d) Accepting an amendment to a proposal.
(e) Establishing an ad hoc committee.
(f) Establishing and referring items to a Special-purpose Committee.
(g) Accepting recommendations of the General Committee.
(h) Approving the nominations made by the Nominating Committee.
5.3.
(MYxFtw)
When a report of the General Committee contains more than one recommendation, the Nomenclature Section may vote separately on an individual recommendation if such a procedure is proposed by a member of the Section, supported (seconded) by five other members (see Prov. 5.7), and approved by a simple majority (more than 50%) of the Section.
5.4.
(BMWTlY)
When a vote to accept a General Committee recommendation does not achieve the required majority (Prov. 5.2(g)), that recommendation is cancelled, and the matter is referred back to the General Committee. Retention or rejection of a name, suppression of a work, or a binding decision on valid publication or homonymy is no longer authorized (Art. 14.15, 34.2, 38.5, 53.4, and 56.3).
5.5.
(7ogsyP)
Any proposal to amend the Code that receives 75% or more “no” votes in the preliminary guiding vote is automatically rejected at the Nomenclature Section unless a proposal to discuss it is moved by a member of the Section and supported (seconded) by five other members.
5.6.
(alAe5v)
Any proposal to amend the Code that concerns only Examples (excluding voted Examples) or the Glossary is automatically referred to the Editorial Committee unless a proposal to discuss it is moved by a member of the Section and supported (seconded) by five other members (but see Prov. 5.5).
5.7.
(NqMqOP)
A new proposal to amend the Code (i.e. one not previously published) or an amendment to a proposal to amend the Code may be introduced at the Nomenclature Section by a member of the Section only when supported (seconded) by five other members.
5.8.
(jd86Ag)
A member of the Nomenclature Section may propose a friendly amendment to a proposal to amend the Code; if accepted by the original proposer(s), such an amendment does not require the support of other members (seconders).
5.9.
(4O8IIy)
There are two kinds of votes at the Nomenclature Section:
(a) Personal votes. Each member of the Section has one personal vote. No accumulation or transfer of personal votes is permissible.
(b) Institutional votes (see Prov. 3). An institution may authorize in writing any member of the Section as a delegate to carry its one institutional vote.
A member of the Section may carry the institutional votes of more than one institution. No single person is allowed more than 15 votes, including personal vote and institutional votes.
5.10.
(lZQWNY)
A card vote requires members of the Nomenclature Section to deposit anonymous cards printed to indicate the kind of votes (personal or institutional), which are counted by the Tellers (see Prov. 4.5). A card vote may be conducted when the required majority cannot be detected by other means or may be requested in advance of the vote by at least five members.
(fqfowt)
After an International Botanical Congress
6.1.
(IMeJwq)
Certain publications, which may be electronic or printed or both, appear as soon as feasible after an International Botanical Congress, not necessarily in this sequence:
(a) The Congress-approved decisions and elections of the Nomenclature Section including the results (if not published before the Congress) of the preliminary guiding vote.
(b) The announcement of Special-purpose Committees and their membership.
(c) The new edition of the Code, including the Glossary.
(d) The Appendices of the Code (App. I–VII).
(e) A transcript of the Nomenclature Section.
(vKg8sQ)
Permanent Nomenclature Committees
7.1.
(7jPrVY)
There are ten Permanent Nomenclature Committees, including five specialist committees (clauses (f)–(j)):
(a) General Committee
(b) Editorial Committee
(c) Editorial Committee for Fungi
(d) Committee on Institutional Votes
(e) Registration Committee
(f) Nomenclature Committee for Vascular Plants
(g) Nomenclature Committee for Bryophytes
(h) Nomenclature Committee for Fungi
(i) Nomenclature Committee for Algae
(j) Nomenclature Committee for Fossils.
7.2.
(TFmuZE)
Members of the Permanent Nomenclature Committees are elected by an International Botanical Congress (except where indicated otherwise). The committees have power to elect officers as desired, to fill vacancies, and to establish temporary subcommittees in consultation with the General Committee.
7.3.
(ro7Hzy)
The General Committee has, in addition to its ordinary (elected) members, the following ex-officio members: the secretaries of the five specialist committees (Prov. 7.1(f)–(j)), the Rapporteur-général, the Vice-rapporteur, and the President and Secretary-general of the International Association for Plant Taxonomy.
7.4.
(fP4tVo)
The Editorial Committee comprises individuals who should preferably have been present at the Nomenclature Section of the relevant International Botanical Congress and includes at least one specialist in each of vascular plants, bryophytes, fungi, algae, and fossils and at least one individual nominated by the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi who attended the Fungal Nomenclature Session of the relevant International Mycological Congress; the Rapporteur-général and Vice-rapporteur of the relevant International Botanical Congress serve as Chair and Secretary, respectively, of the Editorial Committee.
7.5.
(7yt8Uy)
The Editorial Committee for Fungi is elected by an International Mycological Congress and comprises individuals who should preferably have been present at the Fungal Nomenclature Session of the relevant International Mycological Congress and includes the Chair and Secretary of the Editorial Committee for this Code. The Secretary and Deputy Secretary of the Fungal Nomenclature Session of the relevant International Mycological Congress serve as Chair and Secretary, respectively, of the Editorial Committee for Fungi.
7.6.
(JftrNn)
The Committee on Institutional Votes comprises six members, each to represent a different continent, plus the Rapporteur-général, who serves as its chair, plus any additional members that the Committee considers are required.
7.7.
(OYNWZ2)
The Registration Committee includes at least five members appointed by the Nomenclature Section selected, in part, to ensure geographical balance, and representatives nominated by:
(a) the other Permanent Nomenclature Committees;
(b) prospective or functioning nomenclatural repositories;
(c) the International Association for Plant Taxonomy;
(d) the International Association of Bryologists;
(e) the International Federation of Palynological Societies;
(f) the International Mycological Association;
(g) the International Organisation of Palaeobotany;
(h) the International Phycological Society.
7.8.
(3tKSA7)
Each specialist committee includes the Rapporteur-général, the Vice-rapporteur, and the Secretary of the General Committee as non-voting ex-officio members.
7.9.
(Wuf18M)
The Nomenclature Committee for Fungi is elected by an International Mycological Congress and includes the Secretary and the Deputy Secretary of the Fungal Nomenclature Bureau (Prov. 8.1) as non-voting ex-officio members if they are not already members of the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi.
Recommendation 1.
(zXOa4c)
Each committee should, so far as is practicable, be geographically and gender balanced.
7.10.
(tzseub)
The General Committee has the following functions:
(a) Specifies where the nomenclatural publications required by Div. III are to be published (Prov. 1.4).
(b) Receives proposals to conserve, protect, or reject names, proposals to suppress works, and requests for decisions (Art. 14.12, 34.1, 38.5, 53.4, 56.2, F.2.1, and F.7.1) and refers these proposals or requests to the specialist committee(s) concerned (receipt and referral of proposals and requests are automatic upon their publication).
(c) Considers recommendations of the specialist committees and either approves or overturns those recommendations or refers them back to the specialist committees for further consideration.
(d) Ratifies a list of institutional votes drawn up by the Committee on Institutional Votes (see Prov. 3.1).
(e) Receives applications for recognition as nomenclatural repositories for organisms other than those treated as fungi, refers the applications to the Registration Committee, and acts upon its recommendation (Art. 42.2).
(f) Recognizes or appoints nomenclatural repositories for organisms other than those treated as fungi; may suspend, revoke, or cancel such recognition or appointment; and may set aside the requirements for identifiers to be issued if the repository mechanism, or essential parts of it, cease to function (Art. 42.2, 42.3, and 42.7).
(g) Appoints Special-purpose Committees:
(1) authorized by a Nomenclature Section at an International Botanical Congress (see Prov. 4.3(d); or
(2) proposed between International Botanical Congresses following an open call for expressions of interest in serving on such a committee based on (i) the initiative of the General Committee; or (ii) requests that have been submitted to the General Committee by at least five people.
(h) Decides which proposals relate solely to names of organisms treated as fungi, in consultation with the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi (Prov. 8.2).
(i) Is consulted by the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi on the appointment of Special-purpose Committees set up according to Prov. 8.5(d).
(j) Is consulted by the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi when subcommittees are established to prepare lists of protected or rejected names; and reviews and approves such lists (Art. F.2.1 and F.7.1).
(k) Is consulted by the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi about the election of the Chair of the Fungal Nomenclature Session (Prov. 8.6) and the approval of the appointment of the Deputy Secretary of the Fungal Nomenclature Session (Prov. 8.7).
(l) May communicate an international standard format in addition to, or as a successor to, Portable Document Format (PDF) for effective publication of electronic material (Art. 29.3).
7.11.
(24nPdL)
Each of the five specialist committees examines proposals to conserve or reject names, proposals to suppress works, and requests for decisions (Art. 14.12, 34.1, 38.5, 53.4, and 56.2) referred to them by the General Committee, to which they then submit their recommendations. They may also submit opinions on proposals to amend the Code to the Bureau of Nomenclature. The Nomenclature Committee for Fungi has a mandate under Art. F.2.1 and F.7.1 with respect to lists of protected or rejected names proposed for approval and under Art. F.5.1 with respect to repositories for fungal names.
7.12.
(9q7cEC)
The Editorial Committee is charged with the preparation and publication of the Code in conformity with the decisions approved by the relevant International Botanical Congress. It is empowered to make any editorial modification not affecting the meaning of the provisions concerned, e.g. to change the wording of any Article, Note, or Recommendation and to avoid duplication, to add or remove non-voted Examples, and to place Articles, Notes, Recommendations, and Chapters of the Code in the most convenient place, while retaining the previous numbering insofar as possible.
7.13.
(a1mhCL)
The Editorial Committee for Fungi is charged with the preparation and publication of Chapter F in conformity with the decisions approved by the relevant International Mycological Congress. It is empowered to make the editorial modifications specified in Prov. 7.12.
7.14.
(zym45D)
The Committee on Institutional Votes maintains a list of institutions entitled to vote at the upcoming International Botanical Congress (see Prov. 3.1).
7.15.
(08THTW)
The Registration Committee is charged with considering applications for recognition as nomenclatural repositories for organisms other than those treated as fungi, assisting the design and implementation of repositories for nomenclatural novelties and/or any nomenclatural act, monitoring the functioning of existing repositories, and advising the General Committee on relevant matters.
(tXMIMe)
Procedural rules7.16.
(LgJLO9)
A specialist committee, provided that a qualified majority (at least 60%) of its members supports or opposes a proposal, may make any of the following recommendations to the General Committee: conserve or not conserve a name; reject or not reject a name; suppress or not suppress a publication; and for names of organisms treated as fungi, protect or not protect names on a list. In the case of binding decisions on valid publication (Art. 38.5) and homonymy (Art. 53.4), the qualified majority decides whether or not a binding decision should be recommended, then a simple majority (more than 50%) decides between the two alternatives: i.e. treat a name as validly published or not validly published; treat names as homonyms or not homonyms. If a specialist committee is unable to make a recommendation after voting at least twice, the proposal is referred to the General Committee without a recommendation from the specialist committee.
7.17.
(Q5NOG2)
The General Committee may approve or overturn a recommendation of a specialist committee provided that a qualified majority (at least 60%) of the General Committee members supports or opposes the recommendation. In either case, the General Committee makes its own recommendation, which is subject to the decision of a later International Botanical Congress (see also Art. 14.15, 34.2, 38.5, 53.4, and 56.3). If the required majority is not achieved after voting at least twice, the General Committee is considered to have recommended against the proposal or against making a binding decision. The General Committee may also decide to refer the matter back to the specialist committee for further consideration.
Recommendation 2.
(FQ3JIn)
The General Committee and the specialist committees should publish their recommendations at least annually.
(Iz5bzR)
Provisions for governance of the
Code relating solely to names of organisms treated as fungi
8.1.
(H92c1L)
For proposals to amend the Code relating to the content of Chapter F, which brings together the provisions of this Code that deal solely with names of organisms treated as fungi (but excluding any other content), exactly the same procedures outlined in Prov. 1–7 are to be followed except that in Prov. 1, 2, 4, and 5 mentions of International Botanical Congress, Nomenclature Section (of that Congress), Bureau of Nomenclature, Nominating Committee, and Editorial Committee are to be replaced by International Mycological Congress, Fungal Nomenclature Session (of that Congress), Fungal Nomenclature Bureau, Nominating Committee of the Fungal Nomenclature Session, and Editorial Committee for Fungi, respectively; and officers such as President, Rapporteur-général, and Vice-rapporteur (these specifically renamed Chair, Secretary, and Deputy Secretary, respectively) are to be understood as members of the Fungal Nomenclature Bureau rather than the Bureau of Nomenclature (specifically in Prov. 1.1, 1.2, 1.4 footnote, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 2.6, 4.2, 4.4, 4.5, 4.7, 4.8, 4.10, 4.11, 5.1, 5.2, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, and 5.8; but not in Prov. 5.3 and 5.4; and the following clause does not apply: Prov. 5.2(g)). See also Prov. 4.12, 4.13, 7.1, 7.5, and 7.13.
8.2.
(W7xPHp)
The General Committee in consultation with the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi is responsible for deciding which proposals relate solely to names of organisms treated as fungi.
8.3.
(xyrrNT)
A guiding vote on proposals to amend the Code relating solely to names of organisms treated as fungi is organized by the Fungal Nomenclature Bureau in conjunction with the International Mycological Association (IMA) to coincide with the publication of the synopsis of proposals. No accumulation or transfer of votes is permissible in this vote. The following persons are entitled to vote:
(a) individual members of the IMA; and
(b) individual members of organizations affiliated with the IMA; and
(c) individual members of other organizations approved by the Fungal Nomenclature Bureau; and
(d) authors of proposals to amend the Code relating solely to names of organisms treated as fungi; and
(e) members of the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi.
8.4.
(OUPjtW)
The Fungal Nomenclature Session is part of an International Mycological Congress and meets prior to a plenary session of the Congress at a time and with a duration to be determined by consultation between the International Mycological Association and the Fungal Nomenclature Bureau.
8.5.
(4SaHf5)
The Fungal Nomenclature Session has the following functions:
(a) Approves the previous Code if amended at the last International Mycological Congress (in the circumstance where there has not been an International Botanical Congress since the last International Mycological Congress) as a basis for discussion by the Session, and otherwise utilizes the most recent published Code.
(b) Decides on proposals to amend the Code relating solely to organisms treated as fungi.
(c) Appoints ad hoc committees to consider specific questions and report back to the Session.
(d) Authorizes Special-purpose Committees, with a specific mandate, to deal with matters relating solely to names of organisms treated as fungi, to be appointed by the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi in consultation with the General Committee and report back to the Fungal Nomenclature Session of the next International Mycological Congress.
(e) Elects the ordinary members of the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi.
(f) Elects the ordinary members of the Editorial Committee for Fungi.
(g) Elects the Secretary of the Fungal Nomenclature Bureau for the next International Mycological Congress.
(h) Receives reports of Special-purpose Committees dealing with matters relating solely to names of organisms treated as fungi.
8.6.
(Qt63h5)
The Chair of the Fungal Nomenclature Session is elected by the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi in consultation with the General Committee prior to the International Mycological Congress. The Chair chairs the debates and is responsible for their harmony and timely conclusion; recognizes and silences speakers; may end a debate; decides on procedural matters not covered in Div. III; and is authorized to move a resolution on behalf of the Fungal Nomenclature Session at a plenary session of the same International Mycological Congress that the decisions and appointments of the Fungal Nomenclature Session with respect to matters relating solely to names of organisms treated as fungi be approved.
8.7.
(Nra0Ve)
In the Fungal Nomenclature Bureau, the Deputy Secretary is appointed by the Secretary and approved by the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi in consultation with the General Committee no later than two years before the International Mycological Congress. The Deputy Secretary assists and, if necessary, serves in place of the Secretary.
8.8.
(EfGhjB)
The Rapporteur-général elected for the International Botanical Congress that follows the International Mycological Congress, or an alternate appointed by that Rapporteur-général, is invited to attend the Fungal Nomenclature Session as a non-voting advisor to the Session.
8.9.
(IasD4h)
When proposals relating solely to names of organisms treated as fungi are dealt with in a Fungal Nomenclature Session, there are no institutional votes, and therefore Prov. 3, 7.6, and 7.14 do not apply. Each member of the Session has one personal vote. No accumulation or transfer of personal votes is permissible.
8.10.
(KSo6O1)
The decisions taken at the Fungal Nomenclature Session of an International Mycological Congress relating solely to names of organisms treated as fungi, once accepted by a subsequent plenary session of the same Congress, are binding on the Nomenclature Section convened at the subsequent International Botanical Congress. Such decisions will, however, be open for any editorial adjustments deemed necessary by the Editorial Committee for Fungi after consultation with the Editorial Committee for this Code.
8.11.
(d3fuTF)
Certain publications, which may be electronic or printed or both, appear as soon as feasible after an International Mycological Congress, not necessarily in this sequence:
(a) The Congress-approved decisions and elections of the Fungal Nomenclature Session including the results of the preliminary guiding vote.
(b) The announcement of Special-purpose Committees and their membership.
(c) The new edition of Chapter F of this Code.
(d) A transcript of the Fungal Nomenclature Session.
8.12.
(UMXubI)
Where modifications to the Code have been authorized by a plenary session of an International Mycological Congress on a resolution moved by the Fungal Nomenclature Session of that Congress, such modifications are inserted into any online version of the Code in such a manner that it is clear that the modifications originated from that International Mycological Congress. 8.13.
(Ebc7Pt)
The Nomenclature Committee for Fungi
has the following functions:
(a) Examines proposals to conserve, protect, or reject names, proposals to suppress works, and requests for decisions (Art. 14.12, 34.1, 38.5, 53.4, 56.2, F.2.1, and F.7.1) that relate to names of organisms treated as fungi, as referred by the General Committee (Prov. 7.10(b) and (c) and 7.11).
(b) Is consulted by the General Committee as to which proposals relate solely to names of organisms treated as fungi (Prov. 8.2).
(c) Elects the Chair of the Fungal Nomenclature Session, in consultation with the General Committee (Prov. 8.6).
(d) Approves the appointment of the Deputy Secretary of Fungal Nomenclature Bureau, in consultation with the General Committee (Prov. 8.7).
(e) Appoints Special-purpose Committees, in consultation with the General Committee:
(1) authorized by a Nomenclature Session at an International Mycological Congress (Prov. 8.5(d)); or
(2) proposed between International Mycological Congresses following an open call for expressions of interest in serving on such a committee based on: (i) the initiative of the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi; or (ii) requests that have been submitted to the Nomenclature Committee for Fungi by at least five people.
(f) Establishes subcommitees, in consultation with the General Committee, that prepare lists of protected or rejected names; and reviews and approves such lists (Art. F.2.1 and F.7.1).
(g) Appoints repositories that accession information on nomenclatural novelties and type designations (see Art. F.5.1).